FM 3-04.

140(FM 1-140)

HELICOPTER GUNNERY

JULY 2003
DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Distribution authorized to DOD and DOD contractors only to protect technical or operational data information. Other requests must be referred to Director, Directorate of Training, Doctrine, and Simulation, United States Army Aviation Center, Fort Rucker, Alabama 36362-5000. DESTRUCTION: Follow the procedures in AR 380-5, Chapter 6, Section V.

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

This publication is available at Army Knowledge Online <www.us.army.mil> and the General Dennis J. Reimer Training and Doctrine Digital Library at <www.train.army.mil>.

C1, FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140)

Change 1

HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

Washington, DC, 17 April 2006

Helicopter Gunnery

1. Change FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140), 14 July 2003, as follows.

Remove old pages i through viii 1-1 through 1-5 2-0 through 2-20 A-1 through A-32 B-1 through B-80 C-1 through C-9 Glossary-0 through Glossary-20 Bibliography-1 through Bibliography-4 Index-1 through Index-4 2. A star () marks new or changed material. 3. File this transmittal sheet in the front of the publication.

Insert new pages i through viii 1-1 through 1-5 2-0 through 2-17 A-1 through A-30 B-1 through B-73 C-1 through C-12 Glossary-0 through Glossary-21 Bibliography-1 through Bibliography-3 Index-1 through Index-4

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Distribution authorized to DOD and DOD contractors only to protect technical or operational data information. This determination was made on 29 March 2002. Other requests must be referred to Director, Directorate of Training, Doctrine, United States Army Aviation Warfighting Center, Fort Rucker, Alabama 36362-5000. DESTRUCTION NOTICE: Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document.

FM 3-04.140, C1 17 April 2006

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

PETER J. SCHOOMAKER General, United States Army Chief of Staff Official:

JOYCE E. MORROW Administrative Assistant to the Secretary of the Army 0608604 DISTRIBUTION: Active Army, Army National Guard, and United States Army Reserve: To be distributed in accordance with the initial distribution number 110716, requirements for FM 3-04.140.

Field Manual No. 3-04.140

*FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) C1

Headquarters Department of the Army Washington, DC, 17 April 2006

Helicopter Gunnery
Contents
Page

PREFACE .................................................................................................................. vi Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1-1 Training Strategy ......................................................................................................1-1 Gunnery Standards ..................................................................................................1-1 Gunnery Tables ........................................................................................................1-3 Readiness Reporting................................................................................................1-4 Master Gunner Program ..........................................................................................1-4 Weapons Training Standards...................................................................................1-5 Chapter 2 HELICOPTER GUNNERY TRAINING STRATEGY ................................................2-1 Section I Training Assessment and Planning ..................................................2-1 The Commanders Assessment ...............................................................................2-1 Planning the Training................................................................................................2-2 Effective Assessment and Training ..........................................................................2-2

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Distribution authorized to DOD and DOD contractors only to protect technical or operational data information. This determination was made on 29 March 2002. Other requests must be referred to Director, Directorate of Training, Doctrine, United States Army Aviation Warfighting Center, Fort Rucker, Alabama 36362-5000. DESTRUCTION NOTICE: Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document.
*This publication supersedes FM 1-140, 29 March 1996.

FM 3-04.201 (FM 1-201), C1 __________________________________________________________________

Page

Section II Pregunnery Training .......................................................................... 2-3 Subject Areas and Techniques ............................................................................... 2-3 Table V .................................................................................................................... 2-5 Section III Helicopter Gunnery Range Training ............................................... 2-6 Qualification Gates................................................................................................... 2-6 Individual Gates ....................................................................................................... 2-6 Crew Simulator/Ground Training Gates Simulator/Ground Training Gates ............ 2-7 Crew Live-Fire Gates ............................................................................................... 2-8 Engagement Scoring System ................................................................................ 2-11 Scoring Criteria ...................................................................................................... 2-12 Engagement Scoring ............................................................................................. 2-12 Scoring Moving Engagements ............................................................................... 2-13 Scoring Hellfire Engagements With the VRS and AVTR....................................... 2-14 Remote Hellfire Engagement Scoring ................................................................... 2-14 Section IV Posttraining Assessment .............................................................. 2-15 After-Action Review ............................................................................................... 2-15 Required Documents ............................................................................................. 2-15 Range Score Sheet................................................................................................ 2-16 Chapter 3 RANGES FOR HELICOPTER GUNNERY TRAINING ........................................... 3-1 Section I Range Requirements .......................................................................... 3-1 Range Considerations ............................................................................................. 3-1 Realistic Training ..................................................................................................... 3-2 Operational Requirements ....................................................................................... 3-3 Range Scheduling.................................................................................................... 3-3 Section II Personnel Responsibilities and Duties ........................................... 3-8 Officer in Charge ...................................................................................................... 3-8 Range Safety Officer................................................................................................ 3-9 Master Gunner ......................................................................................................... 3-9 Laser Range Safety Officer or NCO ...................................................................... 3-10 Radio Operators..................................................................................................... 3-10 Class-III/-V OIC or NCOIC ..................................................................................... 3-10 Section III Helicopter Gunnery Range Safety................................................. 3-11 Ground Safety ........................................................................................................ 3-11 Firing Safety ........................................................................................................... 3-12 Aircraft Emergency Plan ........................................................................................ 3-15 Section IV Range Layout .................................................................................. 3-15

ii

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

________________________________________________________________________Contents, C1

Considerations........................................................................................................3-15 Multipurpose Range Complex ................................................................................3-15 Aerial Weapons Scoring System............................................................................3-15 Attack Helicopter Gunnery Range..........................................................................3-17 Section V Successful Training .........................................................................3-19 Brief Key Personnel................................................................................................3-19 Start on Time ..........................................................................................................3-19 Keep a Log .............................................................................................................3-19 Change Guards ......................................................................................................3-19 Police Continuously ................................................................................................3-19 Brief Visitors ...........................................................................................................3-20 Plan Aircraft Evacuation .........................................................................................3-20 Chapter 4 BALLISTICS ............................................................................................................4-1 Interior Ballistics .......................................................................................................4-1 Exterior Ballistics .....................................................................................................4-2 Aerial Ballistics .........................................................................................................4-3 Terminal Ballistics.....................................................................................................4-9 Dispersion...............................................................................................................4-12 Apache-Specific Ballistic Considerations ...............................................................4-13 Chapter 5 MUNITIONS FOR HELICOPTER WEAPON SYSTEMS .........................................5-1 Section I Linked Ammunition .............................................................................5-1 Types of 7.62-Millimeter Ammunition for the M60/M60D/M240 Machine Gun ........5-1 Types of .50-Caliber Ammunition for the OH-58D Kiowa Warrior............................5-3 Types of 30-Millimeter Ammunition for the AH-64 M230 Cannon............................5-6 Section II Rockets................................................................................................5-8 2.75-Inch Rockets.....................................................................................................5-8 Rocket Warheads (Tactical and Training)..............................................................5-10 Fuzes ......................................................................................................................5-14 Section III Missiles.............................................................................................5-19 Missile Configurations ............................................................................................5-19 Semiactive Laser Hellfire Missile Performance Capabilities ..................................5-23 Semiactive Laser Hellfire Missile Performance Detractors ....................................5-35 Radar Frequency Hellfire Missile Characteristics and Performance .....................5-40 Air-to-Air Stinger .....................................................................................................5-56 Chapter 6 CREW WARFIGHTING Section I Fratricide Prevention ..........................................................................6-0 Situational Awareness Detractors ............................................................................6-0 Contributing Factors .................................................................................................6-1

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

iii

FM 3-04.201 (FM 1-201), C1 __________________________________________________________________

Effects of Fratricide .................................................................................................. 6-2 Fratricide Prevention................................................................................................ 6-3 Section II Target Acquisition ............................................................................. 6-6 Acquisition Defined .................................................................................................. 6-6 Target-Acquisition Process ...................................................................................... 6-7 Crew Search ............................................................................................................ 6-7 Aerial Search Techniques........................................................................................ 6-7 Techniques for Crew Search ................................................................................... 6-9 Target Detection .................................................................................................... 6-10 Target-Detection Challenges ................................................................................. 6-11 Target Location ...................................................................................................... 6-11 Target Classification .............................................................................................. 6-12 Confirmation........................................................................................................... 6-13 Section III Range Determination ...................................................................... 6-13 Range Determination ............................................................................................. 6-13 Aircraft Mil Values .................................................................................................. 6-17 Laser-off Operations .............................................................................................. 6-23 Section IV Crew Communication .................................................................... 6-23 Standardizing Crew Communication ..................................................................... 6-23 Fire Commands ..................................................................................................... 6-25 Lines of Communications....................................................................................... 6-26 Phraseology ........................................................................................................... 6-27 Remote Hellfire Missile Firing ................................................................................ 6-30 Remote Call for Fire............................................................................................... 6-30 Call-for-Fire Description ......................................................................................... 6-30 Section V Checks on Training ......................................................................... 6-35 Precombat Checks................................................................................................. 6-35 Before-Mission Receipt Checks............................................................................. 6-35 Upon-Mission Receipt Checks............................................................................... 6-35 Preparing for the Mission ....................................................................................... 6-36 Final Checks .......................................................................................................... 6-36 Crew Checks.......................................................................................................... 6-37 Run-up Checks ...................................................................................................... 6-37 Communications Check ......................................................................................... 6-37 Practicing ............................................................................................................... 6-38

iv

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

________________________________________________________________________Contents, C1

Chapter 7

ENGAGEMENT TECHNIQUES ...............................................................................7-1 Section I Modes and Types of Fire ....................................................................7-1 Types of Fire.............................................................................................................7-1 Modes of Fire............................................................................................................7-1 Section II Terminology and Information on Weapons .....................................7-2 Effective Range ........................................................................................................7-2 2-75-Inch Rockets ....................................................................................................7-2 Boresighting and Dynamic Harmonization ...............................................................7-5 Section III Crew Techniques...............................................................................7-6 Firing Techniques .....................................................................................................7-6 Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Modes of Fire ...................................7-8 Section IV Air Combat Weaponeering .............................................................7-11 Weapon Systems Engagement Ranges ................................................................7-11 Target-Engagement Factors ..................................................................................7-13

Appendix A HELICOPTER DOOR GUNNERY .......................................................................... A-1 Appendix B HELICOPTER GUNNERY TABLES ....................................................................... B-1 Appendix C ENGAGEMENT TIME POINT CALCULATION SHEETS ...................................... C-1 Appendix D Appendix E EXAMPLE OF A DIGITAL GUNNERY PROGRAM ............................................... D-0 RISK MANAGEMENT ............................................................................................. E-0 GLOSSARY ............................................................................................. Glossary-1 BIBLIOGRAPHY .................................................................................Bibliography-1 INDEX ............................................................................................................Index-1

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

PREFACE
This manual describes the helicopter gunnery training and qualification portion of Army Aviation Aircrew Training Program. It provides tactics, techniques, and procedures for crews, teams, platoons, companies, and battalions to engage and efficiently destroy the enemy in combat. This manual is written for commanders, staffs, aircrews, and instructors. Use it for coordinating, planning, and executing helicopter gunnery training. Through the Aircrew Training Program, this field manual links the training and qualifications of helicopter weapon systems to the doctrinal employment of Army aviation. In addition, this manual outlines a standardized, progressive program that trains weapon system proficiency through the conduct of helicopter gunnery tables. Trainers for attack battalions and cavalry squadrons should keep the excerpt below, taken from the Center for Army Lessons Learned website at http://call.army.mil, in mind during the planning, organizing, and executing all training, not just training that focuses on gunnery. These observations are somewhat timeless; that is, they could have been observed 10 years ago or one perhaps could see the same things happen next week: Do not let these trends continue unchecked in the unit. Make the unit more combat ready. Focus on helicopter gunnery throughout the year not just during the scheduled time at the range. This publication applies to the Active Army, the Army National Guard (ARNG)/Army National Guard of the United States (ARNGUS), and the United States Army Reserve (USAR) unless otherwise stated. The following trends are noted at the National Training Center regarding boresighting and gunnery skills. The observation is that attack helicopter battalions and cavalry squadrons (air cavalry troops continue to display eroding helicopter gunnery skills during both force-onforce (MILES/AGES) and live-fire operations.

Discussion on Boresighting and Gunnery Skills

1. During recent rotations, crews employing the Hellfire point target weapon system have probability-of-hit (Ph) statistics of less than 60 percent. This Ph is based on actual gun-camera footage of the missile engagements. Some causes are Improper out-front boresight procedures (AH-64 only). Inadequate knowledge of system performance. Improper engagement techniques. 2. Area weapon systems (30-millimeter/caliber .50 and 2.75-inch rockets) are less accurate because adjustments, when crews are firing more than one volley, are made improperly or not at all. 3. Crews seldom have standard cockpit procedures for employment of the chosen weapon system. This results in poor switchboard dexterity, slow engagement times, and poor crew coordination.

vi

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

________________________________________________________________________Preface, C1

4. Unit difficulties with the following tasks indicate a lack of home-station gunnery training. Inadequate system knowledge Not able to recognize and overcome laser detractors (such as backscatter, overspill, and spot jitter). Not able to select appropriate tracking techniques to ensure high Ph. Not able to operate user-system interface properly (for example, CDU). Not able to troubleshoot or overcome weapon system malfunctions. Lack of detailed engagement area development and direct-fire planning (causing multiple crews to engage the same target simultaneously). Lack of standard cockpit operating procedures. No consideration of the effects of the environment.

Techniques and Procedures:

1. This manual prescribes a continual gunnery training program. To attain and sustain good gunnery skills, attack and cavalry units need to train continuously, not once a year. 2. To make gunnery training a priority, the battalion leadershipfrom platoon leaders to battalion commandermust become directly involved. 3. Use combat mission simulator periods to train tactical gunnery with close attention to standardized procedures and phraseology. These CMS periods should be monitored by platoon leaders, company commanders, and even battalion commanders. Conduct formal debriefs after each CMS period to ensure that crewmembers understand what they did right and what they did wrong. For OH-58D units, conduct hot cockpit drills in the absence of a CMS; adhere to the standards mentioned above. 4. All units should incorporate gunnery training into each flight that launches. Weapon system initializations, out-front boresights, practice gunnery engagements, and laser spot tracking training are considerations for crew and lead/wing training flights. Commanders and instructor pilots should take the opportunity after these flights to critique the crews performance by viewing the gun-camera tape with the crew. 5. Standardize gunnery evaluations according to this manual. Tables V through VIII must receive objective evaluation. 6. Conduct home-station gunnery training. One method, according to this manual, is provided below. Training Strategy Conduct commander's assessment. Train continually (not just during an intensified program). Use CMS, TADS selected task trainer, and hot cockpit drills (commander and platoon leader involvement). Run up SOPs and gunnery training scenarios.

Crew Gates Conduct crew simulator/ground training gates (Helicopter Gunnery Skills Test and conduct-of-fire training). Conduct crew live-fire gates.

Ammunition resources in this manual reflect authorizations contained in DA Pam 350-38.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

vii

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

The provisions of this publication are the subject of the STANAG 3117 (Edition Seven). The use of trade names in this manual is for clarity only and does not constitute endorsement by the Department of Defense. The proponent of this publication is the United States Army Training and Doctrine Command (TRADOC). Send comments and recommendations on DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms) to Commander, U.S. Army Aviation Warfighting Center, ATTN: ATZQ-TDS-SG, Fort Rucker, AL 36362-5000. This publication has been reviewed for operations security considerations.

viii

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

Introduction
There is only one tactical principle which is not subject to change. It is to use the means at hand to inflict the maximum amount of wounds, death, and destruction on the enemy in the minimum amount of time.
General George S. Patton

Chapter 1

We as an army must prepare ourselves and our units to deploy, fight, and win in combat at any intensity level, anywhere, anytime. Therefore, training is the priority. Unit training must focus on the wartime mission. Units must carefully plan, aggressively execute, and thoroughly assess their helicopter gunnery training program.

TRAINING STRATEGY
1-1. The helicopter gunnery program begins with individual qualification on aircraft weapon systems and progresses through crew qualification to unit collective training. The unit training strategy must build on the skills learned by individual crew members during the aircraft qualification course. It must include and balance individual, gunnery, tactical, and maintenance training for both aviators and support personnel. The unit gunnery program must be progressive and continuous. The training should integrate new personnel while maintaining qualified crews. This manual provides commanders with the information and guidance to develop and incorporate gunnery training into the Aircrew Training Program and meet the standards in DA Pam 35038, chapter 7. This program is focused on building warfighting units that can engage and destroy the enemy. 1-2. Helicopter gunnery range training is a training event in which individuals, crews, teams, platoons, and companies show proficiency and validate the operational readiness of unit helicopter weapon systems. Crew qualification on Table VIII is the cornerstone of this gunnery program. Table VIII qualification is a live-fire event and an annual requirement. Once crews qualify, units can begin work on the advanced tables. These advanced tables focus on collective training and are the culmination of an effective gunnery training program. 1-3. The mission-essential task list and mission training plan of the unit enable the commander to focus helicopter gunnery training on the units primary mission. Therefore, the commander can exercise command, control, and communication functions while conducting gunnery. Commanders can use training devices, like the MILES/AGES, to enhance the collective training program so the unit can train as it fights. Commanders tailor the advanced tables (Tables IX through XII) to meet the particular mission and training requirements of the unit.

GUNNERY STANDARDS
1-4. The goal of Army training is a combat-ready force that can deploy on short notice, fight, and win. To achieve this goal, commanders must have a common set of weapons and weapon systems qualification standards. They also must have an objective way to judge those standards. Army aviations gunnery program standards are discussed below. 1-5. The aerial Weapon Scoring System (AWSS) is the Army standard for objective scoring of cannon, machine-gun, and rocket firing during aviation gunnery. For

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

1-1

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

engagements beyond the known technical capability of the currently fielded AWSS system, DOTD Gunnery Branch authorizes the following alternate scoring methods. For aerial gunnery, master gunners or designated graders will have visual contact with the target/target engagement area (TEA) to determine engagement effects. Onboard/range camera coverage is recommended. For door gunnery, observation by the master gunner, SI, FI, or designated grader of the target/TEA is approved. If any other method of scoring is used, that method must be approved, through memorandum, by the USAAWC Master Gunner before that scheduled gunnery event. In addition, commanders/master gunners will submit a memorandum to the USAAWC Master Gunner when AWSS is not used. The memorandum should include the reason that AWSS was unavailable (for example, scheduling or maintenance) and the alternate scoring method used. Memorandums will be used to improve aviation gunnery. Memorandums will be sent to DOTD USAAWC, ATTN: ATZQ-TDD-G, Building 4507 Andrews Avenue, Room 326, Fort Rucker, AL 36362-5000, or by e-mail to atzqtddg@rucker.army.mil. 1-6. A target hit (or 10 percent of rounds for OH-58D) within the effective range of the system is the standard for cannon and machine-gun engagements. A target hit is also the standard for Hellfire, TOW, and Stinger missile engagements. If the scoring system malfunctions, the master gunner may score the task by an alternate scoring method. 1-7. Target neutralization is the standard for rocket engagements. Because rockets are most effective when fired in mass, the rocket training strategy is to train crews for neutralization engagements. 1-8. Target neutralization is an engagement that causes 10-percent casualties/destruction of materiel in the target-effect area. It should be a deliberate engagement in which the crew fires an initial engagement (pair or single, depending on the type of airframe and armament configuration) to determine rocket impact relative to the target, determine required adjustments, apply adjustments, and fire again. Once the target or target area has been bracketed, a fire for effect can be accomplished. Target composition and mass determines the number of rockets required to service the target or target area to achieve neutralization. 1-9. Because of the limited quantities of training munitions available, crews can train and demonstrate proficiency only in adjustment of rockets onto a target. The fire-foreffect portion of the engagement is normally not possible.

GUNNERY TABLES
1-10. The gunnery tables in this manual provide the framework for the unit to execute its gunnery program. They are designed to train and evaluate the crews ability to engage targets with the helicopters weapon systems at short, medium, and long ranges. These gunnery tables are progressive and will be fired in order. Commanders will make every effort to fire the tables as published in this manual. Commanders may modify the conditions and target arrays within the tables to fit resource constraints (such as range layout, ammunition availability) or similar restrictions to training. Because modifications to tables are temporary, commanders must work with installation or regional range authorities and DOTD Gunnery Branch to upgrade and improve helicopter gunnery ranges so the unit can fire the tables that this manual describes. Commanders/master gunners will document temporary modifications and forward them to the USAAWC Master Gunner. These memorandums will be used to improve aviation gunnery. Memorandums will be sent to DOTD USAAWC, ATTN: ATZQ-TDD-G, Building 4507 Andrews Avenue, Room 326, Fort Rucker, AL 36362-5000, or by e-mail to atzqtddg@rucker.army.mil .

1-2

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

________________________________________________________________________Chapter 1, C1

BASIC TABLES
1-11. Tables I and II are used for initial weapons qualification. Fire the tables according to USAAWC or NGB AH-64A Apache, AH-64D Longbow Apache, and OH-58D Kiowa Warrior programs of instruction. 1-12. Tables III and IV are used for prequalification training and the commanders evaluation of newly assigned crew members. Units may use these tables to evaluate unit trainers or to conduct refresher training for qualified aviators. Tables III and IV are individual tables evaluated by a unit instructor pilot.

INTERMEDIATE TABLES
1-13. Table V is the commanders pregunnery range assessment of unit helicopter gunnery readiness. This table allows evaluation of the crews knowledge and gunnery skills before the crew progresses to live-fire gunnery. Table V is a gate to live-fire training; crews must complete this table before attempting live-fire gunnery. 1-14. Table VI is the calibration and verification table. This table includes ammunition for units to calibrate and test fire weapon systems before qualification range training. An aircraft must meet the Table VI standards before it can be used for qualification on Tables VII and VIII. Table VII is a training table. Table VIII is a crew qualification table; it is a gate to the advanced tables.

ADVANCED TABLES
1-15. Tables IX through XII are the advanced tables. These tables orient on tactical scenarios and multihelicopter employment. They allow the commander to focus the unit on collective live-fire training. The unit MTP and METL will dictate tactical scenarios, task organization, and weapons mix.

READINESS REPORTING
UNIT STATUS REPORT
1-16. Unit Status Report is an assessment of a units combat readiness. The commander assesses training for the USR by developing a training level, or T-level. The primary purpose of the T-level is to show the units current ability to perform its assigned wartime missions. The standard for measuring the units training status is its METL. 1-17. The commander decides the units training level by evaluating how well the unit accomplishes mission-essential tasks. He considers all available data in making the determination. The training level determines how much time is needed to train the unit to do its mission-essential tasks. 1-18. Many factors affect the units T-level. AR 220-1 states that proficiency is measured in terms of the units demonstrated ability to do its mission-essential tasks. The unit also must perform enabling tasks not specified in the METL but necessary for performing mission-essential tasks. An example of an enabling task is crew gunnery. Proficiency is judged on performance of tasks to standard. Therefore, gunnery proficiency is judged on the performance of gunnery tasks to standards in this manual, which has a direct effect on the unit USR. AR 220-1 also states that the availability of aviation training resources such as flying hours, training ammunition, simulation devices, and fuelmust be considered in the T-level.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

1-3

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

1-19. Reporting of T-ratings will adhere to the following requirements: z T185 percent and above of assigned aviators qualified on Table VIII. z T275 to 84 percent of assigned aviators qualified on Table VIII. z T365 to 74 percent of assigned aviators qualified on Table VIII.

HELICOPTER GUNNERY REPORTING

1-20. The commanders guide mandates the consideration of gunnery performance when determining the readiness levels of aviators. This objective assessment is derived from TC 1-210, table 7-1. It is recorded on the USR in TRAINDAT SET. 1-21. However, proper reporting of helicopter gunnery problems and successes on the unit status report is also important. The Armys leadership must receive an accurate assessment of unit gunnery. This assessment will aid in preserving and improving helicopter live-fire gunnery. AR 220-1, paragraph 1-6d, contains additional information. 1-22. Maintenance of aircraft weapon systems is a critically important component of any helicopter gunnery training program. A shortage of maintainers will affect any training program involving aircraft.

UNIT ACTIONS
1-23. The unit commander considers the unit helicopter gunnery qualification rate when determining the overall T-level. DA Pam 350-38 specifies crew gunnery qualification requirements for helicopter crews/units. 1-24. Record concerns about training resources on TRAINDAT SET, section B. Include the following problems: z Improper ammunition was received for gunnery training/qualification, that is, insufficient quantities, according to DA Pam 350-38 requirements, or one type issued in lieu of another typeM274 model rockets instead of M267 or MK 40 rocket motors instead of MK 66. z There was not enough range time for qualification on Tables VI through VIII and the advanced tables. z The AWSS was unavailable for Table VII/VIII scoring. z The home-station range was unsuitable for helicopter gunnery qualification. z There is a shortage of soldiers in critical MOSs (armament, POL handlers, and aircraft electricians). z The resource constraints experienced by the unit, which should be explained in Section D, TRRAT GENTEXT, and can include helicopter gunnery issues.

MASTER GUNNER PROGRAM

1-25. The battalion or squadron S3 and master gunner manage, develop, and implement the unit helicopter gunnery program. The master gunner is the commanders primary representative for helicopter gunnery. His primary duty is to help maintain the continuity and focus of the commanders helicopter gunnery training program. 1-26. The commander designates a master gunner. The master gunner should be an instructor pilot who is qualified and experienced in the primary attack aircraft of the unit and a graduate of the USAAWC master gunner course.

1-4

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

________________________________________________________________________Chapter 1, C1

1-27. The master gunners responsibilities include the following: z Assist the commander and S3 in developing and implementing the unit helicopter gunnery training program. z Assist the S3 in forecasting and allocating helicopter ammunition. z Monitor training device usage (such as simulator and TSTT), if applicable, gunnery training, and scheduling. z Develop realistic target arrays in coordination with local range-control officials. z Serve as the primary scorer/evaluator on unit live-fire ranges. z Work with the armament officer to ensure the readiness of the units helicopter armament. z Serve as a member of the unit standardization committee.

WEAPONS TRAINING STANDARDS

1-28. DA Pam 350-38 (usually referred to as STRAC) shows the quantities and types of ammunition required for weapons proficiency training and qualification. Ammunition authorizations prescribed are the maximum amounts authorized for each airframe. These authorizations are based on the units component (Active, USAR, or ARNG). (Ammunition requirements are based on suggested strategies; these do not automatically translate into authorizations.) 1-29. Unit commanders will make every effort to conduct live-fire gunnery training with the authorized ammunition. Turned-back or turned-in ammunition does not strengthen the helicopter gunnery training program. 1-30. Ammunition authorizations by STRAC are made on an annual basis. Tables VI through VIII, Table X, and Table XII are designed to be fired annually using live ammunition (inclusive of Tables III and IV for the OH-58D).

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

1-5

This page intentionally left blank.

Helicopter Gunnery Training Strategy

To make helicopter crews and units work together as a team, the commander must execute a well-planned, realistic, and consistent training program. This chapter is a framework for developing a helicopter gunnery training program in four phases. It describes a strategy that is structured for training and progresses from basic through intermediate and advanced gunnery tables to combined-arms exercises. This strategy focuses on the warfighting skills of individuals, crews, and units.

Chapter 2

SECTION I TRAINING ASSESSMENT AND PLANNING

THE COMMANDERS ASSESSMENT

2-1. The unit commanders training assessment and planning are essential for unit-level gunnery training programs. The commander continues to assess and plan throughout the gunnery training cycle. Commanders may repeat phases on different levels of training throughout the training year to sustain the helicopter gunnery training program. They may compress the phases into an intensified gunnery training program, when necessary, (for example, to meet mobilization requirements). The goal of this training is to maximize combat-ready crews. The commander determines the current unit proficiency level in helicopter gunnery by z Analyzing the experience level of the helicopter crews in the unit (for example, how much experience do the crews have in the aircraft and how many crews does the unit have?). z Analyzing the results of previous helicopter gunnery ranges (for example, any trends noted during the last qualification range, such as low rocket qualification rates and excessive engagement times). z Analyzing the total training level of the unit and its personnel assignment stability; this analysis includes the number of RL1 aviators, nonrated crew members, maintenance personnel, and other essential personnel. z Conducting diagnostic tests to determine the current proficiency of the unit; these tests may include a diagnostic HGST, a no-notice Table III and IV for randomly selected crews, or past results of the unit no-notice program. z Determining the maintenance status of aircraft weapon systems; this determination may include regularly performing Table VI. 2-2. By using the standards in this field manual, the commanders guide, and DA Pam 350-38, the commander decides what training is necessary to meet required training standards. The commander charts the course to the desired training end state by z Comparing results of the analysis of the current unit level of proficiency with the required training standard. z Placing the unit, or individuals, into the appropriate level of the training program.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

2-1

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

2-3. The amount of time available for training crews and units to standard varies. The commander determines how much time is available to achieve the required training standards by z Examining the unit mission requirements and other obligations from the unit training calendars. z Deciding whether a sustaining program or an intensified program is required; the primary difference between a sustaining program and an intensified program is the time required for implementation. Note: For planning purposes, an average attack helicopter battalion requires a gunnery period of two weeks on the range to complete the live-fire helicopter gunnery tables. 2-4. The commander determines which resources are required to conduct training by z Referring to the logistic and administrative requirements in this document. z Reviewing the previous unit training experiences, as documented in the required detailed after-action review. 2-5. The commander determines what resources are available to conduct training by z Inventorying unit personnel and equipment. z Determining what assistance is available from supporting units and higher headquarters. z Examining training facilities. z Determining the number of flight hours and ammunition available for basic, intermediate, and advanced gunnery tables. z Determining the availability of the AWSS. 2-6. The commander reconciles all considerations. For example, differences between resources required and resources available will affect both the times required to conduct the training and the units ability to meet the required standards. The commander should adjust differences to meet the goal of producing the maximum number of combat-ready crews.

PLANNING THE TRAINING

2-7. In the assessment process, the commander begins outlining the helicopter gunnery training program. To construct a detailed plan for implementing the program, the commander may follow the following steps: z Develop a unit program of instruction for pregunnery training; use the S3 and master gunner. z Plan the conduct of academic training. z Plan the conduct of hands-on training, based on the commanders assessment. z Plan the conduct of nonaircrew training (such as FARP and armament personnel). z Plan the conduct of Table V; emphasize the importance of assessment before the gunnery range. z Plan the conduct of the intermediate table live fire. z Plan the conduct of advanced table training.

2-2

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Chapter 2

EFFECTIVE ASSESSMENT AND TRAINING

2-8. An effective program for unit-level helicopter gunnery is the result of good assessment and planning. To ensure successful training, use the following principles. z Set standards. Set and enforce tough, but achievable, standards. Tough standards will generate tough training. Crews must know when they do well. Insist on repetition to achieve a high level of proficiency in required tasks. z Start early. All aspects of the training program must be thoroughly coordinated. Forecast and request resources and maintenance assistance long before they are needed. z Be thorough. Avoid wasting resources and training opportunities. Give leaders at all levels the guidance and assets needed to train. Focus the unit on accomplishing the commanders desired end state. z Be flexible. Be prepared to adjust the training program to the changing needs of the unit. Once assessment, training, and planning stop, the training program stagnates and loses its effectiveness. z Train continually. Train at every opportunity, not just during an intensified program to get ready for helicopter gunnery qualification tables. Intensified programs should be used only to bring a unit up to a desired proficiency level. Once accomplished, train continually to maintain that level.

SECTION II PREGUNNERY TRAINING

2-9. Perfumery training prepares members of the unit to perform all tasks required for the actual live-fire gunnery tables. To ensure that unit members reach desired levels of proficiency at the time they are required, units must carefully integrate pregunnery training into the overall training program. Some areas that should be part of pregunnery training and suggestions for their implementation are covered in the following paragraphs. The commander may discover other subjects that require special attention during training assessment and planning.

SUBJECT AREAS AND TECHNIQUES

FLIGHT PROFICIENCY
2-10. Normally conducted at the company, platoon, and crew levels, flight proficiency training is critical for gunnery training. The battalion or squadron standardization officer must advise the commander on the level of unit proficiency.

MAP READING, NAVIGATION, AND TERRAIN ANALYSIS

2-11. Navigating and proper terrain-flight techniques are critical to mission accomplishment and aircrew survival. In the classroom, the instructor may use slides of terrain and terrain boards or sand tables to link map reading to terrain analysis and utilization. Terrain walks and ground-vehicle navigation courses are techniques for training crews. Competitive navigation exercises increase awareness and interest in navigation. The training program should include z Basic map reading and operational graphics. z Map reconnaissance. z Terrain utilization.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

2-3

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

z z

Low-altitude navigation, including Doppler and GPS navigation. AMPS operation and utilization.

ARMAMENT
2-12. Knowledge and skill in operating and working with helicopter armament systems are important in gunnery performance. Pilots should participate regularly in armament maintenance operations. To establish and maintain proficiency, aircrews must conduct armament preflight and operational checks during every flight, to include boresighting. Armament training should include z Operation of armament controls. z Preflight inspection of armament subsystems. z Operational checks of armament subsystems. z Aircrew-level maintenance of armament subsystems. z Correction of armament subsystem malfunctions. z Loading and unloading armament subsystems. z Clearing armament subsystems. z Capabilities and limitations of armament subsystems.

AMMUNITION
2-13. Ammunition training goes hand in hand with armament training. Conduct practical exercises in garrison using dummy ammunition. Conduct concurrent training exercises on ranges and simulation exercises in the classroom. This training should include z Identification and inspection of ammunition. z Care and handling of ammunition. z Target effects of ammunition, including selection of ammunition for various targets. z Ballistic characteristics of ammunition. z Selection of ammunition for various targets.

CREW DUTIES
2-14. The crew-duties training program must include all pilot skills required to attack and destroy a target. Chapter 6 and the ATM contain standard phraseology. Crew-duties training include z Principles of helicopter gunnery. z Target handover procedures. z Unit fire commands. z Crew fire commands. z Fire-distribution and target-attack techniques. 2-15. Training exercises should include as much audiovisual simulation as possible. Record target handovers and fire commands on audiotape. Target attacks can be recorded on audiotape and videotape. They can also be simulated on terrain boards. Cockpit drills can be conducted as a dry run on the ground using a portable tape recorder to present a realistic scenario. Complete and train dry-fire crew and team or company scenarios regularly.

2-4

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Chapter 2

TARGET ACQUISITION AND IDENTIFICATION

2-16. The ability to acquire and identify battlefield targets is one of the most difficult and most often neglected skill areas of helicopter gunnery training. The units first step in the target acquisition and identification training process should be classroom instruction with slides and photographs of vehicles in various types of terrain. The units target acquisition and identification training program prepares crews to acquire targets and minimizes the possibility of fratricide. Units may use the six-step technique in the vehicle identification in chapter 6 to train crews to identify targets systematically. Units should include the Recognition of Combat Vehicles (ROC-V) Program in their target acquisition and identification training. For information on this program, call commercial 703-7041473/1718 (DSN 654-1473/1718). The unit training program must include z Observation techniques. z Target acquisition. z Target identification. z Threat capabilities and limitations.

MISSION PLANNING
2-17. Every pilot must be able to plan and conduct a complete mission. Mission planning training teaches the pilot to receive and assimilate all of the information needed to conduct a mission and relate the results of that mission to other pilots and ground personnel. This training must include z Operations and intelligence briefings. z Mission planning and rehearsals. z Mission debriefing. 2-18. Aircrews require more than basic classroom instruction. Aircrews also require extensive practice. This extensive practice is integrated with other areas of training (such as target acquisition and land navigation courses). Every training exercise presents an opportunity for briefing, planning, and debriefing.

RANGE OPERATION AND SAFETY

2-19. The complexity of a realistically run helicopter gunnery range requires every participating crew member to understand the operational and safety procedures required. Training must include z Range safety. z Administrative procedures. z Conduct of helicopter gunnery tables. 2-20. Terrain boards and models should be used to simulate the layout of the range and to train pilots in range operations before beginning range firing. A visit to the rangeor videotapes of the range recorded by the unitwill aid in range orientation and identify operational and safety issues.

TABLE V
2-21. Pregunnery training prepares aircrews for range training. Table V tests the proficiency level of the crews to ensure they are ready to advance to range training. Table V is the commanders assessment tool to ensure that crews are ready for live-fire gunnery tables.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

2-5

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

SECTION III HELICOPTER GUNNERY RANGE TRAINING

QUALIFICATION GATES
2-22. A helicopter gunnery gate is a task (or tasks) grouped in a training event that a soldier (or unit) must perform to standard before progressing to more complex tasks or events. Gates allow commanders to evaluate the effectiveness of training and assess whether the unit is ready for more complex training. Table 2-1 lists the gunnery gates.

Table 2-1. Helicopter Gunnery Training Gates

GATE# 1 2 3 4 INDIVIDUAL X X X X (see Note 1) CREW UNIT TABLES I, II III/IV V VI REMARKS Approved POI for initial qualification. Individual/RL training table, unit. HGST/G-COFT/C-COFT, annual requirement. (See note 2.) Aircraft must be certified on table before use on intermediate tables. Table VI is the first livefire event for AH-64 units. Crew must qualify to progress to advanced tables. Platoons must pass table X before progressing to table XII.

5 6

X X

VIII X

1. Table VI is not a mandatory gate for each crew. In addition, Table VI improves system familiarity by providing the crew an opportunity to fire without the burden of a time parameter. It is a mandatory gate for all aircraft requiring calibration/verification. All crews should fire Table VI in the same aircraft in which they will fire Tables VII, VIII, X, and XII. 2. All crew members FAC 1 and FAC 2 within the battalion/squadron will perform the HGST/G-COFT annually. 3. Appendix A contains specific requirements for door gunners.

INDIVIDUAL GATES
GATE 1: TABLES I AND II
2-23. Tables I and II are conducted during the aircraft qualification course. They are individual gunnery tables and represent individual gunnery qualification for the aviator.

GATE 2: TABLES III AND IV

2-24. Tables III and IV are conducted with RL progression. They are designed for use by the unit IP/SP to determine individual proficiency and readiness level. These tables evaluate a crewmembers proficiency in the duties associated with each crew position. These tables give the commander the means and flexibility to assign crews effectively.

2-6

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Chapter 2

AIRCRAFT SURVIVABILITY EQUIPMENT TRAINER

2-25. Before proceeding to Table V, the aviator will be integrated into the ASET program, if assigned to the pilots crew station. The intent is for the crew to complete and pass ASET testing before proceeding to the advanced table gunnery.

TADS SELECTED TASK TRAINER

2-26. Complete TSTT testing, if assigned to the front-seat crew station (AH-64A units). Note: This device has not been updated to current aircraft configuration; therefore, care should be used in selecting tasks that correspond to those performed in the aircraft. 2-27. The exercise is based on a 100-point system, with 70 points the minimum for passing. Exercises for testing are found in the TSTT ATAC Situations menu. Conduct the test as follows. z Advanced switchology. Use the advanced switchology (no LDNS) quiz (20 percent). z Hover situations. Select hover situations from the menu. Four similar variations are available in the software. Any of the variations are acceptable for testing (20 percent). z Fly-to situations. Select the built-in fly-to exercise. Four similar variations are available in the software. Any of the variations are acceptable for testing (20 percent). z Multiple targets, rapid fire. This test has two exercises: the close formation and the spread formation. The two exercises are worth 10 points each. These exercises are located under the multiple target menus (20 percent). z Multiple targets, ripple fire. Use the built-in ripple-fire target engagement exercise in the ATAC Situations More Situations menu. Three similar variations are available in the software. Any of the variations are acceptable for testing (20 percent). z G-COFT/C-COFT. The simulation-based G-COFT/C-COFT is the standard, objectively scored training event for AH-64 crews. The master gunner will implement and, if necessary, design the G-COFT/ C-COFT. The G-COFT/C-COFT will evaluate the crews ability to engage targets and work as a team. This training is critical to assess the attack helicopter crews skills before it progresses to live-fire tables.

CREW SIMULATOR/GROUND TRAINING GATES SIMULATOR/ GROUND TRAINING GATES

GATE 3: TABLE V
2-28. Table V allows the commander to assess the unit gunnery readiness before starting the live-fire gunnery tables. To complete Table V, crews will, at a minimum z Score 80 percent on the helicopter-gunnery skills test; the skills test is a written examination with at least 50 gunnery-specific questions. Crews must complete the test no earlier than 180 days before going to the range to conduct live fire. z Complete crew conduct-of-fire training in a compatible simulator.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

2-7

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

G-COFT/C-COFT
2-29. The simulation-based G-COFT/C-COFT is the standard, objectively scored training event for AH-64 crews. The master gunner will implement and, if necessary, design the G-COFT/C-COFT. The G-COFT/C-COFT will evaluate the crews ability to engage targets and work as a team. This training is critical to assess the attack helicopter crews skills before it progresses to live-fire tables. The G-COFT/C-COFT setup will include z Twelve engagements for all weapon systems that resemble Tables VII and VIII engagements. z Day and night engagements similar to Tables VII and VIII. z Appropriate tactical scenarios/events for both day and night tables. z Multiple, progressively more difficult training levels. Note: The G-COFT/C-COFT is part of Table V. It will not replace live-fire gunnery training. 2-30. Some units may not have access to a compatible simulator. For those units, the master gunner may, with the concurrence of the battalion/squadron commander, develop a C-COFT type of exercise for use in the aircraft. The intent is to evaluate the crews skills in a progressive manner. When crews satisfactorily meet all requirements for the individual and crew simulator/ground training gates, they will progress to live-fire tables. 2-31. The commander may make Table V more rigorous. He should determine the level of detail required to assess aircrew readiness. 2-32. The appropriate entries will also be made upon successful completion of Table V in the crew members individual aircrew training folder, according to the commanders guide.

CREW LIVE-FIRE GATES

2-33. Table VI is the aircraft live-fire calibration and verification table. All aircraft requiring calibration/harmonization/verification must complete Table VI before progressing to subsequent live-fire tables. All crews do not have to fire Table VI. However, crews should fire Table VI in the aircraft that they will use for crew qualification. Table VII is the crew live-fire training table. Table VIII is the crew qualification table. Commanders must decide whether crews can progress to the next table based on their demonstrated performance. Commanders retain the ability to deny further live-fire training to crews that fail to meet training standards.

LIVE-FIRE RULES
2-34. If a crew fails to qualify on Table VIII because of failed tasks, the commander may allow the crew to reshoot the tasks that were failed if ammunition is available. If crews have to reshoot tasks on Table VIII to qualify, their table is called a Q2, or qualification on second attempt. If a crews table is scored a Q2, the maximum rating that it can achieve is qualified. If a crew does not qualify after the second pass, the commander must decide whether to commit resources to allow the crew to try for a Q3. 2-35. Although the tables are progressive, Table VIII Day may be fired after Table VII Day without firing Table VII Night. In addition, Table VIII Night may be fired directly after Table VII Night. 2-36. If crew members are assigned to an aircraft type that has a night qualification requirement, they must pass both the day and night portions of Table VIII for

2-8

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Chapter 2

qualification. For validation, the crew must pass both the day and night portions of Table VII.

TARGET RANGE AND ENGAGEMENT TIME

2-37. The live-fire tables represent more than a chance to expend ammunition. They represent a training standard. The ranges to targets and engagement times have been revised for this manual. 2-38. The engagement ranges in the tables were developed as a function of the effective range of the weapon and the limitations of training ammunition. Sensing the impacts of training ammunition can be difficult. 2-39. The engagement time standards were developed to ensure that crews could place fires on targets quickly and accurately. The time standards are based on target acquisition time, munition time of flight, and time to adjust rounds on target.

GATE 4: TABLE VI
2-40. Table VI is the first live-fire table. This table allows the crew to determine if the helicopter weapon systems are working properly. The intent of Table VI is to certify the helicopter weapon systems. It will be fired under the supervision of the unit armament or maintenance officer. If the aircraft weapons do not function to standard, the aircraft will not be used for qualification. Table VI will be accomplished to standard for all aircraft before using them to fire Table VII/Table VIII. As stated in table 2-1, note 1, this table is not a mandatory gate for each crew. However, each crew should fire Table VI in the same aircraft in which it will fire Table VII/Table VIII. This table allows crews to fire live munitions without the fear of failing because of time constraints. Table VI may be the first live-fire training for unit crews in a year. Table VI allows crews to become reacquainted with firing live munitions before progressing to Table VII.

TABLE VII
2-41. Live fire of Table VII is required before progressing to Table VIII. However, crews can validate on Table VII and progress to advanced tables. Validation is the process of ensuring that the gunnery crew can still meet the Table VIII standard, thus validating the results of the crews last Table VIII. 2-42. With the concurrence of the commander, crewmembers may validate on Table VII if z Each individual crewmember was qualified on Table VIII during the preceding 12 months. z Each individual crewmember occupies the same crew station as the previous gunnery in which he/she qualified; dual-seat designated aviators may validate in either crew station. z The crew is Q1 on the validation table. 2-43. The minimum standard for validation is qualification on 8 out of 12 engagements. A qualified engagement is an engagement in which target effect is achieved with a minimum score of 70 points. If the crew meets the standard, it can, at the discretion of the commander, progress to advanced tables without firing Table VIII. In effect, the Table VII performance becomes the crews Table VIII qualification.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

2-9

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

2-44. The commander will evaluate crews that fail to meet the standard on Table VII before they progress to Table VIII. If required, crews will receive additional training in deficient areas before progression. 2-45. STRAC provides ammunition for Table VII as a live-fire table. Using the simulator does not satisfy the requirement for progression to Table VIII.

GATE 5: TABLE VIII

2-46. This table is an annual requirement and the cornerstone of the unit gunnery training program. Annual means once every 12 months, based on the last date of crew qualification. Table VIII is valid only if it is conducted live fire. 2-47. For crews that do not validate on Table VII, live firing this table is a requirement. This table determines crew qualification. Scoring standards are the same as for Table VII. A crew cannot progress to advanced-table gunnery without qualifying on Table VIII. 2-48. Successful qualification will be annotated on DA Form 759 (Individual Flight Record and Flight CertificateArmy). Appropriate entries will also be made in the crewmembers individual aircrew training folder, according to the commanders guide. 2-49. Because of limited range time, weather, and other factors, units cannot always complete the required tables during a single gunnery range training period; therefore, a crews Table VII (validation) or Table VIII might be interrupted. A crew must, however, complete all tasks of Table VII (validation) or Table VIII within 180 days of starting the table. Failure to complete all tasks within 180 days will require the crew to start the table over and complete all Table VIII tasks at the next available opportunity.

ADVANCED TABLES
2-50. The advanced level of gunnery training consists of four tables: Tables IX, X, XI, and XII. The company/troop/battalion/squadron commander uses these tables to train and assess unit collective gunnery skills. These tables emphasize the elements of command and control, situational awareness, tactical placement/movement within the battle area, communicative flow of tactical information, target acquisition, engagement priorities, and fire distribution and discipline of fires. Tables X and XII contain training ammunition requirements to conduct live fire by platoons and company/troops and will be fired if enough ammunition is available after the conduct of intermediate tables. These are not qualification tables but collective training tables. The table scenarios should be based on the unit METL and the tasks, conditions, and standards found in the unit MTP. 2-51. Table IX is a dry-fire training table for a team/section/platoon. This table is oriented on the basic fighting elements of a company/troop. The commander uses this table to train the unit in the coordination skills needed for multiple aircraft to engage targets. Unlike Table VIII, which trains a crew to effectively place steel on target, Table IX allows the commander to train multiple aircraft operations, placing primary emphasis on fire distribution and control measures.

GATE 6: TABLE X
2-52. This table is the live-fire version of Table IX. The training emphasis is on the coordination among multiple aircraft for joint target engagements. This table provides the framework for conducting team/section or platoon gunnery training. Thorough and accurate coordination between elements, as well as accurate delivery of fires, will determine the units success on this table.

2-10

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Chapter 2

2-53. Tables XI and XII are company/troop training tables and are the culmination of an effective gunnery training program. These tables provide examples of training tasks that the company/troop commander may use to evaluate unit proficiency in collective training tasks. The commanders ultimate gunnery training goal is to train the unit to fight in the combined-arms environment. Table XI is a dry-fire training table, designed to exercise the company/troop-level command and control. The primary training emphasis is placed on the unit fire distribution, target engagement priorities, and control measures. Table XII is the live-fire culmination of the company/troops gunnery training program. This table emphasizes the same areas as Table XI but under live-fire, tactical conditions. Evaluation of unit command and control is the primary objective of this table. However, Table XII is also an opportunity for the commander to evaluate the unit maintenance and rearm/refuel capability during multihelicopter operations. 2-54. Combined arms live-fire exercises are not advanced tables. FM 7-10 defines CALFEXs as high-cost, resource-intensive exercises in which player units move or maneuver and employ organic and supporting weapon systems using full-service ammunition with attendant integration of all combat, CS, and CSS functions. In addition, CALFEXs are not advanced tables but live-fire exercises. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for CALFEXs.

ENGAGEMENT SCORING SYSTEM

2-55. The engagement scoring system provides aviation units with a standardized, objective system to evaluate gunnery proficiency.

MISSILE SCORING
Hellfire Missile
2-56. Score engagements using the Apaches onboard video recorder subsystem or the Kiowa Warriors airborne videotape recorder. Missile engagements may also be scored with Department of the Army-approved objective scoring systems, if available.

Air-to-Air Stinger
2-57. Live missiles are not provided. Captive flight-trainer engagements will be scored.

CANNON, MACHINE-GUN, AND ROCKET SCORING

2-58. The standard for scoring cannon, machinegun, and rocket engagements is the Aerial Weapons Scoring System or USAAVNC-approved objective scoring methodology.

TARGET HANDOVERS
2-59. All target handovers will be transmitted from the range tower or a similar fixed base for Table VII and Table VIII. Units should develop a standardized methodology to provide standardized handovers for all crews.

TARGET HITS
2-60. When a crew is firing on a multipurpose range complex, target hits will be recorded on the RETS range computers along with the AWSS.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

2-11

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

SCORING CRITERIA
2-61. Using the appropriate gunnery tables, aviation units will evaluate their crews objectively. The following are commonly used terms relating to the scoring process.

TARGET EFFECT
2-62. Target effect means that the target is hit or the required number of rounds impact in the target effect area. For missile (Hellfire and Stinger) and cannon engagements, the target must be hit to achieve target effect. For machinegun (caliber .50, M60D, and M240H) engagements, the target must be hit or 10 percent of rounds must land in the target effect area.

ENGAGEMENT TIME
2-63. Engagement time is the total time required for the engagement. The two basic target types are controlled presentation targets and fixed, uncontrolled targets. Start and stop times are defined as follows.

Start
2-64. Controlled Presentation (Pop-ups). Engagement time starts when the target is in the full upright position and the target handover is complete (that is, the crew acknowledges the transmission). 2-65. Uncontrolled Presentation (Fixed). Engagement time starts when the firing crew accepts the target handover.

Stop
2-66. For all ranges, the stop time is when target effect is achieved or the crew calls mission complete. Mission complete is when the last rounds fired impact in the TEA or target effect is achieved (for example, the target falls).

ENGAGEMENT SCORING
2-67. Each engagement is graded on a qualified-unqualified standard. In a qualified engagement, the target-effect standard is achieved and a minimum of 70 points attained, as expressed in the time tables (no target effect equals no points!). If an engagement time equates to less than 70 points, those points are awarded but it is a nonqualified engagement. 2-68. Crew duties and time-of-flight figures are integrated into the engagement time tables. The criteria for each table are in the table annex. For example, the rocket tables for the AH-64 are built for pairs of rockets, not for rockets fired singly. 2-69. The minimum table qualification requires the crew to qualify on 8 out of the 12 engagements in the table. In addition, a crew must achieve at least one qualified engagement per evaluated weapon system to receive a GO on the table. For example, an AH-64 crew must qualify on 8 of 12 engagements, with a minimum of one qualified engagement for each evaluated weapon system (cannon, rockets, and Hellfire missile). 2-70. Upon successful completion of qualification tables, crews will be rated by the following standards (IATF entry of rating is not required): z Distinguished90 percent of possible points. z Superior80 percent of possible points. z Qualifiedqualified (achieved at least 70 points) on 8 out of 12 engagements.

2-12

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Chapter 2

SCORING MOVING ENGAGEMENTS

2-71. Moving engagements are engagements in which the helicopter is deliberately moving between designated start-fire and stop-fire points while firing at targets. 2-72. Running-fire engagements are engagements in which the helicopter is deliberately moving forward between designated start-fire and stop-fire points while firing at targets. 2-73. Placing accurate fires on a target is more difficult when the aircraft is at a hover than when moving or running, particularly with rockets. During training, the crew needs adequate maneuver space to fire and observe the impacts. 2-74. The master gunner must accurately and objectively score the moving engagement. The objective is to design the target array so the crew has the maximum time to observe munitions impacts on the target. Figure 2-1 shows a range layout.

Figure 2-1. Range Layout for a Moving Engagement 2-75. There are various considerations in the design of the moving engagement. 2-76. Master gunners can start the engagement time at the start-fire line and stop the engagement time at the stop-fire line. 2-77. The range to target decreases as the helicopter flies toward the target. When an aircraft is traveling at 30 knots, it will cover about 1 kilometer in one minute. 2-78. Select a start-fire line and stop-fire line that will keep the aircraft firing within the range fan and in an engagement time window. Refer to figure 2-1. If the start-fire line is 4,000 meters from the target and the stop-fire line is 3,000 meters from the target, the engagement can be scored using the 3,001-to-4,000-meter engagement time scoring table. 2-79. The amount of maneuver room available will dictate the speed of the aircraft during the engagement.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

2-13

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

2-80. If the aircraft cannot complete all shots between the start-fire and stop-fire line, time each pass separately. Time will start at the start-fire line and stop at the stop-fire line. Add the engagement times for each pass together to get the total engagement time.

SCORING HELLFIRE ENGAGEMENTS WITH THE VRS AND AVTR

2-81. The VRS of the Apache and the AVTR of the Kiowa Warrior are the current standard for scoring Hellfire missile engagements. Whether using live or training missiles, the tape recorded by the VRS or AVTR provides feedback on switchology, crew coordination, and employment techniques. Videotape is a useful resource for crew training, but is not an approved method for scoring cannon and rocket engagements. The master gunner should maintain a library of videotapes containing both good and bad Hellfire engagement techniques. This library is an excellent way to preserve continuity in the gunnery program. It is also useful for reinforcing gunnery instruction and combat readiness. 2-82. Target hit is the standard for Hellfire missile engagements. The score for the engagement is derived from the engagement time scoring tables. Review of the crews tape of the engagement is the method for determining target effect and confirming engagement time. For autonomous Hellfire engagements, engagement time starts as in the paragraph on scoring criteria and ends with the simulated missile impacting the target. As a technique, crews may announce splash to the tower over the radio to stop engagement time. 2-83. When a crew finishes its gunnery table, the master gunner or his/her representative will view the tape and determine target effect. At a minimum, the tape must reflect that the z Target is within range of the Hellfire missile (adjusted for selected delivery mode). z Aircraft is within constraints to launch a missile. z Line of sight and laser energy are on the target for the required time for the engagement. z Crew enters proper grid for remote engagements (target report or proper range and azimuth to target). z Missile and LRF/D are on same code for autonomous designation. 2-84. The master gunner can also determine proficiency of the Apache crew from reviewing the VRS tape. The master gunner can evaluate target tracking technique, crew coordination, and proper designation technique. This scoring technique will also be used with the OH-58D.

REMOTE HELLFIRE ENGAGEMENT SCORING

2-85. Remote Hellfire engagements are scored in the same way as for an autonomous Hellfire engagement. The standards for engagement time start and stop are as follows: z Start engagementtarget handover complete (transmission acknowledged by the shooting crew or when crew begins data entry). z Stop engagementcrew announces Shot, over. Note: Some method of laser control must be exercised by the firing crew (that is, no Laser on call, no points).

2-14

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Chapter 2

2-86. The Hellfire remote engagement has the following evaluation standards: z The evaluated crew will fire the training missile. z The target handover will be sent from the range tower or similar fixed base. z The target handover will use the FM 3-04.140 standard format including an eight-digit grid coordinate of the target. z The master gunner will determine proper crew procedures from review of the VRS tape.

SECTION IV POSTTRAINING ASSESSMENT

AFTER-ACTION REVIEW
2-87. After the live-fire gunnery exercise is complete, a comprehensive after-action review will be completed. The after-action review should focus on all facets of the gunnery program leading up to, and including, the live-fire exercise. The AAR process will produce a written document outlining the issues encountered in the conduct of the unit gunnery program. This process z Allows the commander to assess unit strengths and weaknesses in helicopter gunnery training and evaluation, as well as the unit standardization program. z Allows the unit to design the next gunnery training program based on demonstrated unit proficiency. z Provides continuity during personnel turnover and allows the entire unit to capture the good and the bad of the program. z Provides the unit with objective gunnery data that may serve as the basis for changes or modifications to this manual. z Provides a copy of the unit AAR to USAAVNC, DOTD, Gunnery Branch, ATTN: ATZQ-TDS-GT, Fort Rucker, Alabama 36362-5000.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTS
2-88. Along with the written AAR, each unit will keep the following documents and training records for reference: z Range SOP and duty logs. z Individual crew scoresheets for each crew. z AWSS and RETS printouts of all engagements. z A memorandum containing the names of the crews that fired on the range; the scores; and whether each crew was Q2, Q3, or unqualified; the memorandum will include the tail number of the aircraft used for firing. z A line entry must be made on the DA Form 7122-R (Crew Member Training Record) showing the gunnery qualification date and the crew station from which the crewmember qualified. z A memorandum containing an in-depth assessment of the unit helicopter gunnery training program. It also will provide data for the unit to negotiate for increased resources; it should contain the following information: The names, ranks, and positions of the key unit personnel serving as range staff (for example, name and rank of the officer in charge). Specific problems, if any, with the scoring system; cite examples.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

2-15

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

Lot numbers of the ammunition fired and any problems encountered with the ammunition. A roll up of engagements, by table, with range to target for each task, total number of rounds fired, total number of bullet hits, and total number of rockets scored in the TEA by task.

RANGE SCORE SHEET

2-89. The score sheet allows the master gunner to use a standardized score sheet for scoring the tables. Figure 2-2 shows an example of a completed score sheet used during range training. 2-90. This score sheet is not mandatory. However, if units develop their own score sheet, it will contain the same information as the example score sheet.

2-16

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Chapter 2

RANGE SCORESHEET PILOT Kaufman AIRCRAFT NUMBER 383 CPG/CPO Fisher UNIT B Troop

TABLE: VIII DAY NIGHT DATE 18 Apr 02 TEMPERATURE: +15 VISIBILITY: 4 CEILING: 100 CONDITIONS: Overcast Circle One Q1 Q2 Q3 START TIME 1245 END TIME 1335
Engagement and Task Weapon Flight Mode Range to Target (meters) Crew Weapons Weapons Effect Effect Standard Engagement Time Standard (seconds) Crew Engagement Time (seconds) Crew Score Qualify? Y/N

1/1 2/2 3/3 4/4 5/5 6/15 7/16 8/19 9/3 10/6 11/12 12/13

HF HF HF 30mm MPSM HF HF HF 30mm 30mm PD PD

Hover Hover Hover Hover Hover Hover Hover Hover Hover Moving Hover Run

2,100 1,900 4,500 700 3,300 1,500 6,000 4,500 900 1,500 4,000 4,100

Hit Hit Hit Hit 1/4 Hit Hit Hit Hit Hit 3/8 3/8

Hit Hit Hit Hit 0/4 Hit Hit Hit Hit Miss 4/8 5/8

27 22 40 60 69 22 70 40 60 60 93 111

20 21 31 42 54 19 60 43 40 84 79 105

95 75 90 88 0 85 80 50 90 0 85 75

Y Y Y Y N Y Y N Y N Y Y

TABLE TOTALS:
QUALIFIED ENGAGEMENTS: 9/12 TOTAL SCORE: 813 QUALIFIED TABLE
SCORER : CW3

YES NO

Sanger

REMARKS: Engagement 2 Late acquiring. Engagement 5 Engaged wrong target. Engagement 8 Poor acquisition technique, 30 seconds to acquire. Engagement 10 Too much time acquiring. Missed target.

Figure 2-3. Example of a Completed Score Sheet

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

2-17

This page intentionally left blank.

Chapter 3

Ranges for Helicopter Gunnery Training

A complete helicopter gunnery training program includes range firing. The program uses training areas or dry-fire ranges to run tactical courses. Tactical training should be integrated with gunnery training, when possible, for a more realistic training environment. This chapter highlights procedures, duties, and responsibilities for establishing and operating helicopter gunnery ranges (see AR 385-63). It also includes administrative and logistic requirements that support range firing.

SECTION I RANGE REQUIREMENTS RANGE CONSIDERATIONS

3-1. Proper preparation is essential to conduct helicopter gunnery tables. This preparation includes everything from the normal preparations for field training (such as mess and individual equipment) to the basics (such as aircraft, weapons, range facilities, and ammunition). 3-2. Resources required for gunnery trainingsuch as ammunition and range timeare expensive and, therefore, limited. Commanders must use these resources fully during every exercise. 3-3. Each unit should develop a range-firing SOP or annex to the local range SOP. Range safety should be included in the unit safety SOP. 3-4. Effective range administration and operation are crucial to any firing exercise. Planning should continue throughout the training year. However, once the range training date is set, the S3 will examine the commanders objectives. He works closely with the master gunner and staff to identify all requirements. The S3 gives particular attention to external requirements. 3-5. To maximize training, the unit should dry fire a table on the assigned range before live fire begins. Dry-fire training is most effective when conducted shortly before and during live-fire gunnery. Control measures peculiar to the range can be identified by dry firing an abbreviated crew table and by becoming familiar with the training scenario. Dry-fire training improves crews concentration on the gunnery tasks during live qualification firing. It also reduces their concerns about positioning, range orientation, and range fans. A thorough dry-fire practice also helps the crews to acquire targets. The master gunner should conduct several dry runs in an aircraft to fine-tune the evaluation strategy and ensure that targets are in place before live firing begins.

3-1

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

3-6. Do not use the actual Table VII and VIII target arrays for dry firing. If crews know exactly where targets are located, their proficiency in target acquisition cannot be evaluated.

REALISTIC TRAINING
3-7. Realism is the most important factor in gunnery training. Realistic gunnery training can be accomplished by training tough, realistic target acquisition and engagement situations. 3-8. Scenarios may be incorporated in all gunnery tables. Each scenario should be tailored to the table. For example, Tables III and IV may require only a general threat situation and the assignment of individual aircraft firing positions. Advanced tables may be executed by using a detailed battalion-level OPORD and tactical scenario. Company-level OPORDs may be developed to incorporate all aspects of tactical operations at the company level. The incorporation of tactical scenarios into all gunnery events also increases the value of training. This training should include crews sending spot reports and battle-damage assessments after each task. 3-9. Administrative control measures should be kept to the minimum required for safety. Tactical measures should be substituted for administrative measures, where appropriate. For example, a lateral boundary of a range facility could be briefed as a lateral divisional boundary that may not be crossed. The barrier to flight still exists, but some artificiality has been removed. The only necessary administrative control measures may be the verification of the position of the firing aircraft and the orientation of weapons before firing. 3-10. With the training tables in this FM, the master gunner can design the target array and scenario for the course. The target handover and briefed threat situation provide the information required for crews to conduct a realistic attack. 3-11. Firing tables fulfill minimum training requirements; safety regulations fulfill minimum safety requirements. 3-12. NOE hover-fire routes can be established around the impact area. These routes may also be used as a target identification range. A target array based on the units MTP can assist the crew in target identification and detection. Friendly vehicles may be integrated into the target area during advanced table training so that realistic vehicle identification is part of fratricide-prevention training. 3-13. Targets to be engaged from the various firing points should vary in range and type. These targets facilitate training the crew in weapon and ammunition characteristics and ballistics. Silhouettes should be constructed to full size. Targets must have a thermal signature when they are engaged during night-firing exercises by attack helicopters with thermal sights/target acquisition systems and devices. Hard targets should be artificially heated. Plywood silhouettes mounted on target lifters should have the standard Army thermal signature devices.

3-2

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 3

3-14. Target handovers should provide the crew with target type and cuing information. Crews should determine the appropriate weapon based on target type and engagement range. Providing crews with table engagement data sheets does not develop the decision-making ability that they will need in combat.

OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
3-15. Some operational requirements require advance planning: Training objectives. What is the desired training end state for the unit crews? Ammunition ordered and ammunition available. This ammunition includes rockets and cannon ammunition and return-fire simulators such as ATWESS and Hoffman charges. Combined arms integration. Integration of field artillery, armor, and CAS should be considered for advanced table training. Threat. Incorporation of TRTG or ASET-IV equipment for advanced tables should be considered. Detailed manpower. Tasked labor-force requirements internal and external to the unit must be identified. Briefings. Prerange briefings on range administration, ammunition handling, and range safety are needed. Aerial weapons scoring system. Is the system available during scheduled range density? Has the range been surveyed for AWSS installation?

RANGE SCHEDULING
3-16. Most installations hold a G3 range conference annually to schedule range time. Representatives from all units using the range facilities will attend and compete for range time. Based on the long-range calendar that the units use (division, corps, or National Guard Training Center), the G3 personnel in charge of the conference provide information such as when units will be deployed and in the field. These conferences schedule range time for the installation range. Unit representatives at these conferences can meet range schedulers from the different units using the range. Maintaining a point of contact in the range schedulers office may be important if a short-notice range requirement occurs and the unit must trade with the occupying unit. 3-17. When scheduling a range, take into account the amount of time needed to conduct the required training. Table 3-1 shows an example time sequence for a range density. This example has dead time built into it. The unit, therefore, may be able to make up time as the range progresses. Units should try to schedule extra days for maintenance and weather makeups. Fourteen days is the minimum to run a gunnery density that includes advanced table training, not including AWSS setup time. This example is based on a 24-helicopter AH-64 battalion.

3-3

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

3-18. Although the example shown in Table 3-1 may be condensed to save range time, a schedule that is too condensed will greatly reduce the training value of rounds expended. Table 3-1. Example of Time Sequence for a Range Density DAY 1, 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 VI VI VI VI VII DAY VII DAY VII NIGHT VII DAY VII NIGHT VIII DAY VII NIGHT VIII DAY VIII NIGHT VIII DAY VIII NIGHT X (2X) VIII NIGHT X (2X) XII X (2X) XII XII Makeup/WX TABLE COMPANY AWSS Setup A Company B Company C Company Makeup A Company B Company A Company C Company B Company A Company C Company B Company A Company C Company B Company A Company C Company B Company A Company C Company B Company C Company A Co. completes Table VI, B Co. starts Table VI B Co. completes Table VI, C Co. starts Table VI C Co. completes Table VI, Table VI complete Table VI makeup, A Co. ready for Table VII B Co. first up, A Co. completes Table VII C Co. first up, B Co. completes Table VII A Co. first up, C Co. finishes Table VII B Co. first up, A Co. completes Table VIII C Co. first up, B Co. completes Table VIII A Company completes Table X, C Co. completes Table VIII B Co. completes Table X in A.M., A Co. completes Table XII in P.M. C Co. completes Table X in A.M., B Co. completes Table XII in P.M. C Co. completes Table XII in A.M. REMARKS

AWSS Teardown and Range Turn-in Note: Actual range time requirements will probably increase especially with the advent of the 12-engagement Tables VII and VIII.

3-4

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 3

MANEUVER AREA 3-19. A maneuver area is required to conduct dry-fire crew and team or company tables. Its purpose is twofold. Without tying up valuable range space, it allows the firing elements to practice tactics, techniques, and procedures, short of actual live firing, required for gunnery training. Many impact areas will not accommodate firing lanes and surface danger zones large enough for large-scale advanced table training. Companies waiting for their turn to fire on the range can conduct dry-fire training tables away from the range complex. FACILITIES REQUIREMENTS Preplanning 3-20. A list of range facility requirements includes all of the permanent and semipermanent fixtures required in the range areas. To avoid last-minute problems, consider facilities requirements early, at least six months before the projected training. Give primary attention to the following: Alternate emergency airstrips. Rearm points. Ammunition holding and storage areas. Control towers. Target arrays. Boresight and harmonization pads and targets. Emergency safing areas for weapons. Jettison areas. Maintenance areas. Refuel points. Construction 3-21. Engineers may construct some facilities, and some may be prepared or improved by the unit. For example, engineers may be able to install concrete rearm pads for helicopter units. In addition, range control may install target arrays tailored specifically for helicopter gunnery. EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS Preparation 3-22. Consider equipment requirements during the planning and preparation stage: Number of firing aircraft. Number of crews to qualify. Adequate numbers of working video recorders for firing aircraft. Adequate numbers of serviceable videotape cassettes for aircraft. Serviceable video players and monitors for scoring/review. Command-and-control radio nets.

3-5

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Range-control communication nets. Crash-rescue equipment. Medical-evacuation resources. Adaptation 3-23. Units may expand this list. Depending on the installation, available fixed facilities will vary. Some equipment must come from outside unit resources. Plan early to avoid problems. PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS Initial Requirements 3-24. Filling personnel requirements is as important as filling facility and equipment requirements. Units must integrate the gunnery training program with the rest of the unit training calendar to ensure a coordinated effort. The following are the main personnel required to conduct the live-fire range, which will require additional preparation: Range officer in charge. Range safety officer. Laser range safety officer. Master gunner, chief of scoring. III/V platoon personnel. AVUM company and attached maintenance personnel. 3-25. These preparations are in addition to normal unit functions. For example, the III/V platoon and the AVUM company conduct operations similar to those found on live-fire ranges during field exercises. However, the fast tempo of the live-fire range may require more command, control, and communications functions than these elements normally employ. Training 3-26. The positions listed above are important to the units ability to perform the range mission. These personnel may require specialized training before the range. This training may include a rehearsal of the conduct of the tables at the range. In addition, all unit personnel will brief their personnel in detail on their specific responsibilities. LOGISTIC REQUIREMENTS 3-27. Long-range forecasting and budgeting are required to ensure the availability of logistical support during the desired training period. Specifically, POL, ammunition, and armament repair parts require long-term planning and preparation. Units will pay special attention to budgeting for Class IX Air.

3-6

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 3

RANGE OPERATION 3-28. Effective range administration and operation are crucial to any firing exercise. To conduct effective gunnery ranges, the unit must make a coordinated effort to organize and operate a gunnery range efficiently. Range Administration 3-29. Begin organizing a helicopter gunnery range by identifying an officer in charge. The commander will appoint the OIC. The OIC must be a knowledgeable, responsible officer who can implement safety and training guidance during the operation of the range. The OIC must be familiar with the local range SOP and safety requirements. A range control agency governs most ranges. Units may obtain appropriate range limitations and directives from the controlling agency. Range Logistics 3-30. An effective range requires a great deal of support. Most logistical support functions should be coordinated through the S4 in coordination with the Class III/V platoon leader. These functions must include Medical support. Mess support. Ammunition. Maintenance. Transportation for personnel around the range facility. Range Communications 3-31. At least three radio nets are required to operate a helicopter gunnery range: one net for range operation, one for air traffic control, and a range-control net. VHF and UHF radio nets should be used in controlling and evaluating the firing exercise. Units can use landlines effectively at the ammunition points, maintenance points, and other facilities on the range. The S3 section, along with communications personnel, is responsible for communications on the range. Range Organization 3-32. The final step in preparing a range for firing is to organize the assets already mentioned. All resources should be placed so that each functions smoothly. Note: A unit cannot afford to have time on the range with no aircraft firing. The unit must have good communication with the rearming area and the assembly area. Rehearse the flow of aircraft before aircraft arrive at the range.

3-7

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

SECTION II PERSONNEL RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES OFFICER IN CHARGE

3-33. A range will not be operated without an OIC. The OIC is responsible for all range operations. He supervises range personnel and enforces range safety. Officers in charge should come from the firing units chain of command and operate according to AR 385-63. Most major range complexes dictate OIC responsibilities and operate under strict SOPs. Note: The OIC is not the unit commander. He is the commanders representative. Units may appoint an alternate OIC to relieve the OIC during rest periods. Having an alternate available is especially important during heavy day and night firing schedules. 3-34. Before live-fire operations, the OIC Obtains a range briefing from the installation range officer as required by local range regulations. Obtains clearance to fire from range headquarters and records the time and the name of the person giving the clearance. Ensures that medical support required by the range SOP is present, the range flag is up, and the range sweep is completed. Verifies that required personnel and equipment are present. Verifies ammunition loading by type and amount with the FARP. Checks communications and makes sure that backup communications are available for live fire. Should be prepared to quickly control fires and have a plan to evacuate aircraft, if fires spread; during the dry season, danger of grass and brush fires exists. The range OIC must coordinate the fire-fighting effort if required. 3-35. During live-fire operations, the OIC Enforces table standards. Maintains positive communications with ground elements and helicopters on the range. Supervises flight operations and safety procedures. Observes all range activities to ensure safety and efficiency. Observes and spot checks ground operations. Maintains a duty log.

3-8

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 3

3-36. After live-fire operations cease, the OIC Closes the range with headquarters. Verifies that the range is closed and completes reports as required. Removes the flag, secures the buildings and tower, and polices all operating areas. Releases tasked labor details to supervisors when firing is completed, the last helicopter has departed the range, and work is complete.

RANGE SAFETY OFFICER

3-37. The RSO ensures safe operation of the range and assists the OIC. He is familiar with the range SOP and the aircraft and armament emergency plan. He is also aware of proper storing, handling, and loading of ammunition and fuel and knows the duties of all range personnel. AR 385-63 contains RSO prerequisites. The RSO Observes range operation and reports unsafe conditions to the OIC. Conducts the safety portion of the range briefing for all range personnel including aircrews, Class III/V personnel, and maintenance personnel, as specified in the unit lesson plan. Inspects the firing line and parking and ammunition-loading areas. Ensures that vehicles, equipment, and aircraft are properly positioned for safety. Provides input on the vehicle parking area and the organization and operation of the refuel/rearm areas. Observes safety procedures during firing and ground operations. Inspects crash and rescue equipment and reports any deficiencies in equipment or personnel training. Ensures that a preaccident plan is in effect and all affected personnel are aware of it; ensures that range control has a copy of the preaccident plan. Observes safety procedures of POL and armament personnel; checks for any deficiencies in equipment or personnel. Maintains watch for foreign objects in the parking area or FARP. Ensures that knowledgeable EOD personnel are available. Ensures that a diagram is displayed at the central control point showing the location of all range facilities, range-fan information and flight routes, minimum altitudes, other impact areas, low-level hazards to flight, and possible caution areas.

MASTER GUNNER
3-38. The master gunner is familiar with the unit range SOP, aircraft and armament emergency procedures, and the local accident reporting procedures. He ensures that assigned helicopter weapon systems are operated using the prescribed procedures and applicable safety precautions. He is familiar with the azimuth, range, and sector azimuth limits of the

3-9

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

range. He knows the standards. He is the commanders primary scorer for the gunnery tables. The master gunner Observes the operation of the range and reports unsafe conditions to the OIC or RSO; captures observations on range operation for the after-action review. Ensures, along with the OIC, that helicopters fire the approved scenario within range limits. Conducts the range according to FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) standards. Coordinates an evaluation cell to score gunnery tables; completes required reports and produces required documents.

LASER RANGE SAFETY OFFICER OR NCO

3-39. For all laser range operations, unit commanders must designate, train, and certify LRSOs or LRSNCOs. The LRSO or LRSNCO will Be familiar with Chapter 19 and Appendix B, AR 385-63, and the FM and TM applicable to the laser devices used. Brief unit personnel who work with laser devices on laser-related hazards, safety devices, and malfunction procedures. Know the range fans, including elevations, firing position, and targets used. Ensure that protective eyewear is used when required. Ensure compliance with unit and range SOPs regarding laser operations and training. Maintain continuous communications with personnel on the range; stop lasing immediately if communications are lost.

RADIO OPERATORS
3-40. The radio operators ensure that radios during range operations are working properly. Radio operators must be familiar with the range SOP and aircraft and armament emergency plan.

CLASS-III/-V OIC OR NCOIC

3-41. Early in the planning process, the Class-III/-V OIC or NCOIC coordinates resource requirements. He ensures that adequate fuel and ammunition are available for training. 3-42. In addition, the Class-III/-V OIC or NCOIC conducts classes in coordination with the master gunner to educate the unit air and ground crews on identifying and properly loading ammunition. Units can hold these classes both before and during range operations. 3-43. The Class-III/-V platoon establishes the FARP. It coordinates the drawing, transportation, storage, and dispersal of ammunition and explosive devices on the range. The platoon leader ensures that each aircraft receives the prescribed load of ammunition. The platoon leader also develops a plan for disposal of nonfunctional ammunition and ensures that unit aircraft/weapons do not use restricted or suspended lots of ammunition in

3-10

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 3

training. The Class III/V platoon leader or platoon sergeant reviews and enforces the following safety precautions: Personnel must approach and depart the vicinity of the helicopter from the side and only after visual approval from the pilot in the helicopter. The last person to leave the vicinity of the helicopter gives an all-clear signal to the pilot. Personnel remain clear of loaded weapon danger areas at all times. The weapon system is secured before anyone enters or leaves the helicopter or as directed by the pilot. Personnel remain clear of weapon system areas during boresighting. Aircrews check weapon systems only when the master arm switch/button is in the SAFE position/condition as directed in the appropriate TM. Smoking is not allowed within 50 feet of ammunition or the helicopter. Personnel use available protective devices such as hearing protectors. Loose equipment near the arming pads is secure before helicopter takeoff or landing. Units police and turn in ammunition casings and dunnage. Units close out Class-III/-V accounts and clear the FARP as required. Note: FM 3-04.112(FM 1-112) and FM 3-04.114(FM 1-114) cover FARP operations. This section implements STANAG 3117.

SECTION III HELICOPTER GUNNERY RANGE SAFETY GROUND SAFETY

3-44. Ground-support personnel must be constantly aware of the dangers involved in live-fire training. The training of support personnel in ammunition care and handling is a continuous process at the unit level. All ammunition storage, handling, and basic safety procedures will follow guidelines in ARs 385-62, 385-63, and 385-64; local regulations/the range SOP; Appendix E of this manual; and the unit SOP. Chapter 5 describes ammunition characteristics. Units will train their ground personnel in the procedures for working near operating helicopters. Ammunition loading areas may be separate from refueling areas. In addition, units will train/drill their support personnel on emergency situations related to their duties. The rules for ground safety are as follows: Personnel must avoid main and tail rotors, turret weapon systems, and wing store fore and aft blast areas during aircraft operation. Personnel will approach the helicopter from the 90-degree side position only after receiving visual approval from the aircrew. Crews will not move their helicopter until an armorer moves out of the main rotor arc at the 90-degree side position and signals all clear.

3-11

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Before departing the arming or dearming area for the home station, support personnel will remove all ammunition from the helicopter; the pilot-in-command will check the aircraft to ensure that it is safe and cleared of all ammunition. Ground crews must ground the helicopter before performing any maintenance and before the aircrew enters or exits the helicopter. All personnel working on or near the helicopter will have their sleeves rolled down. All personnel will use eye and hearing protection. During night operations, ground personnel will carry a flashlight or similar lighted device when working near the helicopter. To maintain communications between the aircrew and armorers servicing the armament subsystems, personnel should use the intercom system and practice common hand signals; Figure 3-1 shows ground hand signals.

FIRING SAFETY
3-45. ARs 385-62 and 385-63 contain range safety requirements for firing helicopter weapon systems. Safety requirements for firing are as follows: Leaders will inspect individual weapons. The OIC or his representative will give clearance before arming weapons. Weapons are pointed downrange and within range-fan limits. Ground personnel are not in front of the weapons or in the back-blast area. No other aircraft are within the surface danger area. Crews will not fire weapons closer than the minimum safe slant range. Units will consider and control laser range finders and designators as weapons. 3-46. The rules for firing safety are as follows: During range operations, armament subsystems will be pointed downrange or away from populated areas, whenever possible. Armament subsystems are considered safe for range traffic pattern operations under safe or standby conditions (see the note below). Crews may place armament subsystems in the ARM position/condition if the helicopter is pointed downrange at the firing point and no other aircraft are in the surface danger zone. (Laterally parked helicopters may be cleared for formation firing and team training.) The PC is responsible for operating and positioning the arming switch. Note: Refer to the appropriate aircraft operators manual for aircraft weapons safing techniques. Even if the master arm switch is in the safe position, the weapon may still be functional and dangerous to ground crews.

3-12

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 3

Figure 3-1. Ground Hand Signals

3-13

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 3-1. Ground Hand Signals (Concluded)

3-14

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 3

AIRCRAFT EMERGENCY PLAN

3-47. The aircraft emergency plan prescribes the procedures to be followed if an aircraft emergency (accident, incident, or inadvertent firing) occurs during range firing. The aircraft emergency plan should provide for immediate accident notification to the OIC and RSO. The range OIC will ensure that mishaps are reported according to local policies.

SECTION IV RANGE LAYOUT CONSIDERATIONS

3-48. Construct firing lanes so that targets are clear of obstructions and clearly visible to aircrews. To facilitate boresighting and response to emergency situations, the first 500 meters of a firing lane should be clear and relatively flat. 3-49. The start-fire line must be clearly marked and visible from the air. For control purposes, the start-fire line should be visible from the range tower or control point. Landing pads on the firing line should be clearly marked for both day and night landings. In addition, range limits must be clearly visible to aircrews and controllers. 3-50. TC 25-8 contains specifications for suitable helicopter gunnery range targets. By referring to the gunnery tables, the proper target silhouettes for each engagement can be manufactured and placed on the range. Do not settle for targets that are not full scale. Reduced-scale targets degrade target acquisition by the aircrew.

MULTIPURPOSE RANGE COMPLEX

3-51. Multipurpose ranges are fully automated and instrumented with state-of-the-art targets and controlling devices. MPRCs are primarily designed for armored and mechanized infantry, but they can accommodate helicopter gunnery. Commanders should plan their gunnery programs to integrate helicopter gunnery into combined-arms training. TC 25-8 contains more information on training in a multipurpose range complex. 3-52. The MPRC consists of an area of about 1,000 meters by 4,500 meters. It employs remote target systems and stationary and moving targets. 3-53. Helicopters are restricted to specific firing points, altitudes, and ranges. 3-54. If aircrews use live-fire, nondud-producing ammunition, and MILES/AGES laser engagements, the MPRC can support training as outlined in AR 350-1 and FM 7-0(FM 25-100).

AERIAL WEAPONS SCORING SYSTEM

3-55. The Aerial Weapon Scoring System is an assemblage of computer-controlled sensors that can accurately score cannon, machine-gun, and rocket engagements. With the integration of the Laser Aim Scoring

3-15

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

System, the system also can score autonomous or remote laser designators used with the Hellfire training missile. The AWSS is mobile and can be transported in trailer-size enclosures to installations or training areas approved for AWSS operations. Contractors operate and maintain the AWSS administered by the logistics directorate of STRICOM. 3-56. Units request AWSS support through MACOMs or the National Guard Bureau. FORSCOM, USARPAC, and USAR units will request the AWSS through the FORSCOM aviation office. National Guard units will request the AWSS through their aviation liaison office at FORSCOM. Units in USAREUR schedule the AWSS through the 7th Army Training Command. The AWSS is not compatible with high-explosive service ammunition; units may use only training munitions with the system. 3-57. AWSS support personnel must conduct a range survey to determine sensor locations with respect to targets/target effect areas before AWSS operations begin. Normally, the contractor will survey a range only once unless new targets are installed or moved. 3-58. The AWSS consists of a ballistic scoring subsystem (used with cannon and machine gun), rocket scoring subsystem (used with point-detonating and MPSM rockets), laser-designator scoring (used with the Hellfire training missile), and computer control subsystem. BALLISTIC SCORING SUBSYSTEM 3-59. The BSS consists of Doppler radar sensors located in front of the target. These sensors count 7.62-millimeter, 20-millimeter, 30-millimeter, and .50-caliber hits and transmit hit information, via radio data link, to the control subsystem. DETONATION SCORING SUBSYSTEM 3-60. The DSS consists of acoustical sensors located at surveyed points with respect to the rocket TEA. The sensors detect detonations of training rockets and rocket submunitions and locate their points of impact in the target effect area. The system then transmits this information to the computer control subsystem for processing and tabulation. LASER AIM SCORING SYSTEM 3-61. The LASS is the result of an engineering change proposal applied to the AWSS to score the tactical laser designator when used with the captive Hellfire training missile. It detects the location and intensity of laser energy striking a surface of a target. Within this operation, it also measures (times) the duration of energy on the target and detects laser underspill/overspill. The USAREUR AWSS has an operational LASS; the two CONUS-based AWSSs are undergoing LASS retrofit. Note: Units will use the LASS target for missile engagements/laser verification only because it will not work properly if its associated target has 30-millimeter/rocket holes in it.

3-16

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 3

COMPUTER SCORING SUBSYSTEM 3-62. The CSS consists of processor units and monitors located in an environmental enclosure (usually a trailer) near the range-control tower. The scoring system receives information from the ballistics and rocket scoring subsystems via a communications data link, processes that information, displays the results visually, and provides hard copy for the master gunner/commander. 3-63. The AWSS has some unique system characteristics and associated scoring limitations. The battalion or squadron master gunner should arrange for the AWSS site manager to brief the aircraft crews before any firing begins especially if the unit has never used the AWSS or if most of the crews are not familiar with the AWSS. 3-64. Units will complete the AWSS scheduling process through their MACOM. USAAVNC will only approve an alternate scoring method (ASM) for a specific range when the AWSS is not available to the firing unit. USAAVNC and the installation/unit will maintain a copy of the ASM request and approval. Any ASM must, at a minimum, meet the following criteria: Provide scoring coverage of the entire TEA for rocket engagements or target/target array for cannon/machine-gun engagements. Be continuously observable, if a visual/audio-visual method is used. Be recordable in video or on paper. 3-65. Contact the USAAVNC Directorate of Training, Doctrine, and Simulation (DOTDS), Gunnery Branch, Gunnery and Applied Tactics Division, at DSN 558-2755/2691 or commercial (334) 255-2755/2691 to initiate a request for an ASM.

ATTACK HELICOPTER GUNNERY RANGE

3-66. The AHGR allows an attack helicopter battalion or cavalry squadron to conduct company-level helicopter gunnery operations. While this range complex does not exist, it is being reviewed for possible future construction. Figure 3-2 shows an example of an attack helicopter gunnery range.

3-17

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 3-2. Attack Helicopter Gunnery Range 3-67. The proposed maneuver and firing box for the AHGR is 3,000 meters wide by 2,000 meters long. The adjacent target area is 3,000 meters wide by 10,000 meters long. A firing area of this size allows an entire attack company or air cavalry troop to navigate, maneuver, and conduct live-fire training. The AHGR allows crews to shoot current munitions at maximum ranges. The AHGR allows units to deploy to the training area and be objectively evaluated on helicopter gunnery proficiency on the fully instrumented AHGR.

3-18

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 3

SECTION V SUCCESSFUL TRAINING BRIEF KEY PERSONNEL

3-68. Before moving to the training site, the S3 and master gunner should brief key personnel on the setup of the site. They should also brief on how to react to problems that may occur during setup.

START ON TIME
3-69. The training site should be ready and the communications set up early so that crews can begin firing on time. Plan operations for no interruptions of training for maintenance on the range until a prearranged time or normal shutdown time. Sufficient targets must be available to complete all scheduled training before the scheduled break. Short breaks to replace damaged targets are unavoidable. Try to minimize downtime. Range control must have plenty of backup targets ready for use.

KEEP A LOG
3-70. The OIC will maintain an accurate log or staff journal. A log will help keep the OIC better informed of dry- and live-firing times and other important events. The log should contain at least the following entries: When the unit occupied the range. When (at what time) range control gives permission for live fire. The name of the person at range control granting permission to fire. When the range was in a cease-fire status and the reason for cease-fire. When the unit opens/reopens the range. Locations and times of stray impacts. Crew identification and table-fired start and stop times (the OIC must keep track of which crews have fired). Reason for incomplete tables such as maintenance, unexploded ordnance, and weather. When the unit cleared and departed the range. Shift changes. VIPs or senior officers visiting the range.

CHANGE GUARDS
3-71. Prepare a plan to check and change guards frequently. Units will brief each guard on his job and its importance. Ensure that the guard understands the instructions.

3-19

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

POLICE CONTINUOUSLY
3-72. Keep the range area clean at all times. Police the range area continuously to avoid lengthy cleanup during range turn-in. This policing will also aid in FOD prevention.

BRIEF VISITORS
3-73. Senior officers may arrive on the range unannounced. Have a plan for briefing visitors on the range operation. Designate a briefing officer or NCO. 3-74. Build a professional, concise range briefing book. It should contain the following information: Names, ranks, and telephone numbers (to include the number of portable telephones and pagers) of the unit chain of command and important range personnel. Training objectives for the range. Schedule for range training. A short memo outlining the objectives and standards for the training. MOI for the range. Diagrams of the firing points. A copy of this FM. 3-75. Ensure that the briefing officer or NCO knows which actions to take with the visitor.

PLAN AIRCRAFT EVACUATION

3-76. The AVUM commander must have a plan to evacuate disabled or damaged aircraft from the range and the rearm/refuel area. A precautionary landing on the range or in the FARP can stop firing for a long time unless a plan is in place to remove the aircraft.

3-20

Chapter 4

Ballistics
Ballistics is the science of the motion of projectiles and the conditions that influence their motion. The four types of ballistics influencing projectiles fired from helicopters are interior, exterior, aerial, and terminal. Each type produces dispersion, which is the degree that projectiles vary in range and deflection about a target.

INTERIOR BALLISTICS
4-1. Interior ballistics deals with characteristics that affect projectile motion inside the barrel or rocket tube. It also includes effects of propellant charges and rocket-motor combustion. These characteristics affect the accuracy of all aerial-fired weapons. Aircrews cannot compensate for these characteristics when firing free-flight projectiles. The information below covers the characteristics of interior ballistics. BARREL WEAR 4-2. Gaseous action, propellant residue, and projectile motion wear away the inner surface of the barrel or cause deposits to build up. These conditions result in lower muzzle velocity or a decrease in accuracy or both. PROPELLANT CHARGES 4-3. Production variances can cause differences in muzzle velocity and projectile trajectory. Temperature and moisture in the storage environment can also affect the way that propellants burn. PROJECTILE WEIGHT 4-4. The weight of projectiles of the same caliber may vary. The variance is most noticeable in linked-ball projectiles. These variations do not greatly influence trajectory. LAUNCHER TUBE ALIGNMENT 4-5. The internal or end bulkhead of the rocket launcher aligns individual rocket launcher tubes. However, the precise alignment of each tube may vary. Because of variances in alignment, the launcher boresight also varies from tube to tube. Proper boresighting of the launcher should include checking the boresight of several tubes and selecting the one that best represents the alignment of the entire launcher. THRUST MISALIGNMENT 4-6. A perfectly thrust-aligned free-flight rocket does not exist. Real free-flight rockets have an inherent thrust misalignment, which is the

4-1

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

greatest cause of error in free flight. Spinning the rocket during motor burn reduces the effect of thrust misalignment. 4-7. Firing rockets at a forward airspeed above ETL provides a favorable relative wind, which helps to counteract thrust misalignment. When a rocket is fired from a hovering helicopter, the favorable relative wind is replaced by an unfavorable and turbulent wind caused by rotor down wash. This unfavorable relative wind results in a maximum thrust misalignment and a larger dispersion of rockets. 4-8. Rockets spin to counteract thrust misalignment. Rockets with MK 66 motors exhibit less dispersion in the target effect area than those with MK 40 motors according to data provided by Rock Island Arsenal, Illinois.

EXTERIOR BALLISTICS
4-9. Exterior ballistics deals with characteristics that influence the motion of the projectile as it moves along its trajectory. The trajectory is the flight path of the projectile as it flies from the muzzle of the weapon to the point of impact. Aerial-fired weapons have all of the exterior ballistic characteristics associated with ground-fired weapons. They also have other characteristics unique to helicopters. The information below covers the characteristics of exterior ballistics. AIR RESISTANCE 4-10. Friction between the air and the projectile causes air resistance, or drag. Drag is proportional to the cross-section area of the projectile and its velocity. The bigger and faster a projectile is, the more drag it produces. GRAVITY 4-11. The loss of altitude of the projectile because of gravity directly relates to range. As range increases, the amount of gravity drop increases. This drop is proportional to time of flight (distance) and inversely proportional to the velocity of the projectile. Crew members who fire weapons without FCC solutions must correct for gravity drop. Table 4-1 shows gravity drop for different projectiles. YAW 4-12. Yaw is the angle between the centerline of the projectile and the trajectory. Yaw causes the trajectory of the projectile to change and drag to increase. The direction of the yaw constantly changes in a spinning projectile. Yaw maximizes near the muzzle and gradually subsides as the projectile stabilizes. PROJECTILE DRIFT 4-13. When viewed from the rear, most projectiles spin in a clockwise direction. Spinning projectiles act like a gyroscope and exhibit gyroscopic precession. This effect causes the projectile to move to the right; this is the horizontal plane gyroscopic effect. As the range to target increases, projectile drift increases.

4-2

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 4

Table 4-1. Gravity Drop

PROJECTILE 7.62 millimeter .50 caliber 30 millimeter

APPROXIMATE MUZZLE VELOCITY (FEET PER SECOND) 2,800

RANGE (METERS) 1,000

APPROXIMATE GRAVITY DROP (MILS) 7

2,900 2,640

1,000/1,500 1,000/2,000

9/18 15/60

4-14. To compensate for this effect in aircraft without FCC solutions, the gunner increases any correctionsuch as elevation, depression, or deflectionto hit the target. To compensate for projectile drift, the gunner establishes combat-sight settings or adjusts rounds toward the target. This compensation is known as using burst on target. Figure 4-1 shows projectile drift. WIND DRIFT 4-15. The effect of wind on a projectile in flight is wind drift. The amount of drift depends on the time of flight of the projectile and the wind speed acting on the cross-sectional area of the projectile. Time of flight depends on the range to the target and the average velocity of the projectile. When firing into a crosswind, the gunner must aim upwind so that the wind drifts the projectile back to the target. Firing into the wind or downwind requires no compensation in azimuth but will require range adjustment.

AERIAL BALLISTICS
COMMON CHARACTERISTICS 4-16. Characteristics of aerial-fired weapons depend on whether the projectiles are spin stabilized or fin stabilized and whether they are fired from the fixed mode or the flexible mode. The information below covers some characteristics of aerial-fired weapons. Rotor Down-Wash Error 4-17. Rotor down wash acts on the projectile as it leaves the barrel or launcher. This down wash causes the trajectory of the projectile to change. A noticeable change in trajectory normally occurs when the helicopter is operating below effective translational lift.

4-3

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 4-1. Projectile Drift 4-18. Although rotor down wash influences the accuracy of all weapon systems, it most affects the rockets. Maximum error is induced by rotor down wash when the weapon system is fired from an aircraft hovering IGE, as Figure 4-2 shows. Air flows downward through the rotor system and causes the rocket to pitch up as it leaves the launcher. 4-19. When the rocket passes beyond the rotor disk, air flows upward and causes the rocket to wobble. This air flow causes both lateral (azimuth) and linear (range) errors. 4-20. When the aircraft is hovering OGE (Figure 4-2), the relative wind strikes the rocket only from above after it leaves the launcher. This condition decreases the lateral error. However, the velocity of the rotor down wash increases because of the additional power required to maintain OGE hover, which may increase linear dispersion. 4-21. High-density altitudes and heavily loaded aircraft further increase linear dispersion. During IGE and OGE hovering flight, the true airspeed vector of the helicopter affects the position of rotor down wash and the speed of the down wash at the rocket launchers. For example, holding a position over the ground during a right crosswind results in a true airspeed vector to the right and a shift of the down wash to the left. This shift affects the left rocket for a longer time during launch than it does the right rocket. The left rocket also will pitch up to a higher quadrant elevation and go farther than the right rocket. Detailed system testing has not shown that differences of QE are required for right versus left launchers during hover fire.

4-4

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 4

IN-GROUND EFFECT

OUT-OF-GROUND EFFECT

1. INDUCED FLOW VECTOR IS SHORTER. 2. ROTOR WASH HITS ROCKET TWICE: FIRST FROM THE TOP, THEN FROM THE BOTTOM.

1. INDUCED FLOW VECTOR IS LONGER. 2. ROTOR WASH HITS ROCKET ONLY ONCE.

LESS ACCURATE

MORE ACCURATE

Figure 4-2. Rotor Down-Wash Error 4-22. To prevent a divergence of trajectories, the aircraft can drift with the wind if the terrain allows. Drifting with the wind allows the aircraft to remain stable and provides a more consistent rotor down wash for both launchers. Angular Rate Error 4-23. The motion of the helicopter as the projectile leaves the weapon causes angular rate error. It affects most weapon systems. The exceptions are Hellfire and Stinger missiles. For example, a pilot using the running-fire delivery technique to engage a target with rockets at 5,000 meters may have to pitch the nose of the helicopter up to place the reticle on the target. When the weapon is fired, the movement of the helicopter imparts an upward motion to the rocket. The amount of error induced depends on the range to the target, the rate of motion, and the airspeed of the helicopter when the weapon is fired. Angular rate error occurs when an aircrew fires rockets from a hover using the pitch-up delivery technique. Anytime a pitch-down motion is required to achieve the desired sight picture, the effect of angular rate error causes the projectile to land short of the target. SPIN-STABILIZED PROJECTILES 4-24. Certain ballistic characteristics are peculiar to spin-stabilized projectiles fired from weapons with rifled barrels. These weapons include the .50-caliber and 7.62-millimeter machine guns and the 30-millimeter cannon. When fired in the fixed mode (straight ahead of the helicopter), the projectiles generally have the same ballistic characteristics as ground-fired weapons. However, relative wind changes; the velocity of the helicopter then increases or decreases the velocity of the projectile. Information below covers

4-5

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

the ballistic characteristics influencing spin-stabilized projectiles fired from positions other than a stabilized hover. Trajectory Shift 4-25. When the boreline axis of the weapon differs from the flight path of the helicopter, the movement of the helicopter changes the trajectory of the projectile. For off-axis shots within +90 degrees of the heading of the helicopter, trajectory shift causes the round to hit left or right of the target. To correct for trajectory shift, the gunner leads the target. To lead the target, the gunner places fire on the near side of the target as the helicopter approaches. The amount of lead depends on helicopter airspeed, angle of deflection, projectile velocity, and target range. Figure 4-3 shows trajectory shift. Table 4-2 shows some examples of how to compensate for trajectory shift.

Figure 4-3. Trajectory Shift

4-6

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 4

Table 4-2. Typical Lead Angles for a 60-Degree Deflection Shot at 1,000 Meters

PROJECTILE 7.62 millimeter .50 caliber 30 millimeter

APPROXIMATE MUZZLE VELOCITY (FEET PER SECOND) 2,800 2,900 2,640

HELICOPTER VELOCITY (KNOTS) 100 100 100

LEAD ANGLE (MILS) 51 49 64

Port-Starboard Effect 4-26. Trajectory shift and projectile drift combine to constitute the port-starboard effect. When targets are on the left, the effects of drift and shift compound each other; both cause the round to move right. To hit the target, the gunner must correct for both ballistic effects by firing to the left of the target. When targets are on the right, the effect of projectile drift (round moves right) tends to cancel the effect of trajectory shift (round moves left). Therefore, when targets are on the right, firing requires less compensation. The range and airspeed at which a gunner engages a target determine which effect is greater. For example, at ranges of less than 1,000 meters, trajectory shift is greater. The gunner must fire to the right of the target. At ranges beyond 1,000 meters, the effect of projectile drift is greater and tends to cancel the effect of trajectory shift. Projectile Jump (Vertical Plane Gyroscopic Effect) 4-27. When a crew fires a weapon from a helicopter in flight and the muzzle of the weapon is pointing in any direction other than into the relative wind of the helicopter, the projectile will experience projectile jump (Figure 4-4). Projectile jump begins when the projectile experiences an initial yaw as it leaves the muzzle. The yaw is in the same direction as the direction of rotation of the projectile. The jump occurs because of the precession (change in axis of rotation) induced by crosswind. 4-28. The amount that a projectile jumps is proportional to its initial yaw. Firing to the right produces a downward jump; firing to the left produces an upward jump. To compensate, the gunner must aim slightly above a target on the right of the helicopter and slightly below a target on the left. The amount of compensation required increases as helicopter speed and angular deflection of the weapon increase. Compensation for projectile jump is not required when the gunner fires from a hover.

4-7

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

FIRING TO THE LEFT BULLET ROTATES CLOCKWISE

FIRING TO THE RIGHT

Relative Wind

BULLET JUMPS UP

BECAUSE OF PHASE LAG, THE RESULTANT FORCE TAKES EFFECT 90 DEGREES LATER IN THE DIRECTION OF ROTATION

BULLET JUMPS DOWN

Figure 4-4. Projectile Jump FIN-STABILIZED PROJECTILES 4-29. The ballistic characteristics affecting fin-stabilized projectiles are important. They include the following characteristics. Propellant Force 4-30. A bullet reaches its maximum velocity at or near the muzzle of the weapon. However, a rocket continues to accelerate until motor burnout occurs. As the rocket reaches its greatest velocity, the kinetic energy in the rocket tends to overcome other forces and causes the rocket to travel in a flatter trajectory. Center of Gravity 4-31. Unlike a bullet, the CG of a rocket is in front of the center of pressure. As the rocket propellant burns, the CG moves farther forward. The fins of the rocket cause the center of pressure to follow the CG. Relative Wind Effect 4-32. When a pilot flies a helicopter out of trimeither horizontally or vertically or boththe change in the crosswind component deflects the rocket as it leaves the launcher. Because the rocket is accelerating as it leaves the launcher, the force acting upon the fins causes the nose to turn into the wind. 4-33. A horizontal out-of-trim condition results when a pilot tries to align the sight on the target during a crosswind by cross controlling, or slipping, the helicopter. For example, a pilot flies at 100 knots and maintains 10 degrees out of trim with a quartering crosswind component of 10 knots. This condition causes the rocket to turn into the relative wind after leaving the

4-8

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 4

tube. As the velocity of the rocket increases and the motor burns out, the crosswind component decreases. After the motor burns out, the rocket drifts with the air mass (real wind). If the pilot is unable to align the helicopter into the wind, he must correct the gunsight upwind. While firing from a hover or during slow flight, the pilot must make a downwind correction because the rocket will turn into the wind. 4-34. A vertical out-of-trim condition results from an improper power setting. This condition creates a vertical relative wind on the rocket during launch, causing the rocket to turn into the wind. If the pilot fires the rocket while applying power (as in a climb), the relative wind will be from above. The relative wind will cause the rocket to hit beyond the aiming point. To maintain a vertical trim condition, the pilot must maintain a constant power setting that will produce the desired airspeed and altitude.

TERMINAL BALLISTICS
4-35. Terminal ballistics describes the characteristics and effects of the projectiles at the target. Projectile functioningincluding blast, heat, and fragmentationis influenced as described below. IMPACT AND REMOTE-SET PENETRATION FUZES 4-36. Impact and remote-penetration set fuzes are employed on high-explosive rocket warheads. The type of target engaged and its protective cover determine the best fuze for the engagement. The M423 fuze is an impact point-detonating fuze set on impact (used on the PD4 and 6PD rockets). The M433 fuze provides remote-set selectable penetration setting via the aerial rocket control panel or multipurpose display with RC4 and 6RC rockets. Engage targets on open terrain with a super-quick fuze that causes the warhead to detonate upon contact. Engage targets with overhead protection, such as fortified positions or heavy vegetation, with either a delay or forest-penetration fuze. Figure 4-5 shows that these fuzes detonate the warhead after it penetrates the protective cover.

4-9

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 4-5. M433 Multioption Fuze/2.75-Inch High-Explosive Warhead FIXED TIME AND REMOTE-SET/VARIABLE TIME FUZES 4-37. Timed fuzes produce airbursts. They are most effective against targets with no overhead protection. Smoke (SK4) and illumination (IL4 and 6IL) warheads incorporate a timed fuze, which depends on motor burnout or fixed time delay. The range for this type of fuze is fixed. Remote range/variable time set fuzes (M439 fuze) are in use for multipurpose submunition (6MP), smoke (6SK), illumination, and flechette (6FL) warheads. The fuze set time is variable as a function of target range for this type of fuze and can be set by the crew in the OH-58D (Kiowa). The AH-64 Apache fire-control system automatically sets the fuze for the appropriate fuze time of function, depending on the warhead selected and range. Timed Fuzes 4-38. The M446 fuze provides a fixed nominal 4.5-second delay. This fuze is employed in the SK4 smoke rocket. The M442 fuze provides a fixed nominal 9-second delay fuze, which is employed in the M257 flare/illumination warhead for both IL4 and 6IL rockets. Remote-Set Fuzes 4-39. The M439 fuze provides for remote-set capability of from a 0- to 26-second delay, which is computed based on the ballistic solution. Typically, the fire-control system will compute the fuze-set time, based on the range to the target, and apply the correct range and height offset, based on the warhead type. The 6MP (MPSM), 6SK (M264 smoke), and the 6FL (M255A1 flechette) use the M439 remote-set fuze. WALL-IN-SPACE CONCEPT 4-40. Multipurpose submunition warheads provide a large increase in target effectiveness over standard unitary warheads. The MPSM warhead helps to eliminate range-to-target errors because of variations in launcher/helicopter

4-10

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 4

pitch angles during launch. The M439 fuze is remotely set from the aircraft with range (time) to the target data. 4-41. Once fired, the initial forward motion of the rocket begins fuze time. At the computer-determined time (a point slightly before and above the target area), the M439 fuze initiates the expulsion charge. The submunitions eject, and each ram air decelerator inflates. Inflation of the RAD separates the submunitions, starts the arming sequence, and causes each submunition to enter a near-vertical descent into the target area. Figure 4-6 shows the wall-in-space concept.

Figure 4-6. Wall-In-Space Concept SURFACE CONDITIONS 4-42. The surface of the target areasuch as sand, rocks, or vegetation affects the lethality of the projectile. If super-quick fuzes are used against targets covered by heavy foliage, they will function high in the tree canopy but will be ineffective at ground level. However, the same fuze would be effective against a target area with a sandy surface. To get maximum effectiveness from the warhead, use the proper fuze for the surface condition. WARHEADS 4-43. The type of target to be engaged determines which warhead to use. A variety of warheads is available. The factors of METT-T help determine the proper mix of warheads for the particular mission. ANGLE OF IMPACT 4-44. The altitude from which the projectile is fired and the range to the target determine the angle of impact and fragmentation pattern. Weapons fired with a high angle of impact produce fragmentation patterns that are

4-11

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

close together. A projectile fired from NOE altitudes at the midrange of the weapon forms an elongated pattern, with the projectile impacting at shallow angles. As the range increases, the impact angle of the projectile increases. The length of the fragmentation pattern decreases, while the width increases. Figure 4-7 shows the angle of impact.

5,500 meters Shallow

DISPERSION

Steep

Figure 4-7. Angle of Impact

DISPERSION
4-45. If several projectiles are fired from the same weapon with the same settings in elevation and deflection, their points of impact will be scattered about the mean point of impact of the group of rounds. The degree of scatter (range and azimuth) of these rounds is called dispersion. The mean point of impact with respect to the target center, or intended aiming point, is an indication of the accuracy of the weapon. Both dispersion and accuracy determine whether a particular weapon can hit an intended target. Firing rockets at short ranges can result in increased linear (range) dispersion and normally decreases range accuracy. Firing rockets at longer ranges will decrease linear (range) dispersion but will increase angular (cross-range) dispersion. The errors inherent in firing projectiles cause dispersion. The factors discussed in the ballistics paragraphs influence these errors, in part. In addition, the vibrations/inaccuracies in the mount and condition of the sighting systems may also influence these errors. VIBRATIONS 4-46. Because mounts for weapons are fixed to the helicopter, vibrations in the helicopter transmit through the mounts. These vibrations affect azimuth and elevation. SIGHTS 4-47. The condition of the sights and the accuracy of their alignment with the bore axes of the weapons cause a displacement of the dispersion pattern of the projectiles.

4-12

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 4

BORESIGHT 4-48. Proper boresighting of aircraft weapons is critical to accurate fires. Improper boresighting is a factor in dispersion differences between like aircraft.

APACHE-SPECIFIC BALLISTIC CONSIDERATIONS

4-49. The AH-64 Apache fire-control system automatically compensates for various aspects of ballistics. The following is a brief summary of what it does and how it does this in the fire-control computer or weapons processor with the differences between the AH-64A and AH-64D identified. The AH-64 Apache 30-millimeter AWS and the 2.75-inch rocket system operate in two modes: normal and fixed. Normal mode is the recommended mode of operation because the gun turret is positioned and rocket pylons articulate based on the commands computed by the fire-control/ballistic solution. In fixed mode, the gun turret is positioned to 0-degrees azimuth and +6-degrees elevation. Fire-control and ballistic correctors are computed and used to position the fixed-mode reticle. INTERIOR BALLISTICS Barrel Wear 4-50. AH-64 pilots should be aware that gun duty cycle (heating and associated expansion of the barrel material) will also affect muzzle velocity. The pilot must follow the firing duty cycle guidelines presented in the operators manual (dash 10) to both preserve safety and to retain proper gun accuracy. The AH-64 computes ballistic offsets based on a nominal muzzle velocity of 805 meters per second at 70F for M788/M789 ammunition. The muzzle velocity variable used in the ballistics calculations is further adjusted based on the difference between 70F and the actual ambient temperature data received from the aircraft air-data system. However, no muzzle velocity or temperature sensor is fitted on the AH-64 cannon. Variations between computed and actual muzzle velocity can, therefore, adversely affect accuracy, most notably at longer engagement ranges. Propellant Charges 4-51. AH-64 pilots should recognize that propellant-burn variation, as a function of ambient temperature, also significantly contributes to muzzle velocity variations. It is addressed in the AH-64 ballistics algorithms via the muzzle-velocity temperature compensation. Propellant charge variations, as well as variations in ambient temperature, will manifest as increased dispersion at longer engagement ranges.

4-13

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Launcher Tube Alignment 4-52. The AH-64D aircraft employs pylon interface units in each pylon assembly and aligns each pylon for launch based on its independent error sources as measured with the CBHK. A further consideration associated with alignment accuracy is related to the M261 launcher. Specifically, the launcher deflects appreciably when the rocket motors initially ignite and the launcher holdback mechanism is not yet overcome. This phenomenon is most pronounced when rockets are launched from peripheral tubes of the launcher (outer ring). EXTERIOR BALLISTICS Air Resistance 4-53. The AH-64 ballistics calculations factor air-density ratio, based on data received from the aircraft air data system, in the gun and rocket time-of-flight calculations, which ultimately affect the aiming point adjustment (ballistic correction). Projectile time of flight increases in denser air masses. The opposite is true in thin air. Any increase in the munition time of flight equates to a larger ballistic correction because of the effects of gravitational drop (see the following paragraph). Gravity 4-54. AH-64 pilots should note that the 30-millimeter velocity is highest at barrel exit and decays rapidly as a function of range. The MK 66 rocket achieves maximum velocity at about 500 meters from the launch aircraft. Like the 30-millimeter projectile, its velocity decays rapidly thereafter. Because gravity is a fixed value of 9.806 meters per second squared, projectile time of flight is directly proportional to gravitational drop and dictates use of progressively larger ballistic compensation as a function of time to target. AH-64 pilots should note that the AH-64 ballistics algorithmsand associated rocket and gun coefficientsautomatically address gravitational drop as a function of time of flight. Yaw 4-55. Yaw instability cannot be quantified or compensated for completely; however, spin stabilization minimizes yaw error. In the case of the AH-64 30 millimeter, spin stabilization is implemented via barrel rifling, which imparts spin rate on the projectile while traveling down the barrel. Yaw error is largest at muzzle exit because of tip-off, not lack of spin stabilization. Yaw error is also introduced at longer ranges when the spin stabilization is compromised because of decaying projectile velocity and angle of attackthe round begins to corkscrew and eventually tumbles because of increased drag. This phenomenon is most apparent at ranges beyond 3 kilometers. In the case of rockets, the MK 66 motor flutes impart a high spin rate of more than 30 revolutions per second during the boost phase of motor burn (about one second). Thereafter, the folding fins reverse the roll rate and sustain the spin stabilization for the remainder of the munition free-flight profile. However, not unlike 30-millimeter projectiles, tip-off error is also a major cause of yaw instability in rockets.

4-14

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 4

Projectile Drift 4-56. The amount of projectile drift is proportional to the spin rate of the projectile, which varies throughout the flight profile. AH-64 pilots should note that the Apache ballistics algorithms compensate for this phenomenon. The aircrew does not have to make adjustments. Wind Drift 4-57. AH-64 pilots should recognize that wind-drift compensation is performed automatically by the weapons processor or the fire-control computer. In addition, AH-64 pilots should understand the following important wind compensation considerations. 4-58. Munition Sensitivity. Rockets turn into the wind vector during the motor-boost phase and drift with the air mass during the motor-coast phase. The 30-millimeter rounds drift with the airmass throughout their free-flight trajectory. The amount of projectile drift attributed to wind effects is directly proportional to munition time of flight (which accounts for air-density ratio), wind vector (angle), and wind magnitude. 4-59. Wind Compensation Characteristics. The fire-control computer or the weapons processor translates longitudinal and lateral wind data received from the aircraft air data system to the predicted LOS (where the target will be at termination of munition-free flight). Because the air mass characteristics are measured locally, the AH-64 ballistics algorithms apply wind sensitivity adjustment to the aiming point as if the munition flew directly to the target and the measured winds are constant from the aircraft to target. However, as a function of increased range, gravitational effects dictate that the munition be aimed well above the target to achieve intercept. If the wind characteristics at these altitudes or target ranges do not reflect that measured locally by the aircraft air-data system, appreciable error may result. To illustrate, consider a 30-millimeter gun engagement at 150 feet AGL with a slant range of 3 kilometers. In standard atmospheric conditions, ballistics will apply a 9.06-degree elevation correction above the LOS to achieve target intercept. In essence, the projectiles will achieve a peak altitude of more than 1,000-feet AGL. Surface winds at 1,000-feet AGL can differ dramatically from those at 150 feet, especially in an unstable air mass. A similar condition exists with MPSM (6MP) and illumination (6IL) rockets wherein the submunition payloads are deployed between 600 and 1,900 feet above the target and exhibit high wind-drift sensitivity because of their slow descent rate. The potential for large wind variations exists under certain conditions. AERIAL BALLISTICS (AH-64 APACHE-SPECIFIC BALLISTICS) Rotor Down-Wash Error 4-60. Rockets are most sensitive to down-wash effects as compared to 30-millimeter projectiles. In essence, HIGE launch yields greater dispersion because the aircraft cannot apply appropriate down-wash compensation. Rockets pitch up in hover, whether HIGE or HOGE applies, because rockets turn into the relative wind source during boost. The rotor down-wash magnitude of the AH-64D varies greatly as a function of aircraft gross

4-15

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

weight. At 18,000 pounds, the down-wash magnitude is nominally 21 meters per second, or 40 knots in stabilized hover. This wind source imparts a significant angular error (pitch axis), depending on exposure time. At about 33 knots forward airspeed (indicated), the rotor disk is pitched forward so that the influence vector is moved just aft of the rocket launcher front bulkhead, thus reducing down wash to zero. During the transition to rearward flight, down-wash magnitude initially increases because the rotor disk is pitched aft and the rockets spend more time in the influence vector. However, as rearward airspeed increases, the influence vector is translated from an orthogonal component to a longitudinal component because the rotor is tipped progressively more aft, thus reducing down-wash sensitivity. The AH-64D ballistics algorithms automatically compute rotor down-wash compensation for rockets based on aircraft gross weight, air density ratio, and longitudinal true airspeed. However, this compensation assumes rocket launch is initiated at HOGE altitudes. The AH-64A ballistic algorithms similarly compensate for rotor down wash with the down-wash influence diminishing as forward air speed increases; however, the down-wash value does not vary depending on gross vehicle weight. The fire-control computer on the AH-64A cannot compute changes in gross vehicle weight as the aircraft expends fuel and munitions during a mission. The nominal value for down wash when the aircraft is at a hover is 20 meters per second. As with the AH-64D, the down-wash influence is reduced to zero with forward airspeed of 30 knots. Down-wash compensation is not applied for the gun because of the position of the muzzle with regard to the rotor disk and the short exposure time of the 30-millimeter projectiles. Angular Rate Error 4-61. The phenomenon is effectively negligible for 30-millimeter projectiles. Angular rate error can affect rocket accuracy if rates are appreciable. The articulating pylons address angular rates in the pitch axis up to 10 degrees per second. Lead Angle Compensation/Trajectory Shift 4-62. AH-64 pilots should recognize that compensation for this error is accomplished automatically by the AH-64 ballistics algorithms when the TADS or FCR (AH-64D only) serves as the selected sight. If TADS is the selected sight, the AH-64D weapons processor employs a seven-state Kalman filter-based target state estimator that determines actual target velocities with respect to the TADS LOS. Likewise, if TADS is the selected sight on the AH-64A, the fire-control computer employs a five-state target state estimator that determines actual target velocities with respect to the TADS LOS. The target state estimator uses aircraft linear velocity and body rate data from the EGI, TADS LOS position from the TEU, TADS pitch and yaw rate inputs from the TADS turret, and laser range data from the TEU to arrive at a proper lead angle. (The AH-64D employs a laser range validator algorithm to preprocess the laser-range data before use in the target state estimator.) In essence, the target state estimator differentiates aircraft induced rates from true target rates. Once true target rates are derived, the lead predictor computes the appropriate lead angle based on computed time of flight of the projectile from the ballistic algorithms. If the FCR is the selected sight, the

4-16

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 4

FCR provides target-velocity data as a function of scan-to-scan correlation. If the FCR NTS target-velocity data are valid, the lead predictor is also called and the appropriate lead angle is derived. In addition to computation of lead angle, rate compensation is automatically applied to the pointing command to address servo delays and transport delay latency associated with increased target, ownship, or collateral rates. When the IHADSS is the selected sight system, no lead-angle compensation is computed or added to the gun turret or rocket pylon position command. With the IHADSS as the selected sight, the target state estimator is not employed; therefore, target states (velocities) are not known to compute the lead angle over the projectile time of flight. However, the fire-control system will correct for projectile gravity drop and drift based on the target range and LOS input into the ballistics to compute the ballistic correctors and aircraft-unique correctors when deriving gun turret-pointing commands. These correctors include the boresight, turret bending, body bending, and rate compensation. Projectile Jump 4-63. Projectile jump correction is indeed required in hover if a relative wind exists. AH-64 pilots should recognize that compensation for aeroballistic drop is accomplished automatically by first deriving the munition angle of attack with respect to the wind vector and then applying the appropriate jump correction to the aiming algorithm. TERMINAL BALLISTICS (AH-64 APACHE-SPECIFIC BALLISTICS) REMOTE-SET OR VARIABLE TIME FUZES 4-64. Fixed time-base fuzes detonate and release their payloads at a fixed time after rocket launch. Fixed time-base fuzes are employed in the SK4 with a 4.5-second time-of-function delay. The IL4, 6IL, and IL7 (CRV-7) illumination rockets are employed with an associated function time of 9.0 seconds after motor burnout. Optimum release range is established as 3.5 kilometers for the 6IL and about 4.0 kilometers for the IL7 (because of increased motor velocity). Airburst fuzes (M439) permit the host aircraft to establish a variable time of function from 0.95 to 25.575 seconds. The ballistic algorithms define the optimum fuze time-of-function value based on conventional ballistics compensation, use of a prescribed range and height offset associated with the payload, and submunition free-flight characteristics. M439 fuzes are employed in the following rockets: MP7CRV-7 motor, multipurpose submunition warhead (AH-64D only). SKCRV-7 motor, smoke warhead (AH-64D only). 6MPMK 66 motor, multipurpose submunition warhead. 6SKMK 66 motor, smoke warhead. 6FLMK 66 motor, flechette warhead. DISPERSION 4-65. AH-64 pilots should note that the nominal 30-millimeter round-to-round dispersion is about 3 milliradians in a given burst using a stationary target. The nominal MK 66 rocket unitary munition dispersion

4-17

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

exceeds 10 milliradians when fired from the aircraft. Turret bending is the single largest contributor to perceived dispersion associated with the AH-64 30-millimeter cannon. Specifically, the airframe and gun-turret experience flexure in response to sustained recoil. The AH-64 ballistics algorithms must, therefore, employ a turret-bending compensation table to normalize this adverse effect. The table, developed using multiple AH-64 aircraft, defines the average bending trend at various azimuth and elevation-pointing angles. No compensation is required for the first round in a burst because recoil effects do not yet apply. The aiming point is adjusted for one-half of the bending table value for the second round in a burst. Full table values are applied thereafter until gunfire is terminated. Faulty recoil adapters are another major source of round-to-round dispersion or aiming point biases. If the recoil dampers (either or both) are incorrectly serviced or dysfunctional altogether, a significant variation can exist in first, compared to subsequent, round placement. Finally, excessive turret backlash and component wear also contribute to dispersion and aiming point variations. The AH-64 aircraft employs a gun dynamic harmonization algorithm that permits aircrews to rapidly compensate for the error sources so that that most of the burst will be placed on target. MODES OF OPERATION 4-66. The AH-64 Apache attack helicopter employs two modes of operation for the 30-millimeter AWS and 2.75-inch rocket systems: normal mode and fixed mode. Normal mode is the recommended mode to use for engaging targets. In either mode, the Apache fire-control system automatically compensates for various aspects of ballistics, target and ownship movement, lead compensation, atmospheric effects, and aircraft-unique corrections to derive the azimuth and elevation pointing angles for the AWS turret and the pylon command/steering cues for the rocket system. Aircraft corrections include Boresight. Parallax. Fuselage bending. Turret bending. Data latency. Rate compensation. Normal Mode 4-67. When normal mode is selected, the AWS gun turret will be commanded to slew to desired azimuth and elevation positions based on the computed fire-control/ballistics solution. Likewise, when the rocket system is the selected weapon, the pylons will articulate within the +4- to 15-degree elevation limits with steering cues/rocket reticle provided to the crew for azimuth alignment and elevation adjustment when the desired quadrant elevation angle is beyond the limits of the pylon. When normal mode is selected, the crew can make various sight/range source selections. Depending on the selection made, there are benefits and limitations when the crew uses the AWS or the rocket system. The paragraphs below address the sight/range

4-18

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 4

selections available, starting with the recommended acquisition/range source to achieve the most accurate weapon solution through the other acquisition sight and range sources with the limitations/degradations. Sight selection: TADS (IAT recommended over manual track). Range selection: Laser range, continuous (second detent). 4-68. The preferred engagement sight/range selection when the crew uses the 30-millimeter AWS or 2.75-inch rocket weapon system is with the TADS as the selected sight with IAT and the continuous laser range, normal mode operation. The system will automatically compute target states, ballistic correctors (projectile drop, drift, and TOF), based on the atmospheric conditions, lead-angle compensation, rate compensation, and aircraft-unique corrections. These corrections include boresight, turret bending, parallax error, and body bending. Upon initial engagement/target tracking, the target-state estimator will nominally take three seconds for the algorithms to settle to provide an accurate target-state output for ballistic computation and lead-angle compensation to accurately compute the gun-turret or pylon-position commands. The TADS/laser range-finder combination provides the most accurate solution because the target states (such as velocity) are accurately estimated for use in the prediction algorithm that computes the correct lead-angle command based on target movements over the computed projectile time of flight to the target. To demonstrate the importance of the target state estimation and prediction algorithm, assume that a target is moving 10 meters per second at a range of 2,000 meters. The nominal time of flight for a 30-millimeter round is 5.7 seconds to a range of 2,000 meters. Therefore, the target would have moved10 meters per second multiplied by 5.7 seconds equals 57 metersabout 1.6 degrees (27.9 milliradians). During normal mode of operation, the fire-control system will automatically adjust and correct for target and ownship motion, ballistic gravity drop, and drift compensation as a function of ambient atmospheric conditions, ownship correctors, rate compensation, and data latencies when the system computes and outputs the turret and pylon position and rate commands. Sight selection: FCR (AH-64D only). Range selection: FCR range. 4-69. On the Longbow Apache when the FCR is the selected sight, the FCR will send to the weapons processor (WP) next-to-shoot target NED coordinates and target velocities computed by the FCR. With the target velocities from the FCR, the weapons processor target-prediction algorithm will be employed with the ballistic computation to compute the lead angle similar to when the TADS/laser range is the selected sight/range source. The design of the FCR is to detect and classify targets to provide target handover data to an AGM-114L Hellfire missile. There are some inherent inaccuracies in the FCR range, target-velocity estimation (FCR target velocity data provided as a function of scan-to-scan correlation), and bearing when used for 30-millimeter AWS and rocket engagements. Sight selection: IHADSS. Range selection: Multiple (default, auto, navigation, manual, FCR, and laser).

4-19

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

4-70. When the IHADSS is the selected sight for 30-millimeter AWS or 2.75-inch rocket engagements, the weapon-pointing performance will be degraded because of the inherent inaccuracies of the IHADSS line-of-sight pointing angles and not having a continuous target range source or accurate target range, which is essential to compute an accurate fire-control solution. With the IHADSS as the selected sight, the fire-control system software does not execute the target-state estimator algorithm to produce estimated target velocities; therefore, no lead-angle compensation is computed by the prediction algorithms. This is critical if the ownship or target is moving. The IHADSS allows the crew to rapidly engage a target using the IHADSS sight because the gun-turret or rocket-pylon articulation/steering cues are a function of the IHADSS LOS and target range selected/inputted with ballistic correctors and aircraft-unique compensation computed to derive the gun-turret and rocket-pylon drive commands. Fixed Mode 4-71. Fixed mode is a selectable mode by the crew for the AWS gun. In this mode, the AWS turret will be placed in a fixed position of 0-degree azimuth and +6 degrees elevation. When fixed mode is selected, the same fire-control algorithms are executed as in the normal mode of operation with the differences being that a fixed-mode reticle will be displayed and positioned to provide steering cues to the pilot based on the fire-control system output. During this mode, the pilot has to maintain the reticle on the target. Not maintaining the fixed-mode reticle on the target will degrade weapon performance. The degradation is due to not having the aircraft properly positioned to achieve the correct weapon pointing angle to accurately engage the target. 4-72. Normal mode is the recommended mode of operation for the AWS and rocket to reduce the pilot/CPG work load and error induced by having to maintain the fixed-mode reticle on the target during an engagement with the ownship or target maneuvering. Normal mode allows independent pointing of the sight (LOS) and WAS turret without the pilots having to maintain the fixed-mode reticle on the target, therefore increasing accuracy performance.

4-20

Chapter 5

Munitions for Helicopter Weapon Systems

This chapter covers training munitions that are available through the logistical system. A particular theater of operations may not have combat or service munitions. The theater command or, in some cases, a specific geographical area may require different types of munitions/different packaging configurations. Some Department of Defense ammunition codes are listed with the munitions that are described. Additional identification codes may be necessary to distinguish the type of munitions, series, warhead and fuze combinations, grouping sequence, packaging, package quantity, and availability. Any munitions that cannot be positively identified will not be loaded onto an aircraft, into a weapon, or into the feed system. All munitions must be identified at the ammunition supply or transfer point before receipt and distribution to the unit.

SECTION I LINKED AMMUNITION TYPES OF 7.62-MILLIMETER AMMUNITION FOR THE M60/M60D/M240 MACHINE GUN
CHARACTERISTICS OF 7.62-MILLIMETER AMMUNITION 5-1. The 7.62-millimeter ammunition is percussion primed; chamber pressure is 50,000 pounds per square inch for both the ball and the tracer. Projectile weight varies from 142 grains (.32 ounce) for the tracer to 150 grains (.34 ounce) for the ball. Muzzle velocity averages 2,750 feet per second. Figure 5-1 shows all 7.62-millimeter service and training ammunition described below. Ball (M80 or M59) 5-2. The M80 or M59 ball is used against personnel and unarmored targets. Tracer (M62) 5-3. The M62 tracer permits observation of the trajectory of the projectile to the point of tracer burnout or to the point of impact. It is also used for incendiary effect and signaling. Tracer burnout occurs at about 900 to 950 meters. Armor Piercing (M61) 5-4. The M61 armor-piercing projectile is used against light armor, concrete shelters, and similar bullet-resistant targets. It is not intended for use in a training environment.

5-1

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Frangible Ball (M160) 5-5. The M160 frangible ball can be used during initial training on the M60 machine gun. It can be fired on indoor ranges if the range is ventilated to prevent buildup of toxic bullet dust. Blank (M82) 5-6. The M82 blank is used for training exercises in weapons equipped with blank firing adapters. Dummy (M172) 5-7. The M172 dummy is used for weapon-loading practice and for testing the weapon mechanism.

Figure 5-1. Types of 7.62-Millimeter Munitions

5-2

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

DODACS FOR 7.62-MILLIMETER AMMUNITION 5-8. The list below gives DODACs of linked ammunition for the M60 and M60D machine guns. TM 43-0001-27 lists only one type of metallic link (M13) for all 7.62-millimeter linked ammunition. 1305-A143M80 ball, 100 per linked belt. 1305-A146M62 tracer, 100 per linked belt. 1305-A131M80 ball and M62 tracer (four-to-one mix), 100 per linked belt. 1305-A147M160 ball, frangible, 100 per linked belt. 1305-A159M172 dummy, 100 per linked belt. 1305-A111M82 blank, 100 per linked belt.

TYPES OF .50-CALIBER AMMUNITION FOR THE OH-58D KIOWA WARRIOR

CHARACTERISTICS OF .50-CALIBER AMMUNITION 5-9. The .50-caliber ammunition is percussion primed; chamber pressure is 52,000 pounds per square inch for the tracer and 59,000 pounds per square inch for armor-piercing ammunition. Projectile weight varies from 619 grains (1.36 ounces) for the AP to 662 grains (1.45 ounces) for the ball. Muzzle velocities vary from 2,700 feet per second for the M1 tracer to 3,400 feet per second for the M23 incendiary. Neither armor-piercing nor incendiary ammunition is intended for training environment use. Table 5-1 shows the approximate time of flight and approximate ballistic drop with the M33 ball. Figure 5-2 shows .50-caliber service and training ammunition described below. Table 5-2 shows the hull and turret thickness of selected vehicles. Table 5-1. M33 Projectile Ballistic Data (Approximate Values) RANGE TO TARGET (METERS) 1,000 1,500 2,000 TIME OF FLIGHT (SECONDS) 1.5 2.7 4.3 BALLISTIC DROP (MILS) 9 18 33

Ball (M2 and M33) 5-10. The M2 ball and the M33 ball are used against personnel and unarmored targets. Muzzle velocity of the M33 is about 2,910 feet per second; the muzzle velocity of the M2 is 2,810 feet per second.

5-3

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Tracer (M1, M10, and M17) 5-11. The M1, M10, and M17 tracers permit visible observation of the in-flight path or trajectory to the point of impact. The M1 is limited to training use in CONUS. The M10 exhibits a trace from about 100 meters from the muzzle to about 1,600 meters from the muzzle. Armor Piercing (M2) 5-12. M2 armor-piercing ammunition is used against lightly armored or unarmored targets, concrete shelters, and similar bullet-resistant targets. Incendiary (M1 and M23) 5-13. Impact with a hardened or armored target will cause incendiary composition to burst into flame and ignite flammable material. The incendiary charge of the M1 is 34 grains; the incendiary charge of the M23 is 90 grains. Armor-Piercing Incendiary (M8) 5-14. M8 armor-piercing incendiary ammunition combines the function of the AP and incendiary bullet. The incendiary charge of the M8 is 15 grains. Armor-Piercing Incendiary Tracer (M20) 5-15. The M20 combines the functions of the AP and the incendiary and adds a tracer element. The incendiary charge is 27 grains. Dummy (M2) 5-16. The M2 dummy is used to practice loading. It is also used to test the ammunition of the weapon-feed system and mechanical function. Blank (M1 and M1A1) 5-17. The M1 and M1A1 blanks simulate firing in training exercises. The M1A1 is used with the M2 machine gun and the M19 blank firing adapter. Target Practice Ball (M858) and Plastic Tracer (M860) 5-18. The M858 ball and tracer are intended for scaled range training with the M2 machine gun. The maximum range of this ammunition is 700 meters. The tracer round provides trace from 20 to 150 meters. This target-practice ball and tracer round is constructed of molded, high-density polyethylene plastic.

5-4

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

Figure 5-2. Types of .50-Caliber Munitions DODACS FOR .50-CALIBER AMMUNITION FOR THE M2 MACHINE GUN 5-19. DODACs for linked .50-caliber ammunition for the M2 machine gun are as follows (some may be discontinued/there may be a newer series of ammunition packaging applications): 1305-A555M33 ball, 100 per linked belt. 1305-A572M17 tracer, 100 per linked belt. 1305-A557M33 ball/M17 tracer (four-to-one mix), 100 per linked belt. 1305-A576M8 API/M20API-T (four-to-one mix), 100 per linked belt. 1305-A543M20 AP-I-T, 100/linked belt. 1305-A598M1A1 blank, 100/linked belt. 1305-A602M858 TP/M860 TP-T (four-to-one mix), 100 per linked belt. Note: Only M2/M9 closed-loop links are used with the M2 machine gun.

5-5

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Table 5-2. Hull and Turret Thickness of Selected Vehicles

VEHICLE BTR-70 BRDM-2 BMP BMD ZSU 23-4

THICKNESS OF HULL .40 inch .56 inch .76 inch .60 inch .37 inch 10 millimeters 14 millimeters 19 millimeters 15 millimeters 9 millimeters

THICKNESS OF TURRET .28 inch .28 inch .92 inch 1.0 inch .35 inch 7 millimeters 7 millimeters 23 millimeters 25 millimeters 9 millimeters

TYPES OF 30-MILLIMETER AMMUNITION FOR THE AH-64 M230 CANNON

5-20. The 30-millimeter ammunition for the M230 cannon is electrically primed; chamber pressure has been measured at 40,600 to 44,950 pounds per square inch. Muzzle velocity is 2,640 feet per second for both the TP and HEDP. Table 5-3 shows the approximate times of flight and approximate ballistic drop for the 30-millimeter projectile. The information below covers types of 30-millimenter munitions available. Figure 5-3 shows these types of ammunition. TARGET-PRACTICE M788 PROJECTILE 5-21. The M788 TP is an inert projectile without a fuze. It is used for gunnery training instead of service ammunition. Its three-piece assembly consists of a steel body with a cavity, a rotating band, and an aluminum nose. The cartridge case is aluminum. This round serves no other purpose than target impact or penetration. HIGH-EXPLOSIVE, DUAL-PURPOSE M789 PROJECTILE 5-22. The M789 HEDP is an antimateriel and antipersonnel round. The projectile body is steel. It is loaded with a 340-grain (.76-ounce) explosive charge and a spin-compensated, shaped-charge liner that has a PD (M759) fuze. The cartridge case is aluminum. The fuze arms while the projectile is in flight and initiates the projectiles explosive filler upon impact. The shaped-charge liner collapses with detonation that creates an armor-piercing jet. Fragmentation of the projectile body also occurs that can produce antipersonnel effects within a 4-meter radius. Estimated penetration performance was interpolated from a graph contained in a gun-system effectiveness report. This report reflected penetration of more than 2 inches (50 millimeters) RHA at 2,500 meters.

5-6

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

DUMMY (M848) 5-23. The M848 dummy is used for function checks of the weapon mechanism. It also is used to test linking and delinking operations. It is an inert cartridge with an anodized aluminum case and a modified TP projectile. A threaded steel bolt on the M848 replaces the primer and the propellant to maintain the same weight as the TP round. Table 5-3. Approximate Time of Flight and Approximate Ballistic Drop for 30-Millimeter Ammunition (M789 Fired From Hover) RANGE TO TARGET (METERS) 1,000 1,500 2,000 2,500 3,000 TIME OF FLIGHT (SECONDS) 2 3.7 5.8 8.6 12.2 BALLISTIC DROP (MILS) 15 32 60 100 160

Figure 5-3. Types of 30-Millimeter Munitions

5-7

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

DODACS FOR 30-MILLIMETER AMMUNITION FOR THE M230 CANNON 5-24. The following are the DODACs for linked 30-millimeter ammunition for the M230 cannon: 1305-B120M788 TP, 72 rounds linked. 1305-B118M788 TP, 11-round carton pack. 1305-B130M789 HEDP, 72 rounds linked. 1305-B129M789 HEDP, 11-round carton pack. 1305-B134M848 dummy, 72 rounds linked. 1305-B133M848 dummy, 11-round carton pack.

SECTION II ROCKETS 2.75-INCH ROCKETS

5-25. Hydra 70 is the name associated with the family of 2.75-inch (70-millimeter) rockets. Hydra 70 refers to the Mark 66 rocket motor with any warhead/fuze combination. The MK 66 rocket motor provides a common 2.75-inch rocket for helicopters and high-performance aircraft. The MK 66 Mod 1 can be inadvertently ignited by electromagnetic radiation, especially by radio frequencies found aboard Navy ships. Both the Mod 2 and Mod 3 have hazards of electromagnetic radiation to ordnance filters. The Mod 1 and Mod 3 are the standard motor for the Army. The Mod 4 is the standard motor for all services. Mod 4 motors are similar in appearance to Mod 3 motors. Figure 5-4 shows MK 66 rocket motors. Table 5-4 shows rocket-motor comparison data extracted from TM 43-0001-30. 5-26. M260 and M261 launchers are required to fire the MK 66 rocket. They have reduced system weight and provide remote-set fuze interface capabilities. The M158A1 and M200 launchers are not compatible with the MK 66 rocket motor.

5-8

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

Figure 5-4. MK 66 Rocket Motors

Table 5-4. Rocket-Motor Data

CHARACTERISTIC
Length without warhead Weight before firing Motor burn time (77F) Average thrust Average spin rate Motor burn out Velocity at motor burnout Maximum range at QE 42 degrees (MPSM warhead ground launch)

MK 66
41.7 inches 13.6 pounds 1.05-1.1 seconds 1,3001,370 pounds 9-10 RPS 1,280 feet (397 meters) 2,425 FPS 8,700 meters

5-9

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

ROCKET WARHEADS (TACTICAL AND TRAINING)

M151 HIGH-EXPLOSIVE WARHEAD 5-27. The M151 HE is an antipersonnel, antimateriel warhead. It is traditionally referred to as the 10 pounder. The bursting radius is 10 meters; however, high-velocity fragments can produce a lethality radius of more than 50 meters. The nose section is constructed of malleable cast iron that is threaded to receive the fuze. The base section is constructed of steel or cast iron and is threaded so that it can be attached to the rocket motor. The base section and the nose section are welded (brazed) together. Total weight of the loaded, unfuzed warhead is 8.7 pounds, of which 2.3 pounds are composition B4. The M151 can be used with M423, M429, and M433 fuzes. The body of the warhead is olive drab with a yellow band and yellow or black markings. M274 SMOKE SIGNATURE (TRAINING) ROCKET 5-28. This training rocket provides a ballistic match for the M151 HE warhead. The casing is a modified WTU-1/B with vent holes or blowout plugs. A modified M423 fuze mechanism is integral to the warhead. A cylindrical cartridge assembly is in the forward section of the casing; it contains about 2 ounces of potassium perchlorate and aluminum powder that provide a flash, bang, and smoke signature. The M274 weighs 9.3 pounds. The body of the warhead is blue with a brown band and white markings. M261 HIGH-EXPLOSIVE MULTIPURPOSE SUBMUNITION 5-29. The MPSM warhead provides improved lethality against light armor, wheeled vehicles, materiel, and personnel. It has a plastic nose-cone assembly, an aluminum warhead case, an integral fuze, an expulsion charge, and nine M73 submunitions. The primary warhead fuze, M439, is remotely set with the ARCS, MFD, or RMS to provide range settings (time of flight) from 500 meters to about 7,000 meters. The body of the warhead is olive drab with a yellow band and yellow markings. 5-30. Initial forward motion of the rocket begins the fuze timing. The expulsion charge is initiated at a point before and above the target, about 150 meters, depending on the launch angle. The submunitions are separated by ejection; arming occurs when the ram air decelerator deploys. The RAD virtually stops forward velocity and stabilizes the descent of the submunition. An M230 omnidirectional fuze with an M55 detonator is used on each submunition and functions, regardless of the impact angle. 5-31. Each submunition has a steel body that has a 3.2-ounce shaped charge of composition B4 for armor penetration. The submunition is internally scored to optimize fragments against personnel and materiel. Upon detonation, the shaped charge penetrates in line with its axis and the submunition body explodes into high-velocity fragments (about 195 at 10 grains each, up to 5,000 feet per second) to defeat soft targets. The fuzed weight of the M261 is 13.6 pounds.

5-10

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

Approximate Target-Area Coverage 5-32. Figure 5-5 shows the approximate target-area coverage of one M261 warhead. At shorter ranges, the RAD takes longer to overcome momentum, increasing dispersion. As range increases, the rocket loses momentum, increasing the effectiveness of the RAD. This increased effectiveness reduces submunition drift and ground dispersion. Trees, rocks, and other natural or man-made structures within the target area may cause the submunition to detonate or land in a dispersion pattern other than the one shown in Figure 5-5. Probability-of-Impact Angle 5-33. Aerodynamic forces affecting submunitions during vertical descent may prevent them from landing upright (0 degrees off center). A submunition will land 5 degrees off center 66 percent of the time; a submunition will land 30 degrees off center 33 percent of the time. MPSM Lethality Potential 5-34. Each M73 HE submunition has a shaped charge that can penetrate more than 4 inches of armor. A submunition that lands 5 degrees off center has a 90-percent probability of producing casualties against prone, exposed personnel, within a 20-meter radius. A submunition landing 30 degrees off center has a 90 percent probability of producing casualties within a 5-meter radius.

Figure 5-5. Approximate Target Coverage of One M261 Warhead

5-11

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

M267 MPSM SMOKE SIGNATURE (TRAINING) WARHEAD 5-35. The M267 MPSM training warhead operationally, physically, and ballistically matches the M261. Three M75 practice submunitions and six inert submunition load simulators take the place of the nine HE submunitions in the M261 warhead. Each practice submunition contains about 1 ounce of pyrotechnic powder. An M231 fuze with an M55 detonator is used with practice submunitions. The body of the warhead is blue with a brown band and white markings. M257 ILLUMINATION WARHEAD 5-36. The M257 illumination warhead provides one-million candlepower for 100 seconds or more. It can illuminate an area of more than 1 square kilometer at optimum height. A deployed main parachute descent is about 15 feet per second. An M442 integral fuze provides a standoff range of about 3,000 meters with the MK 40 motor and about 3,500 meters with the MK 66 motor. The M257 weighs 10.8 pounds, of which 5.4 pounds are magnesium sodium nitrate. The body of the warhead is olive drab with white markings. M229 HIGH-EXPLOSIVE WARHEAD 5-37. The M229 HE warhead, an elongated version of the M151, is commonly called the 17 pounder. The M229 filler consists of 4.8 pounds of composition B4; it has the same fuzes as the M151. Its unfuzed weight is 16.4 pounds. The body of the warhead is olive drab with yellow markings. M156 WHITE-PHOSPHOROUS (SMOKE) WARHEAD 5-38. The M156 is primarily used for target marking and incendiary purposes. It ballistically matches the M151; it is of similar construction. Filler for the M156 is 2.2 pounds of white phosphorous with a .12-pound bursting charge of composition B. The fuzed warhead weighs about 9.7 pounds. The M156 uses M423 and M429 fuzes. The M156 is no longer in production; it may still be in the inventory, however. The body of the warhead is light green with a yellow band and red markings. M264 RED-PHOSPHOROUS (SMOKE) WARHEAD 5-39. The M264 smoke-screen warhead contains 72 red-phosphorous wedges that are air-burst ejected over the intended target area. These wedges immediately begin producing a nontoxic, high-density, rapidly spreading, yet persistent smoke screen. The smoke generated by the 72 red-phosphorous wedges blocks the entire visual spectrum as well as much of the infrared spectrum. The smoke generated by 14 M264 rockets will obscure a 300- to 400-meter front, in less than 60 seconds for five minutes, in support of ground forces. The warhead weighs 8.5 pounds, of which about 5.2 pounds are red-phosphorous wedges. The warhead uses an M439 remote-set electromechanical fuze that allows engagements between 1,000 and 6,000 meters. The body of the warhead is light green with a brown band and black markings.

5-12

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

M247 HIGH-EXPLOSIVE WARHEAD 5-40. The M247 is no longer in production; however, some of these warheads may still be in war-reserve stocks. With a shape charge for an antiarmor capability, the M247 employs a cone-shaped charge like that of the M72 LAW. The point-initiated detonating fuze (M438) is an integral part of the warhead. The M247 weighs 8.8 pounds, of which 2.0 pounds are composition B. The body of the warhead is black with yellow markings. M255A1 FLECHETTE WARHEAD 5-41. The M255A1 flechette warhead contains 1,179 60-grain hardened steel flechettes. It is used with the M439 fuze. It has possible air-to-air as well as air-to-ground application. Figure 5-6 shows all current production warheads. The body of the warhead is olive drab with a band of white diamonds and white markings. M278 IR ILLUMINATION WARHEAD 5-42. This warhead was designed for battlefield target illumination using night-vision goggles. The flare warhead is assembled to the MK 66 rocket motor in the field. The flare and rocket can be launched from either fixed-wing or rotary-wing aircraft. The M278 provides an average near-IR light output of 222 watts/steradian and less than 1,000 candlepower of visible light. The IR flare will provide IR light for three minutes. Time to candle ignition from launch is 13.5 seconds. The body of the warhead is black with white markings.

Figure 5-6. Types of 70-Millimeter Warheads in Production

5-13

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

FUZES
M423 POINT-DETONATING FUZE 5-43. The M423 PD is an oblique, sensitive, point-detonating, super-quick fuze used as a common component with the M151. The safety and arming device forward of the booster housing (explosive charge) contains an unbalanced rotor. Upon acceleration of the rocket at firing, a weight setback occurs in the unbalanced rotor assembly that houses the primer and detonator. This setback places the fuze into an armed condition when the rocket has traveled about 52 to 110 meters from the launcher. M433 RESISTANCE-CAPACITANCE FUZE 5-44. The M433 RC is a nose-mounted, multioption, time-delay fuze with selectable functioning modes. A super-quick setting is used for open terrain; a forest-penetration mode permits a selectable time-delay range (10 to 45 meters in 5-meter increments) set for the height of the forest canopy. After first contact with the forest canopy, a delay timer is activated to provide warhead functioning. The bunker- or building-penetration mode provides up to 10 feet of penetration before detonation. A point-mounted probe switch that is initiated by target contact activates the target-penetration RC timer. An umbilical assembly is positioned on the nose of the fuze for interface through the launcher and RMS or ARCS and the aircraft. When the trigger is pulled, aircraft voltage is supplied to the fuze and the time delay is initiated as selected by the pilot. M439 RESISTANCE-CAPACITANCE FUZE 5-45. The M439 RC is a base-mounted, electronic-variable, time-delay fuze with an RC delay circuit. Designed for cargo and flechette warheads, the M439 allows the pilot to remotely set the fuze for airburst functioning at the desired range from 500 to 7,200 meters. The RMS, ARCS, or MFD charges a fuze capacitor through an umbilical assembly. The fuze has no internal battery; the aircraft, through the remote-set fuze subsystem, supplies the required voltage. When the rocket is fired and normal acceleration occurs, the fuze is armed and timing starts. If the fuze is set but the rocket motor fails to fire, the rocket should not be loaded into another tube and fired. When the fuze is set a second time, the function time will increase for shorter ranges and decrease for longer ranges. The fuze will maintain range input for 10 days. It should not be used for accurate range measurement until 10 days have elapsed. The detonator is initiated electrically, depending on the range setting (time of flight), and ignites the expelling charge. Figure 5-7 shows production fuzes. M422/M446 FUZES 5-46. The M442 and M446 fuzes are base-mounted, airburst, motor-burnout delayed fuzes. They are integral fuzes used with the M257/M278 illumination and M259 white-phosphorus smoke rockets, respectively.

5-14

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

Figure 5-7. Types of 70-Millimeter Fuzes in Production DODICS FOR ROCKETS 5-47. Table 5-5 lists the older DODICs for rockets (complete round with MK 66 motors) that are in the inventory. Table 5-6 lists the newer DODICs for all available warhead/motor combinations. Also, note that the users are indicated.

5-15

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Table 5-5. DODIC/NSN Cross Reference for Selected Hydra-70 2.75-Inch Rockets (Older NSNs) DODIC H154 H165 H181 H182 H183 H184 H462 H463 H464 H582 H583 H642 H973 H972 H974 H975 H163 H164 NSN 1340-01-371-8611 1340-01-269-1447 1340-01-249-7721 1340-01-249-7720 1340-01-268-7175 1340-01-289-4719 1340-01-309-5799 1340-01-108-8849 1340-01-108-8850 1340-01-269-9122 1340-01-269-9123 1340-01-309-8300 1340-01-238-2068 1340-01-238-2067 1340-01-268-7174 1340-01-269-1446 1340-01-108-8851 1340-01-110-2672 CONFIGURATION M278/M442/MK 66 Mod 2 M261/M439/MK 66 Mod 3 M257/M442/MK 66 Mod 1 M257/M442/MK 66 Mod 2 M257/M442/MK 66 Mod 3 M264/M439/MK 66 Mod 3 M255/M439/MK 66 Mod 3 M267/M439/MK 66 Mod 1 M261/M439/MK 66 Mod 1 M151/M433/MK 66 Mod 3 M151/M423/MK 66 Mod 3 M229/M423/MK 66 Mod 2 M274/ N/A /MK 66 Mod 2 M274/ N/A /MK 66 Mod 1 M267/M439/MK 66 Mod 3 M274/ N/A /MK 66 Mod 3 M151/M423/MK 66 Mod 1 M151/M433/MK 66 Mod 1 QUANTITY 3 4 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

5-16

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

Table 5-6. DODIC/NSN Cross Reference for All Hydra-70 2.75-Inch RocketsNewer NSNs DODIC H583 NSN CONFIGURATION PACK Fastpack Fastpack Wood Wood Fastpack Fastpack Wood Wood Fastpack Fastpack Wood Wood QTY 48 48 4 4 48 48 4 4 48 48 4 4 48 48 4 4 3 3 48 48 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 USER PALLET PACK Army Army Army Army Army Army Army Army Army Army Army Army Army Army Army Army Army Army Army Army SOF SOF SOF SOF SOF SOF SOF SOF 48 per pallet 48 per pallet 60 per pallet 60 per pallet 48 per pallet 48 per pallet 60 per pallet 60 per pallet 48 per pallet 48 per pallet 60 per pallet 60 per pallet 48 per pallet 48 per pallet 60 per pallet 60 per pallet 45 per pallet 45 per pallet 48 per pallet 48 per pallet 45 per pallet 45 per pallet 60 per pallet 60 per pallet 60 per pallet 60 per pallet 60 per pallet 60 per pallet

1340-01-379-6277 M151 HE/M423 PD Mod 3

HA12 1340-01-446-7680 M151 HE/M423 PD Mod 4 H583 H975 1340-01-269-9123 M151 HE/M423 PD Mod 3 1340-01-379-7118 M274 Smoke Sig Prac Mod 3

HA12 1340-01-448-8889 M151 HE/M423 PD Mod 4 HA13 1340-01-446-4094 M274 Smoke Sig Prac Mod 4 H975 H165 1340-01-269-1446 M274 Smoke Sig Prac Mod 3 1340-01-379-7814 M261 MPSM HE/M439 Mod 3

HA13 1340-01-449-1240 M274 Smoke Sig Prac Mod 4 HA14 1340-01-446-4095 M261 MPSM HE/M439 Mod 4 H165 H974 1340-01-269-1447 M261 MPSM HE/M439 Mod 3

HA14 1340-01-448-8891 M261 MPSM HE/M439 Mod 4

1340-01-379-7889 M267 MPSM Prac/M439 Mod 3 Fastpack

HA17 1340-01-448-7506 M267 MPSM Prac/M439 Mod 4 Fastpack H974 1340-01-268-7174 M267 MPSM Prac/M439 Mod 3 Wood Wood Wood Wood Fastpack Fastpack Wood Wood Wood Wood Wood Wood Wood Wood HA17 1340-01-448-7507 M267 MPSM Prac/M439 Mod 4 H183 H184 1340-01-268-7175 M257 ILL Flare/M442 Mod 3 1340-01-286-4719 M264 RP Smoke/M439 Mod 3

HA18 1340-01-448-8890 M257 ILL Flare/M442 Mod 4 HA15 1340-01-446-4097 M264 RP Smoke/M439 Mod 4 H154 H163 H583 H642 1340-01-371-8611 M278 IR Flare/M442 Mod 2 1340-01-108-8851 M151 HE/M423 PD Mod 1 1340-01-269-9123 M151 HE/M423 PD Mod 3 1340-01-309-8300 M229 HE/M423 PD Mod 2

HA10 1340-01-446-2905 M278 IR Flare/M442 Mod 4

HA09 1340-01-446-2902 M229 HE/M423 PD Mod 4 H462 1340-01-309-5799 M255A1 Flechette/M439 Mod 2

HA11 1340-01-446-2901 M255A1 Flechette/M439 Mod 4

5-17

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Table 5-6. DODIC Cross Reference for All Hydra-70 2.75-Inch RocketsNewer Items (Concluded) DODIC
H663 H812 HA06 HA03 HA07 H812 H872 HA06 J147 HA07 HA12 HA12 HA13 HA13 HA14 HA14 HA17 HA17 HA18 HA15 HA09 HA10 HA11 HA03 HA06 HA07 HA06 HA07

NSN
1340-01-014-5421 1340-01-338-6482 1340-01-412-9346 1340-01-416-1878 1340-01-424-5819 1340-01-456-0978 1340-01-309-5799 1340-01-443-3583 1340-01-154-1679 1340-01-446-4096 1340-01-446-7680 1340-01-448-8889 1340-01-446-4094 1340-01-449-1240 1340-01-446-4095 1340-01-448-8891 1340-01-448-7506 1340-01-448-7507 1340-01-448-8890 1340-01-446-4097 1340-01-446-2902 1340-01-446-2905 1340-01-446-2901 1340-01-416-1878 1340-01-412-9346 1340-01-424-5819 1340-01-443-3583 1340-01-446-4096

CONFIGURATION
WTU-1/B M257 ILL Flare/M442 M278 IR Flare/M442 Mod 2 Mod 4 M257 ILL Flare/M442 M274 Smoke Sig Prac M278 IR Flare/M442 Mod 2 Mod 4 M151 HE/M423 PD Mod 4 M151 HE/M423 PD Mod 4 M274 Sig Prac Smoke Mod 4 M274 Sig Prac Smoke Mod 4 M261 MPSM HE/M439 Mod 4 M261 MPSM HE/M439 Mod 4 M267 MPSM Prac/M439 Mod 4 M267 MPSM Prac/M439 Mod 4 M257 ILL Flare/M442 Mod 4 M264 RP Smoke/M439 Mod 4 M229 HE/M423 PD Mod 4 M278 IR Flare/M442 Mod 4 M255A1 Flechette/M439 Mod 4 Mod 4 M278 IR Flare/M442 Mod 4 M278 IR Flare/M442 Mod 4

PACK
Wood Metal Metal Metal Metal Wood Wood Wood Wood Wood Fastpack Wood Fastpack Wood Fastpack Wood Fastpack Wood Wood Fastpack Wood Wood Wood Metal Metal Metal Wood Wood

QTY
4 4 4 4 4 6 -6 6 6 48 4 48 4 48 4 48 4 3 48 4 3 4 4 4 4 6 6

USER
Navy Navy Navy Navy Navy Air Force Air Force Air Force Air Force Air Force Army Army Army Army Army Army Army Army Army Army SOF SOF SOF Navy Navy Navy Air Force Air Force

PALLET PACK
192 per pallet 80 per pallet 80 per pallet 80 per pallet 80 per pallet 90 per pallet 120 per pallet 90 per pallet 90 per pallet 90 per pallet 48 per pallet 60 per pallet 48 per pallet 60 per pallet 48 per pallet 60 per pallet 48 per pallet 60 per pallet 45 per pallet 48 per pallet 60 per pallet 45 per pallet 60 per pallet 60 per pallet 60 per pallet 60 per pallet 90 per pallet 90 per pallet

5-18

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

SECTION III MISSILES MISSILE CONFIGURATIONS

5-48. The Hellfire surface-attack guided missile is available in three configurations: dummy, training, and tactical. The two basic tactical missile types are semiactive laser and radar frequency. AGM-114A through C and F missiles are SAL 1; the AGM-114K missile is designated SAL 2. All Hellfire missiles are 7 inches in diameter and have a wingspan of 12.9 inches. The missile, depending on the model, weighs from 100 to 108 pounds with an overall length of from 64 to 71 inches. The following are the color codes and data markings for the Hellfire missile: The basic color of missile is black. Data markings are olive drab. Markings on the aft end are four brown 3-inch squares, 90 degrees apart (brown means solid propellant). Markings on the end of the warhead are four yellow 3-inch squares, 90 degrees apart (yellow means HE). The basic color of the container is olive drab. DUMMY MISSILES 5-49. The M34 dummy missile has the same physical characteristics as the tactical missile. It is used to train armament personnel in loading and unloading and to simulate aircraft missile loads for training flights. TRAINING MISSILES 5-50. The M36 training missile is used for captive flight training. It cannot be launched. It has an operational laser seeker that can search for and lock on laser energy. The M36 has the same physical characteristics as the tactical missile; however, it contains no explosives. It requires the same handling as a live tactical missile. Note: If a training missile is on a launcher rail, live missiles cannot be launched. TACTICAL MISSILES 5-51. The AGM-114A tactical missile, DODIC number PA79 and NSN 1410-01-126-4662, is the originally designed Hellfire missile. It is no longer in production. AGM-114As in the inventory are released for live-fire training when AGM-114Cs replace them. 5-52. The AGM-114B, DODIC number PC91 and NSN 1410-01-146-9668, is primarily designed for Navy use. It can be fired from Army aircraft, however. This missile has an additional electronic arm/safety device, required for shipboard use. 5-53. The AGM-114C missile, DODIC number PD68 and NSN 1410-01-192-0293, has an improved semiactive laser seeker with an improved low-visibility capability. The AGM-114C has a low-smoke motor

5-19

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

and a lower trajectory than the 114A. Army missiles should be marked with either the A or C designation, just behind the seeker. 5-54. The AGM-114F missile, DODIC number PV29 and NSN 1410-01-332-2471, features two warheadsa seeker and an autopilot, similar to the C-model missile. The 114F can defeat vehicles equipped with reactive armor. 5-55. The AGM-114K missile, DODIC number PV30 and NSN 1410-01-381-0715, features dual warheads for defeating reactive armor, electro-optical countermeasure hardening, a semiactive laser seeker, and a programmable autopilot for trajectory shaping. The AGM-114K missile can operate with either pulsed-repetition frequency (PRF) or pulsed interval modulation (PIM) laser codes for those aircraft equipped with dual-code capability. 5-56. PIM is a laser-coding scheme (Table 5-7) that was developed as an alternate to the triservice and NATO standard PRF code to provide enhanced protection against specific active electro-optical countermeasure (EOCM) threats. An active EOCM is a CM device such as a laser that emits pulses to counter a laser-guided seeker. Pulse interval modulation is only available on the D-Model Longbow Apache aircraft, with use of the AGM 114-K model missile (Hellfire II). For maximum effectiveness, the PIM coding schemes must be judiciously used with the cockpit CCM on/off switch, as described in paragraph 5-60 and Table 5-8. The use of PIM with the CCM ON/OFF switch will greatly enhance the Hellfire II missiles effectiveness in an active countermeasure threat environment. In a benign environment, in which active CMs are known not to be present, the use of standard PRF codes should be maintained. In addition, in a battlefield environment containing smoke/vehicular dust, the PRF code mode provides better immunity to smoke, if no active EOCMs are present. 5-57. Unlike the PRF codes, which are composed of a periodic pulse train, with every interpulse period in the pulse train exactly equal, the PIM codes consist of a pseudorandom pulse train; the interpulse periods in the pulse train (that is, channel) are entirely random. The PIM channels are pseudorandom, instead of purely random, because the pulse train will repeat itself after a certain amount of time. In the case of the Hellfire II PIM channels, they will repeat after about 512 laser pulse intervals have passed. At the average laser pulse rate of 16 pulses per second in Band II, this corresponds to a repeat time of about 32 seconds. This PIM length was purposely chosen so that the code would not repeat itself during the maximum LOBL Hellfire II flight range. This random nature of the PIM channel thus makes it unlikely that threat forces using countermeasures would be able to predict the code that the missile is operating on during the flight. Thus, crews should use PIM to make it difficult for enemy forces to use countermeasures. 5-58. The AGM-114K missile uniquely uses the first digit 4 for the PIM codes. The table below shows the usage of all the first digit numbers in the octal switch setting.

5-20

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

Table 5-7. Laser Codes Laser Code 1XXX 2XXX 3XXX 4XXX Code Description TRISERVICE PRF AIR FORCE PIM NATO PIM AGM-114K PIM Laser Code 5XXX 6XXX 7XXX 8XXX Code Description FOR COPPERHEAD PIM OR BACK-UP AGM-114K PIM, USE 5, 6, 7, 8

5-59. To implement all 512 channels, that is, codes 4111 through 888 of a specific PIM series, four classified keywords must be loaded into the aircraft from the AMPS via the DTC. Once the aircraft recognizes that one or more of these keywords is on the DTC, the aircraft computer downloads the keywords to the Laser Electronic Unit (LEU) and the M299 launcher. The software algorithms for generating the specific desired PIM channelfor example, code 4288reside in the LEU and on the M299. Therefore, compatibility is ensured between the PIM codes activated on the TADS\PNVS and the code downloaded to the missile from the launcher. It is noted that the launcher only downloads one selected PIM channel, for example, 4288, to the missile, and one only. The whole family of PIM channels only resides on the launcher and in the LEU. The PIM data resides in volatile memory on the aircraft; thus, it is necessary to reload the PIM keywords into the aircraft via AMPS onto the data transfer cartridge before every mission. 5-60. The AH-64D Apache aircraft cockpit has a toggle switch on the panel marked CCM with a switch that can be toggled ON/OFF. This is the switch to be used with the missile and is not to be confused with the toggle switch for the LRF, which can be toggled between FIRST/LAST. Crews must ensure that the missile CCM switch is in the proper position while using either the PRF or the PIM codes. The proper position depends on the type of CM threats that exist in the target area or whether battlefield obscurants are present or whether battlefield conditions are benign; that is, no CM and no smoke. Table 5-8 shows the proper CCM switch position for both PRF and PIM codes and for specific battlefield environments and CM threats. Table 5-8. Missile CCM Switch Position (On/Off) CODE BENIGN (NO SMOKE, NO EOCM) PRF PIM PIM OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF SMOKE ACTIVE EOCM SMOKE AND ACTIVE EOCM MISSILES FAIL TO HIT TARGETS FOR ALL PREVIOUS SETTINGS

ON OFF ON

5-21

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

5-61. The AGM-114L missile, DODIC number PU55 and NSN 1410-01-399-7459, uses an active radar frequency signal to detect and track targets. It emits RF energy and homes in on the reflected RF energy. The AGM-114L is an active (emitting) missile. It is inertially guided and radar assisted. 5-62. The AGM-114M missile, DODIC number WF15 and NSN 1410-01-464-9031, has an HE fragmentary warhead. It is designed for Naval use. This Hellfire model flies the same profile as the AGM-114K. Its weight roughly equals that of the AGM-114F. The U.S. Navy is the only branch that has this model in its inventory. 5-63. For antiarmor roles, the AGM-114 missile has a conical shaped-charge warhead with a copper liner cone that forms the jet that provides armor penetration. This high-explosive, antitank warhead is effective against various types of armor including appliqu and reactive. Actual penetration performance is classified. It can also be employed against concrete bunkers and similar fortifications. The AGM-114F, 114K, and 114L use the same shaped-charge warhead as the 114C. In addition, they contain a small warhead, mounted forward of the main warhead, to enhance performance against reactive armor. 5-64. A single-stage, single-thrust, solid-propellant motor propels tactical missiles. When thrust exceeds 500 to 600 pounds, the missile leaves the rail. Based on a 10G-acceleration parameter, arming occurs between 150 to 300 meters after launch. Thrust duration is about two to three seconds. Maximum velocity of the missile is 950 miles per hour (475 meters per second, or Mach 1.4). Figure 5-9 shows the Hellfire missile models with the exception of the AGM-114M.

5-22

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

SAL 1

SAL 1

SAL 2

Figure 5-8. Hellfire Missile Models

SEMIACTIVE LASER HELLFIRE MISSILE PERFORMANCE CAPABILITIES

MAXIMUM STANDOFF RANGE 5-65. Maximum standoff range is a function of missile performance, launch platform altitude versus target altitude, visibility, and cloud cover. Figures 5-9 and 5-10 show the effects of cloud ceilings on maximum standoff ranges and the launch envelope for all lock-on before launch shots. Figures 5-11 and 5-12 show the effects of cloud ceilings on maximum standoff ranges and the launch envelope for lock-on after launch (LOAL-Direct). Figures 5-13 through 5-16 show the effects of cloud ceilings and the launch envelopes for LOAL-LO and LOAL-HI. Autonomous 5-66. The launching aircraft should designate the target when the aircraft can fire from a position close enough to the target to ensure accurate designation without extensive exposure of the launching aircraft to the enemy threat. On a clear day, the capability of the designator to maintain the total laser spot on the target limits target designation. Table 5-9 shows approximate time of flight in seconds for the Hellfire. Table 5-10 shows SAL Hellfire laser-designation times.

5-23

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Table 5-9. Hellfire Approximate Time of Flightin Seconds)

Range (km)

TEMPERATURE =25F (-32C)

3 7 11 16 20 27 35 44

TEMPERATURE = 70F (21C)

3 7 10 14 19 24 29 36

TEMPERATURE = 125F (52C)

3 6 10 13 17 22 27 33

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Table 5-10. SAL Hellfire Designation Times Range (km) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8*** Approx. Time of Flight From Launch Separation at 70F (21C)* Seconds 7 10 14 19 24 29 36 Laser Delay After Separation* (Seconds) ** 2-3 3-6 4-8 4-11 4-13 4-16 Steady on-Target Time Before Impact (Seconds) 6 6 6 6 6 7 8

*All times are from missile separation. Add an additional second for time from trigger pull. **Delay times of less than two seconds (three seconds from trigger pull) may allow the missile seeker
to lock onto backscatter near the aircraft! ***LOAL-LO and LOAL-HI only. 5-67. Under some atmospheric conditions and aircraft-to-target positions, the Hellfire motor exhaust may obscure the target when the missile flies through the TADS FOV. Using image auto track can cause the TADS to break lock and disrupt the missile flight. Rotating the aircraft just before launchat least three to five degrees in the direction of the missile to be firedprevents the missile from flying through the TADS FOV. If TADS break lock should occur, continue to manually track the target until accurate TADS IAT is reestablished. For a high Ph, the maximum effective autonomous engagement range is limited by the ability of the TADS to accurately maintain the laser spot on the target and the ability of the seeker to lock onto the reflected laser energy (Table 5-11).

5-24

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

Table 5-11. SAL Hellfire Maximum Autonomous Designation Range for High Probability of Hit SIGHT Day TV Day TV FLIR FLIR DVO TRACK MODE Autotrack Manual Autotrack Manual Manual MAXIMUM AUTONOMOUS DESIGNATION RANGE (KM) 6.0 4.0 3.5 3.0 3.0

Remote 5-68. Remote designation allows the launch aircraft to stand off at greater distances from the target. This standoff range can be out to the maximum missile effective-engagement range. Remote designation also allows the launch aircraft to be masked from the target using the LOAL-LO or LOALHI launch mode (Figures 5-13 through 5-16). Remote designation also allows a single aircraft to provide the weapons for several designators. Remote designators may include another aircraft, a ground or vehicle laser-locator designator, or one of the various designators of other services or foreign allies. Remote designators must be within their maximum designation range from the target, as determined by their laser-beam divergence and aiming errors (jitter and boresight). Range to target can vary from one type of designator to another.

5-25

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 5-9. Minimum Cloud CeilingLOBL

5-26

________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

LOBL remote maximum range = 7 km LOBL autonomous maximum range = 6 km (DTV IAT)

Figure 5-10. Launch EnvelopeLOBL

Figure 5-11. Minimum Clou d CeilingsLOAL-DIR

5-27

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) _____________________________________________________________________

Figure 5-12. Launch EnvelopeLOAL-DIR

5-28

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

Figure 5-13. Minimum Cloud CeilingsLOAL-LO

Figure 5-14. Launch EnvelopeLOAL-LO

5-29

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 5-15. Minimum Cloud Ceiling (C-Model and Later Missiles)LOAL-HI

Figure 5-16. Launch EnvelopeLOAL-HI

5-30

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

REMOTE DESIGNATOR LOCATION OFFSET 5-69. When the remote designator is located in an offset position in azimuth from the launch aircraft, the laser spot should be on a section of the target that is visible to the missile (Figure 5-17). The remote designator should not be displaced more than +60 degrees in azimuth from the launch aircraft to the target line.

Figure 5-17. Maximum Designator Offset Angle for SAL Hellfire REMOTE DESIGNATOR SAFETY ZONE 5-70. The crew of the designating aircraft should ensure that it is not inside the +30 degrees designator avoidance area (Figure 5-17). If the designating aircraft is unable to remain/designate outside of the avoidance area, crews must accurately compute and use a laser delay time. The difference between missile time of flight from the launching platforms position and missile time of flight from the designators position is the shortest laser delay time that can be used. The warning following this paragraph explains the guidelines to follow. See also Figure 5-18.

5-31

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

WARNING
When the designating aircraft cannot remain outside the +30-degree safety fanbecause of such conditions as constricting terrainthe designator must use a computed laser delay time. This laser delay time is the result of subtracting the missile time of flight (launching aircraft) from the missile time of flight (designating aircraft); for example If the time of flight for a missile from the launching aircraft equals 23 seconds and the time of flight for a missile from the designating aircraft equals 17 seconds, then the delay time that must be used equals 6 seconds23 seconds minus 17 seconds. The designator/designating aircraft must not delay less than 6 seconds, in this example. A lesser laser delay time could cause a remotely fired missile to impact the designator. Units must use careful engagement area planning in these cases.

MINIMUM ENGAGEMENT RANGE 5-71. Because of the trajectory shaping and seeker scan pattern of the SAL Hellfire missile during LOAL mode, the minimum engagement ranges need to be increased as the launch altitude increases above the target altitude. As launch altitude increases, the ability of the missile to see the target at shorter ranges decreases. The minimum LOAL engagement ranges shown in Table 5-12 are for launch altitudes of less than 50 feet above target altitude. Increase these minimum ranges by 0.5 kilometer for altitudes of from 50 to 400 feet and by 1.0 kilometer for altitudes 401 to 800 feet above the target. Minimum LOBL target engagement ranges are shown in Table 5-13. Table 5-14 shows maximum missile altitude.

5-32

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

About 2,800 meters

Degrees offset

Range in km

Example: GTL = 360 degrees at 5,000 meters. LTL/OTL = 330 degrees. Determine azimuth difference, in this case, 30 degrees. Enter chart at GTL range, then follow 30-degree line up to LTL degree offset to determine minimum designator range, in this case, about 2,800 meters. If the designator is outside 2,800 meters, it is outside the +30degree safety fan.

INSTRUCTIONS 1. Obtain the gun-target line (GTL) (launch aircraft/platform) heading and range to the target. 2. Determine the azimuth difference in degrees between the GTL and laser target line (LTL)/observer target line (OTL) (designating aircraft/platform). 3. Enter the graph on the left side at the GTL range, follow the heavy line to the azimuth difference degree line (as determined in step 2 above), and interpolate the minimum LTL/OTL range using the arced range lines. 4. Designating platform LTL/OTL range must exceed the minimum interpolated range to ensure that 30-degree safety parameters are met. See the warning on page 5-32 if the designating aircraft cannot remain outside the +30-degree safety fan.

Figure 5-18. Hellfire Remote-Engagement Safety Fan Chart

5-33

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Table 5-12. Minimum LOAL Target-Engagement Range

MINIMUM LOAL ENGAGEMENT RANGE (KM) LAUNCH ALTITUDE < 50' ABOVE TARGET ALTITUDE LOAL-DIR 2.0 2.5 1.9 2.0 2.0 2.5 1.5 1.7 LOAL-LO 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.5 3.5 2.0 2.5 LOAL-HI 3.5 4.5 3.5 4.5 3.5 4.5 3.5 3.5

MISSILE

AZIMUTH TARGET OFFSET (degrees) 0 7.5 0 7.5 0 7.5 0 7.5

AGM-114A AGM-114C AGM-114F AGM-114K

50'-400'increase minimum range by 0.5 km. 401'-800'increase minimum range by 1.0 km.

Table 5-13. Minimum LOBL Target Engagement Range

MINIMUM RANGE (KM) 0 Target Offset in Azimuth 0.8 0.8 1.4 0.5 MINIMUM RANGE (KM) 20 Target Offset in Azimuth 1.2 1.2 1.5 0.7

MISSILE AGM-114A AGM-114C AGM-114F AGM-114K

Table 5-14. Maximum Missile Altitude

MODE
TARGET RANGE (KM) LASER DELAY (SEC) 3 0

LOBL
5 0 7 0

LOAL-DIR
7 4 12

LOAL-LO
8 4 15

LOAL-HI
8 4 15

MISSILE TYPE
AGM-114A AGM-114C AGM-114F AGM-114K 400 400 * 300 1,000 1,000 * 500

MAXIMUM MISSILE ALTITUDE INCLUDING RANDOM TRAJECTORY (FEET)

1,700 1,700 * 600 1,700 800 800 400 1,000 400 400 400 1,900 1,400 * 800 1,400 800 * 800 2,300 1,600 * 1,400 2,200 1,300 * 1,400

*F model flies slightly lower than the C-model missile in this mode.

5-34

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

SEMIACTIVE LASER HELLFIRE MISSILE PERFORMANCE DETRACTORS

5-72. Figure 5-19 shows possible laser detractors.

Figure 5-19. Possible Laser Detractors BACKSCATTER 5-73. Backscatter applies to a portion of the laser beams energy reflected off atmospheric particles in the lasers path back towards the designator while the remainder of the lasers energy penetrates toward the target. Backscatter occurs even in clear weather; thus, the operator must rely upon the LOBL constraints box to know if the seeker is tracking backscatter. Obscurants such as fog, haze, rain, snow, smoke, and dustin the laser-to-target line of sight can also cause backscatter. If a target return is not detected, then the seeker may track the backscatter return. If the seeker is tracking backscatter, the seeker LOS and the TADS LOS will differ by more than 2 degrees and the LOBL constraints box will be dashed, indicating an out-ofconstraints condition. 5-74. If an obscurant is between the designator and the target, the seeker can lock on the reflected laser energy from the obscurant and walk up the laser beam toward the aircraft. When the seeker LOS is 2 degrees from the designator LOS and the seeker is locked on the autonomous laser spot, the

5-35

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

symbology will indicate an out-of-constraints condition. Anytime that the constraints box indicates an out-of-constraints condition, the crew member must correct the condition before launch. Figure 5-20 is a typical backscatter out-of-constraints indication for a missile on the right side of the aircraft tracking backscatter in front of the TADS. Note: This symbology is correct in this case only if the aircraft is pointing directly at the target. 5-75. Backscatter is best controlled by maintaining the true target in the instantaneous field of view of the seeker. The seeker generally does not track backscatter after track has been established on the true target. Backscatter tracking is more likely to occur with autonomous lasing than with remote lasing because of the proximity of the seeker to the laser beam on the launch aircraft. Backscatter affects LOBL autonomous launches. It can also affect LOAL autonomous launches if the designation commences too early (less than a two-second delay from launch/less than three seconds from trigger pull) before the missile has time to climb above and away from the laser beam.

-20

+20

Figure 5-20. Typical Backscatter Out-of-Constraints Indication

5-36

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

BACKSCATTER AVOIDANCE TECHNIQUES 5-76. To eliminate a backscatter lock on, lasing the target should be discontinued for a short time and the target redesignated. If a backscatter problem still exists, it may be necessary to discontinue lasing, move to another position, and redesignate the target. 5-77. If the launching aircraft is designating the target and autonomous operation is properly set up, one seeker will be slaved to the designator LOS, such as pointed at the target when the designator is tracking the target. This condition will generally result in proper seeker lock onto the target. However, under some conditions that fail to produce a detectable target return, the seeker will lock onto the laser backscatter close to the aircraft. Generally, poor target reflectivity, collocated obscurants, or excessive designation causes backscatter ranges. If backscatter lock on occurs, the seeker LOS will diverge from the designator LOS by two or more degrees, the LOBL constraints symbology will indicate an out-of-constraints condition, and the missile should not be launched. Note: (dash-45 software only) If primary channel track is achieved and the symbology indicates an out-of-constraints condition, the missile cannot be launched by pulling the trigger to the first detent but can be launched by pulling the trigger to the second detent. The missile should not be launched by pulling the trigger to the second detent when an out-of-constraints condition is indicated because the probability of hitting the target is low. If the LOBL constraints box is intermittently switching in and out of constraints, then a marginal target condition exists and the missile should not be launched in the LOBL mode. 5-78. To eliminate a backscatter lock on, stop lasing the target. Switch to LOAL-Direct, and use a minimum of two seconds of delay from missile separation (about three seconds after trigger pull). 5-79. If time permits, the crew can improve the target return by reducing engagement range, improving aim point, or employing offset designation onto the higher reflective terrain near the target. Lasing must cease before the reengagement of any target to allow the seeker to unlock from the backscatter. 5-80. The seeker may possibly switch to tracking backscatter during the first second after missile separation in the LOBL autonomous mode if the target return is lost before the missile has climbed above the laser beam. This condition can be created by image auto track break lock because of motor smoke in the TADS LOS. As Figure 5-21 shows, the aircraft should be rotated 3 to 5 degrees in the direction of the missile to be launched. This rotation ensures that the missile does not fly across the TADS LOS to create an IAT break lock or degrade the TADS imagery.

5-37

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 5-21. LOBL/LOAL Autonomous Launch Offset RULES FOR OPERATION IN OBSCURANTS 5-81. Performance is reduced when obscurants degrade the seekers lock-on range. The following rules indicate how to determine if the situation supports a missile launch. 5-82. The designator operator must have a clear enough image of the target for accurate placement of the laser spot on the target without overspill or underspill. 5-83. When the launch aircraft has a line of sight to the target, it must have a good enough image in its day television or forward-looking infrared so that the general shape of the target is recognizable. If the launch aircraft is masked, the designating aircraft must have a sufficient image in its DTV or FLIR for the aircrew to recognize the general shape of the target. Otherwise, the seeker will probably not achieve a lock on, even after launch. 5-84. The designating aircraft should take laser range-finder readings and not launch the missile until steady, plausible range readings are indicated. Erratic range readings are generally caused by smoke or dust near the target. Overspill or underspill onto foreground or background objects could also cause the same erratic readings. If accurate designation does not fix the problem, then the only solution is to change to a different designator or a different target or relocate the designating aircraft.

5-38

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

5-85. For LOBL autonomous launches, constraints symbology must show an in-constraints condition. Otherwise, the seeker is not tracking the true target. TARGET ILLUMINATION 5-86. The laser spot illuminates only the target. When the missile is in its last few seconds of flight before impact, the entire laser spot must be placed on the target. During the final few seconds of flight, even a momentary placement of laser energy on adjacent terrain can prevent the missile from hitting the target. Once the seeker is tracking, the designator should not be turned off before all in-flight missiles have impacted. The seeker will not initiate box scan once the laser energy is lost. 5-87. The portion of the target that is illuminated must be seen by the missile. This requirement imposes a 60-degree limit on the angle between the gun-target line and the remote designator-to-target line. The probability of killing a target depends on missile flight path at impact and target attack azimuth but generally is maximized if the laser spot can be held stable on the base of the tank turret. Boresight Error 5-88. Boresight error occurs when the laser spot is not properly aligned with the TADS reticle, which produces an error in the location of the spot on the target.

WARNING
Crew-induced AH-64 A and D boresight error can and will cause a SAL Hellfire missile to miss its intended target. Eliminating boresight error eliminates one of the most fundamental errors that crews make. The crew should know how the unit plans to accomplish out-front boresighting. If there is no good plan, the unit needs to create one. The unit and crew need to allocate time for internal and out-front boresighting in mission planning and correctly complete both internal and out-front boresight procedures for their aircraft. (Also, see the note on trends in the preface.)

Spot Jitter 5-89. Spot jitter results from the motion of the designator or the beam developed by the designator around the intended aim point. Spot jitter can give the laser spot a bouncing movement on the target, which will increase with designator distance from the target.

5-39

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Beam Divergence 5-90. The further the laser designator is from the target, the wider the spot will be on the target. The amount of beam divergence will vary among different types of designators. Attenuation 5-91. Attenuation is a portion of the laser beam that is scattered by obscurants along the laser-to-target LOS and the missile-to-target LOS, resulting in a reduced target pulse to the seeker. In addition, low visibility attenuates the target return to the seeker. If the attenuation is severe, the seeker will not detect the laser energy from the target. Overspill 5-92. Overspill is caused by placing the laser spot too high on the target so that beam divergence and jitter cause the spot or a portion of the spot to spill over onto the object or the terrain behind the target. Overspill can cause intermittent background false targets, which become more severe at long designation ranges. The missile is programmed with last pulse logic, which is intended to defeat backscatter in the target area. If the missile receives two spots of equal intensitythe first or closer return from backscatter and the second/farthest that was reflected from the intended targetthe missile should fly to the intended target. If overspill is present, this last pulse logic will cause the missile to fly past the intended target. Underspill 5-93. Underspill is caused by placing the laser spot too low on the target so that the spot or a portion of the spot spills onto the foreground. Underspill can cause foreground false targets, which become more severe at long designation ranges. Note: Even a small number of overspilled or underspilled laser pulses can cause the missile to follow false signals. If either of these conditions occurs just before missile impact, the Ph is seriously degraded.

RADAR FREQUENCY HELLFIRE MISSILE CHARACTERISTICS AND PERFORMANCE

5-94. Figure 5-22 shows the RF missile operational concept. The RF Hellfire missile uses an active radar frequency signal to detect and track targets. It emits RF energy and homes in on the reflected RF energy. It is an active (emitting) missile that is inertially guided and radar assisted. The missile radar seeker transmits frequencies within the millimeter wave Ka-band, around 35 gigahertz. This frequency band was chosen for several reasons. A relatively narrow radar beamwidth can be developed using Ka-band frequencies while keeping the size of the radar antenna small. A narrow beamwidth is desirable because it concentrates more of the available transmit power on the target of interest while minimizing interference from nearby clutter. The use of Ka-band frequencies also takes advantage of a

5-40

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

relative notch in the tendency of atmospheric water vapor to absorb radar signals. This notch improves the capability of the missiles to operate in all weather environments as well as in smoke.

Figure 5-22. RF Missile Operational Concept 5-95. The primary armament system of the AH-64D is the Longbow Hellfire Modular Missile System. Crews of the AH-64D can fire all variants of the SAL missile and the RF missiles. The Longbow RF missile can engage moving and stationary targets at ranges between 0.5 and 8.0 kilometers. The LBHMM consists of M299 launchers mounted on any of the four wing stations. The M299 launcher is a modified M272 launcher that can launch both SAL and RF Hellfire missiles. The M299 launcher cannot be used on the AH-64A, and the M272 launcher cannot be used on the AH-64D. The M272 cannot launch the RF missile. 5-96. During missile operation, the aircrew should avoid RF radiation-hazard areas (Figure 5-23). This area extends from the missile nose outward one meter and 45 degrees polar from the missile centerline. 5-97. The RF missile operates in three modes: standby, prelaunch, and postlaunch.

5-41

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 5-23. RF Radiation Hazard Areas STANDBY MODE 5-98. After the missile completes power up and PBIT, it will enter and remain in the standby mode until it receives target data (handover) from the WP. On aircraft power up, the missiles begin a startup process. During startup, the missiles initiate a power-up sequence, initialize in the standby mode, perform BIT, and inform the WP that startup is complete and it is in the standby mode. 5-99. A transfer alignment is completed immediately after the power-up BIT sequence. TA allows the missile to receive continuously updated inertial position, acceleration, and velocity data from the aircraft to align its own inertial navigation system. The TA process accounts for known mechanical alignments between the systems, pylon articulation, and communications delays. 5-100. The attitude and velocity of the missile are maintained during the TA function. While the missile is in the standby mode and ready, it will display an R in its missile icon.

5-42

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

5-101. TA compares and updates attitude and velocity measurements from the Longbow EGI to the missile INS. Items included in the TA message are Pitch and roll angle. True heading angle. Aircraft longitudinal, lateral, and vertical velocity. INU time tag. Pressure and density altitude. Static temperature. Pylon position relative to ADL. Pylon position time tag (articulation with aircraft pitch and roll rates). Aircraft pitch, roll, and yaw rate. Aircraft estimated heading error. PRELAUNCH MODE 5-102. Actioning the missile system with acceptable target data (target handover) will initiate the missile prelaunch mode. Prelaunch mode occurs from the time that the WP transfers target data to the missile until the missile is either launched or returns to the standby mode. POSTLAUNCH MODE 5-103. The postlaunch mode is initiated when the firing command (weapon trigger pull) occurs. The WP verifies launch constraints. These constraints include safety and performance inhibits, launcher and missile BIT status, missile gimbal angles, and RF tracking status for LOBL missiles. If no constraints are active, the WP issues the release-consent message to the launcher. Upon receipt of the release-consent message, the launcher issues the launch command to the designated missile and, at the same time, issues commands to enable the missile battery and pneumatic actuator control system. When the missile receives the launch commands, the system mode makes the transition to postlaunch. The launcher verifies battery power; if valid, digital communications with the missile cease and the motor fire command is sent to the missile. The missile achieves umbilical separation and leaves the rail about one second after the launch command is issued. The warhead is armed when the missile achieves 10 Gs acceleration (150 to 300 meters). 5-104. The missile receives a target handover in one of three ways: directly from the aircrafts own FCR, from the WP based on TADS information, or from data received via the IDM (Figure 5-24).

5-43

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 5-24. Target Handover 5-105. The target handover message defines the target position and velocity vector, current at the time of the assignment. The launcher receives the target assignment from the acquisition sensor or WP. The launcher then forwards the data to the priority missile. The missile remains in the standby mode until a handover message is received. It then immediately makes the transition to the prelaunch mode. The target handover contains the following information: Target statusidentification, target type (air/ground), and LOBL inhibit (on/off). Target-detection timetime from initial detection until current update. Target update timetime since last update. Target NED positionNED at time of detection. Updated NED positionNED position at update time. Target NED velocity. Cross-rangehandover data for cross range. Heighthandover data for height. Rangehandover data for range. Range ratehandover data for radial velocity. Cross rangehandover data for cross-range velocity. Aircraft time at request.

5-44

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

There are three types of target handovers. FCR 5-106. When the selected sight is FCR and the 2ND TARGET INHIBIT mode is not selected, the WP transfers target data for both a primary and secondary target when the targets are detected. If the primary target is stationary, a second stationary target may be supplied to the missile. This is the only mode of the three that supplies a secondary target. If the Hellfire system is actioned before an FCR scan, the WP initiates the target handover at the completion of the scan. If the Hellfire system is actioned during an FCR scan, the WP initiates handover of the NTS target immediately based on the targets detected up to that point, with subsequent target handovers occurring after completion of the first far-bar scan. TADS 5-107. When TADS is the selected sight and the actioned missile type is RF, the TARGET DATA? performance inhibit will be displayed. The target must be designated for about three seconds to receive the target handover and remove the TARGET DATA? message. If the laser data are erratic, the message will not be removed and the handover will not occur until valid range is acquired. IDM 5-108. When the target handover is received via the IDM (RFHO) and the mission is accepted, the RF handover data represent the target NED coordinates relative to the receiving aircraft. To receive an IDM target handover in an aircraft with or without radar, the aviator must have the FCR as the selected sight and the missiles WASd. The aviator must press the record button, before selecting FCR as sight (without radar). 5-109. After the WP transfers target NED data to the missile, the missile determines the launch modeeither LOBL or LOAL based on target velocities (moving or stationary) and range to target. Figure 5-25 shows RF missile LOBL/LOAL acquisition modes. The displayed FCR target symbols do not determine the type of missile mode for launch (that is, LOBL/LOAL). Therefore, it is possible to launch a LOBL missile at a LOAL target symbol and vice versa. During prelaunch LOBL operation, if the missile radar fails to acquire the target after three attempts, the radar will make the transition to standbybut the inertial tracking of the target will continue. If the missile determines the target requires a LOBL acquisition, it will try to acquire it by radiating three consecutive times for about three seconds each. Actioning the missile system again would allow for three more scan attempts on the same priority target.

5-45

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

*IDM RFHO/TADS RFHO

Figure 5-25. RF Missile LOBL/LOAL Acquisition Modes 5-110. The Longbow RF missile can engage moving and stationary targets at ranges between 0.5 and 8.0 kilometers. The resulting missile performance against these targets is a function of many factorsthe most important of which is the target handover error at the start of the target acquisition process. The target handover error grows as the time between FCR detect and the missiles receipt of the target handover increases (Figure 5-26). In the figure, the time between accepting the IDM RFHO and the time that the actual target handover occurs (WASing) could cause an acquisition attempt in the wrong area. This handover latency should be minimized for best performance; however, the missile does optimize its performance by selecting the appropriate acquisition mode and submode for best target detection and tracking performance, based on handover latency and initial target handover error.

5-46

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

Figure 5-26. Moving-Target Handover Delay

5-47

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

5-111. The Longbow RF Hellfire missile, AGM-114L, flies a trajectory that is optimized for radar performance while maintaining lethality. The LOBL and LOAL elevation flight profiles are similar (Figure 5-27). To prevent the missile from hitting the ground during launch, the minimum launch altitude is 15 meters.

Figure 5-27. RF Missile-Elevation Flight Profiles 5-112. The missile flies a very direct azimuth flight profile for LOBL operations (Figure 5-28). If the target becomes stationary after launch, an off-axis trajectory is possible.

5-48

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

Figure 5-28. Direct Trajectory for RF LOBL 5-113. Figure 5-29 shows the moving-target azimuth profiles for a 20-degree offset angle. As the offset angle decreases, the trajectory is closer to the armament datum line.

Figure 5-29. RF Missile Moving-Target Azimuth Flight Profiles

5-49

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

5-114. Figure 5-30 shows stationary (LOAL) target azimuth flight profiles. The LOAL azimuth flight profile is driven by a Doppler beam sharpening trajectory. This DBS trajectory is used for medium- to long-range stationary targets. This illustration shows trajectories with a 1-degree offset angle.

Figure 5-30. RF Missile Stationary-Target Azimuth Flight Profiles With a 1-Degree Offset Angle

5-50

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

5-115. Figure 5-31 shows that increasing the offset angle will increase the distance of the trajectory from the armament datum line.

Figure 5-31. RF Missile Stationary-Target Azimuth Flight Profiles With a 20-Degree Offset Angle RADAR-FREQUENCY MISSILE RADAR MODES 5-116. Figure 5-32 shows RF missile modes. The target acquisition and tracking modes are terms used to explain the different ways that the missile seeker improves its chances of locating and hitting LOBL and LOAL targets. The missile radar has three target-acquisition modes tailored to specific target characteristics. All modes require a target handover from the WP: terminal track acquisition for short-range stationary targets (LOAL and LOBL), preterminal track acquisition for long-range stationary targets (LOAL), and moving target acquisition for moving targets (LOBL). The missile has two tracking modes: preterminal track and terminal track. The two stationary-target acquisition modes (PTA and TTA) use different types of processing to separate targets from the surrounding clutter based on range. The TTA mode uses high-range resolution to process targets from 0.5 to 2.5 kilometers for both LOBL and LOAL short-range targets. The missile cannot perform DBS trajectory on short-range targets under 2.5 kilometers. HRR can detect stationary targets in ground clutter by providing much tighter range bins per range gate. This technique produces a much better resolution of the designated target. With smaller range bins, this mode assists target detection by measuring the size of the radar return for comparison with target handover classification. The LOAL mode is exercised at ranges greater than 1.0 kilometer to meet performance requirements for longer range HRR operations and reduced RCS targets. For targets between 1.0 kilometer and

5-51

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

2.5 kilometers, a LOAL status will be supplied to the launch platform; however, the radar will immediately attempt to acquire and track the target (LOBL). This is why, between the ranges of 1.0 and 2.5 kilometers, the missile mode can be either LOAL or LOBL. PTA is designed to acquire long-range stationary targets in the LOAL mode at ranges between 2.5 to 8.0 kilometers using DBS (Figure 5-33).

Figure 5-32. RF Missile Modes

5-52

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

Figure 5-33. Doppler Beam Sharpening

5-53

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Doppler Beam Sharpening 5-117. DBS uses a curved trajectory to induce relative motion between a stationary target and its background by flying an off-axis flight path to the target (Figure 5-34). DBS significantly enhances the probability of detection and tracking stationary targets at long ranges. Standard Doppler processing (missile flying direct to the target) would cause a stationary target to be included in the same Doppler bin as all of the mainlobe clutter return because both types of return exhibit the same relative range rate. DBS, because of the angular difference between the forward velocity vector of the missile and the target LOS, causes the relative range rate of the target to be different from that of the background, spreading the return over many Doppler bins. The resulting spread increases the target signal-to-clutter ratio in the target Doppler bin, enabling the radar to identify and locate the target. DBS is selected for ground-clutter rejection during stationary target PTT or when a target that was initially an MTI has become an STI during flight. If this occurs, the missile would switch from a straight trajectory to a DBS trajectory in flight. Two constraints determine when the in-flight DBS switch option occurs. First, the switch is not allowed near the terminal phase in which missile kinematics cannot support the trajectory switch. Second, the trajectory will not switch from DBS back to a straight trajectory. The probability of an in-flight DBS is very low.

Figure 5-34. DBS Trajectory

5-54

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

DBS Trajectory 5-118. The missile does not always turn in the same direction when DBS occurs. The direction of the turn is determined at umbilical separation as a function of the LOS to the target. Missiles launched from either side of the aircraft will follow the same trajectory based on the following data. If the target is right of the missile centerline, the missile trajectory curve will be a left DBS trajectory to the target. If the target is left of the missile centerline, the missile trajectory curve will be a right DBS trajectory to the target. Targets close to the zero bearing may yield either a left or right DBS trajectory. If the missile loses radar track of the target, it will shift to DBS in an attempt to reacquire the target. The primary parameters used to determine the extent of the DBS trajectory are the inertial guidance data of the missile (where it is at that instant), the last-known point of the target (point that the missile is tracking to), and for moving targets, the last-known velocity of the target. If the missile does not reacquire the target, it will use inertial guidance to fly to the calculated target location.

5-55

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

AIR-TO-AIR STINGER
5-119. The air-to-air Stinger (Figure 5-35) destroys enemy aircraft. The ATAS uses infrared (heat-sensitive) homing and an overpressure blast with some fragmentation for lethality. The ATAS can accept and function with the unmodified basic Stinger (Figure 5-36) and the Stinger reprogrammable microprocessor. In the RMP version, the missile guidance and IR counter-countermeasure functions are reprogrammable by means of a reprogrammable microprocessor in the launcher electronics assembly. This upgrade provides greater countermeasure and background immunity with improved detection characteristics. The RMP Stingers seeker dome cover is clear, while the basic Stingers seeker dome cover is cloudy.

Figure 5-35. Air-to-Air Stinger Mounted on an OH-58D 5-120. The Stinger is 59 inches long and weighs 22.4 pounds. The warhead case is titanium, with a 2.25-pound explosive filler that contains HTA-3 (HMX49 percent, TNT29 percent, and aluminum flake powder22 percent). The impact fuze has a self-destruct feature. There are three modes

5-56

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

of detonation: a low-impact switch allows the warhead to penetrate a soft target before detonation; a hard-target sensor allows the warhead to detonate upon impact with a hard target; or, if the missile does not impact and detonate, it automatically explodes 17 seconds after it is launched. Range is based on target identification and acquisition and environmental conditions. The demonstrated range capability within favorable conditions is classified. 5-121. When the Stinger is fired, the launch motor begins missile movement within the launch tube. Before the missile exits the tube, the launch motor is expended and separation sequence is initiated. At a safe distance from the launcher, the launch motor falls from the missile. During this sequence, flight-motor ignition takes place. Peak velocity of the Stinger is more than Mach 2. Table 5-15 gives the basic characteristics of the Stinger missile.

Figure 5-36. Stinger Missile (Basic) Sections Table 5-15. Characteristics of the Stinger Missile

STINGER MISSILE Shipping and storage container Missile round Field-handler trainer

BASIC COLOR Forest green Olive drab Forest green

1-INCH SQUARES

DATA MARKINGS Yellow

2-1/2-INCH SQUARES Yellow

Yellow White Bronze

5-57

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

5-122. The missile senses IR radiation emitted from a target by optically focusing the radiation on the surface of an infrared detector cell within the seeker. The cell is cooled by argon gas in the coolant reservoir; argon gas is sensitive to IR radiation. When the seeker acquires the IR energy emitted by a target, acquisition signals are produced that inform the pilot of target detection. Figure 5-37 shows the electromagnetic spectrum including the IR portion.

Figure 5-37. The Electromagnetic Spectrum Including the Infrared Portion 5-123. The atmosphere is not completely transparent to IR radiation. Certain gases in the atmosphere, primarily carbon dioxide and water vapor, absorb energy in the IR radiation frequency spectrum. The amount of carbon dioxide in the air is fairly constant, and its effect on detection range is constant and need not be considered. Water-vapor content varies widely with geographic location and local weather conditions. The amount of humidity in the air proportionately decreases the IR signature of an object. Other particles in the atmospheresuch as dust, smoke, fog, and rainalso absorb and scatter IR radiation and reduce IR acquisition ranges. Radiation types and sources include the following: Scatteredsun and fire. Emittedclear sky, terrain, and clouds. Reflectedclouds, terrain, lake surfaces, and snow. Note: Clouds and terrain can be either emitting or reflecting sources, depending on the conditions.

5-58

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 5

5-124. Intensity of emitted IR radiation energy varies, according to the size of an area and the source of the radiation. For example, clear sky or clouds cover a large area and emit low-intensity radiation. Forest and desert terrain covers large areas and emits medium levels of infrared radiation. The sun represents a large area of high-intensity infrared radiation, while an engine exhaust emits a small area of high-intensity infrared radiation. Emitters other than the target are also referred to as background radiation. Note: With the exception of the sun, the engine exhaust or tailpipe of the target is usually the smallest and hottest object in the environment. 5-125. When the target is approaching through clouds or haze or close to the ground, the pilot must be aware that these and other obscurants can reflect, absorb, transmit, and/or emit infrared radiation and a background lock-on could occur. 5-126. If the pilot cannot acquire the target because of background noise, he should continue tracking until the target burns through and acquisition is evident. The pilot should keep launch boundaries in mind and be ready to reposition if necessary. 5-127. If the pilot still cannot acquire the target, he may launch the missile using the manual-uncage mode for missile launching. TM 55-1520-228-10 contains manual-uncage procedures.

5-59

This page intentionally left blank.

Chapter 6

Crew Warfighting
Warfighting is the mission of Army aviation aircrews. This chapter provides information and tactics, techniques, and procedures for attack and armed-reconnaissance helicopter crews.

SECTION I FRATRICIDE PREVENTION

Fratricide is the employment of friendly weapons and munitions with the intent to kill the enemy or destroy his equipment or facilities, which results in unforeseen and unintentional death or injury to friendly personnel.
TRADOC Fratricide Action Plan

6-1. Fratricide is a fact in combat operations. Historically, fratricide incidents are most likely to occur in the early stages of combat, during reduced visibility, or along shared unit boundaries. All soldiers share the responsibility for fratricide prevention. However, they must avoid the reluctance to employ, integrate, and synchronize all battlefield operating systems because of fear of fratricide. On the modern battlefield, the extreme range capability of the direct-fire weapons of the attack helicopter exceeds the ability of the sights of the helicopter to positively identify targets. Therefore, a soldiers decision to fire is based considerably on situational awareness.

SITUATIONAL AWARENESS DETRACTORS

INADEQUATE FIRE AND MANEUVER CONTROL 6-2. Situational awareness is the real-time accurate knowledge of ones own location and orientation, as well as the locations of friendly forces, enemy forces, and noncombatants. Situational awareness includes awareness of the METT-T conditions that affect the operation. The following are the most frequent situational awareness breakdowns. DIRECT FIRE-CONTROL FAILURES 6-3. Units fail to disseminate the minimum necessary maneuver and fire-support control measures to coordinate operations. Units fail to tie control measures to recognizable terrain features. 6-4. Units fail to designate easily recognizable and understandable target reference points, engagement areas, and engagement priorities.

6-0

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

LAND-NAVIGATION FAILURES 6-5. Difficult terrain, bad weather, and/or poor visibility often complicate navigation. Navigation problems can cause units to stray out of sector, report wrong locations, become disoriented, or employ fire support weapons from the wrong locations. Therefore, friendly units may collide unexpectedly or engage each other erroneously. REPORTING, CROSSTALK, AND BATTLE-TRACKING FAILURES 6-6. Commanders and leaders at all levels often do not generate timely, accurate, and complete reports or track subordinates as locations and the tactical situation change. This erroneous information permits erroneous clearance of fires. KNOWN BATTLEFIELD HAZARDS 6-7. Unexploded ordnance, unmarked and unrecorded minefields, FASCAM, and booby traps litter the battlefield. COMBAT IDENTIFICATION FAILURES 6-8. Combat identification failures occur because of the inability or failure of the attack crew to positively identify the target. WEAPONS ERRORS 6-9. Lapses in unit or individual discipline or violations of the rules of engagement are not merely accidents. Examples of weapons error are out-of-sector engagements, unauthorized discharges, mistakes with explosives and hand grenades, charge errors, and incorrect gun.

CONTRIBUTING FACTORS
6-10. Many factors (or preconditions) contribute to fratricide. These factors are crucial in the commanders fratricide risk assessment before combat. They include, based on METT-T, the following contributing factors. MISSION AND COMMAND AND CONTROL 6-11. The following are mission and C2 factors that contribute to fratricide: High vehicle or weapons density. Unclear or complex commanders intent. Poor flank coordination. Lack of internal coordination. Lack of habitual relationships between units. ENEMY 6-12. The following are enemy factors that contribute to fratricide: Weak enemy intelligence or reconnaissance. Intermingled enemy and friendly forces. Enemy equipment similar to or the same as that of friendly forces.

6-1

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TERRAIN AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 6-13. The following are terrain and environmental conditions that contribute to fratricide: Low light levels (unit training level). Obscuration or poor visibility. Extreme engagement ranges. Navigation difficulties. Absence of recognizable features. NBC environment. Battlefield hazards (such as minefields and submunitions). TROOPS AND EQUIPMENT 6-14. The following are troop and equipment factors that contribute to fratricide: High weapon lethality. Unseasoned leaders or troops. Poor fire-control SOPs. Incomplete rules of engagement. Anxiety, confusion, or fear. Failure to adhere to SOPs. Low unit-manning level. Communications ineffectiveness. Lack of available navigation and positioning equipment. TIME 6-15. The following are time-related factors that contribute to fratricide: Soldier and leader fatigue. Inadequate rehearsals. Short planning cycle.

EFFECTS OF FRATRICIDE
6-16. The effects of a fratricide incident can be devastating to a unit. They include the following: Hesitation to conduct limited-visibility operations. Loss of confidence in the units leadership. Increase of leader self-doubt. Hesitation to use supporting combat systems (FA). Oversupervision of units. Loss of initiative. Loss of aggressiveness during fire and maneuver. Disrupted operations.

6-2

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

Needless loss of combat power. General degradation of cohesion and morale.

FRATRICIDE PREVENTION
6-17. Aviation units must practice antifratricide tactics, techniques, and procedures during all training. Unit SOPs must reflect a thorough understanding of fratricide and must focus on those TTP that the soldiers understand, innovate and refine themselves, and practice frequently. The following initiatives can help establish and refine unit SOPs. DOCTRINE/TACTICS, TECHNIQUES, AND PROCEDURES Direct-Fire Weapons Control Measures 6-18. Marking Target Reference Points. Use ground-burning illumination, white phosphorus, beacons, colored smoke, strobes with IR filters, and identifiable engagement areas to orient maneuver and fires. 6-19. Weapons Control Status for Direct Fires. Use a weapons-control status similar to air defense. Weapons HOLD, TIGHT, and FREE would indicate the necessity of an external verification of the fire command or call for fire. 6-20. Rules of Engagement. Use detailed ROE to establish engagement criteria for various conditions that crews may face. Establish a tie-in between visibility, FLIR conditions, and weapon engagement ranges. 6-21. Control Measures. Establish control measures that provide spatial separation between adjacent units; for example, an AH-64 battalion may establish a free-fire area in which, in coordination with higher and adjacent units, the crews can have a high degree of confidence that elements found within the area are not friendly. Units may also establish buffer zones around ground units for close combat. Before control measures can be effective, they have to be accurately plotted on crew-members maps and fully understood. Indirect Fire-Control Measures (Rockets and Field Artillery) 6-22. The following are indirect fire-control measures for rockets and field artillery: Establish and practice routine positive controls (permissive controls for those who can see; restrictive measures protect those who are exposed). Establish simplified procedures for external clearance of fires; for example, an attack battalion clears all fire missions through its fire support officer. Incorporate fire-support members in liaison teams for detailed flank coordination. Anticipate special environments. controls needed for mixed voice-digital

6-3

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Reconnaissance Priorities 6-23. The following are reconnaissance priorities: Consider priority intelligence requirements relating to the feasibility of the routes, navigation, and maneuver plan. Consider allocation of some reconnaissance to flank observation and reporting. Accurately track movement of ground forces in sector by radio net surveillance, visual observation, and tie-in with higher headquarters. Rehearsals 6-24. The benefits of rehearsals include the following: Well-understood fire-control measures are established. Maneuver element locations and actions are well-known. Information reaches down to every crew member. Feedback to leaders results in refinements in the plan. Fratricide prevention measures are determined. Problems are identified and corrected. Crew-member confidence and aggressiveness increase. Crew members have a sense of partnership or ownership in the plan. TRAINING Control Measures and Graphics Training 6-25. Units must train each crew member on the different types of control measures used and their graphic portrayal. Crews must ensure that they copy and plot graphics and control measures accurately on their maps. A oneor two-kilometer error could be the difference between life and death. Combat Vehicle Identification Training 6-26. Great responsibility comes with the ability to quickly and efficiently kill. Crews must be able to identify as many friendly and enemy ground and air vehicle/systems as possible. Efforts to become proficient at this skill will enhance combat effectiveness. All units are responsible for developing and implementing a formal working, consistent training program. Part of this formal training program should be the Recognition of Combat Vehicles (ROC-V) Program. Units should include the ROC-V Program in their target acquisition and identification training. For information on this program, call commercial 703-704-1473/1718 (DSN 654-1473/1718). Combat vehicle identification training key elements include the following: Do not key on vehicle details that the gunner could not realistically discern such as bore evacuator position; key on chassis shape, turret shape and position, and relative length of gun tube. Do not push for moving CVI training; studies show that it is not critical in CVI training. Shift polarities regularly in FLIR/TIS.

6-4

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

Use training in assembly areas for vehicle identification; the tactical assembly area is a good place to train because it allows the crews to key in on the prevailing terrain of the area. Crew Training 6-27. Crew training focuses on collective situational awareness, particularly at night. It includes training and assessment of the crews ability to maintain awareness of the aircrafts heading and location in relation to both friendly and enemy forces. 6-28. TASCs have training tapes available from the U.S. Army Armor Center, Fort Knox, Kentucky, and the Night Vision Laboratories, Fort Belvoir, Massachusetts, showing thermal signatures of different vehicles friendly and threat. Simulators 6-29. A situational training exercise in a compatible simulator can be an excellent building block for reliable threat identification. Intermingling threat and friendly vehicles on training scenarios may build crew confidence. 6-30. The U.S. Army Combined Arms Center, Fort Leavenworth, Kansas, suggests placing friendly vehicles in target arrays on the range for Tables IX through XII for situational awareness training. After-action reviews should follow all training events. Advanced Table Training/Live-Fire Training 6-31. Advanced table training/live-fire training Allows leaders to track aircraft and ground-force orientation in a go-to-war OPTEMPO. Uncovers weaknesses in the units level of understanding of mission and combined-arms operations. Uncovers weaknesses in unit leadership and planning. Builds confidence in the units ability to conduct multiship warfighting missions. Focuses on situational awareness from crew to battalion level. ORGANIZATION 6-32. Liaison officers and liaison parties are normally located in the tactical operations center of the higher headquarters. A liaison party normally includes an assistant S3 officer, a fire support officer, and a communications specialist (enlisted). Primary duties are to Make sure that the aviation element understands scheme of maneuver and the intent of the ground. Exchange information throughout the operation, not just on the front end. Standardize graphic-control measures. Establish and maintain communications between the aviation element and the ground element.

6-5

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

MATERIEL SOLUTIONS 6-33. Although the Army is investigating many technical solutions to fratricide, there are no materiel solutions to the fratricide problem other than panel markers or light-marking devices. During Operation Desert Storm, deployed units painted an inverted V on vehicles to denote friendly forces. Coalition forces understood this symbol; the inverted Vis the number eight in Arabic. Some units also used IR reflective tape on vehicles to aid in vehicle recognition. The drawback was that to be visible at 2,000 meters, the symbol had to be at least 2 feet by 2 feet. Also, it was directional, meaning that if the symbol was on the back of the vehicle, it was not visible from the front of the vehicle. 6-34. Although there is an Army standard for marking vehicles, it is difficult to discern these markings at the standoff ranges of attack helicopters. Aviation units must not allow their training to focus solely on identifying vehicles by their markings. LEADER AND SOLDIER DEVELOPMENT After-Action Reviews 6-35. All AARs should Address fratricide, whether or not it occurs. Highlight near-fratricidal incidents and fire-control successes. Discuss and capture techniques for fratricide reduction. Field Discipline 6-36. Mistakes with weapons and explosives, both friendly and enemy, historically account for a large number of casualties, many self-inflicted, during conflict. All soldiers must understand the command policies relating to the handling of live munitions. To help prevent fratricide, commanders must enforce strict rules of engagement on use of booby traps, weapons on safe, employment of mines and explosives, and use of hand grenades.

SECTION II TARGET ACQUISITION ACQUISITION DEFINED

6-37. Target acquisition is the timely detection, location, and identification of targets in enough detail to permit attack by either direct- or indirect-fire weapons. Effective target acquisition requires the combined effort of the crew. This section Describes the target-acquisition process. Discusses methods for acquiring and classifying targets. Relates target-acquisition confirmation to conduct of fire.

6-6

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

TARGET-ACQUISITION PROCESS
6-38. The target-acquisition process is a series of progressive and interdependent steps or actions with which an aircrew acquires enemy targets for destruction. It is a continuing requirement for all aircrew members, whether in the offense or defense, moving or stationary. Crew search is the crews collective effortsusing both the unaided eye and aircraft optics, within assigned sectors of observationto explore the area of operations visually for enemy presence. The acquisition process consists of the following elements: Detection is the discovery, by any means available (sight, sound, or smell) of any phenomena (personnel, equipment, or objects) of potential military significance. Identification is the friendly or hostile character of a detected potential target determined by its physical traits such as size, shape, or functional characteristics. Classification is the categorizing of a potential target by the relative level of danger that it represents. Confirmation is the rapid verification of a target in terms of the initial identification and classification; during the engagement, the crew must identify and classify the target before engaging it.

Location is the determination (by direction, reference point, or grid) of where a potential military target is on the battlefield (air or ground). Reporting includes spot reports that provide commanders with critical information during missions; the requesting agency specifies the method of sending or transmitting spot reports. Reports of no enemy sighting are often just as important as actual enemy sightings.

CREW SEARCH
6-39. Crew search, or observation, is the act of carefully viewing or watching the area of operationusing search and scanning techniques and sectors of observationto acquire targets. Sectors of observation are areas assigned to each crew member for search and target acquisition. Crew members must know their assigned sectors of observation to thoroughly cover the battlefield. When operating in larger groups (team, platoon, and company), each helicopter will overlap fields of observation with the coverage of other helicopters.

AERIAL SEARCH TECHNIQUES

6-40. Crew members will scan their areas of observation at all times to detect targets or possible target signatures. Three search techniques enable crew members to locate targets quickly: side scan, motive, and stationary. Crews must divide duties during deliberate searchsomeone must fly the helicopter. Crews may employ all three techniques, using the aided or unaided eye or aircraft optics, under both day and night conditions.

6-7

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

SIDE-SCAN TECHNIQUE 6-41. The crew normally uses this technique when the aircraft is operating at an altitude of 100 feet AGL or higher at cruise airspeed. The crew is looking for readily visible or obvious sightings. Over most terrain, the CPG/CPO systematically Looks out about 1,000 meters and searches in toward the aircraft. Looks out one-half of the distance (500 meters) and searches in toward the aircraft. Looks out one-fourth of the distance (250 meters) and searches in toward the aircraft. Repeats the procedure. MOTIVE TECHNIQUE 6-42. The crew uses this technique when the aircraft is operating at terrain-flight altitudes and at airspeeds of 10 KIAS or more. The crew divides the entire area on either side of the aircraft into two major sectors: the nonobservation sector and the observation work sector. The nonobservation sector is the area where the aircrews field of vision is restricted by the physical configuration of the aircraft. The observation work sector is that portion of the field of vision to which search activity is confined. The observation work sector is subdivided into two smaller sectors: The acquisition sector is the forward 45-degree area of the observation work sector; this area is the primary area of search. The recognition sector is the remainder of the observation work sector. In using the motive technique, the CPG/CPO looks forward of the aircraft and through the center of the acquisition sector for obvious sightings; he then scans through the acquisition sector, gradually working back toward the aircraft. STATIONARY TECHNIQUE 6-43. The crew uses this technique at NOE altitudes with the aircraft hovering in a concealed position. The crew makes a quick, overall search for sightings, unnatural colors, outlines, or movements. The crew members start scanning to the immediate front, searching an area of about 50 meters in depth. The crew continues to scan outward from the aircraft, increasing the depth of the search area by overlapping 50-meter intervals until the crew has covered the entire search area.

6-8

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

SPECIFIC AREA SEARCH USING OPTICS 6-44. If the crews do not find targets using the motive, side-scan, or stationary techniques and if time permits, they may use their optics to make a careful, deliberate search of specific areas in their sector. This method is also used to search, in detail, small areas or locations with likely or suspected enemy activity. Concentrate on one specific area or location, and study it intensely. Look for direct or indirect target signatures in a clockwise sweep around the focal point (key terrain feature) of the area; some examples of signatures to look for are the following: Dust created by movement or firing. Diesel exhaust. Track or tire marks on the ground. Reflection from glass or metal. Angular object that does not blend in with the surroundings. Vegetation that seems out of place. Radical movement of vegetation. Flash or smoke from a firing gun or missile. Entrenchments or earthworks.

TECHNIQUES FOR CREW SEARCH

6-45. Crew members can search for targets in FLIR (if available) wide field of view, both day and night. They can select a narrower field of view when they acquire a target. Note: Crew members should start with wide fields of view and, when they acquire the target, select a narrower field. When firing at a target, they can select a wider field of view to observe munition impacts. Many times, attack crews will select a narrow field of view and maintain it through munitions impact. Crew members will not be able to adjust the weapons on target if they do not see the impacts. 6-46. Use the laser range-finder to determine how far the crew is looking. Crews normally use the laser range-finder only to find ranges to an acquired target. The laser range-finder can help overlap sectors of observation. 6-47. On qualification ranges, use the laser range-finder to bracket a target before it pops up. For example, if crew members know that a target is between 2,000 and 2,500 meters on a general azimuth from the firing point, they can use their laser to pick a point to observe at about 2,300 meters. When the target pops up, crew members will be looking in the general area and target acquisition will be easier. 6-48. Switching between black and white hot on FLIR during a search will sometimes cause a target to appear. A well-optimized FLIR, coupled with frequently reversing polarities, will help the crew acquire targets.

6-9

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

6-49. AH-64 and OH-58D crews should use their onboard video recorder during deliberate search. Playback of the videotape may reveal targets unseen during search.

TARGET DETECTION
6-50. Target detection is the discovery of objects (personnel, vehicles, or equipment) of potential military significance on the battlefield. It is the first phase of target acquisition. Target detection occurs during crew search as a direct result of observing target signatures. TARGET SIGNATURES 6-51. Target signatures are telltale indicators or clues that help an observer detect potential targets on the battlefield. Most weapons and vehicles have identifiable signatures. These distinguishing characteristics may be the result of equipment design or the environment in which the equipment is used. Firing a tank main gun will produce blast, flash, dust, smoke, and noise. 6-52. Look for track-vehicle signatures in open areas and rolling terrain. Look for helicopters on the back side of tree lines, on ridgelines, and in significant folds in the terrain. Crews must be familiar with where enemy positions, both vehicular and dismounted, will likely be located. EXAMPLES OF TARGET SIGNATURES Soldier Signatures 6-53. Soldier signatures include Foxholes. Broken vegetation. Footprints. Camp fires. Cleared fields of fire. Track-Vehicle Signatures 6-54. Track-vehicle signatures include Vehicle track on the ground. Dust clouds from movement. Weapons firing report and smoke. Bright, white flash at night. Thermal signatures: Suspension and exhaust systems will be more visible than the rest of the vehicle and surrounding area. A gun tube that has just fired will appear much brighter than a tube that has not. Normally, the vehicle is more visible than the surrounding area and is readily visible when weather conditions permit.

6-10

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

General Signatures 6-55. The general signature indicators are Sun glint from objects such as canopies and windshields. Vapor trails from shoulder-fired missiles. Dust and movement of foliage.

TARGET-DETECTION CHALLENGES
6-56. Some targets are more difficult to detect than are others. Units must train diligently in target-detection techniques to find the most elusive targets. The following are some examples of these more difficult targets and detection challenges: Targets on the extreme edge of the field of view. Targets that are camouflaged or in shadows. Small, single targets such as a lone, dismounted ATGM or a shoulder-fired antiaircraft missile position. Natural obstacles such as weather and terrain. Man-made obstacles such as smoke and battlefield clutter. Crew fatigue.

TARGET LOCATION
6-57. Target location determines where a potential target is on the battlefield. Locating a target occurs as a result of observation and detection during crew search. Target location allows a crew member to fix or locate a target for the other crew members; for example, a pilot locating a target for his copilot/gunner. The following are common target location methods. CLOCK METHOD 6-58. The clock method and sector methods are the fastest methods used to get the gunner on target. The crew bases 12 oclock on the direction of helicopter movement while traveling and on aircraft orientation or the nose of the aircraft when stationary; for example, BMP, nine oclock. SECTOR METHOD 6-59. Similar in concept to the clock method, the sector method is quicker. Crews use the sector method to indicate a direction from the aircrafts direction of movement or orientation. Center sector is always to the direct front; for example, BMP, left front. WHEEL METHOD 6-60. The wheel method is a relatively quick method. Primarily, the pilot uses this method to get the gunner on target; for example, Turn leftstop turnhold. Note: When handing a target over to another aircraft, use a magnetic heading. The previously discussed methods may not be relevant to another crew because of its position.

6-11

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

TARGET CLASSIFICATION
6-61. Target classification is the grouping of potential targets by the relative level of danger that they represent. The aircrew determines target classification after it completes target acquisition. To defeat the many enemy targets that will appear on the battlefield, the crew must rapidly decide which targets present the greatest danger. Target classifications are most dangerous, dangerous, and least dangerous. Estimate of the threat array, target by target, leads to a priority-of-engagement decision. The crew further analyzes the targets in terms of hard (tank) versus soft (truck) and single (tank) versus multiple (troops) to determine the proper ammunition (MPSM or PD rockets) and weapon system to use in the engagement. MOST DANGEROUS 6-62. When crew members observe an enemy air-defense target that exhibits the intent to engage them, they classify that target as most dangerous. This type of target is the greatest threat; the crew must engage it immediately. If crew members encounter more than one target, they should engage the closest one first. DANGEROUS 6-63. When crew members observe an enemy air-defense target that does not exhibit the intent to engage them, they classify that target as dangerous. The crew should engage this type of target after destroying all of the most dangerous targets, unless otherwise specified by the priority of engagements. Multiple dangerous targets are engaged the same as most dangerous targetsthe closest one first. LEAST DANGEROUS 6-64. A target that does not have an air-defense capability but can report the crew to one that does is classified as least dangerous. The crew engages this type of target after destroying/disabling all of the most dangerous and dangerous targets unless certain least-dangerous targets have a high priority of engagement as in the case of command-and-control vehicles.

6-12

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

CONFIRMATION
6-65. Target confirmation is the rapid verification of the initial identification and classification of the target. Confirmation takes place after the crew has completed the fire commands except for the execution command. The crew may complete the evaluation of the target based on the six-step method. The crew uses this technique at the discretion of the commander. It provides a deliberate method for crews to classify a target. If crew members determine that the target is enemy, they continue the engagement. However, if crew members answer unknown to the following questions, they probably should seek out assistance from other crews in the area unless they are taking fire. Answer yes, no, or unknown for the following questions: LINE 1: Is the vehicle located in a briefed enemy sector? (Situational awarenessa yes response does not necessarily mean that it is enemy.) LINE 2: Is the vehicle oriented toward friendly positions? (Situational awarenessa yes response does not necessarily mean that it is enemy.) LINE 3: Is the vehicle tracked? (Categorizes the vehicle based on the briefed enemy situation. If it is not tracked, assume that it is wheeled.) LINE 4: Does the vehicle have a gun? (Categorizes the vehicle as a potential threat; may distinguish the vehicle between a tank and an APC.) LINE 5: Does the vehicle have a turret? (Further refines LINE 3; also, shifts attention to the turret, where the shape may help identify the vehicle.) LINE 6: Does the vehicle have other equipment mounted on it? (For example, radar, missiles and smoke generators may help identify an ADA system.)

SECTION III RANGE DETERMINATION RANGE DETERMINATION

6-66. The laser range-finder is the primary method of determining range in attack helicopters. LRF malfunctions, environmental conditions, battlefield obscurants, or target size may force the crew to use alternate methods. This section explains how to determine range without the LRF. RECOGNITION METHOD 6-67. Range determination by recognition is simple and accurate when practiced. The target must be visible to the unaided eye. The principle of this method is that when crew members see a target, they can determine the range according to what they recognize; for example, if a crew member can recognize a target with the unaided eye as a tank, it is probably within 1,500 meters. Table 6-1 shows what the average person can identify with the naked eye at various ranges. The ranges shown are the maximum ranges for identification.

6-13

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Table 6-1. Identification Ranges

TARGET

UNAIDED EYE (METERS)

500 1,000 1,500 2,000

Tank crew, troops, machine gun, antitank gun, mortar Tank, armored personnel carrier, truckby model (for example, T-72) Tank, howitzer, APC, truckgeneric Armored vehicle, wheeled vehicle

6-68. When using the recognition method, crew members must consider the size and clarity of the target in relation to its background. Some light and terrain conditions make a target seem closer; others make it seem farther away. The conditions outlined below may cause an error in estimating range by the recognition method. 6-69. A target seems closer On a bright, clear day. When the sun is in front of it. When it is at a higher elevation. When it is brightly colored. When it contrasts with the background. When looking across ravines, hollows, rivers, or depressions. In the desert. At sea. 6-70. A target seems closer In fog, rain, or haze. When the sun is behind the target. At lower elevations. When it is smaller. When it is dark colored. When it is camouflaged.

6-14

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

MAP METHOD 6-71. Crew members can use a map to determine range to target. The CPG/CPO finds the position of his aircraft on the map using Doppler, GPS, or other navigation system coordinates or terrain positioning. He then determines the position of the target. Once he determines the position of the aircraft and the target, he measures the distance between the two to determine range. All aircrews must carry maps even if their aircraft have electronic navigation devices. KNOWN RANGES 6-72. Using battle-position cards, an attack-by-fire position card, or similar techniques, the aircrew can overcome a laser range-finder failure. When positioned in the battle position, the BPC or ABFC allows the crew to determine ranges from the battle position/attack-by-fire position to center of mass of the engagement area. MIL RELATIONSHIP METHOD 6-73. The mil relationship method is useful in deliberate range determination. To use this method, the crew must know the width, length, or height of the target. Measure the width, length, or height with the helicopters optics; substitute the mil relation; and compute the range. Accuracy depends on knowledge of target dimensions and the ability of the individual to measure with the helicopters displays and the ability to relate the measurement to the actual target range. 6-74. There are about 18 mils in one degree. The mil is a unit of angular measurement equal to 1/6,400 of a circle. One mil equals a width (or height) of 1 meter at a range of 1,000 meters. The relationship of the angle, the length of the sides of the angle, and the width (height) between the sides remains constant. 6-75. Table 6-2 can help aircrews determine range to target when the helicopters LRF is not working. Aircrews can use this chart for training deliberate range determination.

6-15

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Table 6-2. Mil/Range TableTank and APC

AVERAGE THREAT TANK

VEHICLE DIMENSION

MIL ANGLE AND RANGE IN METERS 0.5 1

6,700

1.5
4,467

2
3,350

2.5
2,680

3
2,233

3.5
1,914

4
1,675

4.5
1,489

5
1,340

5.5

6.5

7
957

Length 6.7 meters Width 3.4 meters Full height 2.3 meters Turret height 1 meter

13,400

1,218 1,117 1,031

6,800

3,400

2,267

1,700

1,360

1,133

971

850

756

680

618

567

523

486

4,600

2,300

1,533

1,150

920

767

657

575

511

460

418

383

354

329

2,000

1,000

667

500

400

333

286

250

222

200

182

167

154

143

AVERAGE THREAT ARMORED PERSONNEL CARRIER

VEHICLE DIMENSION

MIL ANGLE AND RANGE IN METERS

0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 6.5 7

Length 6.4 meters Width 2.6 meters Full height 2.1 meters

12,800 6,400

4,267

3,200

2,560

2,133

1,829

1,600

1,422

1,280

1,164 1,067

985

914

5,200

2,600

1,733

1,300

1,040

867

743

650

578

520

473

433

400

371

4,200

2,100

1,400

1,050

840

700

600

525

467

420

382

350

323

300

THE MIL RELATION 6-76. The relationship of the angle in mils (m), the length of the sides (or range) in thousands of meters (R), and the width between the ends of the sides in meters (W) is expressed as the mil relation of

W=m R

6-16

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

6-77. Because the mil relation is constant, the crew may substitute other units of measurementsuch as yards, feet, or inchesfor meters in expressing width or range. However, the relation holds true only if both W and R are expressed in the same unit of measure; for example, if the sides of a 1 mil angle are extended to 1,000 meters, the width between the ends of the sides is 1 meter. Computations are difficult in a busy cockpit. The following formula is the easiest to use and is preferred for quick range computations.

RANGE TO TARGET = (WIDTH OF TARGET/MIL) X 1,000

Note: Width refers to the measurement of width, length, or height of the vehicle. 6-78. Using this formula, crew members divide the width of the target by the determined mil measurement and multiply by 1,000. If they round the mil values to a whole number and memorize a mil value for each of one or two fields of view in the helicopters optics, practice will produce accurate, quick range determinations. Table 6-3 shows some average measurements (in meters) for the above formula. Table 6-3. Average Measurements in Meters

TYPE OF VEHICLE TANK APC

LENGTH (meters) 7 6

WIDTH (meters) 3 3

HEIGHT (meters) 2 2

AIRCRAFT MIL VALUES

6-79. The key to determining range with the mil method is that crew members must remember mil values that relate to their particular aircraft. The training program should focus on using one or two selected mil values that the aircrew can easily remember. Focusing on a few values can speed up the process and produce consistent ranges. MIL DETERMINATION FOR THE AH-64 6-80. The Apache aircraft can display several different reticle symbologies to the crew. The following provides a brief description of the different reticles. TADS LOS Reticle 6-81. The TADS LOS reticle is a crosshair symbol that represents the TADS line of sight. The TADS LOS reticle is generated by the TADS TEU and is displayed as part of the TADS imagery.

6-17

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Note: If TADS becomes the selected NVS, then the TADS LOS reticle display is inhibited and the aircraft symbol generator (AH-64A) or display processor (AH-64D) will generate the LOS reticle for display, which has different dimensions than the TADS LOS reticle. LOS Reticle 6-82. The LOS reticle is displayed as part of the flight symbology format (hover, transition, or bobup) and weapon symbology format. The LOS reticle is a crosshair located at the center of the display and represents the LOS of the crew members selected sight. The reticle is generated by the aircraft symbol generator or the display processor. LOS Reticle (Cruise) 6-83. The cruise LOS reticle is a bold crosshair reticle located in the center of the cruise-mode flight format. It represents the crew-members selected sight and is used as an aiming reticle. When the pilot selects cruise-flight mode symbology, he will see the bolded reticle displayed. The reticle is generated by the aircraft display processor (AH-64D). Cued LOS Reticle 6-84. The cued LOS reticle is a bold, dashed crosshair symbol that represents the crew-members acquisition source in the flight symbology and weapon symbology formats. The reticle is generated by the aircraft symbol generator or the display processor. When the fixed gun is used, the cued LOS reticle represents the same mil value as the LOS reticle. 6-85. HMD displayNVS. The CPG and pilots HMD can present the LOS reticle/cruise LOS reticle and the cued LOS reticle in the flight symbology format when the NVS selection is PNVS or TADS. The reticles from point to point and the center gap are nominally the same dimensions. Table 6-4 provides the mil values for the FOV and the LOS reticle dimensions for the PNVS or TADS FLIR WFOV when selected as the NVS. Table 6-4. Mil Values With the LOS Reticle and Cued LOS Reticle SENSOR PNVS TADS/FLIR FOV WIDE HFOV 711.1 636.5 VFOV 533.3 490.7 HRET 65.3 58.4 VRET 62.0 57.1 HGAP 20.8 18.6 VGAP 19.8 18.2

6-86. HMD and ORT (HMD, HOD, and HDD) with the TADS Sight Select. These displays are used by the CPG and provide him with a 45-degree FOV diagonal down to 0.45 degrees FOV diagonal depending on the TADS sensor and field of view selected. Table 6-5 shows the mil values for TADS FLIR and DTV fields of view and the TADS LOS reticle in the FOV. Round numbers are used in range formulas.

6-18

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

Table 6-5. HMD, HOD, and HDD Mil Values With the TADS LOS Reticle SENSOR TV TV TV FLIR FLIR FLIR FLIR KEY: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. SENSOR: Day TV or FLIR FOV: Field of View HFOV: Horizontal field of view VFOV: Vertical field of view HRET: Horizontal LOS reticle, outside tip to outside tip VRET: Vertical LOS reticle, outside tip to outside tip HGAP: Gap in center of LOS reticle, measured horizontally VGAP: Gap in center of LOS reticle, measured vertically 6-87. Longbow MPD Mil Determination. The AH-64D Longbow Apache MPD can also present the sensor video with flight and weapon symbology. The MPD is a 1:1 aspect ratio compared to the 4:3 aspect ratio with the HMD and ORT that results in a different formatted video. The Longbow MPD allows the sensor video to be presented in a wide, normal, or zoom view selection. The MPD view selection is different from the actual sensor FOV selection. A brief description is provided below. Wide viewTop and bottom area on MPD contains black or grayscale borders, and the image is cropped about 5 percent in width (2.5 percent on each side); in height, the vertical FOV presented is nominally the same as the sensor vertical FOV. The mil dimensions provided for the MPD wide-view tables are for the video presented and do not include the top/bottom black or gray-scale borders. Normal viewThe image is cropped about 25 percent in width (12.5 percent on each side); in height, the FOV is nominally the same as the sensor vertical FOV. Zoom viewThe center 30 percent of the image is presented over the entire display with 70 percent of the image cropped. FOV WIDE NARROW ZOOM WIDE MEDIUM NARROW ZOOM HFOV 56.9 12.8 6.4 636.5 130.3 38.4 19.2 VFOV 42.7 9.6 4.8 490.7 100.1 29.7 14.8 HRET 11.4 2.6 1.3 127.3 26.1 7.7 3.8 VRET 8.5 1.9 1.0 98.1 20.0 5.9 3.0 HGAP 1.7 0.4 0.2 18.5 3.8 1.1 0.6 VGAP 0.9 0.2 0.10 9.8 2.0 0.6 0.3

6-19

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

6-88. MPD Views With NVS Sensor Selected. The following three tables (Table 6-6 through 6-8) reflect the NVS sensor video FOV and LOS reticle symbology presented on the Longbow MPD in mil dimensions for the PNVS and TADS FLIR WFOV when selected as the NVS sensor. The reticle dimensions from point to point and center gap are nominal for the LOS reticle, cruise reticle, and cued LOS reticle in the flight symbology format. 6-89. MPD Views With the TADS Sight Select. The MPD can present the TADS sensor video with the TADS LOS reticle for target acquisition providing a 44-degree field-of-view diagonal down to 0.24 degrees FOV diagonal depending on the sensor, sensor field of view, and MPD view selected. Tables 6-9 through 6-11 show the mil values for FLIR and DTV fields of view and TADS LOS reticle. The TADS LOS reticle is generated by the TEU and displayed as part of the TADS imagery. The reticle displayed in the different MPD views will change in apparent size on the display video because of video reformatting; however, it will retain the nominal mil dimensions of the TADS LOS reticle for the sensor FOV as displayed on the ORT or HMD. Table 6-6. MPD View Mil Values With NVS Sensor and LOS ReticleWide View SENSOR PNVS TADS FLIR FOV WIDE HFOV* 678.1 606.5 VFOV* 533.3 490.6 HRET 75.5 67.5 VRET 74.2 69.4 HGAP 25.2 22.5 VGAP 24.8 22.8

* Reflects nominal video FOV in mil dimensions presented on the MPD. Table 6-7. MPD View Mil Values With NVS Sensor and LOS ReticleNormal View SENSOR PNVS TADS FLIR FOV WIDE HFOV* 542.6 483.9 VFOV* 533.3 490.6 HRET 60.4 53.9 VRET 59.4 54.6 HGAP 20.1 18.0 VGAP 19.8 18.2

* Reflects nominal video FOV in mil dimensions presented on the MPD. Table 6-8. MPD View Mil Values With NVS Sensor and LOS ReticleZoom View SENSOR PNVS TADS FLIR FOV WIDE HFOV* 348.7 310.1 VFOV* 342.6 314.6 HRET 38.8 34.5 VRET 38.1 35.0 HGAP 12.9 11.5 VGAP 12.7 11.7

* Reflects nominal video FOV in mil dimensions presented on the MPD.

6-20

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

Table 6-9. MPD View Mil Values With the TADS and TADS LOS ReticleWide View SENSOR TV TV TV FLIR FLIR FLIR FLIR
KEY: 1. SENSOR: Day TV or FLIR 2. FOV: Field of view 3. HFOV: Horizontal field of view 4. VFOV: Vertical field of view (does not include top/bottom borders) 5. HRET: Horizontal LOS reticle, outside tip to outside tip 6. VRET: Vertical LOS reticle, outside tip to outside tip 7. HGAP: Gap in center of LOS reticle, measured horizontally 8. VGAP: Gap in center of LOS reticle, measured vertically * Reflects nominal video FOV in mil dimensions presented on the MPD.

FOV WIDE NARROW ZOOM WIDE MEDIUM NARROW ZOOM

HFOV* 54.0 12.2 6.1 606.5 123.8 36.5 18.2

VFOV* 42.7 9.6 4.8 490.7 100.1 29.7 14.8

HRET 11.4 2.6 1.3 127.3 26.1 7.7 3.8

VRET 8.5 1.9 1.0 98.1 20.0 5.9 3.0

HGAP 1.7 0.4 0.2 18.5 3.8 1.1 0.6

VGAP 0.9 0.2 0.1 9.8 2.0 0.6 0.3

Table 6-10. MPD View Mil Values With the TADS and TADS LOS ReticleNormal View SENSOR TV TV TV FLIR FLIR FLIR FLIR
KEY: 1. SENSOR: Day TV or FLIR 2. FOV: Field of view 3. HFOV: Horizontal field of view 4. VFOV: Vertical field of view 5. HRET: Horizontal LOS reticle, outside tip to outside tip 6. VRET: Vertical LOS reticle, outside tip to outside tip 7. HGAP: Gap in center of LOS reticle, measured horizontally 8. VGAP: Gap in center of LOS reticle, measured vertically * Reflects nominal video FOV in mil dimensions presented on the MPD.

FOV WIDE NARROW ZOOM WIDE MEDIUM NARROW ZOOM

HFOV* 42.6 9.6 4.8 483.9 97.7 28.8 14.4

VFOV* 42.7 9.6 4.8 490.6 100.1 29.7 14.8

HRET 11.4 2.6 1.3 127.3 26.1 7.7 3.8

VRET 8.5 1.9 1.0 98.1 20.0 5.9 3.0

HGAP 1.7 0.4 0.2 18.5 3.8 1.1 0.6

VGAP 0.9 0.2 0.1 9.8 2.0 0.6 0.3

6-21

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Table 6-11. MPD View Mil Values With the TADS and TADS LOS ReticleZoom View SENSOR TV TV TV FLIR FLIR FLIR FLIR
KEY: 1. SENSOR: Day TV or FLIR 2. FOV: Field of view 3. HFOV: Horizontal field of view 4. VFOV*: Vertical field of view 5. HRET: Horizontal LOS reticle, outside tip to outside tip 6. VRET: Vertical LOS reticle, outside tip to outside tip 7. HGAP: Gap in center of LOS reticle, measured horizontally 8. VGAP: Gap in center of LOS reticle, measured vertically * Reflects nominal video FOV in mil dimensions presented on the MPD.

FOV WIDE NARROW ZOOM WIDE MEDIUM NARROW ZOOM

HFOV* 27.0 6.1 3.0 310.1 62.0 18.2 9.1

VFOV* 27.0 6.1 3.0 314.6 63.5 18.8 9.4

HRET 11.4 2.6 1.3 127.3 26.1 7.7 3.8

VRET 8.5 1.9 1.0 98.1 20.0 5.9 3.0

HGAP 1.7 0.4 0.2 18.5 3.8 1.1 0.6

VGAP 0.9 0.2 0.1 9.8 2.0 0.6 0.3

6-22

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

MIL DETERMINATION FOR THE OH-58D (KIOWA) 6-90. Table 6-12 shows the mil values for the Kiowa MFD. Table 6-12. Mil Values for the Kiowa Warrior SENSOR FOV RAS/WT RAS/HT MILLIMETERS LOS/ R/A/G
2.9 .7 3.6 1.8 1.1 .5

MILLIMETERS LOS/HF
4.2 1.0 5.2 2.6 1.6 .8

GPC

GPCL/ H-V
19.2 4.8 24 12 7.2 3.6

TV TV TIS TIS TIS TIS

WIDE NARROW WIDE WIDE 2x NARROW NARROW 2x

.6 .4 2.0 1.0 .6 .3

20.2 5.0 25.2 12.6 7.6 3.8

10.2 2.6 12.8 6.4 3.8 1.9

KEY: RAS/WT: rocket aiming symbol, width. RAS/HT: rocket aiming symbol, height. LOS/R/A/G: line of sight, rockets, ATAS, gun. LOS/HF: line of sight, Hellfire. GPC: gun pitch cue, solid ring. GPCL/H-V: gun pitch cue lines, horizontal and vertical.

LASER-OFF OPERATIONS
6-91. Laser range finders can fail. Always have a back-up plan. Few units can use their laser range-finders during routine home-station training. Use the mil-determination methods to send spot reports, target handovers, and battle-damage assessments. In addition, units may set up a training program on the ground using M22 binoculars. These binoculars have mil scales. They reinforce the methods of mil-based range determination before the crew executes them in the aircraft. Most aircraft are equipped with GPS or inertial navigation. Crews may use these devices to determine range to target.

SECTION IV CREW COMMUNICATION STANDARDIZING CREW COMMUNICATION

6-92. Attack helicopter crew-member work loads increase during an engagement. Review of videotapes of actual weapons engagements from armed conflicts shows that communications between crew members lack standardization and are often confusing. Because the sequence of communication is unknown, crew members become confused in the busy cockpit. Crew members sometimes become irritated with other crew members

6-23

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

because of a communication breakdown. For this reason, units should develop standardized target engagement procedures (steps) to provide a structure for consistent, effective engagements. 6-93. Rote memorization of words by crews is not the intent of this section. The intent is for the phrases to make sense and become part of the crews vocabulary through training. TCs 1-209, 1-213, and 1-214 discuss crew coordination and establish a list of standardized phrases. 6-94. This section defines the process of cockpit communication and outlines the steps necessary to implement standard fire commands. This section gives some reasons why crews should use standard fire commands during engagements. CREW TURNOVER 6-95. When crew turnover occurs, the commander may have to cross-level crews quickly to meet missions. Crews must use standard sequences during target acquisition and engagement to avoid confusion between existing crew members and newly assigned crew members. TIME SEQUENCE 6-96. Testing shows that standard sequences during target acquisition and engagement significantly reduce engagement times. FOCUS 6-97. Standard sequences help the crew to stay focused during demanding engagements. Crews should use proper communication in training to better prepare themselves for actual combat engagements. Crew communication and coordination consist of the following essential elements. COMMUNICATE POSITIVELY 6-98. Communication is positive when the sender directs, announces, requests, or offers. The receiver acknowledges the sender. Positive communication Is quickly and clearly understood. Permits timely actions. Uses a limited vocabulary work-intensive cockpit. DIRECT ASSISTANCE 6-99. A crew member may direct assistance, either for himself or another crew member, when required. An example is communication during an aircraft emergency procedure. ANNOUNCE ACTIONS 6-100. Each crew member will announce actions that affect other crew members. to improve understanding in a

6-24

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

OFFER ASSISTANCE 6-101. A crew member will offer assistance when he sees that another crew member needs help. ACKNOWLEDGE ACTIONS 6-102. Crew members must understand directives and announcements from other crew members. Acknowledgements must be short and positively indicate that the crew members received and understood the message. BE EXPLICIT 6-103. Crew members should use clear terms and phrases and positively acknowledge critical information.

FIRE COMMANDS
6-104. The following are the elements of standard fire commands. Crews should use standard fire commands for all target engagements: Alert. Target location. Movement commands. Target identification. Weapon selection. Weapon engagement. Weapon effect. Adjust fire command. 6-105. The following is an explanation of each element of the standard fire command. In this explanation, target refers to ground targets and air targets. ALERT 6-106. This is simply one crew member spotting a target and notifying another crew member. TARGET LOCATION 6-107. The crew member who observed the target tells the other crew member its location. MOVEMENT COMMANDS 6-108. Movement commands are commands to the crew member flying the aircraft that explain how to maneuver the aircraft to engage the target. TARGET IDENTIFICATION 6-109. Crew determines what the target is. If not readily apparent, the crew uses deliberate action to classify the target.

6-25

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

WEAPON SELECTION 6-110. The crew determines the appropriate weapon for engagement. For example, if the crew will fire a missile, the gunner will announce from which side of the aircraft that he will launch the missile. WEAPON ENGAGEMENT 6-111. The crew member firing will announce shot before trigger pull for missiles or rockets or firing for cannon. WEAPON EFFECT 6-112. The firing crew member reports target effect for BDA. ADJUST-FIRE COMMAND 6-113. This command adjusts the fire of weapons on target. A crew member primarily uses this command for engagement with rockets. It is similar to shift commands for artillery.

LINES OF COMMUNICATIONS
6-114. Lines of communications must be established or communicated during each step of the engagement. The following examples contain information that crew members should pass between themselves. ALERT 6-115. The following is an example of communication of an alert: PILOT: Gunner, target. (The pilot indicates that he sees a target, and he wants to hand the target over to the CPG for identification.) COPILOT: Tally. (This message tells the pilot that the copilot sees the target.) TARGET LOCATION 6-116. The following is an example of a target-location communication: COPILOT: 240 degrees, 3,200 meters. (The copilot tells the pilot the location of the target.) MOVEMENT COMMANDS 6-117. The following is an example of a movement command: COPILOT: Turn right to 240 degrees. (The copilot tells the pilot to turn the aircraft.) PILOT: Turning right to 240 degrees. (The pilot repeats the command for confirmation.) TARGET IDENTIFICATION 6-118. The following is an example of target identification communication: COPILOT: BMP, 3,200 meters. (The copilot identifies the target and states the range.)

6-26

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

WEAPONS SELECTION 6-119. The following is an example of a weapons-selection communication: COPILOT: One Hellfire ready, left side. Designating. (This communication denotes that the crew member will launch the missile from the left side of the aircraft.) The copilot states the weapon of choice for the engagement and declares laser status. PILOT: Turning right, in constraints. (The pilot maneuvers the aircraft into constraints.) WEAPON ENGAGEMENT 6-120. The following is an example of a weapon-engagement communication: COPILOT: Shot. (This communication indicates trigger pull for the weapon.) WEAPONS EFFECT 6-121. The following is an example of a weapons-effect communication: COPILOT: Target destroyed. (This message tells the pilot that the target has been destroyed.)

PHRASEOLOGY
6-122. The most important aspect of crew coordination is the sequence. The following phrases are examples that facilitate crew coordination. ALERT TERMINOLOGY 6-123. The following alert terminology is commonly used: Target. A crew member has spotted a ground target. Bogey. A crew member has spotted an unidentified airborne target. Bandit. A crew member has spotted an identified hostile airborne target. Gunner, target. The pilot wants to hand a target over to the copilot/gunner or door gunner. Pilot, target. The gunner wants to hand a target over to the pilot. Note: Crews may substitute bogey or bandit for target. Multiple targets. The pilot/crew has spotted more than one ground target. Multiple bandits (bogeys). The pilot/crew has spotted more than one airborne target. TARGET LOCATION 6-124. Target location information includes Identification of the target (if known). Magnetic heading to the target; for example, 090 degrees. The crew states the heading from the nose of the aircraft. Range to targetestimated range or laser range to target.

6-27

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

MOVEMENT COMMANDS (IF REQUIRED) 6-125. The movement commands include Break. Immediate action command to perform a maneuver to deviate from present ground track; the word right or left will follow it. Hold At hover. Maintain present hover altitude and heading. In flight. Maintain airspeed, altitude, and heading.

Slide. Horizontal movement of aircraft followed by a direction: left, right, forward, or back. Stop. Go no further; halt present action. Turn At hover. Perform pedal turn right or left. In flight. Turn right or left from current ground track.

Stop Turn. Terminates turn. Pilot holds heading/altitude present at stop turn command. TARGET IDENTIFICATION 6-126. Target identification is self-explanatory. The crew states the identity of the target. WEAPONS SELECTION 6-127. Weapons selection is self-explanatory. The engaging crew member will announce the weapon of choice for target engagement. WEAPONS ENGAGEMENT 6-128. The following are terms commonly used during weapons engagement: Ready. Used by the pilot or gunner during engagements; tells the other crew member that the selected weapon is ready to fire. Shot. Announced at trigger pull for rocket or missile engagements. Firing. Announced at trigger pull for cannon engagements. Searching. Indicates that the gunner is actively searching for targets or that he has selected a wider field of view and is observing the target area for munition impacts. Match and shoot. Cooperative rocket engagement in AH-64; tells the pilot that the CPG is ready and range is in the FCC and that the pilot can line up symbology to fire rockets. Sensing. Indicates that the gunner is looking for rocket impacts to adjust subsequent rounds during follow-on rocket engagements. WEAPONS EFFECT 6-129. The following are terms commonly used to describe weapons effects: Hit. Rounds complete and target was hit. Destroyed. Rounds complete and target was killed.

6-28

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

Miss. Rounds complete and crew did not hit target. Adjusting. Command from gunner that a miss has occurred and he is adjusting rounds to target. Bad missile. Indicates that an apparent missile malfunction has occurred based on suspect flight path. ADJUST-FIRE COMMANDS 6-130. The following are commonly used range-adjustment terms: Long. Impact is behind the target. Short. Impact is in front of the target. 6-131. The following are examples of commonly used azimuth-adjustment terms: Line. Azimuth is correct. Left. Impact is to the left of the target. Right. Impact is to the right of the target. 6-132. The following are examples of commonly used adjust-fire terms: Short, line. Impact is in front of the target, but the azimuth is correct. Long, left. Impact is to the left and behind the target. Short, right. Impact is to the right and in front of the target. MISCELLANEOUS WEAPONS TERMS AND COMMANDS 6-133. The following are examples of miscellaneous weapons terms and commands: Cease fire. This command means to stop firing but continue to track. Heads down. The gunner is in a weapons mode; the gunners attention is primarily focused inside the aircraft. Heads up/out. The gunner is not in a weapons mode; the gunners attention is primarily focused outside the aircraft. Strobe. The pilot indicates that the aircraft is being tracked by radar; the pilot will then give a heading direction and identify the radar, if possible. Spot. The aircraft sight/missile target-designation energy. seeker is receiving laser

Tally. The crew/crew member sees the traffic, obstacle, or target. Drifting. The crew/crew member alerts to the unintentional or uncommanded movement of the aircraft. Looking. The crew is looking for the traffic, obstacle, or target. No joy. The crew/crew member does not see or identify the traffic, obstacle, or target. Traffic. The crew/crew member identifies and alerts others to the presence of friendly aircraft that may pose a hazard to the current route of flight of the aircraft; crews/crew members will follow this alert with an approximate clock position, altitude, and distance; for example, Traffic six oclock, one-thousand AGL, two-thousand meters.

6-29

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Visual. Contact is established visually.

REMOTE HELLFIRE MISSILE FIRING

6-134. A remote Hellfire missile call for fire is a concise message initiated by the laser designator. It contains all information that the designator and launch aircraft need to effect an engagement, with the exception of the exact positioning of the two aircraft. Because of the specific parameters that are required to safely and successfully fire remote Hellfire missiles, the engagements are usually preplanned or part of unit SOPs.

REMOTE CALL FOR FIRE

6-135. The call for fire is transmitted in four parts consisting of seven elements. The four parts are as follows: Designator identification and warning order. Number of missiles, target location, and control. Ready call with time of flight of missile, if known. Execution call. 6-136. The four parts consist of seven elements: Designator identification. Warning order. Number of missiles requested with requested code. Targeting information and laser target line. Ready call with time of flight. Execution call. Battle-damage assessment.

CALL-FOR-FIRE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATOR IDENTIFICATION 6-137. The designator identification call tells the launch aircraft who is calling for the missiles, and it clears the net for the mission. WARNING ORDER 6-138. The warning order alerts the launch crew of the upcoming mission request. NUMBER OF MISSILES REQUESTED 6-139. The number of missiles is self-explanatory. Crews will always launch missiles on the designators designated code. For multiple missiles, unless specified, the launch aircraft will launch missiles with 15 seconds between launches. Also, unless specified, the launch crew will select LOAL-LO or LOAL-HI, depending on terrain masks, cloud ceiling, and target range. Note: The designating crew assumes that launch crew members accept the mission if they acknowledge the warning-order transmission. If the launch

6-30

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

crew members cannot accept the mission, they alert the designating crew at this time and give the reason for not accepting the mission; for example, the launch crew responds Blue 6, mission denied, out of missiles. TARGETING INFORMATION 6-140. This information allows the launch aircraft to launch the missile on the proper heading and laser target line and within range constraints. The target location can be a grid coordinate (six- or eight-digit) or a preplotted target reference point. Designating aircraft will announce Call when ready, Fire when ready, or At my command. If available, target altitude should also be included in this transmission. READY CALL AND TIME OF FLIGHT 6-141. The launch aircraft calls the designator when he is ready to fire and provides the missile time of flight. EXECUTION CALL 6-142. The designator initiates the missile launch by transmitting Fire, over if he specified At my command. The launch aircraft responds with Shot, over. The crew member launches the missile when the designator responds with Shot, out. 6-143. For multiple launches, the launch aircraft will announce Shot one, over, followed by a 15-second delay, then Shot two, over. 6-144. The designating aircraft may also specify Fire when ready. When the designator gives this command, the firing aircraft announces Shot, over. The designator responds with Shot, out. Then, the crew member fires the missile. BATTLE-DAMAGE ASSESSMENT 6-145. The designating aircraft will send the BDA to the launch aircraft. SEQUENCE OF RADIO TRANSMISSIONS 6-146. Figures 6-1 through 6-3 give the sequence of radio transmissions for fire missions.

WARNING
The crew will make the transmissions in Figures 6-1 through 6-3 via secure means.

6-31

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Note: The numbers transmissions.

in

parentheses

denote

the

sequence

of

radio

DESIGNATING AIRCRAFTBLUE 6 (1) BLUE 4, THIS IS BLUE 6, ONE ALPHA, OVER.

LAUNCH AIRCRAFTBLUE 4

(2) BLUE 6, THIS IS BLUE 4, ONE ALPHA, OUT. (3) GRID AA 12345678, ALTITUDE 1,078, LTL 160, RANGE 4,000, CALL READY, OVER. (4) GRID AA 12345678, ALTITUDE 1,078, LTL 160, RANGE 4,000, ROGER, OUT. (5) READY, TIME OF FLIGHT 20 SECONDS. (6) TOF 20 SECONDS (STANDBY OR FIRE) FIRE, OVER. (7) SHOT, OVER. (8) SHOT, OUT. (9) BDA: 1 T-72 DESTROYED, GRID AA 12345678, TIME: 2115. (10) BDA: 1 T-72 DESTROYED, GRID: AA 12345678, TIME: 2115.

Figure 6-1. Example of Call for Fire, One Missile, Two Attack Helicopters

6-32

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

Note: The numbers in parentheses show the sequence of radio transmissions. DESIGNATING AIRCRAFTBLUE 6 (1) BLUE 4, THIS IS BLUE 6, ONE ALPHA, ONE BRAVO, RIPPLE, OVER. (2) BLUE 6, THIS IS BLUE 4 ONE ALPHA, ONE BRAVO, RIPPLE, OUT. (3) GRID AA 12345678, LTL 160, RANGE 4,000, CALL READY, OVER. (4) GRID AA 12345678, LTL 160, RANGE 4,000, ROGER, OUT. (5) READY, TIME OF FLIGHT 20 SECONDS. (6) TOF 20 SECONDS (STANDBY OR FIRE) FIRE, OVER. (7) SHOT ONE, OVER. (8) SHOT ONE, OUT. (9) SHOT TWO, OVER. (10) SHOT TWO, OUT. (11) BDA: 2 T-72s DESTROYED, GRID AA 12345678, TIME: 2115. (12) BDA: 2 T-72s DESTROYED, GRID: AA 12345678, TIME: 2115.
Figure 6-2. Example of Call for Fire, Two Missiles, Ripple Fire, Two Attack Helicopters

LAUNCH AIRCRAFTBLUE 4

6-33

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Note: The numbers in parentheses denote the sequence of radio transmissions. CALLING AIRCRAFTBLUE 6 (1) BLUE 4, THIS IS BLUE 6, FIRE MISSION (GUN, ROCKETS, OR HELLFIRE), OVER. (2) BLUE 6, THIS IS BLUE 4, FIRE MISSION, HELLFIRE, OUT. (3) ONE T-72, (POLAR, SHIFT FROM KNOWN POINT, OR GRID) GRID AA 12345678, 1,078 FEET, ALPHA SPOT ON, OVER. (4) ONE T-72, GRID AA 12345678, 1,078 FEET, TALLY ALPHA SPOT, OUT. (5) CALL SPOT (OR FIRING), OVER. (6) FIRING, OVER. (7) BDA: 1 T-72 DESTROYED, GRID: AA 12345678, TIME: 2115. (8) ROGER, END OF MISSION, OUT. Note: On transmission #3, the calling aircraft may use the following for handover: Polar: 360 degrees, 4,000 meters from location. Shift from known point: two kilometers south of TRP 5, EA CAT. Grid: AA 12345678, 1,078 feet (altitude). Crews should use laser spot-tracker operations for this procedure. SHOOTING AIRCRAFTBLUE 4

Figure 6-3. Autonomous Fire Mission to Apache

6-34

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

SECTION V CHECKS ON TRAINING PRECOMBAT CHECKS

6-147. Commanders conduct precombat checks to ensure that the unit is prepared for the mission. Aircrews and aircraft require extensive precombat checks to ensure mission readiness. 6-148. Precombat checks are a part of all missions. They are included in this manual to increase the success of helicopter gunnery operations. The following paragraphs contain a suggested format for the aircrew precombat checks.

BEFORE-MISSION RECEIPT CHECKS

6-149. Preflight the aircraft according to the appropriate checklist with the PPC in progress. Place the aircraft logbook in a known location, preferably in the aircraft. 6-150. Refuel the aircraft, and load it with ammunition (if applicable). Compute weight and balance for the aircraft load. 6-151. Place aircrews on the appropriate crew-rest schedule. The commander and the ASO should track crew rest.

UPON-MISSION RECEIPT CHECKS

6-152. The commander and company/troop planning cells provide the following information, gathered from the various unit staff sections, to the crews: Navigation/air-route planning according to posted A2C2 plan. Communications card or SOIs. COMSEC/IFF codes for aircraft. Mission graphics. Fire support and fire distribution on the objective. Weather and light data and fuel requirements.* Tactical flight-plan preparation and filing. Risk assessment. Assessment of enemy capability.* Actions on contact.* Aviation Mission Planning Station productsa three-way check of all AMPS products should be SOP within a company/troop; the best time for correcting mistakes is before mission execution.* *Note: Units may develop much of this information concurrently with the staff. Units can continually track and update the items marked with the asterisks before mission receipt.

6-35

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

PREPARING FOR THE MISSION

6-153. After receiving the mission briefing (either written or oral), the mission unit executes the following actions: The commander conducts a briefing to cover more detailed flight and tactical procedures for the mission aircrews; the crew briefing contained in FM 3-04.112(FM 1-112) is recommended. The planning cells receive updates from the staff, continually updating the friendly and enemy situation, as well as weather and environmental considerations. By backward planning, the commander and planning cells determine the missions time sequence. Crews file a flight plan or field strip at flight operations with a current risk assessment for the mission.

FINAL CHECKS
6-154. Before the crews move to the aircraft, the following checks will take place. GRAPHICS 6-155. Check mission graphics for completeness and accuracy. The commander or a designated platoon leader will inspect the mission graphics of the mission crews. Use a known, properly prepared map as the baseline. This technique can be ongoing throughout the planning process, but a quick check before the mission is critical. COMMUNICATIONS CARD 6-156. If the crews copy their own frequencies and call signs, designate a crew member to read the card aloud to the crews to check accuracy. Ensure that crews know the proper frequencies to conduct a communications check. MISSION STATEMENT AND COMMANDERS INTENT 6-157. The commander will read the mission statement and the commanders intent to the crews. CHAIN OF COMMAND 6-158. Restate the chain of command, and reiterate the downed-pilot points and the SERE plan at this time. Ask for questions, and send the crews to their aircraft.

6-36

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 6

CREW CHECKS

6-159. Crews will check the following items before getting into the aircraft: Crew members are within the limits of crew-endurance policy. The aircraft ignition key is present. Aviation life-support equipment, both personal and crew, is present. Checklist, operators manual, and all mission-related publications are available. Special mission equipment (such as night vision goggles and sidearms) is available and function check is complete. COMSEC and IFF codes are loaded in appropriate equipment.

RUN-UP CHECKS
6-160. Complete the start sequence according to the appropriate operators manual checklist. Crews are required to complete weapons system initialization according to the appropriate aircraft ATM. For armed helicopters, weapons checks and boresights are one of the most critical precombat checks.

COMMUNICATIONS CHECK
6-161. For brevity, complete the communications check in the following manner. Techniques for communications checks may not be compatible with all communications packages in armed helicopters. The commander may use this technique for SOP development. 6-162. Chalk 1 starts the check on FM, selects UHF and transmits, and then selects VHF and transmits; for example, This is (call sign) on 1 (FM internal frequency, nonsecure), 2 (UHF internal frequency), and 3 (VHF internal frequency). 6-163. This process continues through the chalk order until all aircraft in the flight have checked. All aircraft will monitor to determine which radios work on which aircraft. 6-164. Chalk 1 announces This is (call sign); go secure on 1. This call instructs the flight to select the secure mode for its FM radio. The check progresses, in chalk order, but only the FM is used. 6-165. Once FM secure is checked, the flight can go active on Have Quick, with a designated aircraft in the flight sending the time. Sending the time is not required if the unit is equipped with self-timing radio systems. 6-166. If crews use this procedure during all training missions, communications checks become quick and routine. The commander may need to readjust radio nets because of nonfunctioning radios in the flight. The commander should let all crews know which radio nets will be used before takeoff.

6-37

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

6-167. Once all checks are complete and the commander is satisfied that the flight can communicate, he will call Execute card. This command will tell the crews to tune their radios to the predetermined nets for the mission; it probably will be the last radio transmission until takeoff.

PRACTICING
6-168. When the commander or AMC calls for takeoff, he must assume that the crews in his flight have conducted all weapons system checks. Units should practice precombat checks before all training missions. When practiced regularly, these checks will become quickly performed habits for unit crews.

6-38

This page intentionally left blank.

Chapter 7

Engagement Techniques
Attack helicopters can be extremely effective if aircrews understand the techniques and standards associated with the employment of their weapons systems. This chapter discusses the terminology, procedures, and standards for helicopter-fired weapons.

SECTION I MODES AND TYPES OF FIRE TYPES OF FIRE

7-1. The two types of fire are direct and indirect. FM 5-20(FM 101-5-1) defines direct and indirect fire: Direct fire is fire directed at a target that is visible to the firer or firing unit. Indirect fire is fire delivered on a target which cannot be seen by the firing unit.

MODES OF FIRE
7-2. Armed helicopters use three modes of firehover fire, running fire, and diving fire. HOVER FIRE 7-3. Hover fire is any engagement conducted below ETL. It may be either stationary or moving. For objectively scored gunnery ranges, hover fire is broken into two subgroups. When hover is specified on a gunnery task, the crew will conduct the task from a stationary hover. This definition is not intended to conflict with aircraft ATMs. Stationary Fire 7-4. Hover engagements occur with the aircraft at stationary hover. Crews can deliver both direct and indirect fires during hover fire. Moving Fire 7-5. Moving fire is an engagement from a moving helicopter below effective translational lift. Horizontal movement may be in any direction, but some deliberate movement is present. Crews can deliver both direct and indirect fires during moving fire.

7-1

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

RUNNING FIRE 7-6. Running fire is an engagement from a moving helicopter above ETL. Crews can deliver both direct and indirect fires during running fire. The forward airspeed adds stability to the helicopter and increases the delivery accuracy of weapon systems, particularly rockets. DIVING FIRE 7-7. Diving fire is a direct-fire engagement from a helicopter that is in a diving flight profile according to the aircraft ATM. The airspeed and altitude of the aircraft improve the accuracy of engagements, particularly for rockets. The following are the advantages of diving fire: Normally, decreased vulnerability to small-arms fire. Increased armament loads because of decreased power requirements. Increased accuracy because of fewer rotor down-wash effects on munitions and a more stable launch platform. A smaller beaten zone in the target-effect area.

SECTION II TERMINOLOGY AND INFORMATION ON WEAPONS EFFECTIVE RANGE

7-8. FM 5-20(FM 101-5-1) defines effective range as, that range at which a weapon or weapons system has a 50-percent probability of hitting a target. The effective range of a weapon extends from the minimum effective range to the maximum effective range. Maximum effective range is the longest range at which a weapon has a 50-percent probability of hitting a target. 7-9. The standard targets used in determining effective range for cannons are 3- by 3-meter plywood silhouettes. These are vehicle-sized targets. 7-10. The training tables in this manual require aircrews to engage targets within the effective range of the weapon with target-practice ammunition. However, crews may have to shoot long-range engagements in combat using service ammunition.

2.75-INCH ROCKETS
7-11. Whether fired from an AH-64 or OH-58D, the 2.75-inch rocket system displays similar characteristics. The following general information applies to all helicopters armed with this weapon. 7-12. The rocket system mounted on attack helicopters is a unique weapon system. Rockets fired from an attack helicopter possess characteristics of both direct- and indirect-fire weapons. Like indirect artillery fire, 2.75-inch rockets are most effective when fired in mass. In addition, helicopter crews can fire rockets in the direct-fire and indirect-fire mode.

7-2

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 7

7-13. Crews can expect 8 to 12 mils of dispersion (sometimes greater, depending on a variety of factors) from rockets fired from helicopters. The MK 66 rocket motor spins clockwise up to 30 revolutions per second to motor burnout caused by the flutes on the motor nozzle. As the motor burns out, the clockwise rotation of the rocket zeroes out and the wrap-around fins cause the rocket to rotate rapidly counterclockwise. Engineers designed this reversal of rotation for the following reasons: The high rate of rotation of the rocket may keep the set-back fuze of the warhead from arming because of the centrifugal force of the spinning rocket. The MPSM warheads submunition (other cargo warheads could be affected as well) ejection pattern is disrupted by high rates of rotation; the pattern of submunition impacts is inconsistent and provides poor target coverage without proper submunition ejection. Live-fire testing shows that most rockets achieve best effectiveness between 3,000 and 5,000 meters; these test results apply to both MPSM and unitary warhead rockets. 7-14. Crews must select the proper weapon for the target. The targets most suited for rockets are large target areas with high concentrations of enemy personnel and materiel. Figures 7-1 and 7-2 show examples of rocket targets. The targets best suited for neutralization with rockets include Troops in the open. Tactical assembly areas. Command, control, and communications facilities. Motor parks and vehicle marshalling area. Convoys of thin-skinned vehicles. River-crossing sites. Deployed artillery or air-defense sites.

7-3

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 7-1. Example of Rocket Range

7-4

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 7

Figure 7-2. Emerging Contemporary Threat Array

BORESIGHTING AND DYNAMIC HARMONIZATION

7-15. Armament personnel and aircrews must adjust each weapon system to ensure that the aiming point and the impact point of the projectile are the same. Boresighting is the first step in this process. It involves adjusting the boreline axis of the weapon and the optical axis of the sight. Boresighting does not compensate for deviations caused by the ballistic characteristics covered in Chapter 4. 7-16. Normally, armament personnel are responsible for boresighting before range training. However, aircrews should be knowledgeable in the procedures for boresighting weapon systems. The publications in the bibliography describe boresighting procedures for specific helicopters and weapon subsystems. Table VI shows the ammunition for weapons calibration and verification. 7-17. The dynamic harmonization procedure is for AH-64 units only. Crews conduct dynamic harmonization during Table VI. This procedure greatly improves the accuracy of the 30-millimeter cannon.

7-5

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

7-18. The range specified by the dynamic harmonization procedure (range specified within the applicable operators manual) is selected to negate the effect of environmental conditions. In addition, the FOV diagrams and the correctors are scaled to that range. Note: This procedure is not a replacement for the CBHK ground procedure.

SECTION III CREW TECHNIQUES FIRING TECHNIQUES

7-19. Firing helicopter weapons systems requires a great deal of skill by the pilot and CPG/CPO. These skills require development and sustainment. They include aircraft control and burst on target. AIRCRAFT CONTROL 7-20. Aircraft control is most critical when engaging targets with rockets. Changes in pitch attitude and relative wind affect rockets as they leave the launcher. Regardless of the engagement technique used, aircrews should use a consistent sequence. This sequence is known as the four Tstarget, torque, trim, and target. This sequence, regardless of aircraft type, assures a consistent launch. The following describes the sequence. Target Verified 7-21. Crews verify that they are engaging the correct target. They verify the correct azimuth. The pilot may select key terrain to assist in lining up on the target. Torque Verified 7-22. The pilot verifies the torque required to maintain altitude and does not change it. Any torque changes during the firing sequence will affect the distance that the rockets fly based on the changed induced flow from the rotor system. Trim Verified 7-23. The trim of the aircraft includes both horizontal and vertical trim. During hovering fire, the pilot should verify and adjust the pitch attitude (vertical trim) for the specific range with the cyclic. During running fire, the pilot should verify and adjust the trim of the aircraft (horizontal trim) with the pedals before firing. An out-of-trim condition will deflect the rockets toward the opposite side. That is, if the nose of the aircraft is out of trim to the left (right sideslip), the rockets will plane into the relative wind to the right, and vice versa. Target Reverified 7-24. Finally, the crew reverifies the correct target and azimuth before firing.

7-6

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 7

BURST ON TARGET 7-25. BOT is the technique used to adjust fires on target. This technique requires the crew member firing the weapon to sense projectile impacts of the weapon system and then use proper technique to adjust the rounds on target. Crews use BOT with cannon, machine-gun, and rocket engagements. Techniques for applying BOT include the following methods. Laser Range-Finder Method 7-26. The crew member should Select a narrow field of view on the optics of the helicopter, lase the target, and note the range to the target. Fire a burst of cannon fire at the target. Immediately select a wider field of view on the optics. Note the impacts of the bullets: Lase the impact. Note the range to the impacts; the difference between the laser range to target and the laser range to the center of the bullet impacts is the range error. Note the azimuth to the impact; if impacts were right or left of the target, make minor corrections in the aiming point to the opposite side of the target to adjust bullets on the target. Add/subtract the range error to the original range to target, and manually enter the corrected range into the aircraft. Add/subtract the range error from the original range to target and lase either short or long of the target to get the corrected range.

Change the range:

Continue the engagement. Mil Relation Method 7-27. Using the mil relation method, the crew member should Select a narrow field of view on the optics of the helicopter, estimate the range to the target using mil values, and input or adjust the range manually, noting the range to the target. Fire a burst of cannon fire at the target. Immediately select a wider field of view on the optics. Note the impacts of the bullets and measure the distance between the impacts and the target using the symbology in the optics of the helicopter; using the mil values in Section III, Chapter 6, determine the distancein both range and azimuthfrom the target where the impact occurred. Change the range by adding or subtracting the range error to the original range to target and manually entering the corrected range. Continue the engagement.

7-7

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Recognition Method 7-28. The recognition method is also known as Kentucky Windage. The effectiveness of this technique is directly proportional to the experience of the crew member making the corrections. To use this method, the crew member fires a burst, senses its impact, and estimates the amount of correction needed to adjust rounds onto the target. Range changes are affected by moving the selected LOS up or down in relation to the target.

TACTICS, TECHNIQUES, AND PROCEDURES FOR THE MODES OF FIRE

HOVER FIRE 7-29. Hover fire is fire delivered when the helicopter is below effective translational lift, either in-ground effect or out-of-ground effect. It may be stationary or moving, but movement during hover fire is always below ETL airspeed. 7-30. The four Ts in paragraph 7-20 apply to hover fire. Vertical trim and horizontal trim are important when the pilot engages from a hover. During high temperature, high-pressure altitude, and/or high gross-weight conditions, many aircraft hover OGE near their maximum torque available limit or are unable to hover OGE at all. Pilots must make smooth, deliberate control inputs when narrow power margins exist. 7-31. When firing at a hover, the pilot verifies proper torque control by setting the collective and ensuring that the vertical speed indicator is steady. The pilot should confirm the pitch of the aircraft with the attitude indicator or symbology. He should keep the aircraft stable for the most accurate shots. The pilot can drift with the wind if the threat situation and terrain permit. 7-32. AH-64 pilots can check the speed of the real wind around the aircraft. If a crew is shooting rockets on a windy day, a technique is to watch the true airspeed display and let it become stable, or constant, before firing the rockets. 7-33. When a pilot fires from a hover, the attitude of the aircraft may prevent him from seeing directly over the nose of AH-64 aircraft. The pilot should select reference points identifiable from the aircraft to maintain aircraft alignment and position over the ground during the engagement.

7-8

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 7

RUNNING FIRE 7-34. The crew selects an initial point about 8 to 10 kilometers from the target. The initial point should be an identifiable terrain feature. The initial point is selected primarily as a function of the desired route to the target. The aircraft departs the initial point toward the target flying contour, using terrain to mask the approach: About 6 kilometers from the target, the pilot starts a climb to achieve intervisibility with the target; once the crew acquires the target, the pilot levels the aircraft. At 5 kilometers (rockets) or 1,500 meters (cannon) from the target, the pilot starts a shallow 3- to 5-degree dive angle and the crew begins engaging the target. At 3 kilometers (rockets) or 1 kilometer (cannon) from the target, the pilot begins his break and uses terrain to cover his departure from the target area. 7-35. The crew returns for an immediate reattack on the target or returns to the initial point and holds. Note: The crew does not fly over the target in running fire. DIVING FIRE 7-36. Figure 7-3 shows diving fire. Use diving fire when The line of sight to target from hover is obstructed and direct fire is required on target for a destruction or neutralization mission. A high volume of accurate rocket and cannon fire is required on the target and there is a minimal air-defense threat. A high gross weight or environmental conditions prevent hover fire.

7-9

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 7-3. Diving Fire 7-37. The AH-64A and AH-64D ATMs address diving flight. TC 1-213 (Task 2069) and TC 1-214 (Task 2069) give specific performance standards for diving flight. The following discussion covers techniques for firing weapons during diving flight. 7-38. Use the four Ts in paragraph 7-30 (target, torque, trim, and target). Proper aircraft control enhances the accuracy of the aircraft weapon systems, primarily with rockets. 7-39. Engage targets with rockets and cannon similar to techniques used in running fire. Use rockets employing point-detonating fuses, and use fixed gun for cannons during the engagement. 7-40. Use a careful crosscheck because target fixation may cause the pilot to fly the aircraft into the ground. The pilot should complete the recovery from the dive no lower than 500 feet AGL for training. 7-41. High rates of descent, coupled with high flight-path speeds, require the pilot to closely monitor rate of closure and terrain features. The pilot must plan the dive recovery in time to avoid abrupt recovery maneuvers. If the pilot attempts an abrupt recovery at high airspeed, mushing may occur.

7-10

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 7

When the pilot tries to recover from a dive, the high rate of descent and high power setting cause the controls of the helicopter to become less responsive. Mushing may prevent the pilot from recovering the aircraft from the dive. Note: The crew should avoid flying over the target in diving fire.

SECTION IV AIR COMBAT WEAPONEERING

7-42. This section provides information on helicopter weapons and their employment against airborne targets. Air-combat weaponeering techniques increase the survivability of the aviation force. Note: When discussing sighting systems for air-to-air firing, the pilot needs to understand that it is far more important to know where the bullet is in relation to the sight at different ranges than it is to know how far the bullet can go.

WEAPON SYSTEMS ENGAGEMENT RANGES

30-MILLIMETER CANNON, AH-64 7-43. The 30-millimeter cannon when fired FIXED GUN has a bullet impact at 1,575 meters and a TOF of 3.9 seconds. Recommended range setting is 1,000 meters. Elevation mil corrections for air combat engagement from 500 to 1,500 meters are minimal. Therefore, Kentucky Windage adjustments are easier and faster than readjustment for range. Table 7-1 contains information on adjusting aim for elevation. Table 7-1. Range Adjustment for 30-Millimeter Cannon

RANGE (meters) 500 1,000 1,500

2.75-INCH ROCKETS

AIM ADJUSTMENT (mils) -29.0 0.0 +23.3

7-44. The MK 66 rocket motor reaches its maximum velocity within 400 meters after launch (at motor burnout). For the purpose of air combat, the rocket warhead of choice is the flechette, followed by the HEPD. 7-45. The flechette warhead detonates 150 meters before the predetermined range set by the rocket-management system. Detonation of the warhead deploys the flechettes at a 12-degree angle and creates a flechette cloud that becomes a cylinder after 150 meters. This cylinder is about 15.7 meters (49.7 feet) in diameter.

7-11

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

7-46. Analysis of the firing characteristics of the flechette warhead indicates that firing three pairs of rockets at a range of 2,000 to 2,500 meters will result in a 75- to 82-percent probability of hit. Table 7-2 shows range, TOF, and velocity for the flechette and HEPD MK 66 rockets for air combat engagements. Table 7-2. Air Combat Engagement With Rockets

RANGE (METERS)
1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000 6,000 7,000

TIME OF FLIGHT (SECONDS)

1.96 4.38 7.41 11.0 15.17 19.93 25.06

VELOCITY (METERS/SECOND)
510 413 330 278 240 210 195

HELLFIRE MISSILE 7-47. The maximum range of the Hellfire missile is 8,000 meters. Firing the missile at ranges greater than 8,000 meters greatly reduces the Ph. With an onboard laser designator, aircrews can engage targets at ranges up to the maximum range. Ideally, aircrews should engage enemy helicopters indirectly with the Hellfire. An OH-58D or a ground laser can designate the target, enabling aircrews to fire the missile from concealed positions behind masking terrain. STINGER MISSILE 7-48. Crews should use the air-to-air Stinger at or near maximum range before the enemy can detect the friendly aircraft. In extended range firing where/when the friendly aircraft has not been detected, the aircrew should be aware that the ATAS has a detectable smoke signature under certain atmospheric conditions. Crews may use the ATAS in short-range firings of less than 1,000 meters. However, the minimum arming range may affect its lethality.

7-12

_________________________________________________________________________________Chapter 7

TARGET-ENGAGEMENT FACTORS
RANGE 7-49. Inaccurate range estimation results in rounds missing the target. It reduces the element of surprise by alerting the enemy to an impending attack. Therefore, aircrews must train to estimate the range accurately. The following methods are recommended: Visual range estimation. Tracer burnout. Maps and photomaps. Electronic devices. Sight mil values. Laser range findersthe most accurate of all these methods. TARGET MOTION 7-50. If a target is not stationary, it becomes necessary to aim the gun ahead of the target to compensate for motion. The lead requirements for a motion of a target occur because the target has a velocity and sometimes acceleration. 7-51. The lead component compensating for the velocity of the target is generally 85 to 90 percent of the total lead requirement. It is a function of the targets true airspeed and aspect. The lead component compensation for target acceleration comprises the remaining 10 to 15 percent of the total lead requirement. 7-52. The lead for target velocity is a function of the TAS and aspect of the target. The velocity of the target is not nearly as important as the LOS motion rate that it creates. The magnitude of that LOS rate is a function of the magnitude of the target rate of motion and distance. At longer ranges, a smaller LOS rate is required to match the rate of the movement of the target. As the range decreases, LOS rate will proportionally increase. To determine the amount of lead required to compensate for target velocity Compute the amount of target movement in degrees per second and then multiply that number by 17.45; this number gives the rate of target movement in mils per second. Multiply this number by the TOF of the bullet to the target. The result is the amount of velocity lead required; for example, if the aircraft is turning at 10 degrees/second (10 degrees x 1,745 = 174.5 mils per second) to match (track) the targets velocity relative to the LOS and the apparent TOF of the bullet is 0.5 second, the required velocity lead would be Velocity lead = (174.5 mils/second) x (0.5 second) = 87.25 mils TARGET ACCELERATION (COMPENSATION FOR TARGET ACCELERATION DURING TAIL-CHASE ENGAGEMENT) 7-53. The acceleration of the target does not actually increase the LOS of the target before the bullet is fired. What is required, however, is an additional

7-13

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

lead component to compensate for the change in the motion path of the target during the TOF of the bullet. The additional lead component compensates for a turning situation in which the target is turning after the bullet is fired. A miss distance has been generated because the target turns after the bullet leaves the gun. The magnitude of acceleration is a function of the total Gs (crew station G-force) that the target aircraft is generating. Gun-control theory assumes that over the short TOF of the bullet, the speed of the target remains constant. The amount of correction will depend on the amount of Gs pulled by the target aircraft and TOF of the bullet. This amount would not be greater than 50 mils in most cases. LEAD ANGLE 7-54. Placing a killing burst onto a moving target requires more than a passing degree of skill. One of the biggest problems to solve is how much to lead the target. Without a fire-control computer that can compute lead angles, the pilot and gunner have an increased workload. 7-55. Lead the speed refers to leading the target aircraft by the number of mils equal to the maximum speed of the aircraft. For example, if the maximum speed of an aircraft is 120 knots, lead the aircraft by 120 mils in an engagement. The following are a few guidelines for tracking airborne targets and engaging them. These guidelines will get the bullets going in the right direction but will probably require adjustment by the pilot or gunner: The 7.62-millimeter weapon systemlead the speed. The 30-millimeter cannonlead the speed. Rocketslead the speed plus 10 percent. ATAStrack the target. WEAPONS GUIDE 7-56. Table 7-3 shows the recommended weapon system to use for air combat at various ranges to target. Table 7-3. Recommended Weapon System for Air Combat

RANGE TO TARGET (METERS) 01,250 01,500 7002,500 2,0008,000 1,0008,000

SIGHT REFERENCE 7-57. Chapter 6 has mil values for sights.

WEAPON SYSTEM 7.62-Millimeter 30-Millimeter 2.75" Rockets Hellfire Missile Air-to-Air Stinger

7-14

Helicopter Door Gunnery

This appendix contains the tactics, techniques, and procedures required for training and employing door gunners for utility and cargo helicopters.

Appendix A

SECTION I DOOR GUNNERY TRAINING STRATEGY AND OVERVIEW MISSION

A-1. Utility and cargo helicopter units will conduct annual live-fire door gunnery qualification, according to this appendix, on objectively scored range facilities. Door gunners on utility and cargo helicopters are concerned with threats to the helicopter and crew on board, whether the helicopter is in the air or on the ground. Door gunners must be able to acquire and engage a variety of targets from many different flight profiles. Evaluation of door gunners includes a time standard to acquire, engage, and hit the target. A-2. Door gunners are normally helicopter crew chiefs or repairers. They may also be soldiers, internal or external to the unit. Crew coordination is critical between the door gunners and the pilots of the helicopter. The door gunners and pilots maintain communication and work as a team to operate the aircraft safely and acquire and engage targets, as required by the tactical situation. A-3. The door gunners primary weapon is the 7.62-millimeter M60D/M240H machine gun. The M60D/M240H is a direct-fire weapon system. The configuration of the M60D/M240H is similar for all cargo and utility helicopters and differs mainly in the helicopter gun mount and auxiliary equipment.

DOOR-GUNNER DUTIES
A-4. Door gunners provide direct fire as protection for the aircraft and crew. To effectively employ their weapon, door gunners must z Thoroughly understand the functional characteristics and operation of the weapon system, as well as its capabilities and limitations. z Have a thorough knowledge of tactical helicopter employment. z Be prepared to act independently, based on the threat, and engage targets without a specific command from the pilot or copilot. z Act as observers to assist the pilot and copilot in maintaining situational awarenessin training and in combat. A-5. The door gunner will inspect the weapons and weapon subsystems on the aircraft unless unit SOP or directives specify otherwise. The door gunner will perform operatorlevel maintenance on the aircraft weapon system. The door gunner ensures that clean and serviceable ammunition, of the correct type and amount, is on board the aircraft for the mission.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

A-1

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

A-6. The door gunner normally assists in daily aircraft maintenance operations. The unit SOP should specify additional duties/aviation-specific duties required of the door gunner (not crew chief). Door gunners must act as integral crewmembers to help the pilot and copilot operate the aircraft safely and effectively within the mission envelope. A-7. During flight and ground operations, door gunners watch for hazards and obstructions to flight. These obstructions vary from high-tension wires and other aircraft along the flight path to obstacles such as tree stumps in the landing zone or dunnage in the FARP. A-8. Reporting potential or actual targets to the pilot/copilot is a specified task of the door gunner. From the gunners side of the aircraft, the primary observation sector is normally 60 degrees off the nose of the helicopter all the way to the rear. A-9. During both combat operations and training, door gunners must maintain situational awareness. They must know the location of friendly troops, the location of other aircraft in their formation (including escorting attack helicopters), and the classification and location of the targets to be engaged. A door gunner may also be required to mark a ground location with smoke grenades or tracers. A-10. The unit SOP should have procedures for crews to follow during an emergency landing. The door gunners must know the procedures for removing weapons, electronic equipment (such as radios and COMSEC devices), or other sensitive equipment or items (such as maps and SOIs) from the helicopter. The gunner must know how to destroy or assist in the destruction of sensitive equipment, if necessary, to prevent capture.

DOOR-GUNNER TRAINING PROGRAM

Note: AR 600-106, paragraph 2-3, describes the duties of door gunners. Door gunners work with aviators under the team concept; the aircrew training program will be conducted according to the commanders guide and the appropriate ATM. A-11. This program is progressive. It has training gates similar to the gates found in the attack helicopter qualification program. This training program gives the door gunner the skills necessary to perform door-gunner duties in a crew. The training program consists of 10 training tables. These tables progress, in numerical order, from individual marksmanship training to multiship live-fire training. The training tables support the commanders METL and the units MTP.

BASIC GUNNERY
A-12. Tables I through IV are the initial M60D/M240H ground qualification using the bipod: z Table I10-meter practice fire. z Table II10-meter record fire. z Table IIItransition practice fire from 100 to 800 meters. z Table IVtransition record fire from 100 to 800 meters. A-13. Tables I through IV qualify the door gunner according to FM 3-22.68(FM 23-67) with tasks modified for the M60D/M240H machinegun using the bipod, tripod, or static aircraft. The philosophy of ground qualification is to instill confidence in the door gunner and in the soldiers transported in the helicopter.

A-2

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

A-14. Before firing the basic tables, the door-gunner candidate will receive premarksmanship instruction on the M60D/M240H machinegun. Figure A-1 shows the minimum instruction required for Tables I through IV. A-15. Door-gunner candidates must complete ground qualification according to FM 3-22.68(FM 23-67) before progressing to air qualification. Ground qualification is a training gate. The door gunner must ground qualify only once, providing the aircraft qualification (for example, Tables V through VIII) is completed within 12 months. If the door-gunner candidate does not complete aircraft qualificationthat is, Tables V through VIIIwithin 12 months of ground qualification, the individual must refire Tables I through IV before progressing to the aircraft qualification. Once the individual completes aircraft qualification within his or her assigned unit, the crewmember does not have to requalify on Tables I through IV if the individual qualifies annually. A-16. Units may conduct live-fire training from a helicopter cabin mock-up during basic gunnery. Many units build a helicopter cabin mock-up for training their door gunners. They approximate the dimensions of the immediate area of a door-gunners station in the helicopter cabin. The door-gunner trainee can then fire his or her weapon using a sight picture similar to that used in the actual aircraft. These simulators range in complexity from simple 20-foot towers to those mounted on 2-1/2-ton trucks, simulating aircraft movement during engagements. No standard design exists; units may develop their own design for enhancing door gunnery training.

INTERMEDIATE GUNNERY
Table V
A-17. Table V is the door gunnery skills training and test table. During this annual table, the door gunners learn skills needed to execute their duties. The commander uses this table to assess the readiness of the door gunners before they progress to Table VI. A-18. During this phase of training, pilot academic training should cover, at a minimum, weapon control and fire commands, aircraft modes of flight for Table VII and Table VIII, and overview of Table IX and Table X operations. A-19. The Table V program contains two parts: training and assessment. The training program prepares the door gunner for intermediate live-fire tables. To fill both doorgunner positions, the commander may designate a non-crewmember. Table V training for the non-crewmember must include instruction on the basics of the aircraft. A-20. At a minimum, Table V will include academic instruction on the subjects outlined in figure A-2 and a door gunnery skills test of at least 50 questions. Subject areas for the questions will be selected by the commander. These questions will include questions on academic instruction, with emphasis on weapon function, ballistics, target acquisition, and aircraft procedures. Door gunners will score at least 70 percent on the DGST. Door gunners must complete the DGST within 180 days before starting intermediate gunnery. A-21. Aircraft orientation applies only to door gunners who are not crew chiefs, or who are not familiar with the unit aircraft. A-22. Units should ensure their door gunnery training programs are conducted year round. A gunnery program does not start just before the qualification range.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

A-3

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

Table VI
A-23. If the door gunner completes Table V to standard, he or she progresses to Table VI. Table VI is the initial aircraft live-fire table. The door gunner fires the M60D/M240H from the aircraft for the first time if he or she did not fire from static aircraft for Tables I through IV: z The table consists of five day tasks, of which one is an NBC task. z The tables verify the function of the door gunners assigned weapons. z Gunners fire the NBC task in mask and gloves only; this task has no requirement for a MOPP suit.

Table VII
A-24. Table VII is a day/night practice table for Table VIII. The table consists of eight tasks (five day and three night) of which one is an NBC task. Gunners complete this table from the aircraft in a variety of flight modes.

Table VIII
A-25. Table VIII is the qualification table. The table consists of the same number of tasks as Table VII. Table VIII contains both day and night tasks and is the gate for advanced table gunnery. Gunners who do not qualify on Table VIII will not progress to advanced table training. The unit METL and MTP determine whether to conduct night training and qualification tables. Night door gunnery is designed for door gunners and crews to use NVGs. Commanders must designate night/NVG modes to be conducted to meet the unit METL. The more demanding mode of flight does not apply. NVGs may be used with mounted IR aiming lasers.

Training Objective: To provide initial M60D/M240H qualification for personnel assigned to door gunnery
positions

Subject
Operation and Function of the M60D/M240H Assembly, Disassembly, and Nomenclature of the M60D/M240H Malfunctions, Immediate Action, and Maintenance Range Estimation Fire Control/ Fire Commands M60D/M240H Machine-Gun Practice and Record Fire

Description
A class to provide the basic knowledge of how the components of the M60D/M240H function during operation. A demonstration and a practical exercise on the general and detailed assembly, disassembly, and nomenclature of the M60D/M240H machine gun. A class to provide information concerning abnormal operation, corrective action, and maintenance. A class and practical exercise to provide information on methods of determining the distance between gunner and target. A class to provide information on the methods used in controlling and delivering fires. A briefing on the conduct and standards of Tables I-IV.

References
FM 3-22.68(FM 23-67), TM 9-1005-224-10 FM 3-22.68(FM 23-67), TM 9-1005-224-10 (M60), TM 9-1005-313-23&P FM 3-22.68(FM 23-67), TM 9-1005-224-10 (M60), TM 9-1005-313-23&P FM 3-22.68(FM 23-67), FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140), TM 9-1005-224-10 FM 3-22.68(FM 23-67), FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) Unit SOP, Range SOP, FM 3-22.68(FM 23-67)

Figure A-1. Basic Weapon Qualification

A-4

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

Training Objective: To qualify door gunners Subject

Duties of the Door Gunner Aircraft Orientation Techniques of Fire and Employment Ballistics Armament System Introduction Aviation Battlefield Survivability Visual Search and Target Detection Crewmember Emergency Procedures Night Gunnery First-Aid Training Protective Mask

Description
A class on the duties of door gunners. A class and practical exercise to familiarize the student with the capabilities and limitations of the unit aircraft. A class on principles and techniques of helicopter machinegun firing. A class on ballistics for spin-stabilized projectiles. A class and practical exercise on the M60D/M240H to include safety procedures and operator maintenance. A class to provide an overview of threat defense systems that aircrews may face. A class on techniques of visual search, to include limitations and procedures of target detection. A class on, and demonstration of, duties and actions taken by the door gunner during in-flight and forcedlanding emergencies. A class on techniques and procedures of night firing. A class on principles of first aid. A class and practical exercise on the description, characteristics, and procedures for wearing the protective mask during engagements. A briefing on the conduct and standards of Table VI through Table VIII.

References
Unit SOP, Appendix A, FM 304.140(FM 1-140) Appropriate aircraft operators manual Appendix A, FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140), FM 3-22.68(FM 23-67) Chapter 4, FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140); Chapter 7,FM 3-22.68(FM 23-67) TM 9-1005-262-13, TB 9-1005-262-50-1 Bde/Bn S2 brief FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) Aircraft operators manual and unit SOP FM 1-203, TC 1-204, Range SOP FM 3-04.301(FM 1-301), FM 4-25.11(FM 21-11) TM 3-4240-280-10 Range SOP, TM 9-1005-224-10, TM 9-1005-262-13

Door-Gunnery Qualification

Figure A-2. Table V, Intermediate Gunnery Training

ADVANCED GUNNERY
Table IX
A-26. Table IX is multiship gunnery using MILES/AGES and blanks with the M60D/M240H. This table gives door gunners who completed intermediate gunnery qualification the first opportunity to participate in training with more than one aircraft. In addition, this table is the first step toward crew qualification.

Table X
A-27. Table X is multiship live-fire gunnery. The intent of Table X is for units to fire the table at CTCs or large range complexes. The large surface danger zone of two M60Ds/M240Hs prohibits multidoor-gunner gunnery at most installations. The maximum recommended number of aircraft participating in Table X gunnery is five.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

A-5

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

UNIT TRAINING STRATEGY

A-28. Commanders designate, in writing, a door gunnery nonrated crewmember standardization instructor. The door gunnery SI should be a senior noncommissioned officer with experience in door gunnery. The standardization instructor is the commanders point of contact and subject-matter expert on door gunnery. The SI is responsible for training new personnel and conducting sustainment training for personnel already qualified. The standardization instructor will z Be a qualified door gunner. z Organize all training in coordination with the S3. z Supervise the preparation and execution of all instruction. z Supervise initial qualification and annual qualification from the aircraft. z Evaluate qualification tables. z Maintain qualification records on all door gunners, according to Chapter 2. Note: Usually this position is held by the battalion or company-level SI. A-29. The commander may designate nonrated crew-member instructors (FIs) to assist the standardization instructor. The SI will work closely with the commander and the S3 to administer and evaluate the training program for unit door gunners. The SI and the FIs should be the best-qualified personnel to conduct door-gunnery training; however, the standardization instructor does not have to be a master gunner, as paragraphs 1-25 through 1-27 describe. A-30. The commander, assisted by the standardization instructor, will complete a unit training assessment according to Chapter 2. Once the assessment is complete, the commander will outline the objectives for the door gunnery training program. This guidance must include the desired training end-state for the program (for example, two qualified door gunners per UH-60 in A Company). The commander should base this requirement on available resources. A-31. Once the gunnery objectives are clear, the S3 and the SI will begin planning the conduct of the training program. Door-gunner training should be incorporated into the unit training plan as a continual program. A-32. Units should incorporate door gunnery training into a written SOP with clear objectives and training goals throughout the training year. Door gunnery subjects are relevant for sergeants time or prime-time training programs common to most active Army units. A-33. The unit commander designates door gunners in writing. The commander accomplishes this with a memorandum similar to standard additional-duty appointment orders. A-34. The door gunnery section of this appendix defines the requirements for conducting and evaluating live-fire door-gunnery tables. Units that have night missions as part of their METL complete the night tasks. The door gunners use night-vision goggles while firing from the aircraft. A-35. Once the intermediate gunnery is complete, the SI documents the training and maintains records at least 36 months, according to Chapter 2. Note: Units should allow door gunners to fire from both sides of the aircraft for familiarization, if resources are available. However, range-control personnel have specific instructions for door gunnery, which vary from installation to installation (for example, at one installation, firing may be allowed only from the right side of the aircraft). Local range-control personnel have information on local restrictions.

A-6

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

CREW COORDINATION
Note: Aircrew coordination training is a requirement for all door gunners. A-36. High personnel turnover and OPTEMPO make crew coordination for door gunnery more crucial than in recent years. Crew chiefs stay with their aircraft; they are an integral part of the crew. Because of personnel turnover and maintenance, the pilots and copilots may not always fly the same aircraft or fly with the same crew chief. Training must focus on standardization of cockpit communication and procedures.

WEAPONS CONTROL AND FIRE COMMANDS

A-37. Before departure on a mission, the pilot in command will brief the crew on the situation and mission. The briefing is mission dependent but will normally include the friendly situation, enemy situation, rules of engagement, possible target areas, marking of targets, mission-specific fire commands, and other mission-specific information. The unit SOP or parent-unit operating procedures or directives should dictate when ammunition is loaded in the aircraft weapon systems.

STANDARD WEAPON CONTROL MEASURES

A-38. The following are the standard weapon control measures/terms: z Weapons hold. The door-gunners weapons remain in a stowed position; enemy contact is not likely, or it is an administrative measure by the PC. z Weapons tight. The door gunner places the weapon in a position to fire and fires only on order of the PC; enemy contact is possible. z Weapons free. Door gunners make the decision to fire, based on the mission brief, where enemy contact is expected. A-39. The door gunner acknowledges the weapon-control status to the PC. If the weapon status is other than weapons hold, the gunner announces that the weapon is in a condition and position to fire. The door gunner reports gun ready.

CREW WEAPON SEQUENCE

A-40. Crews should use a standard sequence for engagements (chapter 6). The following is the standard weapon sequence for utility/cargo crews. The intent is for the sequence to follow a logical progression for the crewmember. If the pilot, copilot, or other crewmembers acquire a target, the observing crewmember alerts the other crewmembers. The standard weapon sequence is z Where is it (clock position)? z What is the estimated range (in meters) to target? z What is it (target description)? z What should be done with it (engage or track)? A-41. The crewmembers take action. (What are the crewmembers doing, or what should they be doing?) A typical weapon sequence is Eleven oclock, six hundred meters, soldiers in tree line, engage. A-42. The left-side door gunner, upon acquisition, would announceTally, firing. A-43. Chapter 6 lists standard phrases for crew communication. The following are phrases specifically for door gunnery:

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

A-7

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

Open fire. Instructs the gunners to start firing at an obvious threat to the aircraft and may also apply to a specific gunner; for example, right gunner, open fire. z Cease fire. Instructs the gunners to stop firing and may also apply to a specific gunner; for example, right gunner, cease fire. z Right gun/left gun ready. Indicates that guns are ready to fire. z Right gun/left gun jam. Indicates that a gun is jammed and cannot fire; right/left indicates which side that the gun is on. z Right gun/left gun out of ammo. Indicates that the door gunner is out of ammunition; right/left indicates which side that the gun is on. Note: Back gunner or back gun indicates the rear door gunner and will be used on CH-47s with the third door gunner.
z

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
FLIGHT EQUIPMENT
A-44. Door gunners, during flight operations, will wear ALSE (such as flight helmet, flight suit, and gloves and, if available, body armor) and other pieces of equipment (such as the IR aiming laser) specified by regulations/directives. The commander directs that door gunners wear additional hearing protection because of the increased sound-pressure levels generated during weapons firing. For increased eye protection, door gunners lower helmet visors during firing operations, unless NVGs are worn.

SEAT BELT/SAFETY HARNESS

A-45. The door gunner remains strapped in the seat during normal aircraft operations (UH-60). A safety harness (monkey strap) permits additional movement inside the CH47.

EJECTED BRASS
A-46. Spent brass that collects on the floor of the aircraft can make footing hazardous. The slipstream of the aircraft can carry ejected brass from a firing weapon into the aircraft, causing damage. Door gunners use serviceable ejection-control bags (brass catchers) to control spent brass.

BARREL CHANGE
A-47. The airflow around a helicopter in flight helps to cool the machine-gun barrel. However, a barrel change may still be necessary, depending on the rate of fire. A barrel change is normally a team effort (gunner and assistant gunner) on a standard M60. However, on board an aircraft, a barrel change will more than likely be performed by the individual door gunner. Although barrel removal and replacement are relatively simple, safety dictates that procedure be standardized. The unit SOP should specify when, where, and how crews carry and secure an extra barrel and how gunners change barrels. FM 322.68(FM 23-67) recommends barrel change based on the following rates of fire: z Sustained (100 rounds per minute)change the barrel every 10 minutes. z Rapid (200 rounds per minute)change the barrel every 2 minutes. z Cyclic (550 M60D/695 M240H rounds per minute)change the barrel every minute.

A-8

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

AMMUNITION
A-48. DA Pam 350-38 identifies ammunition to train one door gunner per aircraft annually. Total rounds per aircraft will double when the second gunner position is authorized. Ammunition for the M60D/M240H is standard 7.62-millimeter mix. Figure A-3 shows the ammunition allocation per table.

GUNNERY TABLES
A-49. Figures A-4 through A-8 (Gunnery Table VI, Table VII and Table VIII) provide the framework for the door gunnery training program. Commanders may vary the engagement sequences, conditions, and target arrays within the tables to meet missiontraining requirements or to fit resource constraints (such as range layout). Modified tables must be no less demanding than those in the manual; modifications will be temporary. Commanders must work continuously with installation or regional range authorities to upgrade and improve gunnery ranges. Commanders may allocate additional ammunition to Table VI for weapons calibration, if available. A-50. Table VII and Table VIII encompass eight tasks. The door gunner must qualify on five tasks and score at least 350 points on Table VIII to be considered qualified. The scoresheet in chapter 2 can help to score engagements. A-51. Table VI through Table VIII incorporate ground, takeoff, hover, moving, and running modes of fire during engagements.

HOVER FIRE
A-52. Hover fire is any engagement conducted below ETL. When hover is specified on a gunnery task, the crew conducts the task from a stationary hover. This definition is not intended to conflict with aircraft ATMs.

MOVING FIRE
A-53. Moving fire is an engagement from a moving helicopter below ETL. Horizontal movement may be in any direction, but some deliberate movement is present.

RUNNING FIRE
A-54. Running fire is an engagement from a moving helicopter above ETL. Crews deliver both direct and indirect fires during running fire.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

A-9

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

Gunnery table
I

Description
10-meter practice fire

# Rounds
(Active Component/ Reserve Component)

117/117 ball

II III IV V VI VII VIII IX X

10-meter record fire Transition range practice fire Transition range record fire Door-gunner training and assessment Aircraft transition/weapons calibration Aircraft practice Aircraft qualification Section/platoon training (MILES) Section/platoon training

119/119 ball 182/182 mix 154/154 mix 0 150/150 mix 240/240 mix 240/240 mix 200/200 blank 200/0 mix

Totals: 7.62-mm ball: 236/236 7.62-mm mix: 1,166 (Active Component)/966 (Reserve Component) 7.62-mm blank: 200/200 Notes: 1. DA Pam 350-38 contains current ammunition authorizations. 2. The unit METL and MTP determine whether the unit conducts night training and qualification tables. Night door gunnery is designed for door gunners and crew to use NVGs. Figure A-3. Annual Ammunition Allocation per Gunnery Table

A-10

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

Task
No 1 2 3 4 5 Description Engage stationary target, NBC Engage stationary target Engage moving target Engage moving target Engage stationary target Mode Ground Takeoff Hover Moving Running

Condition
Range (meters) 300-500 300-500 400-600 400-500 300-800 Target Troops Troops Vehicle Vehicle Vehicle

Standard
Target Effect 1 Hit 1 Hit 3 Hits 3 Hits 3 Hits Ammo 30 30 30 30 30

Figure A-4. Table VI. Door-Gunner Transition Course

Task

Condition

Standard
Target Troops Troops Vehicle Vehicle Vehicle Target Effect 1 Hit 1 Hit 3 Hits 3 Hits 3 Hits Ammo 30 30 30 30 30

No
1 2 3 4 5

Description
Engage stationary target, NBC Engage stationary target Engage moving target Engage stationary target Engage stationary target

Mode
Ground Takeoff Hover Moving Running

Range (meters) 300-500 300-500 400-600 400-500 300-800

Figure A-5. Table VII. Day Door-Gunner Practice Course

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

A-11

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-201), C1 __________________________________________________________________

Task
No 1 2 3 Description Engage stationary target Engage stationary target Engage stationary target Mode Ground Hover Moving

Condition
Range (meters) 250-350 400-500 400-600 Target Troops Vehicle Vehicle

Standard
Target Effect 1 Hit 3 Hits 3 Hits Ammo 30 30 30

Figure A-6. Table VII. Night Door-Gunner Practice Course (Door Gunners and Crew Use NVGs and, if Available, IR Lasers)

Task

Condition

Standard

No
1 2 3 4 5

Description
Engage stationary target, NBC Engage stationary target Engage moving target Engage stationary target Engage stationary target

Mode
Ground Takeoff Hover Moving Running

Range (meters)
300-500 300-500 400-600 400-500 300-800

Target
Troops Troops Vehicle Vehicle Vehicle

Target Effect
1 Hit 1 Hit 3 Hits 3 Hits 3 Hits

Ammo
30 30 30 30 30

Figure A-7. Table VIII. Day Door-Gunner Qualification Course

Task
No 1 2 3 Description Engage stationary target Engage stationary target Engage stationary target Mode Ground Hover Moving

Condition
Range (meters) 250-350 400-500 400-600 Target Troops Vehicle Vehicle

Standard
Target Effect 1 Hit 3 Hits 3 Hits Ammo 30 30 30

Figure A-8. Table VIII. Night Door-Gunner Qualification Course (Door Gunners and Crew Use NVGs and, if Available, IR Lasers)

A-12

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

A-55. Using the following point-calculation table, scorers can determine a numerical score for each engagement. To use Table A-1: z Time the engagement, using the methods outlined in chapter 2 and with the system described in chapter 3 (paragraphs 3-55 through 3-63). z Find the time of the engagement in the Time column; read down to the Points column to determine the score. z If the engagement time is exactly halfway between two times, figure the number in between the two scores that the engagement time falls between; for example, if the engagement time is 10.5 seconds, the score is 95 points. z Always round down to get the score; for example, if the engagement time is 11.7 seconds, the score is 93 (rounded down to 11.5 seconds). z Ensure that guidance in paragraphs 3-64 and 3-65 is followed. Table A-1. Point Calculation for Tables VII and Table VIII TIME (seconds) POINTS 8 9 10 96 11 94 12 92 13 90 14 88 15 86 16 84 17 82 18 80 19 78 20 76 21 74 22 72 24 70 27 50 30 30

100 98

Note: Appendix C contains a full-size version of this point-calculation table.

SECTION II TACTICS, TECHNIQUES, AND PROCEDURES

FIRE-CONTROL FUNDAMENTALS
A-56. Fire control is the name given to the observations, calculations, and actions involved in firing a weapon. Fire control is the method of directing munitions so they will hit the target with a minimum expenditure of ammunition. A-57. Most gun systems contain the same basic elements. The line of sight is the direction from the gun to the target. The line of aim is offset from the LOS by an amount determined by the following: z Target motion. z Helicopter motion. z Range to target. z Projectile drop. z Wind effects. z Projectile and gun characteristics. A-58. The gunner must estimate all the factors that determine the amount of compensation required. The gunner estimates range and lead for an initial burst and corrects for elevation and deflection by adjusting the rounds on target; this is known as applying burst on target. Chapter 4 covers the ballistic factors for door guns.

RANGE ESTIMATION
A-59. Chapter 6 covers range estimation. Door gunners will normally use the recognition method for range estimation. When the door gunner uses the recognition method, the following factors affect the accuracy of the range estimation process.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

A-13

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

A-60. Objects seem closer when z Viewed from altitude. z Looking down a straight road or railroad track. z Objects are in bright light. z Looking over smooth terrain. z Color of the object contrasts sharply with the color of background. A-61. Objects seem farther away when z Looking from low altitude to higher terrain. z Looking over rough terrain. z There is poor light or fog. z Only a small part of the object is visible.

WEAPON ENGAGEMENT RANGE

A-62. The maximum range of the M60D/M240H machine gun with the 7.62-millimeter round is 3,725 meters. Maximum range means that, with the necessary elevation applied to the weapon with standard ball ammunition over flat earth, the projectile should travel 3,725 meters. A-63. The published maximum effective range of the M60D/M240H is 1,100 meters. However, the planning maximum effective range is 900 to 950 meters, based on probabilities of hit and tracer burnout.

FIRING TECHNIQUES
A-64. The door gunner must understand the challenges of firing a machine gun from a helicopter in flight. These challenges include variable airspeeds, ranges, firing angles, and ballistics. The following discussion explains some of these complexities, as compared to a ground gunner: z The door gunners firing platform is normally moving; the ground gunner usually fires from a stationary platform. z The door gunner normally has only his or her eyes to estimate range; the ground gunner can use range finders, maps, or known ground reference points to more easily determine range. z The door gunner is usually autonomous regarding fire control and ammunition conservation; the ground gunner receives fire-control instructions from the section leader and ammunition-conservation assistance from the assistant gunner. A-65. Range estimation is the door gunners first consideration when he or she prepares to fire at a target; door gunners must be able to estimate range quickly and accurately. They should practice range estimation throughout their training. A-66. Proper aiming points for target engagement from a moving helicopter vary with airspeed, altitude, bank angle, and rate of turn. As a rule, the point of aim is to the near side of the target (the side of the target closest to the firer). The aiming point is, in part, due to the motion of the aircraft and the effects of projectile drift that carry the bullet forward. A-67. Another accepted method of initial target engagement is for the door gunner to aim low when firing from the left side of the aircraft and to aim high when firing from

A-14

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

the right side. Bank angles, approach angles, turns, and other aircraft motions will also be factors in aiming the weapon and placing effective fire on a target (see figure A-9). A-68. When crews have IR aiming lasers available, they should ensure that they turn off their lasers between engagements. Crews should treat lasers with the same discipline they use with loaded weapons.

Figure A-9. Aiming Points

FIRE ADJUSTMENT
A-69. Observation and adjustment of fire must be continuous throughout the engagement. Initial delivery of long bursts normally help the gunner adjust subsequent bursts. A-70. Gunners must try to anticipate the movement of a target. Personnel on the ground and in vehicles tend to move when fired upon. Gunners need to quickly react to that movement by shifting fire in the direction of the movement. A-71. A four-to-one (ball-to-tracer) ratio of ammunition will normally provide enough tracers for positive adjustment of fire. At engagement ranges beyond tracer burnout, the door gunner must consider other factors. Tracer burnout of 7.62-millimeter ammunition is about 900 meters. At ranges beyond 900 meters, the firer could observe tracer burnout and believe the aim was low when, in reality, the projectile continued along its trajectory and struck beyond the target. A-72. The M60D/M240H machine-gun barrel tends to climb during firing. Gunners should exercise caution to prevent this. If a gunner fails to correct for a climbing muzzle, rounds could reach an angle that endanger other aircraft, or the main rotor blades of the firing aircraft. A-73. When firing with the M60D/M240H, the door gunner can place the front sight blade on line with the target to correct for bullet drop at ranges up to 750 meters. Gunners must aim higher at ranges beyond 750 meters. A-74. When correcting for lead effect, the gunner must align the target, front sight blade (M240H), and the approximate point on the horizontal crosshair (M60D). This alignment is only an estimated point of aim because aircraft speed/movement will make accurate aiming difficult. When firing from the right side of the helicopter, the gunner

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

A-15

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

uses the right-hand section of the sighting rings, according to target location and aircraft speed. When firing from the left side of the helicopter, the gunner uses the left side of the sighting rings (M60D). Figures A-10 and A-11 contain more information on the lead effect.

OVERVIEW
A-75. This section describes the tactics, techniques, and procedures for planning and conducting multihelicopter door gunnery operations. It is used to establish M60D/M240H multihelicopter door gunnery training programs in aviation units that have assigned utility or cargo helicopters. A-76. This section applies to commanders, platoon leaders, crewmembers, and nonrated crewmembers of aviation units who conduct air movement and air-assault missions. It does not replace aviation unit door gunnery training manuals or SOPs. It provides planning and training requirements for aerial door gunnery that are not in doctrinal publications or ATMs. A-77. These tactics, techniques, and procedures apply to the UH-1, UH-60, and CH-47 helicopters. However, these principles apply to all aviation units that conduct multihelicopter air-movement and air-assault operations.

MULTIHELICOPTER DOOR GUNNERY

A-78. Multihelicopter door gunnery consists of the techniques used to acquire and engage targets from helicopters flying in formation at terrain-flight altitudes. Aircrews and door gunners in the formation must use effective crew-coordination procedures to visually acquire, identify, and engage targets. Both aircraft and passengers are vulnerable to attack during air-movement operations and throughout all phases of air-assault operations. Therefore, door gunners must respond by delivering direct and suppressive fires on these targets. This section discusses crew-coordination procedures, gunner employment, and firing techniques that units should use during multihelicopter operations. A-79. Before conducting multihelicopter door gunnery, the aircrews and door gunners must be qualified in the techniques and skills of basic door gunnery and they must complete crew qualification, Table VIII, according to this appendix.

A-16

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

Figure A-10. Sight Picture, M60D, Right Side of Aircraft

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

A-17

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

Figure A-11. Sight Picture, M60D, Left Side of Aircraft

A-18

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

SECTION III ADVANCED TABLE TACTICS, TECHNIQUES, AND PROCEDURES

CREW COORDINATION
AIRCREW DUTIES
A-80. Before departing on a mission, the pilot-in-command must orient the crew on the situation and the mission. This orientation includes the friendly situation, rules of engagement, possible target areas, fire commands, the location of emergency medical and survival equipment, and other available information essential to mission success. A crewmember cannot assume that others know what he or she knows or see what he or she sees.

COORDINATION BETWEEN AIRCRAFT

A-81. The unit standardizes and specifies in its SOP the detailed procedures for communicating during live fire (training and combat). Crewmembers must clearly understand one another. In addition, positive communication between aircrews must specify commence-fire and cease-fire procedures and firing azimuths of overlapping or sector fires for the flight (for example, lead calls formation cease fire upon landing in the LZ). Coordination between aircraft/aircrews can prove to be the critical element in accident/incident prevention. A crewmember cannot assume that others know what he or she knows or see what he or she sees.

DOOR-GUNNER EMPLOYMENT IN FORMATION

SECTORS OF FIRE
A-81. Door gunners are normally assigned two sectors of fire: a primary sector and a secondary sector. Door gunners must know the traversing limits and the definitions that apply when calculating sectors of fire in formation. The aircraft operators manual covers traversing limits.

DEFINITIONS
Inboard Gunner
A-82. The gunner on the inboard side of a formation is the inboard gunner. This gunner usually has another aircraft in his or her field of fire. Figures A-12 through A-16 show examples of inboard gunner positions.

Outboard Gunner
A-83. The gunner on the outboard side of a formation who does not have another aircraft in his or her field of fire is the outboard gunner. Figures A-12 through A-16 show examples of outboard gunner positions.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

A-19

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

The Safety Limit

A-84. The safety limit is an imaginary line from the gunners position to a point in space that is no closer than two rotor diameters (day) or three rotor diameters (night) from any other aircraft.

Permissible Sector of Fire

A-85. The door-gunners permissible sector of fire is defined as the area in which the weapon may move freely within its traversing limits, minus the area in which weapons fire would affect friendly troops or equipment. For safety reasons, the door gunner should not fire any closer than a lateral distance of two rotor diameters (day safety limit) or three rotor diameters (night safety limit) from another aircraft. The gunner will determine this distance. The figures in this section show the approximate angles for the sectors of fire for different aircraft when the door gunner allows for the safety limit. The permissible sectors of fire will constantly change because of changes in position of aircraft during formation flying.

FORMATION CONSIDERATIONS
A-86. Multihelicopter door gunnery training operations should include at least two aircraft, with a maximum of five aircraft in formation. Aircrews conducting formation flight must do so with an extreme sense of responsibility. The employment of door gunners while in formation flight adds another responsibility to the entire aircrew. In addition to being concerned with separation from other aircraft, the aircrew must concentrate on permissible sectors of fire, when firing can commence, and when it must cease. Door gunners must be constantly vigilant to avoid mistakes that could prove fatal during live-fire formation flight.

AERODYNAMIC INTERFERENCE
A-87. Aircrews, especially door gunners, should anticipate aerodynamic interference between helicopters during formation flight. Aircrews flying trailing aircraft may encounter wake turbulence if they permit their aircraft to get below leading aircraft. Flight in the turbulent air may result in rapid attitude (pitch), roll, and yaw changes. The pilot may also have to increase power to maintain a proper position in a formation. Door gunners must be aware of the possibility of aerodynamic interference.

AIRCRAFT SEPARATION
A-88. The tactical situation may dictate an increase in the distance between helicopters, or formations of helicopters. At higher altitudes, helicopters should be positioned far enough apart to prevent a burst of antiaircraft fire from destroying the entire flight. At terrain-flight altitudes, aircraft may be spread out to take advantage of the terrain. In addition, flying loose and extended formations is less fatiguing to the pilot than flying close formations. Door gunners must be familiar with the techniques for maintaining proper aircraft separation. Understanding these techniques aid door gunners in determining their permissible sectors of fire while in formation.

AIRCRAFT MANEUVERING
A-89. A pilot normally maneuvers his or her aircraft primarily referencing only one other aircraft in the formation. The constant effort required to detect a change in altitude, airspeed, or heading of the reference aircraft precludes watching aircraft other than the

A-20

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

reference aircraft. If all aircraft guide correctly to their reference aircraft, all aircraft have adequate distance and altitude separation for safe operation of the flight and door-gunner employment. In those formations requiring a relative position to more than one aircraft (staggered trail), the aviator must use peripheral vision to the maximum, while concentrating on the reference aircraft. The pilot must also keep a constant mental picture of the door-gunners permissible sectors of fire and keep track of locations of other aircraft in the formation. Gunners also play a role in determining when they do and do not have permissible sectors of fire. A gunner on one side of the aircraft may have a permissible sector of fire while the gunners in other positions do not, and vice versa.

MANEUVERS
A-90. Aircrews that conduct formation flight must be familiar with the many different maneuvers normally associated with multihelicopter operations. They must be aware of how those maneuvers could change the permissible sectors of fire or, in some cases, restrict the gunners fire altogether. Maneuvers they must be familiar with include z Formation takeoff. z Formation turns. z Formation changes en route. z Rendezvous and join up. z Tactical formation breakup. z Formation landing. z Night formation landing. z Evasive actions. A-91. FM 1-203 covers the procedures for these maneuvers. The appropriate ATM for each aircraft contains the tasks, conditions, and standards for some of the maneuvers, particularly evasive maneuvers. The following are commonly used formations and their permissible sectors of fire.

Echelon Left/Right
A-92. This formation allows rapid deployment of the flank and allows unrestricted fires by outboard gunners in the lead and trail aircraft. It somewhat restricts suppressive fire by inboard gunners of lead and trail aircraft and the inboard and outboard gunners of other aircraft in the formation. Figure A-12 shows echelon left. Figure A-13 shows echelon right.

Trail
A-93. Trail formation allows rapid deployment of forces to the flank; it somewhat restricts fires by all gunners. Separation is two rotor disks during the day and three rotor disks at night. Figures A-14 and A-15 show trail formations for day and night.

Tactical Free Cruise

A-94. Free cruise is a technique that permits the wingman in a two-ship section or more to freely maneuver in the zone extending 45 degrees on either side and to the rear of the leaders tail. Within the zone, the wingman may vary vertical separation, airspeed, and distance from the leader. The distance that the wingman trails the leader varies and depends on visibility and terrain. The wingman must maintain visual contact with the

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

A-21

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

leader and exercise caution not to overtake the leader. The flexibility of free cruise enables the wingman to change position behind the leader at will, without radio communication. The wingman is able to choose his or her own flight path to avoid obstacles, use terrain to the maximum advantage, or provide fires against known or suspected enemy positions. Free cruise is best suited for tactical situations. This formation causes continuous changes in the permissible sectors of fire. Depending on aircraft position in the flight, it sometimes allows unrestricted fires of gunners while restricting fires of other gunners in the formation. Figure A-16 shows tactical free-cruise sectors of fire. Note: Tactical free cruise is the most challenging formation for controlling fires from door gunners. Because of the constant change involved in the formation, employment of door gunners during free cruise requires a great deal of training and command and control.

FIRING TECHNIQUES
FIRE-CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
A-95. Fire control includes all actions of the aircrews in planning, preparing, and applying fire on a target. These actions include z Selecting and designating targets. z Opening fire at the instant desired. z Adjusting fire and regulating the rate of fire. z Shifting from one target to another. z Overlapping fires with other gunners. z Ceasing fire. A-96. Failure to exercise fire control causes ineffective employment of the weapon systems. It can endanger friendly troops or aircraft. It can also result in failure to engage a threatening target, loss of surprise, premature disclosure of positions, fire on unimportant targets, loss of time in adjusting fire, and wasted ammunition.

A-22

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

Figure A-12. Sectors of Fire, Echelon Left

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

A-23

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

Figure A-13. Sectors of Fire, Echelon Right

Figure A-14. Trail Formation, Day

A-24

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

Figure A-15. Trail Formation, Night

Figure A-16. Tactical Free Cruise

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

A-25

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TARGET OF OPPORTUNITY
A-97. The requirement for immediate fires arises from targets of opportunity or changes in the tactical situation. Any of the door gunners in the formation may acquire immediate fire targets. However, all immediate fires require close coordination between other aircraft in the formation and, if the situation dictates, with the ground commander or the fire-support coordinator.

TARGET ACQUISITION
A-98. Gunners should acquire targets by all available means. Then the pilot-incommand, pilot, or air mission commander will direct engagements. Engagement of targets acquired by other means will be according to existing directives or policies of the supported headquarters. A-99. Target identification under natural-light conditions at night may be difficult. The factors of METT-T and the tactical situation (such as cross-FLOT) also apply to night operations. As with all operations, gunners must positively identify targets before firing. A-100. At night or during periods of low visibility, target acquisition becomes more difficult and crew responsibilities take on added importance. Proper crew training and knowledge of techniques available can turn the operation into an advantage for the door gunners. Aids to night target acquisition include z Artificial illumination. z Night-vision devices. z Enemy fireobservers may spot enemy fire by seeing muzzle flashes or tracers from the air; however, the observer must rapidly pinpoint the muzzle flash or tracer location before it disappears.

PRINCIPLES OF APPLICATION OF FIRE

A-101. Application of fire consists of the methods that crews use to get complete and effective coverage of a target area. Training in the methods of applying fire can be accomplished only after the aircrews and door gunners have learned z How to recognize the different types of targets that they may find in combat. z How to properly distribute, overlap and concentrate their fire. z How to maintain the proper rate of fire.

Airspeeds 80 to 120 Knots

A-102. At airspeeds en route exceeding 120 knots, the gunners must adjust their LOA/LOS because of exterior ballistics effect.

Targets
A-103. The door gunner may have to engage a variety of targets during a mission. Suppression is a self-defense engagement. It allows friendly helicopters to bypass the threat. Door gunners do not shoot at targets that they do not intend to hit. Therefore, coordinated fires from all aircraft in the formation will enhance the probability of destroying the target.

A-26

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

Fires En Route
A-104. Gunners should initiate overlapping fires to provide the maximum fire available to destroy or suppress targets encountered en route. The unit will specify techniques and procedures for engaging targets en route to enhance mission security. En route targets might include an SA-14 team, an observation post, and small-arms fire. Targets identified en route will be visible for a short time; therefore, door gunners must be prepared to respond immediately to the threat.

Approach to Landing
A-105. Aircrews and troops are most vulnerable during landing. Therefore, units must develop procedures to coordinate and employ simultaneous fires.

On the Ground
A-106. Door gunners must fire immediately or continue firing to suppress or destroy targets while troops disembark. A-107. During Troop Egress. To prevent fratricide, units must carefully develop procedures for gunners firing within the aft 75 degrees (UH-60) fan. Situations may require continued suppression while troops egress. Soldiers will have to egress toward the aft part of the helicopter; they will then immediately take the prone position. This technique is potentially dangerous and takes a great deal of training. Soldiers should practice this technique during Table IX training. A-108. Overlapping or Sector Fire. After landing, door gunners should expect enemy fires from any direction. Therefore, they must use their discretion regarding fire control. Gunners should use overlapping fires or sector fires. These provide the most effective engagement techniques.

Departure
A-109. Units must train gunners, according to FM 3-97.4(FM 90-4), in troop dismounting and movement procedures from all aircraft-landing formations. The gunners ability to suppress targets depends on troop actions and movements from aircraft in different formations. Depending on the threat in the landing zone, door gunners may be required to continue suppression to assist the inserted soldiers as they organize their actions during the ground tactical plan.

SECTION IV ADVANCED TABLES AND RANGE TRAINING

TABLE IX
A-110. Table IX is the first opportunity for door gunners to participate in multiship door gunnery. It is a scenario-based crew validation for door gunners and pilots. Units will use Table IX to train the crew coordination elements and TTPs necessary to progress to multiship live fire. The commander selects the specific tasks or missions to train during Table IX. These can include but are not limited to insertion/extraction, MOUT, SAR, and convoy security. Table IX is the commanders training and assessment event before live-fire multiship gunnery. The following are guidelines for Table IX. A-111. Scenarios for Table IX should be briefed and rehearsed as per the unit TACSOP. ROE and weapons control measures should be developed that support the

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

A-27

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

scenario and the commanders training objective. Routes should be selected that allow aircrews to acquire, identify, and engage targets en route and in the objective. A-112. Targets should be configured to represent a realistic threat formation that replicates the enemy situation briefed for the scenario. A-113. A maximum of five aircraft should participate in multiship door gunnery formations. The S3 and the standardization instructor should select a route for the flight on which the door gunners can engage targets en route and in the LZ. A-114. OPFOR should be available to engage the aircraft and provide targets for the door gunner. The OPFOR should be soldiers with infantry MILES equipment. The OPFOR should have weapons that can engage the aircraft. A-115. Units will thoroughly brief and rehearse crews involved in exercises/missions. Because the door gunners will not be shooting live-mix ammunition, adjusting fires onto the targets may be difficult. This situation is unavoidable. The training value is in rehearsing formations and fire commands. The objectives of the training are to z Allow units to refine crew coordination to bring fires on target. more efficiently z Expose door gunners to engaging targets in a multiship mission profile. z Exercise command and control using a briefed ROE and weapons control measures. z Allow aircrews to respond to a variety of target arrays.

TABLE X
A-116. Commanders conduct Table X at combined training centers. Table X is the livefire graduation exercise for unit door-gunnery training. Commanders use the same premission planning procedures, with additional emphasis on safety, for Table X as for Table IX. A-117. The primary reason for firing Table X at a CTC is that the surface danger area for a helicopter with two door gunners firing is almost 8,200 meters wide. Thus, most units cannot conduct this training on their home-station range. However, if commanders have the resources and adequate range facilities, they can fire Table X at their home station. A-118. The commander will dictate the scenario, but it will have the following characteristics: z Enemy target arrays will be en route and in the LZ. z Only the crewno troopswill be onboard the aircraft. z A maximum of five aircraft will be in the formation. z For initial live fire, trail is the mandated formation. z TTPs developed in Table IX will be applied to the multiship Table X. z Coordination between aircraft will be used to maintain suppression of targets throughout the formation. A-119. Gunners must complete Table IX no earlier than 180 days before the conduct of Table X. A-120. The unit commander must decide whether the unit is ready for live fire. Units must complete a thorough risk assessment before the exercise/mission.

A-28

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix A

GUIDES FOR SUCCESSFUL TRAINING

A-121. Units must thoroughly prepare for door-gunner qualification ranges. Pilots must practice the flight profiles required by the tables before the range. Running fire and takeoff will present the greatest challenge to the pilot. In addition, the helicopter should hover only high enough to give the door gunner intervisibility with the target. Extremely high hovers present unrealistic training for the door gunner. Engagement timing is important. To make the timing objective z Make sure the pilot of the firing aircraft is ready before target presentation. z Make sure the soldiers timing the engagements practice the calls to the firing aircrew and timing sequences to ensure uniform scoring. z Make sure the pilots understand the required flight profile for the engagement. z Refer to the running-fire diagram in chapter 2; adopt this method to door-gunner running fire. The running-fire engagement must start and stop at the same point for all qualifying door gunners; in addition, the door gunner must have intervisibility with the target during the running engagement. A-122. Door gunners must engage both troop and vehicle targets during qualification. The recommended vehicle targets are BMP silhouettes. For troop targets, units have several options. A-123. Figures A-17 and A-18 show the proper use of three-dimensional and E silhouettes on the door gunnery range. TC 25-8 contains the dimensions of the targets. A-124. The following publications are suggested as references: z TM 9-1005-224-10 (M60). z TM 9-1005-313-10 (M240). z TM 9-1005-262-13. z TM 9-1005-2626-50-1. z TM 9-1005-313-23&P. z TB 9-1005-202-50-1. z FM 3-22.68 (FM 23-67). z AR 385-63. z AR 600-106. z DA Pamphlet 385-63. z DA Pamphlet 385-38. z TC 1-204.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

A-29

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

Figure A-17. Troop Target With Three-Dimensional Silhouettes

Figure A-18. Target Lifter With Troop Silhouettes

A-30

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

Appendix B

Helicopter Gunnery Tables

SECTION I GUNNERY TABLE OVERVIEW

INTRODUCTION
B-1. The gunnery tables in this appendix provide the framework for helicopter gunnery training and evaluation. They are designed to develop and test the proficiency of individual, crew, and unit gunnery techniques at the basic, intermediate, and advanced levels. B-2. Because all units do not have the same METL, the anticipated shooting situations will vary from unit to unit. A unit conducting a pure attack mission would likely execute deliberate engagements (for example, longer rangesprecision munitions). In contrast, a unit conducting a reconnaissance or a screen mission may do more hip shooting (shorter rangessecondary or tertiary weapon systems). Aside from the tactical situation, the topography will often dictate how, where, and what type of engagements will be fired. All crews must understand the limitations or the opportunities that terrain may provide. Engaging a group of foot soldiers in a built-up area will be vastly different from engaging a mechanized force on the open desert. Mountainous terraincompared to dense jungle or a heavily wooded areawill present yet another weapon-system employment capability or limitation consideration. B-3. To provide the commander with latitude to address the units likely combat mission with respect to specific gunnery tasks, Table VII and Table VIII have been modified. Five selected engagements have been identified for crews/units equipped with OH-58D aircraft. Four selected engagements have been identified for crews/units equipped with AH-64 aircraft. These engagements are referred to as core tasks. They are considered basic engagements or engagements common to all crews. The commander/master gunner will select the remainder of engagement tasks from the additional and optional task-condition-standard lists within the tables. In addition, the commander may vary the engagement sequences and target arrays within the tables to meet specific training requirements or to accommodate resource constraints. Resource constraints may include ammunition availability, range size/layout, or suitable targets. B-4. Modified tasks/tables must be no less demanding than those described within this appendix. Commanders and master gunners must work continuously with installation or regional range officers to upgrade and improve ranges so that gunnery tasks can be conducted as prescribed.

TARGETS
B-5. The tables in this appendix specify the targets suitable for each engagement task. These targets include heavy armor, light armor, wheeled vehicles, and troops.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-1

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

B-6. TC 25-8 depicts standard target silhouettes for range training. The following are the approved targets for the tables in this appendix:
z z z z

Heavy armor. T-72 front or flank target. Light armor. BMP, BRDM, ZSU 23-4, 2S6, BMD, or BTR-series targets (front or flank profiles). Wheeled vehicles. U-375 truck fronts or flank targets. Troops. E-type or three-dimensional personnel silhouettes. Three to four personnel silhouettes can be attached to a single target board or lifter for scoring. In addition, Appendix A, Section IV, shows other options for personnel target scoring. The commander will decide whether to use flank or frontal target silhouettes. This decision will most likely depend on target intervisibility, target lifters used, and range layout. Rockets. The condition for each rocket task specifies a target silhouette for the engagement. Portray the rocket target effect area as a notional large target area (for example, an assembly area) with the target silhouette located in the center, serving as the crews aim point. The TEA is oriented with its long axis parallel to the firing helicopters gun-target line.

TARGET ENGAGEMENTS
B-7. The target engagement ranges on the tables in this appendix are within the effective range of the weapons specified by the task. Commanders may combine single table tasks into multiple engagements. Each individual task within a multiple task must be evaluated by its individual standard. For example, when commanders combine single Hellfire and cannon engagement tasks, each task must be scored and timed separately, even if the tasks occur at the same time. No engagement timetables are available for multiple engagementsonly for single engagements.

AMMUNITION
B-8. Ammunition conservation is not evaluated, but it is an implied task. In addition to stating the task, condition, and standard for engagements, each Table VII and VIII task has a specific type and quantity of ammunition allocated. Commanders will ensure that the proper type and quantity of ammunition are available for the conduct of tables. B-9. The ammunition used to execute the crews first attempt at Table VII or VIII will not exceed the total table allocation. Crews must manage their ammunition carefully to ensure that they have enough ammunition for each task. B-10. Crews are allowed to exceed the ammunition allocation for a task but are not given additional ammunition to make up for that ammunition. If a crew uses more than the allocated ammunition on a task and does not have enough ammunition to execute the remaining tasks, no credit will be given for those tasks not fired because of insufficient ammunition. Incomplete tasks or tasks not fired for reasons deemed appropriate by the master gunner will be executed during the rerun or refire portion of that crews training. B-11. The time allocation for a task does not increase even if crews have extra rounds of ammunition. For example, an AH-64 crew is authorized a total of 130 30-millimeter rounds for the four required 30-millimeter tasks in Table VII Day. If the crew uses only a total of 30 rounds to qualify on its first three 30-millimeter tasks, it could use the remaining 100 rounds for the last 30-millimeter engagement. While the crew could shoot its remaining rounds during its last engagement, the time standard would not increase and would remain the same as if the crew had only the rounds prescribed by the task to fire.

B-2

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

B-12. The ammunition allocations serve as planning factors for the conduct of the gunnery tables. They allow the commander/master gunner to assess resources required for each gunnery table. In addition, the allocations show individual crews the maximum amount of ammunition available for them to engage the tables targets. In addition, the ammunition allocation serves as a guide for Q2 and Q3 engagements when crews must reshoot a specific task. DA Pamphlet 350-38 lists the total amount of ammunition for each table. The numbers listed are all-inclusive; that is, the amount of ammunition listed for Table VII, for example, is the total amount for Table VII Day and Table VII Night. Note: No ammunition resources are provided for Q2 crew firings.

TABLE VI
B-13. The following procedures should be followed for Table VI:
z z z

Execute Table VI during daylight hours. Check all systems, shooting and sighting, on the helicopter. Execute this table under the supervision of the unit armament and maintenance officers.

B-14. Table VI is not a gate for each crew. However, it is recommended that each crew use the same aircraft to fire Tables VI, VII, and VIII. Table VI is a requirement for all aircraft requiring calibration/harmonization/verification before firing Tables VII/VIII.

TABLES VII AND VIII AH-64 AND OH-58D

B-15. Table VII Day, Table VII Night, Table VIII Day, and Table VIII Night consist of 12 engagement tasks each: 5 core tasks as listed, 7 additional/optional tasks selected from the list provided within the tables for OH-58D, 4 core tasks as listed, and 8 additional/optional tasks selected from the list provided within the tables for AH-64. B-16. Table VII provides crew training in preparation for Table VIII qualification. Consistency should be maintained between tables. For example, if a .50-caliber machinegun engagement is conducted in Table VII Day at a given target at a given range, then a similar engagement should be conducted during Table VIII Day. Tables should resemble each other, but they should not be identical. B-17. DA Pamphlet 350-38 does not provide Hellfire or Stinger missiles. When available because of stockpile reliability, surveillance/stock rotation, or shelf life, live missiles may be used when all pertinent regulations and directives are met concerning missile live fire.

EVALUATION
B-18. Score the tables according to the guidance in Chapter 2 of this manual. There are no degraded-mode gunnery tasks specified during conduct of the qualification table gunnery training/qualification tables. The commander/master gunner should mandate the use of the most accurate sighting system on the helicopter for intermediate gunnery tables unless otherwise required for specific mission-training purposes.

ALIBI FIRES
B-19. The unit commander or the master gunner will decide whether alibis will be fired. Any aircraft system or subsystem malfunction not detectable by the crew before the

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-3

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

engagement that adversely affects the performance of the selected weapon system will constitute an alibi. Malfunctions induced by crew error will not constitute an alibi. A simulator cannot be used for any weapon-system alibi fires.

ADVANCED TABLES
B-20. The advanced tables in this appendix are examples. The commander may modify them to support the unit METL and applicable MTP. Each section includes advanced tables with both attack and cavalry scenarios. B-21. Advanced tables are the commanders collective training tables. Units progress to advanced tables once they have completed intermediate tables. Advanced tables allow the commander to train and subjectively evaluate his units ability to control and distribute fires and engage targets as a unit in a tactical scenario. Tables IX and X focus on ensuring that two aircraft can function as an integrated team. In Tables XI and XII, the battalion commander ensures that the unit can conduct collective live-fire attack. Note: Crews who do not validate on Table VII or qualify on Table VIII will not progress to advanced table training. B-22. The commander determines the tasks that he wants to accomplish. The scenario should be built as an STX according to TC 1-210 and should support the unit METL and battle tasks. B-23. The S3 and master gunner must consider the physical dimensions of the assigned range complex when designing the scenario for advanced table live fire. Realistic target arrays and tactical spacing between helicopters firing simultaneously will provide a planning challenge. The following is an example flow for a company Table XII. B-24. The evaluation starts at the assembly area. The crews receive an OPORD from the battalion staff and plan the mission. The company continues its planning process as it would during normal collective training missions. When the company planning is complete, the company conducts a rehearsal and brief-back to the commander. B-25. When rehearsals and brief-backs are complete, the company starts the mission. The company moves along briefed air routes to the FARP, rearms/refuels, and continues to the attack-by-fire position. B-26. Figure B-1 shows the initial occupation of the ABF and engagement of long-range targets with missiles. The initial engagements are accomplished with missiles to simulate a deliberate attack. The standard is to hit all targets. Scoring is accomplished with onboard videotape or hits with live missiles. B-27. Figure B-2 shows the company engaging short-range cannon targets. Three to five minutes after the initial target handover for the missile engagements, present pop-up targets at about 1,000 meters. The standard is to hit all targets. Present at least two targets per aircraft. As Figure B-3 shows, a simulated artillery battery opens fire during the cannon engagements. Use Hoffman charges to simulate the artillery battery. The teams will engage the target with rockets. Neutralization is the standard for this engagement. B-28. Once the rocket engagement is complete, the company departs the ABF and returns to the FARP. Figure B-4 shows the company departing the ABF. B-29. The performance of the units should be judged against each other. The standard should include fire distribution, target effect for each of the weapons, and movement techniques.

B-4

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

Figure B-1. Occupation of the ABF

Figure B-2. Short-Range Cannon Engagements

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-5

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

Figure B-3. Neutralization of Artillery Battery

Figure B-4. Mission Complete, Depart ABF

B-6

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TARGET-EFFECT STANDARDS
B-30. The three target-effect standards for armed helicopter engagements are suppression, neutralization, and destruction.

SUPPRESSION
B-31. Popular definitions of suppression include
z z z

Shoot enough to get their heads down. Make those tanks button up. Shoot enough to cover my break.

B-32. However, FM 5-20(FM 101-5-1) defines suppression as direct and indirect fires, electronic countermeasures, or smoke brought to bear on enemy personnel, weapons, or equipment to prevent effective fire on friendly forces. B-33. Suppression for the individual aircraft is normally unplanned, defensive in nature, and executed as a self-defense engagement. A suppression engagement is a hasty engagement to prevent, modify, or stop an enemy engagement. Aircrews should use suppression to break contact and gain maneuver time and space. B-34. Suppression is not a decisive engagement. FM 5-20(FM 101-5-1) defines a decisive engagement as an engagement in which a unit is considered fully committed and cannot maneuver or extricate itself. In the absence of outside assistance, the action must be fought to a conclusion and either won or lost with the forces at hand. B-35. The crew firing the suppression engagement may not be able to observe target effect. B-36. Aircrews may attempt suppression against virtually any target for self-defense; for example, a crew may have to engage an armored target with cannon at close range to gain time and situational awareness for egress. B-37. Training suppression on live-fire gunnery ranges provides limited training value. The amount of ammunition required to suppress a target is not definable. In addition, all weapons mounted on armed helicopters can suppress targets.

NEUTRALIZATION
B-38. Neutralization knocks a target out of action temporarily. Neutralization of a target occurs when it suffers 10 percent or more casualties or damage. B-39. Neutralization is the standard for rocket engagements. Neutralization is a deliberate engagement in which the crew fires an initial engagement, senses the impacts, makes adjustments, and fires for effect. B-40. The crew selects a central aiming point for multiple targets covering a large area and adjusts the aiming point on observed impacts. Crews must observe the impacts of the sensing rockets to adjust for the fire for effect. B-41. Rockets are usually the most effective when fired in mass. For neutralization training, resource constraints do not allow aircrews to fire rockets in mass to achieve a fire-for-effect standard. The training strategy for neutralization is to teach and evaluate crews on their ability to select a central aiming point (target center of mass) and adjust rockets onto the target without completing a decisive fire for effect.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-7

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

B-42. The optimal solution for training and evaluating neutralization is for units to set up an assembly area complete with tents and vehicles in the range impact area and allow the crews to engage the area with rockets. When a crew completes the engagement, the master gunner goes to the target area and counts impacts. Units cannot achieve this complete array of targets because of resource constraints. The neutralization standard for training is, therefore, to use single (or several) silhouettes on the range as central aiming points. The crew adjusts the rockets onto the individual targets. B-43. All aircrews will train to the neutralization standard. Although commanders may consider suppression a more relevant rocket mission for their units, neutralization will provide the maximum training value per trigger pull for basic and intermediate gunnery training. B-44. Paragraphs 7-29 through 7-41 contain more information on the employment of 2.75-inch rockets.

DESTRUCTION
B-45. Destruction puts a target out of action permanently. Direct hits with highexplosive munitions are required to destroy hard materiel targets. Destroying a tank should not be confused with a destruction mission. Destruction often requires large expenditures of ammunition. Destruction is a deliberate engagement. B-46. Crews use precision-guided missiles against hard targets during destruction missions. While crews may use other weapons for destruction, unit and crew mission planning normally focuses on the standoff capability of Hellfire missiles.

B-8

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

SECTION II AH-64A GUNNERY TABLES

B-47. AH-64A aircraft will use the gunnery tables in this section. TABLE I. DAY AH-64A INITIAL TRANSITION/QUALIFICATION (PILOT)

TASK
NO DESCRIPTION AMMO

CONDITION
MODE RANGE TARGET

STANDARD
TGT EFFECT

IAW USAAVNC- or NGB-approved POI

TABLE I. NIGHT AH-64A INITIAL TRANSITION/QUALIFICATION (PILOT)

TASK
NO DESCRIPTION AMMO

CONDITION
MODE RANGE TARGET

STANDARD
TGT EFFECT

IAW USAAVNC- or NGB-approved POI

TABLE II. DAY AH-64A INITIAL TRANSITION/QUALIFICATION (CPG)

TASK
NO DESCRIPTION AMMO

CONDITION
MODE RANGE TARGET

STANDARD
TGT EFFECT

IAW USAAVNC- or NGB-approved POI

TABLE II. NIGHT AH-64A INITIAL TRANSITION/QUALIFICATION (CPG)

TASK
NO DESCRIPTION AMMO

CONDITION
MODE RANGE TARGET

STANDARD
TGT EFFECT

IAW USAAVNC- or NGB-approved POI

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-9

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE III. DAY/NIGHT AH-64A INDIVIDUAL TRAINING TABLE (PILOT) TASK NO

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

DESCRIPTION
ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET OFF-AXIS WITH CANNON ENGAGE MOVING TARGET OFFAXIS WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY TGT WITH HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TGT WITH HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TGT WITH HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TGT WITH HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY TGT WITH HELLFIRE ENGAGE MOVING TGT WITH HELLFIRE

AMMO
40 RDS 30mm IHADSS 40 RDS 30mm IHADSS 40 RDS 30mm IHADSS 40 RDS 30mm IHADSS 40 RDS 30mm IHADSS 40 RDS 30mm IHADSS 40 RDS 30mm IHADSS 40 RDS 30mm IHADSS 4 RKTS (M274) IHADSS 4 RKTS (M274) IHADSS 6 RKTS (M274) COOP 6 RKTS (M274) COOP 8 RKTS (M267) COOP 8 RKTS (M267) COOP 1 SAL HF LOAL-AUTO 1 SAL HF LOAL-REMOTE 1 SAL HF LOBL-REMOTE 2 SAL HF RIPL 2 SAL HF RAPID 2 SAL HF RAPID

CONDITION STANDARD RANGE MODE (meters) TARGET TGT EFFECT

HOVERING MOVING/ RUNNING HOVERING MOVING/ RUNNING DIVING DIVING HOVERING MOVING/ RUNNING DIVING DIVING <1,500 <1,500 <1,500 <1,500 <1,500 <1,500 <1,500 <1,500 <1,500 <1,500 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT 1 rkt in 10m radius or 2 rkts in 50m radius TEA 1 rkt in 10m radius or 2 rkts in 50m radius TEA 2 rockets in 150 X 200m TEA 2 rockets in 150 X 200m TEA 3 rockets in 300 X 400m TEA 3 rockets in 300 X 400m TEA HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT

MOVING/ 1,500-3,000 RUNNING MOVING/ 1,500-3,000 RUNNING APPROPRIATE >3,000 MODE APPROPRIATE >3,000 MODE HOVERING MOVING/ RUNNING >3,000 >3,000

APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE MOVING/ 500-8,000 RUNNING HOVERING 500-8,000

NOTES: 1. Table III is designed for use by the unit IP/SP to determine individual proficiency and readiness level. 2. Diving or running rockets may be fired as singles or pairs. All hovering rocket engagements will be fired as pairs. To maximize rocket training, all required rockets must be fired for each engagement. 3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for this table; conduct in the AH-64A simulator. 4. MOVINGbelow ETL; RUNNINGabove ETL. 5. Aviator must obtain a GO on all 20 tasks of Table Ill. 6. Table III is the minimum to be performed; additional tasks may be added to determine or obtain a higher level of proficiency. 7. Targets may be light vehicles, troops, trucks, buildings, or miscellaneous equipment.

B-10

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE IV. DAY/NIGHT AH-64A INDIVIDUAL TRAINING TABLE (CPG)

TASK NO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

CONDITION AMMO
40 RDS 30mm CPG IHADSS 40 RDS 30mm CPG IHADSS 30 RDS 30mm TADS 30 RDS 30mm TADS 40 RDS 30mm CPG IHADSS 40 RDS 30mm CPG IHADSS 30 RDS 30mm TADS 40 RDS 30mm CPG IHADSS 4 RKTS (M274) CPG IHADSS 4 RKTS (M274) CPG IHADSS 6 RKTS (M274) COOP 6 RKTS (M274) COOP 8 RKTS (M267) COOP 8 RKTS (M267) COOP 1 SAL HF LOAL-AUTO 1 SAL HF LOAL-REMOTE 1 SAL HF LOBL-REMOTE 2 SAL HF RIPL 2 SAL HF RAPID 2 SAL HF RAPID

STANDARD TGT EFFECT

HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT

DESCRIPTION
ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET OFF-AXIS WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET OFF-AXIS WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY TGT WITH HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TGT WITH HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TGT WITH HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TGT WITH HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY TGT WITH HELLFIRE ENGAGE MOVING TGT WITH HELLFIRE

MODE
HOVERING MOVING/ RUNNING HOVERING MOVING/ RUNNING DIVING DIVING APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE DIVING DIVING MOVING/ RUNNING MOVING/ RUNNING APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE HOVERING MOVING/ RUNNING

RANGE TARGET (meters)

<1,500 <1,500 <4,000 <4,000 <1,500 <1,500 <1,500 <1,500 <1,500 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7

1 rkt in 10m radius or 2 rkts in 50m radius 1 rkt in 10m radius <1,500 See Note 7 or 2 rkts in 50m radius 2 rockets in 1,500-3,000 See Note 7 150 X 200m TEA 1,500-3,000 See Note 7 >3,000 >3,000 >3,000 >3,000 See Note 7 See Note 7 HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR 2 rockets in 150 X 200m TEA 3 rockets in 300 X 400m TEA 3 rockets in 300 X 400m TEA HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT

APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE MOVING/ RUNNING HOVERING 500-8,000 500-8,000

NOTES: 1. Table IV is designed for use by the unit IP/SP to determine individual proficiency and readiness level. 2. Diving or running rockets may be fired as singles or pairs. All hovering rocket engagements will be fired as pairs. To maximize rocket training, all required rockets must be fired for each engagement. 3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for this table; conduct in the AH-64A simulator. 4. MOVINGbelow ETL; RUNNINGabove ETL. 5. Aviator must obtain a GO on all 20 tasks of Table IV. 6. Table IV is the minimum to be performed; additional tasks may be added to determine or obtain a higher level of proficiency. 7. Targets may be light vehicles, troops, trucks, buildings, or miscellaneous equipment.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-11

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE V. HELICOPTER GUNNERY SKILLS TEST AND G-COFT

TASK
Pass a written test consisting of at least 50 gunnery-specific questions from the following subject areas: Weapon Systems Operation/Firing Characteristics. Ballistics. Delivery Techniques. Munitions: Identification/Function/Operation.

CONDITION
Without reference to publications.

STANDARD
Minimum of 80% correct.

Perform relevant tasks from the following areas: Armament/Weapon Systems Preflight. Armament/Weapon Systems Switchology. Procedures for hangfire, misfire and emergency conditions involving armament systems. Munitions handling, uploading and downloading.

Demonstrate ability to perform or explain selected subject areas: Aircraft. Simulator or Aircraft. Simulator or Aircraft. Aircraft With Training or Live Munitions.

Overall GO/NO-GO is based on master gunners or designated representatives assessment.

Pass G-COFT.

Simulator.

Achieve 70 points on 10 out of 12 engagements on each iteration (day and night). Must receive at least one GO (at least 70 points) for each weapon system.

Other requirements according to Chapter 2, FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140).

NOTES: 1. Some hands-on tasks are also ATM tasks. However, conduct these tasks as part of the HGST to confirm crew proficiency before live-fire training/qualification. 2. G-COFT will be conducted day and night and will be modeled on Table VII or VIII.

B-12

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VI. AH-64A WEAPONS CALIBRATION/VERIFICATION TASK NO DESCRIPTION

CONDUCT AWS DYNAMIC HARMONIZATION OPERATE CANNON WITH TADS/LASER OPERATE CANNON WITH IHADSS (PILOT) OPERATE CANNON WITH IHADSS (GUNNER) OPERATE ARCS OPERATE ARCS

CONDITION AMMO MODE RANGE (meters)

1,000

STANDARD TARGET TGT EFFECT

REFER TO HARMONIZATION PROCEDURE HIT

60 RDS

HOVERING

TADS

30 RDS

HOVERING

1,000-1,500

TADS

30 RDS

HOVERING

<1,000

IHADSS (PILOT) IHADSS (GUNNER) COOP COOP

HIT

30 RDS 6 RKTS M274 6 RKTS M274

HOVERING

<1,000

HIT 2 rockets in a 300 X 400m TEA 2 rockets in a 300 X 400m TEA PROPER PRELAUNCH/ POSTLAUNCH SYMBOLOGY

5 6

HOVERING HOVERING

1,500-3,000 >3,000

OPERATE PTWS

1 SAL HF

HOVERING

2,0004,000

TADS

NOTE: This table is designed to verify weapon-systems operation. If the Laser Aim Scoring System is available, verify laser spot as well. AMMUNITION: (DA Pam 350-38) 12 rkts (M274), 150 rds 30mm.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-13

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE VII. DAY AH-64A CREW TRAINING TABLE

TASK
NO
1 2

CONDITION
AMMO
1 HF 1 HF REMOTE 40 RDS 30mm IHADSS 6 RKTS (M274) 4 RKTS (M274) PLT IHADSS HF HF 30mm 30mm 30mm 2.75" 2.75"

STANDARD
TARGET
HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR

DESCRIPTION
ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MOVING TGT WITH HF ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MOVING TGT WITH HF ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS

MODE
HOVERING APPROPRIATE MODE HOVERING HOVERING DIVING

RANGE (meters)
>2,000 >4,000

TGT EFFECT
HIT HIT

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

<1,000 <4,000 <1,500

See Note 6

HIT 2 rockets in a 300 X 400m TEA

1 rkt in 10m radius or 2 rkts in 50m radius

See Note 6

See Note 6

MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE.

ENGAGEMENTS 6 through 12: Commander/master gunner will select 7 optional tasks from list on following page. There will be a total of 12 engagement tasks: 4 missile, 4 cannon, and 4 rocket. STANDARD: Crew must have 8 qualified engagements to receive an overall GO for this table. The crew must receive at least one GO (at least 70 points) for each weapon system. AMMUNITION: (DA Pam 350-38) Ammunition depicted equals the maximum ammunition required for day firings for the given table; that is, 20 rkts (M274), 130 rds 30mm. NOTES: 1. Tasks 1 through 5 are core task and will be fired according to the table. The commander/master gunner will determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering for engagements 6 though 12. 2. Tasks 6 through 12 will be selected from list on the following page to support the unit mission, METL, and resources. 3. Ammunition allocated is for both day and night tables. 4. Diving or running rocket engagements may be fired as singles or pairs. All hovering rocket engagements will be fired as pairs. 5. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide missiles for this table. Training missiles should be used. 6. Targets may be light vehicles, troops, trucks, buildings, or miscellaneous equipment.

B-14

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VII. DAY AH-64A CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONCLUDED)

TASK
NO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

CONDITION
AMMO MODE

STANDARD

DESCRIPTION

RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT (meters)

<1,500 <1,500 <1,500 <4,000 <4,000 <1,500 <1,500 <3,000 <3,000 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT See Notes 2 and 3 See Notes 2 and 3 See Notes 2 and 3 See Notes 2 and 3 See Notes 2 and 3 See Notes 2 and 3 HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET 30 RDS 30mm APPROPRIATE WITH CANNON CPG IHADSS MODE ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET OFF-AXIS WITH CANNON ENGAGE MOVING TARGET OFFAXIS WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30mm CPG IHADSS 30 RDS 30mm CPG IHADSS 30 RDS 30mm TADS APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE MOVING/ RUNNING MOVING/ RUNNING APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE MOVING/ RUNNING APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH 30 RDS 30mm CANNON TADS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET 30 RDS 30mm WITH CANNON IHADSS ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH 30 RDS 30mm CANNON IHADSS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET 4 RKTS (M274) WITH ROCKETS IHADSS ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH 4 RKTS (M274) ROCKETS IHADSS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET 6 RKTS (M274) WITH ROCKETS COOP ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH 6 RKTS (M274) ROCKETS COOP ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET 4 RKTS (M274) WITH ROCKETS COOP ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH 4 RKTS (M274) ROCKETS COOP ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH HELLFIRE 1 SAL HF

1,500-3,000 See Note 4 1,500-3,000 See Note 4 <7,500 <7,500 <2000 >4,000 >2,000 >2,000 >3,000 500-8,000 500-8,000 See Note 4 See Note 4 HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR

ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET 1 SAL HF WITH HELLFIRE LOAL-REMOTE ENGAGE STATIONARY/MVNG 1 SAL HF TGT W/HELLFIRE LOAL-REMOTE ENGAGE STATIONARY/MVNG 1 SAL HF TGT W/HELLFIRE LOBL-REMOTE ENGAGE STATIONARY/MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY TGT W/ HELLFIRE 1 SAL HF LOAL-AUTO 2 SAL HF RIPL 2 SAL HF RAPID

NOTES: 1. The commander/master gunner will determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering for the engagements above to support unit training requirements and mission essential task list. 2. The standard for rocket target effect is diving rockets (<1,500-meter engagements) 1 of 4 in 10-meter radius or 2 of 4 in 50-meter radius TEA; running rockets (1,500- to 3,000-meter engagements) 2 of 6 (or 1 of 4) in a 150m X 200m TEA; all other rocket engagements (running, diving, or hovering), 2 of 6 (or 1 of 4) rockets in a 300m X 400m TEA. 3. Diving or running rocket engagements may be fired as singles or pairs. All hovering rocket engagements will be fired as pairs. 4. Targets may be light vehicles, troops, trucks, buildings, or miscellaneous equipment.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-15

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE VII. NIGHT AH-64A CREW TRAINING TABLE

TASK
NO
1 2

CONDITION
AMMO
1 HF 1 HF REMOTE 40 RDS 30mm IHADSS 6 RKTS (M274) 4 RKTS (M274) PLT IHADSS HF HF 30mm 30mm 30mm 2.75" 2.75"

STANDARD
TARGET
HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR

DESCRIPTION
ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH HF ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS

MODE
HOVERING APPROPRIATE MODE HOVERING HOVERING DIVING

RANGE (meters)
>2,000 >4,000

TGT EFFECT
HIT HIT

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

<1,000 <4,000 <1,500

See Note 6

HIT 2 rockets in a 300 X 400m TEA

1 rkt in 10m radius or 2 rkts in 50m radius

See Note 6

See Note 6

MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE.

ENGAGEMENTS 6 through 12: Commander/master gunner will select 7 optional tasks from list on following page. There will be a total of 12 engagement tasks: 4 missile, 4 cannon, and 4 rocket. STANDARD: Crew must have 8 qualified engagements to receive an overall GO for this table. The crew must receive at least one GO (at least 70 points) for each weapon system. AMMUNITION: (DA Pam 350-38) Ammunition depicted equals the maximum ammunition required for day firings for the given table; that is, 20 rkts (M274), 130 rds 30mm. NOTES: 1. Tasks 1 through 5 are core task and will be fired according to the table. The commander/master gunner will determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering for engagements 6 though 12. 2. Tasks 6 through 12 will be selected from list on the following page to support the unit mission, METL, and resources. 3. Ammunition allocated is for both day and night tables. 4. Diving or running rocket engagements may be fired as singles or pairs. All hovering rocket engagements will be fired as pairs. 5. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide missiles for this table. Training missiles should be used. 6. Targets may be light vehicles, troops, trucks, buildings, or miscellaneous equipment.

B-16

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VII. NIGHT AH-64A CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONCLUDED)

TASK
NO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

CONDITION
AMMO MODE

STANDARD

DESCRIPTION
ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET OFF-AXIS WITH CANNON ENGAGE MOVING TARGET OFFAXIS WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON

RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT (meters)

<1,500 <1,500 <1,500 <4,000 <4,000 <1,500 <1,500 <3,000 <3,000 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT See Notes 2 and 3 See Notes 2 and 3 See Notes 2 and 3 See Notes 2 and 3 See Notes 2 and 3 See Notes 2 and 3 HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT

30 RDS 30mm APPROPRIATE CPG IHADSS MODE 30 RDS 30mm CPG IHADSS 30 RDS 30mm CPG IHADSS 30 RDS 30mm TADS APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE MOVING/ RUNNING MOVING/ RUNNING APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE MOVING/ RUNNING APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH 30 RDS 30mm CANNON TADS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30mm IHADSS

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH 30 RDS 30mm CANNON IHADSS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS 4 RKTS (M274) IHADSS

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH 4 RKTS (M274) ROCKETS IHADSS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS 6 RKTS (M274) COOP

1,500-3,000 See Note 4 1,500-3,000 See Note 4 <7,500 <7,500 <2,000 >4,000 >2,000 >2,000 >3,000 500-8,000 500-8,000 See Note 4 See Note 4 HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH 6 RKTS (M274) ROCKETS COOP ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS 4 RKTS (M274) COOP

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH 4 RKTS (M274) ROCKETS COOP ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH HELLFIRE 1 SAL HF

ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET 1 SAL HF WITH HELLFIRE LOAL-REMOTE ENGAGE STATIONARY/MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY TGT W/ HELLFIRE 1 SAL HF LOAL-REMOTE 1 SAL HF LOBL-REMOTE 1 SAL HF LOAL-AUTO 2 SAL HF RIPL 2 SAL HF RAPID

NOTES: 1. The commander/master gunner will determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering for the engagements above to support unit training requirements and mission essential task list. 2. The standard for rocket target effect is diving rockets (<1,500-meter engagements) 1 of 4 in 10-meter radius or 2 of 4 in 50-meter radius TEA; running rockets (1,500- to 3,000-meter engagements) 2 of 6 (or 1 of 4) in a 150m X 200m TEA; all other rocket engagements (running, diving, or hovering), 2 of 6 (or 1 of 4) rockets in a 300m X 400m TEA. 3. Diving or running rocket engagements may be fired as singles or pairs. All hovering rocket engagements will be fired as pairs. 4. Targets may be light vehicles, troops, trucks, buildings, or miscellaneous equipment.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-17

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE VIII. DAY AH-64A CREW TRAINING TABLE

TASK
NO
1 2

CONDITION
AMMO
1 HF 1 HF REMOTE 40 RDS 30mm IHADSS 6 RKTS (M274) 4 RKTS (M274) PLT IHADSS HF HF 30mm 30mm 30mm 2.75" 2.75"

STANDARD
TARGET
HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR

DESCRIPTION
ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH HF ENGAGE STATIONARY/MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS

MODE
HOVERING APPROPRIATE MODE HOVERING HOVERING DIVING

RANGE (meters)
>2,000 >4,000

TGT EFFECT
HIT HIT

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

<1,000 <4,000 <1,500

See Note 6

HIT 2 rockets in a 300 X 400m TEA

1 rkt in 10m radius or 2 rkts in 50m radius

See Note 6

See Note 6

MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE.

ENGAGEMENTS 6 through 12: Commander/master gunner will select 7 optional tasks from list on following page. There will be a total of 12 engagement tasks: 4 missile, 4 cannon, and 4 rocket. STANDARD: Crew must have 8 qualified engagements to receive an overall GO for this table. The crew must receive at least one GO (at least 70 points) for each weapon system. AMMUNITION: (DA Pam 350-38) Ammunition depicted equals the maximum ammunition required for day firings for the given table; that is, 20 rkts (M274), 130 rds 30mm. NOTES: 1. Tasks 1 through 5 are core task and will be fired according to the table. The commander/master gunner will determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering for engagements 6 though 12. 2. Tasks 6 through 12 will be selected from list on the following page to support the unit mission, METL, and resources. 3. Ammunition allocated is for both day and night tables. 4. Diving or running rocket engagements may be fired as singles or pairs. All hovering rocket engagements will be fired as pairs. 5. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide missiles for this table. Training missiles should be used. 6. Targets may be light vehicles, troops, trucks, buildings, or miscellaneous equipment.

B-18

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VIII. DAY AH-64A CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONCLUDED)

TASK
NO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

CONDITION
AMMO MODE

STANDARD

DESCRIPTION
ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET OFF-AXIS WITH CANNON ENGAGE MOVING TARGET OFFAXIS WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON

RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT (meters)

<1,500 <1,500 <1,500 <4,000 <4,000 <1,500 <1,500 <3,000 <3,000 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT See Notes 2 and 3 See Notes 2 and 3 See Notes 2 and 3 See Notes 2 and 3 See Notes 2 and 3 See Notes 2 and 3 HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT

30 RDS 30mm APPROPRIATE CPG IHADSS MODE 30 RDS 30mm CPG IHADSS 30 RDS 30mm CPG IHADSS 30 RDS 30mm TADS APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE MOVING/ RUNNING MOVING/ RUNNING APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE MOVING/ RUNNING APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH 30 RDS 30mm CANNON TADS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30mm IHADSS

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH 30 RDS 30mm CANNON IHADSS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS 4 RKTS (M274) IHADSS

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH 4 RKTS (M274) ROCKETS IHADSS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS 6 RKTS (M274) COOP

1,500-3,000 See Note 4 1,500-3,000 See Note 4 <7,500 <7,500 <2,000 >4,000 >2,000 >2,000 >3,000 500-8,000 500-8,000 See Note 4 See Note 4 HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH 6 RKTS (M274) ROCKETS COOP ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS 4 RKTS (M274) COOP

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH 4 RKTS (M274) ROCKETS COOP ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH HELLFIRE 1 SAL HF

ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET 1 SAL HF WITH HELLFIRE LOAL-REMOTE ENGAGE STATIONARY/MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY TGT W/ HELLFIRE 1 SAL HF LOAL-REMOTE 1 SAL HF LOBL-REMOTE 1 SAL HF LOAL-AUTO 2 SAL HF RIPL 2 SAL HF RAPID

NOTES: 1. The commander/master gunner will determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering for the engagements above to support unit training requirements and mission essential task list. 2. The standard for rocket target effect is diving rockets (<1,500-meter engagements) 1 of 4 in 10 meter-radius or 2 of 4 in 50-meter radius TEA; running rockets (1,500- to 3,000-meter engagements) 2 of 6 (or 1 of 4) in a 150m X 200m TEA; all other rocket engagements (running, diving, or hovering), 2 of 6 (or 1 of 4) rockets in a 300m X 400m TEA. 3. Diving or running rocket engagements may be fired as singles or pairs. All hovering rocket engagements will be fired as pairs. 4. Targets may be light vehicles, troops, trucks, buildings, or miscellaneous equipment.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-19

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE VIII. NIGHT AH-64A CREW TRAINING TABLE

TASK
NO
1 2

CONDITION
AMMO
1 HF 1 HF REMOTE 40 RDS 30mm IHADSS 6 RKTS (M274) 4 RKTS (M274) PLT IHADSS HF HF 30mm 30mm 30mm 2.75" 2.75"

STANDARD
TARGET
HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR

DESCRIPTION
ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH HF ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS

MODE
HOVERING APPROPRIATE MODE HOVERING HOVERING DIVING

RANGE (meters)
>2,000 >4,000

TGT EFFECT
HIT HIT

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

<1,000 <4,000 <1,500

See Note 6

HIT 2 rockets in a 300 X 400m TEA

1 rkt in 10m radius or 2 rkts in 50m radius

See Note 6

See Note 6

MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON FOLLOWING PAGE.

ENGAGEMENTS 6 through 12: The commander/master gunner will select 7 optional tasks from list on following page. There will be a total of 12 engagement tasks: 4 missile, 4 cannon, and 4 rocket. STANDARD: Crew must have 8 qualified engagements to receive an overall GO for this table. The crew must receive at least one GO (at least 70 points) for each weapon system. AMMUNITION: (DA Pam 350-38) Ammunition depicted equals the maximum ammunition required for day firings for the given table; that is, 20 rkts (M274), 130 rds 30mm. NOTES: 1. Tasks 1 through 5 are core task and will be fired according to the table. The commander/master gunner will determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering for engagements 6 though 12. 2. Tasks 6 through 12 will be selected from list on the following page to support the unit mission, METL, and resources. 3. Ammunition allocated is for both day and night tables. 4. Diving or running rocket engagements may be fired as singles or pairs. All hovering rocket engagements will be fired as pairs. 5. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide missiles for this table. Training missiles should be used. 6. Targets may be light vehicles, troops, trucks, buildings, or miscellaneous equipment.

B-20

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VIII. NIGHT AH-64A CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONCLUDED)

TASK
NO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

CONDITION
AMMO MODE

STANDARD

DESCRIPTION
ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET OFF-AXIS WITH CANNON ENGAGE MOVING TARGET OFFAXIS WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON

RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT (meters)

<1,500 <1,500 <1,500 <4,000 <4,000 <1,500 <1,500 <3,000 <3,000 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 See Note 4 HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT See Notes 2 and 3 See Notes 2 and 3 See Notes 2 and 3 See Notes 2 and 3 See Notes 2 and 3 See Notes 2 and 3 HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT

30 RDS 30mm APPROPRIATE CPG IHADSS MODE 30 RDS 30mm CPG IHADSS 30 RDS 30mm CPG IHADSS 30 RDS 30mm TADS APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE MOVING/ RUNNING MOVING/ RUNNING APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE MOVING/ RUNNING APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH 30 RDS 30mm CANNON TADS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30mm IHADSS

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH 30 RDS 30mm CANNON IHADSS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS 4 RKTS (M274) IHADSS

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH 4 RKTS (M274) ROCKETS IHADSS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS 6 RKTS (M274) COOP

1,500-3,000 See Note 4 1,500-3,000 See Note 4 <7,500 <7,500 <2,000 >4,000 >2,000 >2,000 >3,000 500-8,000 500-8,000 See Note 4 See Note 4 HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH 6 RKTS (M274) ROCKETS COOP ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS 4 RKTS (M274) COOP

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH 4 RKTS (M274) ROCKETS COOP ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH HELLFIRE 1 SAL HF

ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET 1 SAL HF WITH HELLFIRE LOAL-REMOTE ENGAGE STATIONARY/MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY TGT W/ HELLFIRE 1 SAL HF LOAL-REMOTE 1 SAL HF LOBL-REMOTE 1 SAL HF LOAL-AUTO 2 SAL HF RIPL 2 SAL HF RAPID

NOTES: 1. The commander/master gunner will determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering for the engagements above to support unit training requirements and mission essential task list. 2. The standard for rocket target effect is diving rockets (<1,500-meter engagements) 1 of 4 in 10-meter radius or 2 of 4 in 50-meter radius TEA; running rockets (1,500- to 3,000-meter engagements) 2 of 6 (or 1 of 4) in a 150m X 200m TEA; all other rocket engagements (running, diving, or hovering), 2 of 6 (or 1 of 4) rockets in a 300m X 400m TEA. 3. Diving or running rocket engagements may be fired as singles or pairs. All hovering rocket engagements will be fired as pairs. 4. Targets may be light vehicles, troops, trucks, buildings, or miscellaneous equipment.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-21

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE IX. DAY/NIGHT AH-64A ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TEAM/PLT)

TASK
NO
1

CONDITION
AMMO
1 SAL HF APPROPRIATE MODE

STANDARD
TARGET
HEAVY ARMOR See Note 7 See Notes 5 and 6

DESCRIPTION
ACFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/HELLFIRE ACFT 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/ROCKETS

MODE

RANGE (meters)
>4,000

TGT EFFECT
HIT

4 RKTS M274 30 RDS

>4,000

ACFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/CANNON ACFT 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/CANNON

<1,500 APPROPRIATE MODE

See Note 7

HIT

30 RDS

<1,500

See Note 7

HIT

ACFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/ROCKETS ACFT 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/HELLFIRE

4 RKTS M274 1 SAL HF APPROPRIATE MODE

<3,000

See Note 7

See Notes 5 and 6

<3,000

HEAVY ARMOR See Note 7

HIT

ACFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/CANNON ACFT 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/CANNON

30 RDS APPROPRIATE MODE 30 RDS

<1,500

HIT

<1,500

See Note 7

HIT

ACFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/ROCKETS ACFT 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/ROCKETS

4 RKTS M274 4 RKTS M274 APPROPRIATE MODE

<4,000

See Note 7

See Notes 5 and 6

<4,000

See Note 7

See Notes 5 and 6

STANDARD: Aircraft 1 and 2 must achieve a combined GO rating on 70 percent of all tasks to receive an overall GO for this table. NOTES: 1. The commander/master gunner may modify this table to tailor the gunnery tasks more closely to those required to support the units mission and METL. 2. The commander/master gunner will determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering for the engagements above to support unit training requirements and mission essential task list. 3. Engagement points for each task are based on applying engagement time to the appropriate calculation sheet. 4. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for this table. 5. The standard for rocket target effect is diving rockets (<1,500-meter engagements) 1 of 4 in 10-meter radius or 2 of 4 in 50-meter radius TEA and running rockets (1,500- to 3,000-meter engagements) 2 of 6 (or 1 of 4) in a 150m X 200m TEA; all other rocket engagements (running, diving, or hovering), 2 of 6 (or 1 of 4) rockets in a 300m X 400m TEA. 6. Diving and running rocket engagements may be fired as singles or pairs. All hovering rocket engagements will be fired as pairs. 7. Targets may be light vehicles, troops, trucks, buildings, or miscellaneous equipment.

B-22

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE X. DAY/NIGHT AH-64A ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TEAM/PLT)

TASK
NO
1

CONDITION
AMMO
1 SAL MSL APPROPRIATE MODE

STANDARD
TARGET
HEAVY ARMOR See Note 7

DESCRIPTION
ACFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/HELLFIRE ACFT 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/ROCKETS

MODE

RANGE (meters)
>4,000

TGT EFFECT
HIT

4 RKTS M274 30 RDS

>4,000

See Notes 5 and 6

ACFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/CANNON ACFT 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/CANNON

<1,500 APPROPRIATE MODE

See Note 7

HIT

30 RDS

<1,500

See Note 7

HIT

ACFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGETW/ROCKETS ACFT 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/HELLFIRE

4 RKTS M274 1 SAL MSL APPROPRIATE MODE

<3,000

See Note 7

See Notes 5 and 6

<3,000

HEAVY ARMOR See Note 7

HIT

ACFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/CANNON ACFT 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/CANNON

30 RDS APPROPRIATE MODE

<1,500

HIT

30 RDS

See Note 7 <1,500 HIT See Note 7 See Notes 5 and 6

ACFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/ROCKETS ACFT 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/ROCKETS

4 RKTS M274 4 RKTS M274 APPROPRIATE MODE

<4,000

<4,000

See Note 7

See Notes 5 and 6

STANDARD: Aircraft 1 and 2 must achieve a combined GO rating on 70 percent of all tasks to receive an overall GO for this table. AMMUNITION PER A/C: 8 rkts (M274) and 180 rds 30mm. See Note 4. NOTES: 1. The commander/master gunner may modify this table to tailor the gunnery tasks more closely to those required to support the units mission and METL. 2. The commander/master gunner will determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering for the engagements above to support unit training requirements and mission essential task list. 3. Engagement points for each task are based on applying engagement time to the appropriate calculation sheet. 4. DA Pam 350-38 contains information about the amount and type of ammunition provided for this table. 5. The standard for rocket target effect is diving rockets (<1,500-meter engagements) 1 of 4 in 10-meter radius or 2 of 4 in 50-meter radius TEA; running rockets (1,500- to 3,000-meter engagements) 2 of 6 (or 1 of 4) in a 150m X 200m TEA; all other rocket engagements (running, diving, or hovering), 2 of 6 (or 1 of 4) rockets in a 300m X 400m TEA. 6. Diving and running rocket engagements may be fired as singles or pairs. All hovering rocket engagements will be fired as pairs. 7. Targets may be light vehicles, troops, trucks, buildings, or miscellaneous equipment.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-23

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE XI. DAY/NIGHT AH-64A ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (COMPANY)

TASK
Receive mission, conduct mission planning

CONDITION
Commander receives on-order deliberate attack mission. Enemy is two to three hours from decision point. Operations overlay includes lateral boundaries, phase lines, air routes, and engagement area. Commander receives order to execute mission. Unit departs TAA en route to the ABF according to briefed time schedule.

STANDARD
Commander will ensure that precombat checks are complete. Commander briefs mission to aircrews. Unit conducts mission planning and rehearsal.

Conduct air movement

Unit complies with A2C2 plan, coordinates with ground elements in vicinity of HA and ABF, and meets times for crossing start point, ACPs, CCPs, and release point. Unit occupies ABF along briefed routes. Unit establishes security in ABF. Unit prepares to engage IAW briefed schedule. Direct fire distribution according to the SOP. Unit will fire and maneuver according to the commanders guidance. Execute distribution of fires according to the SOP. Unit will fire and maneuver, engage troops and vehicles with cannon, and neutralize artillery with rockets. Commander reports to higher HQ. Commander consolidates BDA and FARM and reports to higher command. Commander determines proper weapons load for aircraft. Aircraft sequence into FARP and refuel according to the SOP. Unit complies with A2C2 plan, conducts AAR, prepares for future operations, and completes precombat checks.

Conduct battle-position operations Engage multiple targets

Unit occupies ABF per SOP. SITREP from S2 indicates that the enemy is near the planned engagement area. Multiple targets are in the EA. Unit engages targets with long-range missile fires.

Detect and react to During missile engagements, the unit OPFOR makes contact with lead elements of the OPFOR. OPFOR is recon element with lightly armored vehicles and troops supported by artillery. Unit engages with cannon at short to medium ranges and rockets at medium to long ranges. Conduct FARP operations Upon completing briefed mission, unit rallies at HA and returns along briefed air route to FARP.

Return to TAA, and Commander orders the unit to depart the prepare for future FARP and return to the TAA along operations briefed air routes.

NOTES: 1. The purpose of this table is to exercise command and control of the live fire. 2. Commanders may modify this table and develop a tactical scenario to support the unit METL/MTP. 3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for this table.

B-24

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE XI. DAY/NIGHT AH-64A ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TROOP)

TASK
Receive mission, conduct mission planning Conduct movement to LD Conduct zone reconnaissance Detect and react to OPFOR

CONDITION
Commander receives on-order zone recon mission. Enemy situation is unknown. Operations overlay includes lateral boundaries, LD, and objective. Commander receives order to execute mission. Unit departs TAA en route to the LD. Enemy contact is likely. Unit uses bounding overwatch to conduct reconnaissance. Unit makes contact with lead elements of the OPFOR. OPFOR is recon element with lightly armored vehicles and dismounted troops. Unit rallies, conducts battle handover, and returns along briefed air routes to the FARP. Commander orders the unit to depart the FARP and return to the TAA along briefed air routes.

STANDARD
Commander will ensure that precombat checks are complete. Commander briefs mission to aircrews. Unit conducts mission planning and rehearsal. Unit complies with A2C2 plan and coordinates with ground elements for LD passage. Unit conducts recon of assigned zone IAW time constraints in OPORD. Unit engages OPFOR and breaks contact. The engagement is not decisive. The commander reports to higher HQ. Commander determines the proper weapons load for aircraft. Aircraft sequence into FARP and refuel according to the SOP. Unit complies with A2C2 plan, conducts AAR, prepares for future operations, and completes precombat checks.

Conduct FARP operations

Return to the TAA, and prepare for future operations

NOTES: 1. The purpose of this table is to exercise command and control of the troop live fire. 2. Commanders may modify this table and develop a tactical scenario to support the unit METL/MTP. 3. Accomplish tasks according to standards in the applicable MTP. 4. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for this table.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-25

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE XII. DAY/NIGHT AH-64A ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (COMPANY)

TASK
Receive mission, conduct mission planning Conduct air movement

CONDITION
Commander receives on-order deliberate attack mission. Enemy is two to three hours from decision point. Operations overlay includes lateral boundaries, phase lines, air routes, and engagement area. Commander receives order to execute mission. Unit departs TAA en route to ABF according to the briefed time schedule.

STANDARD
Commander will ensure that precombat checks are complete. Commander briefs mission to aircrews. Unit conducts mission planning and rehearsal.

Unit complies with A2C2 plan, coordinates with ground elements in vicinity of HA and ABF, and meets times for crossing start point, ACPs, CCPs, and release point.

Conduct battle-position operations Engage multiple targets Detect and react to OPFOR

Unit occupies ABF according to SOP. Unit occupies ABF along briefed routes, SITREP from S2 indicates that the establishes security in ABF, and prepares enemy is near the planned engagement to engage IAW briefed schedule. area. Multiple targets are in the EA. Unit Direct fire distribution according to the engages targets with long-range missile SOP. Unit will fire and maneuver fires. according to the commanders guidance. During missile engagements, unit makes contact with lead elements of the OPFOR. OPFOR is recon element with lightly armored vehicles and troops supported by artillery. Unit engages with cannon at short to medium ranges and rockets at medium to long ranges. Upon completing briefed mission, the unit rallies at HA and returns along briefed air route to FARP. Execute distribution of fires according to the SOP. Unit will fire and maneuver, engage troops and vehicles with cannon, and neutralize artillery with rockets. The commander reports to higher HQ.

Conduct FARP operations

Commander consolidates BDA and FARM and reports to higher command. Commander determines proper weapons load for aircraft. Aircraft sequence into FARP and refuel according to the SOP. Unit complies with A2C2 plan, conducts AAR, prepares for future operations, and completes precombat checks.

Return to TAA, and prepare for future operations

Commander orders the unit to depart the FARP and return to the TAA along briefed air routes.

NOTES: 1. The purpose of this table is to exercise command and control of the live fire. 2. Commanders may modify this table and develop a tactical scenario to support the unit METL/MTP. 3. DA Pam 350-38 contains information about the amount and type of ammunition provided for this table.

B-26

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE XII. DAY/NIGHT AH-64A ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TROOP)

TASK
Receive mission, conduct mission planning Conduct movement to LD Conduct zone reconnaissance

CONDITION
Commander receives on-order zone recon mission. Enemy situation is unknown. Operations overlay includes lateral boundaries, LD, and objective. Commander receives order to execute mission. Unit departs TAA en route to the LD. Enemy contact is likely. Unit uses bounding overwatch to conduct reconnaissance. Unit makes contact with lead elements of the OPFOR. OPFOR is recon element with lightly armored vehicles and dismounted troops. Unit rallies, conducts battle handover, and returns along briefed air routes to the FARP. Commander orders the unit to depart the FARP and return to the TAA along briefed air routes.

STANDARD
Commander will ensure that precombat checks are complete. Commander briefs mission to aircrews. Unit conducts mission planning and rehearsal. Unit complies with A2C2 plan and coordinates with ground elements for LD passage. Unit recons assigned zone according to time constraints in the OPORD.

Detect and react to OPFOR

Unit engages OPFOR and breaks contact. The engagement is not decisive. The commander reports to higher HQ. Commander determines proper weapons load for aircraft. Aircraft sequence into FARP and refuel according to the SOP. Unit complies with A2C2 plan, conducts AAR, prepares for future operations, and completes precombat checks.

Conduct FARP operations

Return to TAA, and prepare for future operations

NOTES: 1. The purpose of this table is to exercise command and control of the troop live fire. 3. Commanders can modify this table and develop a tactical scenario to support the unit METL/MTP. 4. DA Pam 350-38 contains information about the amount and type of ammunition provided for this table.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-27

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

SECTION III AH-64D GUNNERY TABLES

B-48. AH-64D aircraft will use the gunnery tables in this section.

TABLE I. DAY AH-64D INITIAL TRANSITION/QUALIFICATION (PILOT)

TASK
NO DESCRIPTION AMMO

CONDITION
MODE RANGE TARGET

STANDARD
TGT EFFECT

IAW USAAVNC- or NGB-approved POI

TABLE I. NIGHT AH-64D INITIAL TRANSITION/QUALIFICATION (PILOT)

TASK
NO DESCRIPTION AMMO

CONDITION
MODE RANGE TARGET

STANDARD
TGT EFFECT

IAW USAAVNC- or NGB-approved POI

TABLE II. DAY AH-64D INITIAL TRANSITION/QUALIFICATION (CPG)

TASK
NO DESCRIPTION AMMO

CONDITION
MODE RANGE TARGET

STANDARD
TGT EFFECT

IAW USAAVNC- or NGB-approved POI.

TABLE II. NIGHT AH-64D INITIAL TRANSITION/QUALIFICATION (CPG)

TASK
NO DESCRIPTION AMMO

CONDITION
MODE RANGE TARGET

STANDARD
TGT EFFECT

IAW USAAVNC- or NGB-approved POI.

B-28

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE III. DAY/NIGHT AH-64D INDIVIDUAL TRAINING TABLE (PILOT)

TASK
NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DESCRIPTION ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET OFF-AXIS WITH CANNON ENGAGE MOVING TARGET OFF-AXIS WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH ROCKETS AMMO 40 RDS 30mm IHADSS 40 RDS 30mm IHADSS 40 RDS 30mm IHADSS 40 RDS 30mm IHADSS 40 RDS 30mm IHADSS 40 RDS 30mm IHADSS 40 RDS 30mm 40 RDS 30mm 30 RDS 30mm FCR 30 RDS 30mm FCR 4 RKTS (M274) IHADSS 4 RKTS (M274) IHADSS 6 RKTS (M274) COOP 6 RKTS (M274) COOP 6 RKTS (M274) COOP 6 RKTS (M274) COOP

CONDITION
MODE
HOVERING MOVING/ RUNNING HOVERING MOVING/ RUNNING DIVING DIVING

STANDARD

RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT (meters) <1,500 See Note 7 <1,500 See Note 7 <1,500 See Note 7 <1,500 See Note 7 <1,500 See Note 7 <1,500 See Note 7 HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT

APPROPRIATE <1,500 See Note 7 MODE APPROPRIATE <1,500 See Note 7 MODE HOVERING MOVING/ RUNNING DIVING DIVING HOVERING HOVERING MOVING/ RUNNING MOVING/ RUNNING

<3,500 See Note 7 <3,500 See Note 7 <1,500 See Note 7 <1,500

1 rkt in 10m radius or 2 rkts in 50m radius TEA 1 rkt in 10m radius See Note 7 or 2 rkts in 50m radius TEA 2 rockets in 300 x 400m TEA 2 rockets in 300 x 400m TEA 2 rockets in 150 X 200m TEA 2 rockets in 150 X 200m TEA

1,500See Note 7 7,000 1,500See Note 7 7,000 1,500See Note 7 3,000 1,500See Note 7 3,000

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-29

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE III. DAY/NIGHT AH-64D INDIVIDUAL TRAINING TABLE (PILOT) (CONCLUDED)

TASK
NO 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 DESCRIPTION ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH SAL HF ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH SAL HF (REMOTE) ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE AMMO

CONDITION
MODE

STANDARD
RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT (meters) 1,5007,000 1,5007,000 >3,000 <2,000 >2,000 <2,000 >4,000 5008,000 5008,000 5008,000 5008,000 5008,000 5008,000 5008,000 See Note 3 rockets in 300 7 x 400m TEA See Note 3 rockets in 300 7 x 400m TEA HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT

8 RKTS (M267) APPROPRIATE MODE FCR 8 RKTS (M267) APPROPRIATE MODE FCR 2 SAL HF RAPID 1 SAL HF LOBL 1 SAL HF LOAL 1 SAL HF 1 SAL HF 2 SAL HF RIPL 1 SAL HF RFHO 1 RF HF RFHO
APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE

ENGAGE STATIONARY TGT 1 RF HF APPROPRIATE MODE W/HELLFIRE AUTONOMOUS ENGAGE MOVING TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE 1 RF HF APPROPRIATE MODE AUTONOMOUS 2 RF HF RAPID 1 RF HF TADS HO
APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE

Notes: 1. Table III is designed for use by the unit IP/SP to determine individual proficiency and readiness level. 2. Diving or running rockets may be fired as singles or pairs. All hovering rocket engagements will be fired as pairs. To maximize rocket training, all required rockets must be fired for each engagement. 3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for this table; conduct in the AH-64D simulator. 4. MOVINGbelow ETL; RUNNINGabove ETL. 5. Aviator must obtain a GO on all 30 tasks of Table Ill. 6. Table III is the minimum to be performed, additional tasks may be added to determine or obtain a higher level of proficiency. 7. Targets may be light vehicles, troops, trucks, buildings, or miscellaneous equipment.

B-30

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE IV. DAY/NIGHT AH-64D INDIVIDUAL TRAINING TABLE (CPG)

TASK
NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DESCRIPTION ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET OFF-AXIS WITH CANNON ENGAGE MOVING TARGET OFF-AXIS WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH ROCKETS AMMO 40 RDS 30mm IHADSS 40 RDS 30mm IHADSS 40 RDS 30mm IHADSS 40 RDS 30mm IHADSS 40 RDS 30mm IHADSS 40 RDS 30mm IHADSS 40 RDS 30mm 40 RDS 30mm 30 RDS 30mm FCR 30 RDS 30mm FCR 4 RKTS (M274) IHADSS 4 RKTS (M274) IHADSS 6 RKTS (M274) COOP 6 RKTS (M274) COOP 6 RKTS (M274) COOP 6 RKTS (M274) COOP

CONDITION
MODE
HOVERING MOVING/ RUNNING HOVERING MOVING/ RUNNING DIVING DIVING

STANDARD

RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT (meters) <1,500 <1,500 <1,500 <1,500 <1,500 <1,500 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 See Note 7 HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT
1 rkt in 10m radius or 2 rkts in 50m meter radius 1 rkt in 10m radius or 2 rkts in 50m meter radius 2 rockets in 300 x 400m TEA 2 rockets in 300 x 400m TEA 2 rockets in 150 X 200m TEA 2 rockets in 150 X 200m TEA

APPROPRIATE <1,500 MODE APPROPRIATE <1,500 MODE HOVERING MOVING/ RUNNING DIVING DIVING HOVERING HOVERING MOVING/ RUNNING MOVING/ RUNNING

<3,500 <3,500 <1,500 <1,500 1,5007,000 1,5007,000 1,5003,000 1,5003,000

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-31

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE IV. DAY/NIGHT AH-64D INDIVIDUAL TRAINING TABLE (CPG) (CONCLUDED)

TASK
NO 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 DESCRIPTION ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH SAL HF ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH SAL HF (REMOTE) ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE AMMO

CONDITION
MODE

STANDARD

RANGE (meters) TARGET TGT EFFECT 1,5007,000 1,5007,000 >3,000 <2,000 >2,000 <2,000 >4,000 See Note 7 See Note 7 HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR
3 rockets in 300 x 400m TEA 3 rockets in 300 x 400m TEA

8 RKTS (M267) APPROPRIATE MODE FCR 8 RKTS (M267) APPROPRIATE MODE FCR 2 SAL HF RAPID 1 SAL HF LOBL 1 SAL HF LOAL 1 SAL HF 1 SAL HF 2 SAL HF RIPL 1 SAL HF RFHO 1 RF HF RFHO
APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE APPROPRIATE MODE

HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT

HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE ARMOR HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE ARMOR HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE ARMOR

ENGAGE STATIONARY TGT 1 RF HF HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE W/HELLFIRE AUTONOMOUS ARMOR ENGAGE MOVING TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE 1 RF HF HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE AUTONOMOUS ARMOR 2 RF HF RAPID 1 RF HF TADS HO HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE ARMOR HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE ARMOR

Notes: 1. Table IV is designed for use by the unit IP/SP to determine individual proficiency and readiness level. 2. Diving or running rockets may be fired as singles or pairs. All hovering rocket engagements will be fired as pairs. To maximize rocket training, all required rockets must be fired for each engagement. 3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for this table; conduct in the AH-64D simulator. 4. MOVINGbelow ETL; RUNNINGabove ETL. 5. Aviator must obtain a GO on all 12 tasks of Table Ill. 6. Table III is the minimum to be performed, additional tasks may be added to determine or obtain a higher level of proficiency. 7. Targets may be light vehicles, troops, trucks, buildings, or miscellaneous equipment.

B-32

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE V. HELICOPTER GUNNERY SKILLS TEST AND G-COFT

TASK
Pass written test consisting of a minimum of 50 questions from the following subject areas: Weapon Systems Operation/Firing Characteristics. Ballistics. Delivery Techniques. Munitions: Identification/Function/Operation.

CONDITION
Without reference to publications.

STANDARD
Minimum of 80% correct.

Perform relevant tasks from the following areas: Armament/Weapon Systems Preflight. Armament/Weapon Systems Switchology. Procedures for Hangfire/Misfire/Emergency Conditions Involving Armament Systems. Munitions Handling, Uploading/Downloading.

Demonstrate ability to perform or explain selected subject areas: Aircraft. Simulator or Aircraft. Simulator or Aircraft. Aircraft with Training or Live Munitions.

Overall GO/NO-GO is based on Master Gunner's or designated representatives assessment.

Pass G-COFT.

Longbow Crew Trainer.

Achieve 70 points on 10 out of 12 engagements on each iteration (day and night). Must receive at least one GO (at least 70 points) for each weapon system.

Other requirements according to Chapter 2, FM 3-04.140.

Notes: 1. Some hands-on tasks are also ATM tasks. However, conduct these tasks as part of the HGST to confirm crew proficiency before live-fire training/qualification. 2. G-COFT will be conducted day and night and will be modeled like Table 7 or 8.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-33

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE VI. AH-64D WEAPONS CALIBRATION/VERIFICATION

TASK
NO DESCRIPTION AMMO

CONDITION
MODE RANGE (meters) 500-1,000 SIGHT

STANDARD
TGT EFFECT

ENGAGE AWS DYNAMIC 60 RDS 30-mm HOVERING HARMONIZATION OPERATE CANNON W/TADS OPERATE CANNON W/IHADSS OPERATE CANNON W/IHADSS OPERATE ARCS OPERATE ARCS OPERATE PTWS (SAL) OPERATE PTWS (RF)

TADS

HIT

30 RDS 30-mm HOVERING 1,000-1,500

TADS IHADSS (PILOT) IHADSS (CPG) COOP COOP TADS TADS

HIT

30 RDS 30-mm HOVERING

<1,000

HIT

4 5 6 7 8

30 RDS 30-mm HOVERING 6 RKTS M274 6 RKTS M274 1 TRAINING MISSILE 1 TRAINING MISSILE

<1,000

HIT 2 ROCKETS IN 300- X 400-m TEA 2 ROCKETS IN 300- X 400-m TEA PROPER SYMBOLOGY PROPER SYMBOLOGY

HOVERING 3,000-4,000 HOVERING >4,000

HOVERING 2,000-6,000 HOVERING 2,000-6,000

9 OPERATE PTWS (See (FCR) Note 2)

1 TRAINING MISSILE

HOVERING 2,000-6,000

FCR

PROPER SYMBOLOGY

Notes: 1. This table is designed to verify weapon-system operation. 2. Engagement 9 is required only for aircraft equipped with the FCR. AMMUNITION: 12 rkts M274 150 rds 30mm

B-34

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VII. DAY AH-64D CREW TRAINING TABLE

TASK
NO
1 2

CONDITION
AMMO
1 RF HF 1 HF REMOTE 40 RDS 30mm PLT IHADSS 6 RKTS (M274) 4 RKTS (M274) PLT IHADSS HF HF 30mm 30mm 30mm 2.75" 2.75"

STANDARD
TARGET
HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR

DESCRIPTION
ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MOVING TGT WITH RF HF ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MOVING TGT WITH HF ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS

MODE
HOVERING

RANGE (meters)
>2,000 >4,000

TGT EFFECT
HIT HIT

APPROPRIATE MODE HOVERING

<1,000

See Note 6

HIT 2 rockets in 300- X 400meter TEA

1 rkt in 10m

HOVERING

<4,000

See Note 6

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

DIVING

<1,500

See Note 6 radius or 2 rkts in

50m radius TEA

MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.

ENGAGEMENTS 6 through 12: Commander/master gunner will select 7 optional tasks from list on following pages. There will be a total of 12 engagement tasks: 4 missile, 4 cannon, and 4 rocket. STANDARD: Crew must have 8 qualified engagements to receive an overall GO for this table. The crew must receive at least one GO (at least 70 points) for each weapon system. AMMUNITION: (DA Pam 350-38) Ammunition depicted equals the maximum ammunition required for day firings for the given table; that is, 20 rkts (M274), 130 rds 30mm. Notes: 1. Tasks 1 through 5 are core task and will be fired according to the table. The commander/master gunner will determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering for engagements 6 though 12. 2. Tasks 6 through 12 will be selected from list on the following page to support the unit mission, METL, and resources. 3. Ammunition allocated is for both day and night tables. 4. Diving or running rocket engagements may be fired as singles or pairs. All hovering rocket engagements will be fired as pairs. 5. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide missiles for this table. Training missiles should be used. 6. Targets may be light vehicles, troops, trucks, buildings, or miscellaneous equipment 7. Appendix D contains an example of a digital gunnery program.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-35

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE VII. DAY AH-64D CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONTINUED)

TASK
NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 DESCRIPTION ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON AMMO

CONDITION
MODE

STANDARD

RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT (meters) 40 RDS 30mm See Note DIVING <1,500 HIT PLT IHADSS 4 40 RDS 30mm APPROPRIATE See Note <1,500 HIT MODE CPG IHADSS 4 HIT HIT HIT HIT

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET See Note APPROPRIATE 30 RDS 30mm <3,500 MODE WITH CANNON 4 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30mm See Note APPROPRIATE <3,500 MODE 4

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET 30 RDS 30mm APPROPRIATE See Note <3,500 MODE WITH CANNON FCR 4 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS 30 RDS 30mm APPROPRIATE See Note <3,500 MODE FCR 4

4 RKTS (M274) APPROPRIATE See Note See Notes 2 <3,000 MODE IHADSS 4 and 3 4 RKTS (M274) APPROPRIATE See Note See Notes 2 <3,000 MODE IHADSS 4 and 3 6 RKTS (M274) COOP 6 RKTS (M274) COOP
MOVING/ RUNNING MOVING/ RUNNING

1,500- See Note 3,000 4 1,500- See Note 3,000 4

2 rockets in 150 X 200m TEA 2 rockets in 150 X 200m TEA

See Note See Notes 4 RKTS (M274) APPROPRIATE <7,500 4 2 and 3 FCR MODE

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET 4 RKTS (M274) APPROPRIATE See Note See Notes 2 <7,500 MODE WITH ROCKETS FCR 4 and 3 ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE 2 SAL HF RAPID 1 SAL HF LOBL 1 SAL HF LOAL
APPROPRIATE >3,000 MODE APPROPRIATE <2,000 MODE APPROPRIATE >2,000 MODE

HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR

HIT HIT HIT

B-36

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VII. DAY AH-64D CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONCLUDED)

TASK
NO 16 DESCRIPTION ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH SAL HF ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH SAL HF (REMOTE) ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE AMMO 1 SAL HF

CONDITION
MODE RANGE (meters) TARGET HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR

STANDARD
TGT EFFECT HIT

APPROPRIATE <2,000 MODE APPROPRIATE >4,000 MODE

17

1 SAL HF

HIT

18

2 SAL HF RIPL 1 SAL HF RFHO 1 RF HF RFHO

HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE ARMOR HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE ARMOR HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE ARMOR

HIT

19

HIT

20

HIT

21

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 RF HF HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE TGT W/HELLFIRE AUTONOMOUS ARMOR ENGAGE MOVING TGT 1 RF HF HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE W/HELLFIRE AUTONOMOUS ARMOR ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE 2 RF HF RAPID 1 RF HF TADS HO HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE ARMOR HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE ARMOR

HIT

22

HIT

23

HIT

24

HIT

Notes: 1. The commander/master gunner will determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering for the engagements above to support unit training requirements and mission essential task list. 2. The standard for rocket target effect is diving rockets (<1,500-meter engagements) 1 of 4 in 10-meter radius or 2 of 4 in 50-meter radius TEA; running rockets (1,500- to 3,000-meter engagements) 2 of 6 (or 1 of 4) in a 150m X 200m TEA; all other rocket engagements (running, diving, or hovering), 2 of 6 (or 1 of 4) rockets in a 300m X 400m TEA. 3. Diving or running rocket engagements may be fired as singles or pairs. All hovering rocket engagements will be fired as pairs. 4. Targets may be light vehicles, troops, trucks, buildings, or miscellaneous equipment.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-37

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE VII. NIGHT AH-64D CREW TRAINING TABLE

TASK
NO
1 2

CONDITION
AMMO
1 RF HF 1 HF REMOTE 40 RDS 30mm PLT IHADSS 6 RKTS (M274) 4 RKTS (M274) PLT IHADSS HF HF 30mm 30mm 30mm 2.75" 2.75"

STANDARD
TARGET
HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR

DESCRIPTION
ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MOVING TGT WITH RF HF ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MOVING TGT WITH HF ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS

MODE
HOVERING

RANGE (meters)
>2,000 >4,000

TGT EFFECT
HIT HIT

APPROPRIATE MODE HOVERING

<1,000

See Note 6

HIT 2 rockets in 300- X 400meter TEA

1 rkt in 10m

HOVERING

<4,000

See Note 6

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

DIVING

<1,500

See Note 6 radius or 2 rkts in

50m radius TEA

MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.

ENGAGEMENTS 6 through 12: Commander/master gunner will select 7 optional tasks from list on following pages. There will be a total of 12 engagement tasks: 4 missile, 4 cannon, and 4 rocket. STANDARD: Crew must have 8 qualified engagements to receive an overall GO for this table. The crew must receive at least one GO (at least 70 points) for each weapon system. AMMUNITION: (DA Pam 350-38) Ammunition depicted equals the maximum ammunition required for day firings for the given table; that is, 20 rkts (M274), 130 rds 30mm. Notes: 1. Tasks 1 through 5 are core task and will be fired according to the table. The commander/master gunner will determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering for engagements 6 though 12. 2. Tasks 6 through 12 will be selected from list on the following page to support the unit mission, METL, and resources. 3. Ammunition allocated is for both day and night tables. 4. Diving or running rocket engagements may be fired as singles or pairs. All hovering rocket engagements will be fired as pairs. 5. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide missiles for this table. Training missiles should be used. 6. Targets may be light vehicles, troops, trucks, buildings, or miscellaneous equipment. 7. Appendix D contains an example of a digital gunnery program.

B-38

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VII. NIGHT AH-64D CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONTINUED)

TASK
NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 DESCRIPTION ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON AMMO

CONDITION
MODE

STANDARD

RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT (meters) 40 RDS 30mm See Note DIVING <1,500 HIT PLT IHADSS 4 40 RDS 30mm APPROPRIATE See Note <1,500 HIT MODE CPG IHADSS 4 HIT HIT HIT HIT

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET See Note APPROPRIATE 30 RDS 30mm <3,500 MODE WITH CANNON 4 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30mm See Note APPROPRIATE <3,500 MODE 4

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET 30 RDS 30mm APPROPRIATE See Note <3,500 MODE WITH CANNON FCR 4 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS 30 RDS 30mm APPROPRIATE See Note <3,500 MODE FCR 4

4 RKTS (M274) APPROPRIATE See Note See Notes 2 <3,000 MODE IHADSS 4 and 3 4 RKTS (M274) APPROPRIATE See Note See Notes 2 <3,000 MODE IHADSS 4 and 3 6 RKTS (M274) COOP 6 RKTS (M274) COOP
MOVING/ RUNNING MOVING/ RUNNING

1,500- See Note 3,000 4 1,500- See Note 3,000 4

2 rockets in 150 X 200m TEA 2 rockets in 150 X 200m TEA

4 RKTS (M274) APPROPRIATE See Note See Notes <7,500 MODE FCR 4 2 and 3

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET 4 RKTS (M274) APPROPRIATE See Note See Notes 2 <7,500 MODE WITH ROCKETS FCR 4 and 3 ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE 2 SAL HF RAPID 1 SAL HF LOBL 1 SAL HF LOAL
APPROPRIATE >3,000 MODE APPROPRIATE <2,000 MODE APPROPRIATE >2,000 MODE

HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR

HIT HIT HIT

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-39

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE VII. NIGHT AH-64D CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONCLUDED)

TASK
NO 16 DESCRIPTION ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH SAL HF ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH SAL HF (REMOTE) ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE AMMO 1 SAL HF

CONDITION
MODE RANGE (meters) TARGET HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR

STANDARD
TGT EFFECT HIT

APPROPRIATE <2,000 MODE APPROPRIATE >4,000 MODE

17

1 SAL HF

HIT

18

2 SAL HF RIPL 1 SAL HF RFHO 1 RF HF RFHO

HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE ARMOR HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE ARMOR HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE ARMOR

HIT

19

HIT

20

HIT

21

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 RF HF HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE TGT W/HELLFIRE AUTONOMOUS ARMOR ENGAGE MOVING TGT 1 RF HF HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE W/HELLFIRE AUTONOMOUS ARMOR ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE 2 RF HF RAPID 1 RF HF TADS HO HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE ARMOR HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE ARMOR

HIT

22

HIT

23

HIT

24

HIT

Notes: 1. The commander/master gunner will determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering for the engagements above to support unit training requirements and mission essential task list. 2. The standard for rocket target effect is diving rockets (<1,500-meter engagements) 1 of 4 in 10-meter radius or 2 of 4 in 50-meter radius TEA; running rockets (1,500- to 3,000-meter engagements) 2 of 6 (or 1 of 4) in a 150m X 200m TEA; all other rocket engagements (running, diving, or hovering), 2 of 6 (or 1 of 4) rockets in a 300m X 400m TEA. 3. Diving or running rocket engagements may be fired as singles or pairs. All hovering rocket engagements will be fired as pairs. 4. Targets may be light vehicles, troops, trucks, buildings, or miscellaneous equipment.

B-40

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VIII. DAY AH-64D CREW TRAINING TABLE

TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO DESCRIPTION
1 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MOVING TGT WITH RF HF ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MOVING TGT WITH HF ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS

AMMO
1 RF HF 1 HF REMOTE 40 RDS 30mm PLT IHADSS 6 RKTS (M274) 4 RKTS (M274) PLT IHADSS HF HF 30mm 30mm 30mm 2.75" 2.75"

MODE HOVERING

RANGE (meters)
>2,000

TARGET

TGT EFFECT

HVY ARMOR HIT HVY ARMOR HIT

APPROPRIATE >4,000 MODE HOVERING <1,000

See Note 6

HIT 2 rockets in 300- X 400meter TEA

1 rkt in 10m radius or 2 rkts in 50m radius TEA

HOVERING

<4,000

See Note 6

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

DIVING

<1,500

See Note 6

MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.

ENGAGEMENTS 6 through 12: Commander/master gunner will select 7 optional tasks from list on following pages. There will be a total of 12 engagement tasks: 4 missile, 4 cannon, and 4 rocket. STANDARD: Crew must have 8 qualified engagements to receive an overall GO for this table. The crew must receive at least one GO (at least 70 points) for each weapon system. AMMUNITION: (DA Pam 350-38) Ammunition depicted equals the maximum ammunition required for day firings for the given table; that is, 20 rkts (M274), 130 rds 30mm.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-41

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE VIII. DAY AH-64D CREW TRAINING TABLE

TASK
Notes: 1. Tasks 1 through 5 are core task and will be fired according to the table. The commander/master gunner will determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering for engagements 6 though 12. 2. Tasks 6 through 12 will be selected from list on the following page to support the unit mission, METL, and resources. 3. Ammunition allocated is for both day and night tables. 4. Diving or running rocket engagements may be fired as singles or pairs. All hovering rocket engagements will be fired as pairs. 5. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide missiles for this table. Training missiles should be used. 6. Targets may be light vehicles, troops, trucks, buildings, or miscellaneous equipment. 7. Appendix D contains an example of a digital gunnery program.

CONDITION

STANDARD

B-42

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VIII. DAY AH-64D CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONTINUED)

TASK
NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 DESCRIPTION ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON AMMO

CONDITION
MODE

STANDARD

RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT (meters) 40 RDS 30mm See Note DIVING <1,500 HIT PLT IHADSS 4 40 RDS 30mm APPROPRIATE See Note <1,500 HIT MODE CPG IHADSS 4 HIT HIT HIT HIT

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET See Note APPROPRIATE 30 RDS 30mm <3,500 MODE WITH CANNON 4 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30mm See Note APPROPRIATE <3,500 MODE 4

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET 30 RDS 30mm APPROPRIATE See Note <3,500 MODE WITH CANNON FCR 4 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS 30 RDS 30mm APPROPRIATE See Note <3,500 MODE FCR 4

4 RKTS (M274) APPROPRIATE See Note See Notes 2 <3,000 MODE IHADSS 4 and 3 4 RKTS (M274) APPROPRIATE See Note See Notes 2 <3,000 MODE IHADSS 4 and 3 6 RKTS (M274) COOP 6 RKTS (M274) COOP
MOVING/ RUNNING MOVING/ RUNNING

1,500- See Note 3,000 4 1,500- See Note 3,000 4

2 rockets in 150 X 200m TEA 2 rockets in 150 X 200m TEA

4 RKTS (M274) APPROPRIATE See Note See Notes <7,500 MODE FCR 4 2 and 3

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET 4 RKTS (M274) APPROPRIATE See Note See Notes 2 <7,500 MODE WITH ROCKETS FCR 4 and 3 ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE 2 SAL HF RAPID 1 SAL HF LOBL 1 SAL HF LOAL
APPROPRIATE >3,000 MODE APPROPRIATE <2,000 MODE APPROPRIATE >2,000 MODE

HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR

HIT HIT HIT

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-43

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE VIII. DAY AH-64D CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONCLUDED)

TASK
NO 16 DESCRIPTION ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH SAL HF ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH SAL HF (REMOTE) ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE AMMO 1 SAL HF

CONDITION
MODE RANGE (meters) TARGET HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR

STANDARD
TGT EFFECT HIT

APPROPRIATE <2,000 MODE APPROPRIATE >4,000 MODE

17

1 SAL HF

HIT

18

2 SAL HF RIPL 1 SAL HF RFHO 1 RF HF RFHO

HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE ARMOR HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE ARMOR HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE ARMOR

HIT

19

HIT

20

HIT

21

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 RF HF HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE TGT W/HELLFIRE AUTONOMOUS ARMOR ENGAGE MOVING TGT 1 RF HF HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE W/HELLFIRE AUTONOMOUS ARMOR ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE 2 RF HF RAPID 1 RF HF TADS HO HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE ARMOR HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE ARMOR

HIT

22

HIT

23

HIT

24

HIT

Notes: 1. The commander/master gunner will determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering for the engagements above to support unit training requirements and mission essential task list. 2. The standard for rocket target effect is diving rockets (<1,500-meter engagements) 1 of 4 in 10-meter radius or 2 of 4 in 50-meter radius TEA; running rockets (1,500- to 3,000-meter engagements) 2 of 6 (or 1 of 4) in a 150m X 200m TEA; all other rocket engagements (running, diving, or hovering), 2 of 6 (or 1 of 4) rockets in a 300m X 400m TEA. 3. Diving or running rocket engagements may be fired as singles or pairs. All hovering rocket engagements will be fired as pairs. 4. Targets may be light vehicles, troops, trucks, buildings, or miscellaneous equipment.

B-44

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VIII. NIGHT AH-64D CREW TRAINING TABLE

TASK
NO
1 2

CONDITION
AMMO
1 RF HF 1 HF REMOTE 40 RDS 30mm PLT IHADSS 6 RKTS (M274) 4 RKTS (M274) PLT IHADSS HF HF 30mm 30mm 30mm 2.75" 2.75"

STANDARD
TARGET
HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR

DESCRIPTION
ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MOVING TGT WITH RF HF ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MOVING TGT WITH HF ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS

MODE
HOVERING

RANGE (meters)
>2,000 >4,000

TGT EFFECT
HIT HIT

APPROPRIATE MODE HOVERING

<1,000

See Note 6

HIT 2 rockets in 300- X 400meter TEA

1 rkt in 10m

HOVERING

<4,000

See Note 6

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

DIVING

<1,500

See Note 6 radius or 2 rkts in

50m radius TEA

MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM LIST ON NEXT TWO PAGES.

ENGAGEMENTS 6 through 12: Commander/master gunner will select 7 optional tasks from list on following pages. There will be a total of 12 engagement tasks: 4 missile, 4 cannon, and 4 rocket. STANDARD: Crew must have 8 qualified engagements to receive an overall GO for this table. The crew must receive at least one GO (at least 70 points) for each weapon system. AMMUNITION: (DA Pam 350-38) Ammunition depicted equals the maximum ammunition required for day firings for the given table; that is, 20 rkts (M274), 130 rds 30mm. Notes: 1. Tasks 1 through 5 are core task and will be fired according to the table. The commander/master gunner will determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering for engagements 6 though 12. 2. Tasks 6 through 12 will be selected from list on the following page to support the unit mission, METL, and resources. 3. Ammunition allocated is for both day and night tables. 4. Diving or running rocket engagements may be fired as singles or pairs. All hovering rocket engagements will be fired as pairs. 5. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide missiles for this table. Training missiles should be used. 6. Targets may be light vehicles, troops, trucks, buildings, or miscellaneous equipment. 7. Appendix D contains an example of a digital gunnery program.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-45

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE VIII. NIGHT AH-64D CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONTINUED)

TASK
NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 DESCRIPTION ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON AMMO

CONDITION
MODE

STANDARD

RANGE TARGET TGT EFFECT (meters) 40 RDS 30mm See Note DIVING <1,500 HIT PLT IHADSS 4 40 RDS 30mm APPROPRIATE See Note <1,500 HIT MODE CPG IHADSS 4 HIT HIT HIT HIT

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET See Note APPROPRIATE 30 RDS 30mm <3,500 MODE WITH CANNON 4 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON 30 RDS 30mm See Note APPROPRIATE <3,500 MODE 4

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET 30 RDS 30mm APPROPRIATE See Note <3,500 MODE WITH CANNON FCR 4 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH CANNON ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE MOVING TARGET WITH ROCKETS ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ROCKETS 30 RDS 30mm APPROPRIATE See Note <3,500 MODE FCR 4

4 RKTS (M274) APPROPRIATE See Note See Notes 2 <3,000 MODE IHADSS 4 and 3 4 RKTS (M274) APPROPRIATE See Note See Notes 2 <3,000 MODE IHADSS 4 and 3 6 RKTS (M274) COOP 6 RKTS (M274) COOP
MOVING/ RUNNING MOVING/ RUNNING

1,500- See Note 3,000 4 1,500- See Note 3,000 4

2 rockets in 150 X 200m TEA 2 rockets in 150 X 200m TEA

4 RKTS (M274) APPROPRIATE See Note See Notes <7,500 MODE FCR 4 2 and 3

ENGAGE MOVING TARGET 4 RKTS (M274) APPROPRIATE See Note See Notes 2 <7,500 MODE WITH ROCKETS FCR 4 and 3 ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE 2 SAL HF RAPID 1 SAL HF LOBL 1 SAL HF LOAL
APPROPRIATE >3,000 MODE APPROPRIATE <2,000 MODE APPROPRIATE >2,000 MODE

HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR

HIT HIT HIT

B-46

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VIII. NIGHT AH-64D CREW TRAINING TABLE (CONCLUDED)

TASK
NO 16 DESCRIPTION ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH SAL HF ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH SAL HF (REMOTE) ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE AMMO 1 SAL HF

CONDITION
MODE RANGE (meters) TARGET HVY ARMOR HVY ARMOR

STANDARD
TGT EFFECT HIT

APPROPRIATE <2,000 MODE APPROPRIATE >4,000 MODE

17

1 SAL HF

HIT

18

2 SAL HF RIPL 1 SAL HF RFHO 1 RF HF RFHO

HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE ARMOR HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE ARMOR HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE ARMOR

HIT

19

HIT

20

HIT

21

ENGAGE STATIONARY 1 RF HF HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE TGT W/HELLFIRE AUTONOMOUS ARMOR ENGAGE MOVING TGT 1 RF HF HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE W/HELLFIRE AUTONOMOUS ARMOR ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE ENGAGE STATIONARY/ MVNG TGT W/HELLFIRE 2 RF HF RAPID 1 RF HF TADS HO HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE ARMOR HVY APPROPRIATE 500-8,000 MODE ARMOR

HIT

22

HIT

23

HIT

24

HIT

NOTES: 1. The commander/master gunner will determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering for the engagements above to support unit training requirements and mission essential task list. 2. The standard for rocket target effect is diving rockets (<1,500-meter engagements) 1 of 4 in 10-meter radius or 2 of 4 in 50-meter radius TEA; running rockets (1,500- to 3,000-meter engagements) 2 of 6 (or 1 of 4) in a 150m X 200m TEA; all other rocket engagements (running, diving, or hovering), 2 of 6 (or 1 of 4) rockets in a 300m X 400m TEA. 3. Diving or running rocket engagements may be fired as singles or pairs. All hovering rocket engagements will be fired as pairs. 4. Targets may be light vehicles, troops, trucks, buildings, or miscellaneous equipment.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-47

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE IX. DAY/NIGHT AH-64D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TEAM/PLATOON)

TASK
NO DESCRIPTION ACFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/HELLFIRE ACFT 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/ROCKETS ACFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/CANNON ACFT 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/CANNON ACFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/ROCKETS ACFT 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/HELLFIRE ACFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/HELLFIRE (REMOTE DESIGNATION) ACFT 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/HELLFIRE (REMOTE LAUNCH) ACFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/CANNON ACFT 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/CANNON AMMO 1 HF SAL 4 RKTS M274 30 RDS

CONDITION
MODE RANGE (meters) <4,000
APPROPRIATE MODE

STANDARD
TARGET HEAVY ARMOR See Note 7 See Note 7 TGT EFFECT HIT See Notes 5 and 6 HIT

<4,000 <1,500
APPROPRIATE MODE

30 RDS 4 RKTS M274 1 HF SAL NA

APPROPRIATE MODE

<1,500 <4,000
APPROPRIATE MODE

See Note 7 See Note 7 HEAVY ARMOR HEAVY ARMOR

HIT See Notes 5 and 6 HIT NA

<4,000 <4,000

1 HF SAL

<4,000

HEAVY ARMOR See Note 7

HIT

30 RDS
APPROPRIATE MODE

<1,500

HIT

30 RDS

<1,500

See Note 7

HIT

B-48

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE IX. DAY/NIGHT AH-64D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TEAM/PLATOON) (CONCLUDED)

TASK
NO DESCRIPTION ACFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/HELLFIRE (REMOTE LAUNCH) 6 ACFT 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/HELLFIRE (REMOTE DESIGNATION) ACFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/HELLFIRE (FCR) 7 ACFT 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/HELLFIRE (RF HANDOVER) ACFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/ROCKETS 8 ACFT 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/ ROCKETS 4 RKTS M274 1 HF SAL AMMO

CONDITION
MODE RANGE (meters) TARGET

STANDARD
TGT EFFECT

1 HF SAL
APPROPRIATE MODE

>4,000

HEAVY ARMOR

HIT

NA

>4,000

HEAVY ARMOR

NA

1 HF SAL
APPROPRIATE MODE

2,000-6,000

HEAVY ARMOR

HIT

2,000-6,000

HEAVY ARMOR

HIT

4 RKTS M274
APPROPRIATE MODE

>3,000

See Note 7

See Notes 5 and 6

>3,000

See Note 7

See Notes 5 and 6

STANDARD: Aircraft 1 and 2 must achieve a combined GO rating on 70% of all tasks to receive a GO for this table. NOTES:
1. The commander/master gunner may modify this table to tailor the gunnery tasks more closely to those required to support the units mission and METL. 2. The commander/master gunner will determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering for the engagements above to support unit training requirements and mission essential task list. 3. Engagement points for each task are based on applying engagement time to the appropriate calculation sheet. 4. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for this table. 5. The standard for rocket target effect is diving rockets (<1,500-meter engagements) 1 of 4 in 10-meter radius or 2 of 4 in 50-meter radius TEA; running rockets (1,500- to 3,000-meter engagements) 2 of 6 (or 1 of 4) in a 150m X 200m TEA; all other rocket engagements (running, diving, or hovering), 2 of 6 (or 1 of 4) rockets in a 300m X 400m TEA. 6. Diving or running rocket engagements may be fired as singles or pairs. All hovering rocket engagements will be fired as pairs. 7. Targets may be light vehicles, troops, trucks, buildings, or miscellaneous equipment.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-49

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE X. DAY/NIGHT AH-64D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TEAM/PLATOON)

TASK
NO DESCRIPTION ACFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/HELLFIRE 1 ACFT 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/ROCKETS ACFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/CANNON ACFT 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/CANNON ACFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/ROCKETS ACFT 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/HELLFIRE ACFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/HELLFIRE (REMOTE DESIGNATION) ACFT 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/HELLFIRE (REMOTE LAUNCH) ACFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/CANNON 5 ACFT 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/CANNON 30 RDS 4 RKTS M274 30 RDS AMMO 1 HF SAL

CONDITION
MODE RANGE (meters) >4,000
APPROPRIATE MODE

STANDARD
TARGET HEAVY ARMOR See Note 7 See Note 7 TGT EFFECT HIT See Notes 5 and 6 HIT

>4,000 <1,500
APPROPRIATE MODE

30 RDS 4 RKTS M274 1 HF SAL NA

APPROPRIATE MODE

<1,500 <4,000
APPROPRIATE MODE

See Note 7 See Note 7 HEAVY ARMOR HEAVY ARMOR

HIT See Notes 5 and 6 HIT NA

<4,000 <4,000

1 HF SAL

<4,000

HEAVY ARMOR See Note 7

HIT

30 RDS
APPROPRIATE MODE

<1,500

HIT

<1,500

See Note 7

HIT

B-50

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE X. DAY/NIGHT AH-64D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TEAM/PLATOON) (CONCLUDED)

TASK
NO DESCRIPTION ACFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/HELLFIRE (REMOTE LAUNCH) 6 ACFT 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/HELLFIRE (REMOTE DESIGNATION) ACFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/HELLFIRE (FCR) 7 ACFT 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/HELLFIRE (RF HANDOVER) ACFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/ROCKETS 8 ACFT 2 ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET W/ ROCKETS 4 RKTS M274 1 HF RF AMMO

CONDITION
MODE RANGE (meters) TARGET

STANDARD
TGT EFFECT

1 HF SAL
APPROPRIATE MODE

>4,000

HEAVY ARMOR

HIT

NA

>4,000

HEAVY ARMOR

NA

1 HF RF
APPROPRIATE MODE

2,000-6,000

HEAVY ARMOR

HIT

2,000-6,000

HEAVY ARMOR

HIT

4 RKTS M274
APPROPRIATE MODE

>3,000

See Note 7

See Notes 5 and 6

>3,000

See Note 7

See Notes 5 and 6

STANDARD: Aircraft 1 and 2 must achieve a combined GO rating on 70% of all tasks to receive a GO for this table. AMMUNITION PER A/C: 14 rkts M274 and 150 rds 30-mm. See Note 4. NOTES:
1. The commander/master gunner may modify this table to tailor the gunnery tasks more closely to those required to support the units mission and METL. 2. The commander/master gunner will determine the appropriate mode; for example, running, diving, or hovering for the engagements above to support unit training requirements and mission essential task list. 3. Engagement points for each task are based on applying engagement time to the appropriate calculation sheet. 4. DA Pam 350-38 contains information about the amount and type of ammunition provided for this table 5. The standard for rocket target effect is diving rockets (<1,500-meter engagements) 1 of 4 in 10 meter radius or 2 of 4 in 50-meter radius TEA; running rockets (1,500- to 3,000-meter engagements) 2 of 6 (or 1 of 4) in a 150m X 200m TEA; all other rocket engagements (running, diving, or hovering) the standard is 2 of 6 (or 1 of 4) rockets in a 300m X 400m TEA. 6. Diving or running rocket engagements may be fired as singles or pairs. All hovering rocket engagements will be fired as pairs. 7. Targets may be light vehicles, troops, trucks, buildings, or miscellaneous equipment.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-51

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE XI. DAY/NIGHT AH-64D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (COMPANY)

TASK
Receive mission, conduct mission planning Conduct air movement

CONDITION
Commander receives on-order deliberate attack mission. Enemy is two to three hours from decision point. Operations overlay includes lateral boundaries, phase lines, air routes, and engagement area. Commander receives order to execute the mission. Unit departs TAA en route to ABF according to the briefed time schedule. Unit occupies ABF per SOP. SITREP from S2 indicates that the enemy is near the planned engagement area.

STANDARD
Commander will ensure that precombat checks are complete. Commander briefs mission to aircrews. Unit conducts mission planning and rehearsal. Unit complies with A2C2 plan, coordinates with ground elements in vicinity of HA and ABF, and meets times for crossing start point, ACPs, CCPs, and release point. Unit occupies ABF along briefed routes, establishes security in BP, and prepares to engage IAW briefed schedule. Direct fire distribution according to the SOP. Unit will fire and maneuver according to the commander's guidance. Execute distribution of fires according to the SOP. Unit will fire and maneuver, engage troops and vehicles with cannon, and neutralize artillery with rockets. The commander reports to higher HQ. Commander consolidates BDA and FARM, reports to higher command, and determines proper weapons load for aircraft. Aircraft sequence into the FARP and refuel according to the SOP. Unit complies with A2C2 plan, conducts AAR, prepares for future operations, and completes precombat checks.

Conduct battle-position operations

Engage Multiple targets are in the EA. Unit multiple targets engages targets with long-range missile fires. Detect and react to OPFOR During missile engagements, unit makes contact with lead elements of the OPFOR. OPFOR is recon element with lightly armored vehicles and troops supported by artillery. Unit engages with cannon at short to medium ranges and rockets at medium to long ranges.

Conduct FARP Upon completing briefed mission, unit operations rallies at HA and returns along briefed air route to FARP.

Return to TAA, and prepare for future operations

Commander orders the unit to depart the FARP and return to the TAA along briefed air routes.

NOTES: 1. The purpose of this table is to exercise command and control of the live fire. 2. Commanders may modify this table and develop a tactical scenario to support the unit METL/MTP. 3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for this table.

B-52

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE XI. DAY/NIGHT AH-64D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TROOP)

TASK
Receive mission, conduct mission planning

CONDITION
Commander receives on-order zone recon mission. Enemy situation is unknown. Operations overlay includes lateral boundaries, LD, and objective. Commander receives order to execute mission. Unit departs TAA en route to the LD. Enemy contact is likely. Unit uses bounding overwatch to conduct reconnaissance. Unit makes contact with lead elements of the OPFOR. OPFOR is recon element with lightly armored vehicles and dismounted troops. Unit rallies, conducts battle handover, and returns along briefed air routes to FARP. Commander orders the unit to depart the FARP and return to the TAA along briefed air routes.

STANDARD
Commander will ensure that precombat checks are complete. Commander briefs mission to aircrews. Unit conducts mission planning and rehearsal. Unit complies with A2C2 plan and coordinates with ground elements for LD passage. Unit recons assigned zone IAW time constraints in OPORD. Unit engages OPFOR and breaks contact. The engagement is not decisive. The commander reports to higher HQ. Commander determines proper weapons load for aircraft. Aircraft sequence into FARP and refuel according to the SOP. Unit complies with A2C2 plan, conducts AAR, prepares for future operations, and completes precombat checks.

Conduct movement to LD Conduct zone reconnaissance Detect and react to OPFOR

Conduct FARP operations

Return to TAA, and prepare for future operations

NOTES: 1. The purpose of this table is to exercise command and control of the troop live fire. 2. Commanders may modify this table and develop a tactical scenario to support the unit METL/MTP. 3. Accomplish tasks according to standards in the applicable MTP. 4. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for this table.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-53

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE XII. DAY/NIGHT AH-64D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (COMPANY)

TASK
Receive mission, conduct mission planning Conduct air movement

CONDITION
Commander receives on-order deliberate attack mission. Enemy is two to three hours from decision point. Operations overlay includes lateral boundaries, phase lines, air routes, and engagement area. Commander receives order to execute mission. Unit departs TAA en route to ABF according to the briefed time schedule. Unit occupies ABF per SOP. SITREP from S2 indicates that the enemy is near the planned engagement area.

STANDARD
Commander will ensure that precombat checks are complete. Commander briefs mission to aircrews. Unit conducts mission planning and rehearsal.

Unit complies with A2C2 plan, coordinates with ground elements in vicinity of HA and ABF, and meets times for crossing start point, ACPs, CCPs, and release point. Unit occupies ABF along briefed routes, establishes security in ABF, and prepares to engage IAW briefed schedule.

Conduct battle-position operations Engage multiple targets Detect and react to OPFOR

Multiple targets are in the EA. Unit Direct fire distribution according to the engages targets with long-range missile SOP. Unit will fire and maneuver fires. according to the commander's guidance. During missile engagements, the unit makes contact with lead elements of the OPFOR. OPFOR is recon element with lightly armored vehicles and troops supported by artillery. Unit engages with cannon at short to medium ranges and rockets at medium to long ranges. Upon completing briefed mission, unit rallies at HA and returns along briefed air route to FARP. Execute distribution of fires according to the SOP. Unit will fire and maneuver, engage troops and vehicles with cannon, and neutralize artillery with rockets. The commander reports to higher HQ.

Conduct FARP operations

Commander consolidates BDA and FARM, reports to higher command, and determines proper weapons load for aircraft. Aircraft sequence into the FARP and refuel according to the SOP. Unit complies with A2C2 plan, conducts AAR, prepares for future operations, and completes precombat checks.

Return to TAA, and prepare for future operations

Commander orders the unit to depart the FARP and return to the TAA along briefed air routes.

NOTES: 1. The purpose of this table is to exercise command and control of the live fire. 2. Commanders may modify this table and develop a tactical scenario to support the unit METL/MTP. 3. DA Pam 350-38 contains information about the amount and type of ammunition provided for this table.

B-54

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE XII. DAY/NIGHT AH-64D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TROOP)

TASK
Receive mission, conduct mission planning

CONDITION
Commander receives on-order zone recon mission. Enemy situation is unknown. Operations overlay includes lateral boundaries, LD, and objective.

STANDARD
Commander will ensure precombat checks are complete. Commander briefs mission to aircrews. Unit conducts mission planning and rehearsal. Unit complies with A2C2 plan and coordinates with ground elements for LD passage. Unit recons assigned zone IAW time constraints in OPORD. Unit engages OPFOR and breaks contact. The engagement is not decisive. The commander reports to higher HQ. Commander determines proper weapons load for aircraft. Aircraft sequence into FARP and refuel according to the SOP. Unit complies with A2C2 plan, conducts AAR, prepares for future operations, and completes precombat checks.

Conduct movement to LD Conduct zone reconnaissance Detect and react to OPFOR

Commander receives order to execute mission. Unit departs TAA en route to the LD. Enemy contact is likely. Unit uses bounding overwatch to conduct reconnaissance. Unit makes contact with lead elements of the OPFOR. OPFOR is recon element with lightly armored vehicles and dismounted troops. Unit rallies, conducts battle handover, and returns along briefed air routes to FARP.

Conduct FARP operations

Return to TAA, and prepare for future operations

Commander orders the unit to depart the FARP and return to the TAA along briefed air routes.

NOTES: 1. The purpose of this table is to exercise command and control of the troop live fire. 2. Commanders can modify this table and develop a tactical scenario to support the unit METL/ MTP. 3. DA Pam 350-38 contains information about the amount and type of ammunition provided for this table.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-55

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

SECTION IV OH-58D GUNNERY TABLES

B-49. Units that are assigned OH-58D aircraft will use the gunnery tables in this section. TABLE I DAY OH-58D INITIAL WEAPON QUALIFICATION TASK NO DESCRIPTION AMMO CONDITION MODE RANGE STANDARD TARGET TARGET EFFECT

IAW USAAVNC OR NGB-APPROVED POI TABLE II NIGHT OH-58D INITIAL WEAPON QUALIFICATION TASK NO DESCRIPTION AMMO CONDITION MODE RANGE STANDARD TARGET TARGET EFFECT

IAW USAAVNC OR NGB-APPROVED POI TABLE III DAY OH-58D INDIVIDUAL TRAINING TABLE NO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

TASK DESCRIPTION
ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF (AUTONOMOUS) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF (REMOTE) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH ATAS

AMMO
100 RDS .50 CAL 3 RKTS M274 100 RDS .50 CAL 4 RKTS M274 100 RDS .50 CAL 3 RKTS M274 4 RKTS M274 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT 1 STINGER CFT

CONDITION MODE RANGE (METERS)

HOVER HOVER RUNNING RUNNING DIVING RUNNING /DIVING DIVING HOVER/ RUNNING HOVER/ RUNNING HOVER/ MOVING 300 1,500 1,500 6,000 300 1,500 300 6,000 300 1,500 300 6,000 300 1,500 500 8,000 500 8,000 <4,000

STANDARD TARGET TARGET EFFECT

TROOPS ARMOR TROOPS ARMOR TROOPS ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR AIRCRAFT HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA IAW TABLE 6 HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA IAW TABLE 6 HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6 HIT HIT HIT

STANDARD: Table III is used for individual training of newly assigned aviators that have not Table VIII qualified within the preceding 12 months. Table III will be evaluated by unit instructor pilots. NOTE: 1. If Task 2130, Engage Target With the ATAS, is included on the commanders task list. AMMUNITION: 300 RDS .50 CAL 14 RKTS M274

B-56

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE IV NIGHT OH-58D INDIVIDUAL TRAINING TABLE TASK NO

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CONDITION AMMO
100 RDS .50 CAL 3 RKTS M274 100 RDS .50 CAL 4 RKTS M274 100 RDS .50 CAL 3 RKTS M274 4 RKTS M274 1 HF CFT

DESCRIPTION
ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF (AUTONOMOUS) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF (REMOTE) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH ATAS

MODE
HOVER HOVER RUNNING RUNNING DIVING RUNNING/ DIVING DIVING HOVER/ RUNNING HOVER/ RUNNING HOVER/ MOVING

RANGE (METERS)
300 1,500 1,500 6,000 300 1,500 300 6,000 300 1,500 300 6,000 300 1,500

STANDARD TARGET TARGET EFFECT

TROOPS ARMOR TROOPS ARMOR TROOPS ARMOR ARMOR HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA IAW TABLE 6 HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA IAW TABLE 6 HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6

500 8,000

ARMOR

HIT

9 10

1 HF CFT 1 STINGER CFT

500 8,000 <4,000

ARMOR AIRCRAFT

HIT HIT

STANDARD: Table IV is used for individual training of newly assigned aviators that have not qualified on Table VIII within the preceding 12 months. Table IV will be evaluated by unit instructor pilots. NOTE: 1. If Task 2130, Engage Target With the ATAS, is included on the commanders task list. AMMUNITION: 300 RDS .50 CAL 14 RKTS M274

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-57

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE V HELICOPTER GUNNERY SKILLS TEST TASK PASS WRITTEN TEST CONSISTING OF A MINIMUM OF 50 QUESTIONS FROM THE FOLLOWING SUBJECT AREAS: WEAPON SYSTEMS OPERATION/FIRING CHARACTERISTICS. BALLISTICS. DELIVERY TECHNIQUES. MUNITIONS: IDENTIFICATION FUNCTION OPERATION EFFECTS FRATRICIDE: THREAT IDENTIFICATION CONDITION STANDARD

WITHOUT REFERENCE TO PUBLICATIONS.

MINIMUM OF 70% CORRECT.

PERFORM RELEVANT TASKS FROM THE FOLLOWING AREAS:

DEMONSTRATE ABILITY TO PERFORM OR EXPLAIN SELECTED SUBJECT AREAS: AIRCRAFT. SIMULATOR OR AIRCRAFT. SIMULATOR OR AIRCRAFT. AIRCRAFT WITH TRAINING OR LIVE MUNITIONS. OVERALL GO/NO-GO IS BASED ON SCORERS ASSESSMENT.

ARMAMENT/WEAPON SYSTEMS PREFLIGHT. ARMAMENT/WEAPON SYSTEMS SWITCHOLOGY. PROCEDURES FOR HANGFIRE/MISFIRE/EMERGENCY CONDITIONS INVOLVING ARMAMENT SYSTEMS. MUNITIONS HANDLING, UPLOADING/DOWNLOADING.

NOTE: Some hands-on tasks are also ATM tasks. However, conduct these tasks as part of the HGST to confirm crew proficiency before live-fire training/qualification.

B-58

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VI OH-58D WEAPON CALIBRATION/VERIFICATION TASK NO

1 2 3 4 5 6

CONDITION AMMO
75 RDS .50 CAL 3 RKTS M274 75 RDS .50 CAL 4 RKTS M274 1 HF CFT 1 STINGER CFT

DESCRIPTION
ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG (MMS) ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH RKTS (MMS) ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG (CCA) ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH RKTS (CCA) ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH HF ENGAGE STATIONARY TARGET WITH ATAS

MODE
HOVER/ RUNNING HOVER/ RUNNING DIVING DIVING HOVER/ RUNNING HOVER/ RUNNING

RANGE (METERS)
300 1,500 1,500 6,000 300 1,500 300 1,500 500 8,000 <4,000

STANDARD TARGET TARGET EFFECT

AS REQUIRED AS REQUIRED AS REQUIRED AS REQUIRED AS REQUIRED AS REQUIRED HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA IAW TABLE 6 HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA IAW TABLE 6 HIT HIT

STANDARD: Table VI improves system familiarity by providing the crew an opportunity to fire without the burden of a time parameter. It is a mandatory gate to certify aircraft weapon system calibration. NOTE: 1. If Task 2130, Engage Target With the ATAS, is included on the commanders task list. AMMUNITION: 150 rds .50 cal 7 RKTS M274

TABLE VII DAY OH-58D CREW TRAINING TABLE TASK

NO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CONDITION
AMMO MODE RANGE (METERS)

STANDARD
TARGET TARGET EFFECT
HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA IAW TABLE 6 HIT HIT

DESCRIPTION

ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING 75 RDS HOVER 300 1,500 TROOPS TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG .50 CAL ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING 3 RKTS HOVER 1,500 6,000 ARMOR TARGET WITH RKTS M274 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING 1 HF HOVER/ 500 8,000 ARMOR TARGET WITH HF (REMOTE) CFT RUNNING ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING 1 HF HOVER/ 500 8,000 ARMOR TARGET WITH HF (AUTONOMOUS) CFT RUNNING MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE.

STANDARD: Crew must achieve a GO rating on 8 of 12 tasks to receive an overall GO for this table. The crew must receive at least one GO (at least 70 points) for each weapon system. NOTES: 1. Tasks 5 through 12 will be selected to support the units mission, METL, and resources. 2. Table execution will be accomplished with 4 gun engagements, 4 rocket engagements, and 4 missile engagements. 3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide HF and Stinger missiles for this table. When available through stockpile reliability, surveillance, stock rotation, or shelf life, live missiles may be used. AMMUNITION: 300 rds .50 cal 14 rkts M274

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-59

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE VII DAY OH-58D CREW TRAINING TABLE TASK NO

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

CONDITION AMMO
75 RDS .50 CAL 75 RDS .50 CAL 75 RDS .50 CAL 3 RKTS M267 3 RKTS M267 4 RKTS M267 4 RKTS M267 3 RKTS M274 3 RKTS M274 3 RKTS M274 4 RKTS M274 4 RKTS M274 4 RKTS M274 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT

DESCRIPTION
ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOBL (AUTONOMOUS) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOBL (REMOTE) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOAL (AUTONOMOUS) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOAL (REMOTE) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOBL (AUTONOMOUS) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOBL (REMOTE) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOAL (AUTONOMOUS) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOAL (REMOTE) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH ATAS

MODE
HOVER RUNNING DIVING HOVER RUNNING HOVER RUNNING HOVER RUNNING DIVING HOVER RUNNING DIVING HOVER HOVER HOVER HOVER RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING

RANGE (METERS)
300 1,500 300 1,500 300 1,500 1,000 6,000 1,000 6,000 1,000 6,000 1,000 1,500 300 6,000 300 6,000 300 1,500 300 6,000 300 6,000 300 1,500 500 8,000 500 8,000 500 8,000 500 8,000 500 8,000 500 8,000 500 8,000 500 8,000

STANDARD TARGET TARGET EFFECT

TROOPS TROOPS TROOPS ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR TROOPS/ VEHICLE ARMOR ARMOR TROOPS/ VEHICLE ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR AIRCRAFT AIRCRAFT HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6 HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT

1 STINGER HOVER <4,000 CFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING STINGER RUNNING <4,000 23 TARGET WITH ATAS CFT NOTE: 1. If Task 2130, Engage Target With the ATAS, is included on commander's task list.

B-60

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VII NIGHT OH-58D CREW TRAINING TABLE TASK NO

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CONDITION AMMO
75 RDS .50 CAL

DESCRIPTION
ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG

MODE
HOVER

RANGE (METERS)
300 1,500

STANDARD TARGET TARGET EFFECT

TROOPS HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA IAW TABLE 6 HIT HIT

ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING 3 RKTS LIGHT HOVER 1,500 6,000 TARGET WITH RKTS M274 ARMOR ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING 1 HF HOVER/ HEAVY 500 8,000 TARGET WITH HF (REMOTE) CFT RUNNING ARMOR ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING 1 HF HOVER/ HEAVY 500 8,000 TARGET WITH HF (AUTONOMOUS) CFT RUNNING ARMOR MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE.

STANDARD: Crew must achieve a GO rating on 8 of 12 tasks to receive an overall GO for this table. The crew must receive at least one GO (at least 70 points) for each weapon system. NOTES: 1. Tasks 5 through 12 will be selected to support the units mission, METL, and resources. 2. Table execution will be accomplished with 4 gun engagements, 4 rocket engagements, and 4 missile engagements. 3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide HF and Stinger missiles for this table. When available through stockpile reliability, surveillance, stock rotation, or shelf life, live missiles may be used. AMMUNITION: 300 rds .50 cal 12 rkts M274

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-61

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE VII NIGHT OH-58D CREW TRAINING TABLE TASK NO

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CONDITION AMMO
75 RDS .50 CAL 75 RDS .50 CAL 75 RDS .50 CAL 3 RKTS M267 3 RKTS M267 3 RKTS M274 3 RKTS M274 3 RKTS M274 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT 1 STINGER CFT 1 STINGER CFT

DESCRIPTION
ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOBL (AUTONOMOUS) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOBL (REMOTE) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOAL (AUTONOMOUS) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOAL (REMOTE) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOBL (AUTONOMOUS) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOBL (REMOTE) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOAL (AUTONOMOUS) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOAL (REMOTE) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH ATAS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH ATAS

MODE
HOVER RUNNING DIVING HOVER RUNNING HOVER RUNNING DIVING

RANGE (METERS)
300 1,500 300 1,500 300 1,500 1,000 6,000 1,000 6,000 300 6,000 300 6,000 300 1,500

STANDARD TARGET TARGET EFFECT

TROOPS TROOPS TROOPS ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR TROOPS/ VEHICLE ARMOR HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6

HOVER

500 8,000

HIT

10

HOVER

500 8,000

ARMOR

HIT

11

HOVER

500 8,000

ARMOR

HIT

12

HOVER

500 8,000

ARMOR

HIT

13

RUNNING

500 8,000

ARMOR

HIT

14

RUNNING

500 8,000

ARMOR

HIT

15

RUNNING

500 8,000

ARMOR

HIT

16 17 18

RUNNING HOVER RUNNING

500 8,000 <4,000 <4,000

ARMOR AIRCRAFT AIRCRAFT

HIT HIT HIT

NOTE: 1. If Task 2130, Engage Target With the ATAS, is included on commander's task list.

B-62

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VIII DAY OH-58D CREW TRAINING TABLE TASK NO

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CONDITION AMMO
75 RDS .50 CAL 3 RKTS M274 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT

DESCRIPTION
ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF (REMOTE) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF (AUTONOMOUS)

MODE
HOVER HOVER HOVER/ RUNNING HOVER/ RUNNING

RANGE (METERS)
300 1,500 1,500 6,000 500 8,000 500 8,000

STANDARD TARGET TARGET EFFECT

TROOPS ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA IAW TABLE 6 HIT HIT

MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE.

STANDARD: Crew must achieve a GO rating on 8 of 12 tasks to receive an overall GO for this table. The crew must receive at least one GO (at least 70 points) for each weapon system. NOTES: 1. Tasks 5 through 12 will be selected to support the units mission, METL, and resources. 2. Table execution will be accomplished with 4 gun engagements, 4 rocket engagements, and 4 missile engagements. 3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide rHF and Stinger missiles for this table. When available through stockpile reliability, surveillance, stock rotation, or shelf life, live missiles may be used. AMMUNITION: 300 rds .50 cal 14 rkts M274

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-63

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE VIII DAY OH-58D CREW TRAINING TABLE TASK NO

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

CONDITION AMMO
75 RDS .50 CAL 75 RDS .50 CAL 75 RDS .50 CAL 3 RKTS M267 3 RKTS M267 4 RKTS M267 4 RKTS M267 3 RKTS M274 3 RKTS M274 3 RKTS M274 4 RKTS M274 4 RKTS M274 4 RKTS M274 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT

STANDARD TARGET
TROOPS TROOPS TROOPS ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR TROOPS/ VEHICLE ARMOR ARMOR TROOPS/ VEHICLE ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR AIRCRAFT AIRCRAFT

DESCRIPTION
ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50-CAL MG ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50-CAL MG ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50-CAL MG ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOBL (AUTONOMOUS) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOBL (REMOTE) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOAL (AUTONOMOUS) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOAL (REMOTE) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOBL (AUTONOMOUS) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOBL (REMOTE) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOAL (AUTONOMOUS) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOAL (REMOTE)

MODE
HOVER RUNNING DIVING HOVER RUNNING HOVER RUNNING HOVER RUNNING DIVING HOVER RUNNING DIVING HOVER HOVER HOVER HOVER RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING

RANGE (METERS)
300 1,500 300 1,500 300 1,500 1,000 6,000 1,000 6,000 1,000 6,000 1,000 6,000 300 6,000 300 6,000 300 1,500 300 6,000 300 6,000 300 1,500 500 8,000 500 8,000 500 8,000 500 8,000 500 8,000 500 8,000 500 8,000

TARGET EFFECT
HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6 HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT

1 HF RUNNING 500 8,000 CFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING STINGER HOVER <4,000 22 TARGET WITH ATAS CFT 1 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING STINGER RUNNING <4,000 23 TARGET WITH ATAS CFT NOTE: 1. If Task 2130, Engage Target With the ATAS, is included on commander's task list.

B-64

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE VIII NIGHT OH-58D CREW TRAINING TABLE TASK NO

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CONDITION AMMO
75 RDS .50 CAL 3 RKTS M274 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT

DESCRIPTION
ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF (REMOTE) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF (AUTONOMOUS)

MODE
HOVER HOVER HOVER/ RUNNING HOVER/ RUNNING

RANGE (METERS)
300 1,500 1,500 6,000 500 8,000 500 8,000

STANDARD TARGET TARGET EFFECT

TROOPS ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA IAW TABLE 6 HIT HIT

MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE. MASTER GUNNER WILL SELECT FROM THE FOLLOWING PAGE.

STANDARD: Crew must achieve a GO rating on 8 of 12 tasks to receive an overall GO for this table. The crew must receive at least one GO (at least 70 points) for each weapon system. NOTES: 1. Tasks 5 through 12 will be selected to support the units mission, METL, and resources. 2. Table execution will be accomplished with 4 gun engagements, 4 rocket engagements, and 4 missile engagements. 3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide HF and Stinger missiles for this table. When available through stockpile reliability, surveillance, stock rotation, or shelf life, live missiles may be used. AMMUNITION: 300 rds .50 cal 12 rkts M274

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-65

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE VIII NIGHT OH-58D CREW TRAINING TABLE TASK NO

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

CONDITION AMMO
75 RDS .50 CAL 75 RDS .50 CAL 75 RDS .50 CAL 3 RKTS M267 3 RKTS M267 3 RKTS M274 3 RKTS M274 3 RKTS M274 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT 1 HF CFT 1 STINGER CFT 1 STINGER CFT

STANDARD RANGE (meters)

300 1,500 300 1,500 300 1,500 1,000 6,000 1,000 6,000 300 6,000 300 6,000 300 1,500 500 8,000 500 8,000

DESCRIPTION
ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOBL (AUTONOMOUS) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOBL (REMOTE) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOAL (AUTONOMOUS) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOAL (REMOTE) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOBL (AUTONOMOUS) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOBL (REMOTE) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOAL (AUTONOMOUS) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF LOAL (REMOTE) ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH ATAS ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH ATAS

MODE
HOVER RUNNING DIVING HOVER RUNNING HOVER RUNNING DIVING HOVER HOVER

TARGET
TROOPS TROOPS TROOPS ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR TROOPS/ VEHICLE ARMOR ARMOR

TARGET EFFECT
HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6 HIT HIT

11

HOVER

500 8,000

ARMOR

HIT

12

HOVER

500 8,000

ARMOR

HIT

13

RUNNING

500 8,000

ARMOR

HIT

14 15 16 17 18

RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING HOVER MOVING

500 8,000 500 8,000 500 8,000 <4,000 <4,000

ARMOR ARMOR ARMOR AIRCRAFT AIRCRAFT

HIT HIT HIT HIT HIT

NOTE: 1. If Task 2130, Engage Target With the ATAS, is included on commander's task list.

B-66

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE IX DAY/NIGHT OH-58D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TM/PLT) TASK NO DESCRIPTION

AIRCRAFT #1 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS 1 AIRCRAFT #2 ENGAGE MOVING/STATIONARY TARGET WITH HF AIRCRAFT #1 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG 2 AIRCRAFT #2 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS AIRCRAFT #1 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS 3 AIRCRAFT #2 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF AIRCRAFT #1 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG 4 AIRCRAFT #2 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS AIRCRAFT #1 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS 5 AIRCRAFT #2 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF AIRCRAFT #1 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG 6 AIRCRAFT #2 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS AIRCRAFT #1 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS 7 AIRCRAFT #2 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF 1 HF CFT 3 RKTS M274 HOVER/ RUNNING/ DIVING HOVER/ RUNNING/ DIVING HOVER/ RUNNING 300 1,500 TROOPS 1 HF CFT 4 RKTS M274 3 RKTS M274 HOVER/ RUNNING/ DIVING HOVER/ RUNNING/ DIVING HOVER/ RUNNING HOVER/ RUNNING/ DIVING 300 1,500 300 6,000 WHEELED VEHICLE ARMOR 1 HF CFT 75 RDS .50 CAL 3 RKTS M274 4 RKTS M274 HOVER/ RUNNING/ DIVING HOVER/ RUNNING/ DIVING HOVER/ RUNNING HOVER/ RUNNING/ DIVING 300 1,500 300 6,000 TROOPS WHEELED VEHICLE ARMOR TROOPS 1 HF CFT 75 RDS .50 CAL

AMMO
3 RKTS M274

CONDITION RANGE MODE (METERS)

HOVER/ RUNNING/ DIVING HOVER/ RUNNING HOVER/ RUNNING/ DIVING 300 6,000

TARGET
TROOPS

STANDARD TARGET EFFECT

IAW TABLE 6

500 8,000 300 1,500

WHEELED VEHICLE WHEELED VEHICLE

HIT HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6

500 8,000 300 1,500

HIT HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6

500 8,000

ARMOR

HIT

75 RDS .50 CAL

300 1,500

WHEELED VEHICLE

HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA IAW TABLE 6

4 RKTS M274

300 6,000

WHEELED VEHICLE ARMOR

IAW TABLE 6

500 8,000

HIT

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-67

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE IX DAY/NIGHT OH-58D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TEAM/PLATOON) (CONCLUDED) TASK NO DESCRIPTION
AIRCRAFT #1 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG 8 AIRCRAFT #2 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS 4 RKTS M274 HOVER/ RUNNING/ DIVING 300 1,500 TROOPS

AMMO
75 RDS .50 CAL

CONDITION RANGE MODE (METERS)

HOVER/ RUNNING/ DIVING 300 1,500

TARGET
WHEELED VEHICLE

STANDARD TARGET EFFECT

HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA IAW TABLE 6

STANDARD: Aircraft 1 and 2 must achieve a GO rating of 70% of all tasks to receive an overall Go for this table NOTES: 1. Commanders may modify this table to tailor the gunnery tasks more closely to those required by the tasks, conditions, and standards found in the unit's MTP and unit's METL. 2. Engagement points for each task are based on applying engagement time to the appropriate calculation sheet. 3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for this table. Table IX should be conducted as a dry fire table or in the AVCATT. AMMUNITION: Aircraft #1 300 rds .50 cal 14 rkts M274 Aircraft #2 14 rkts M274 4 HF CFT

TABLE X DAY/NIGHT OH-58D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TEAM/PLATOON) TASK NO DESCRIPTION

AIRCRAFT #1 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS 1 AIRCRAFT #2 ENGAGE MOVING/STATIONARY TARGET WITH HF AIRCRAFT #1 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG 2 AIRCRAFT #2 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS AIRCRAFT #1 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS 3 AIRCRAFT #2 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF AIRCRAFT #1 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50 CAL MG 4 AIRCRAFT #2 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS 3 RKTS M274 HOVER/ RUNNING/ DIVING 300 1,500 WHEELED VEHICLE 1 HF CFT 75 RDS .50 CAL 3 RKTS M274 4 RKTS M274 HOVER/ RUNNING/ DIVING HOVER/ RUNNING/ DIVING HOVER/ RUNNING HOVER/ RUNNING/ DIVING 300 1,500 300 6,000 TROOPS WHEELED VEHICLE ARMOR TROOPS 1 HF CFT 75 RDS .50 CAL

CONDITION AMMO
3 RKTS M274

MODE
HOVER/ RUNNING/ DIVING HOVER/ RUNNING HOVER/ RUNNING/ DIVING

RANGE (meters)
300 6,000

STANDARD TARGET TARGET EFFECT

TROOPS IAW TABLE 6

500 8,000 300 1,500

WHEELED VEHICLE WHEELED VEHICLE

HIT HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA IAW TABLE 6 IAW TABLE 6

500 8,000 300 1,500

HIT HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA IAW TABLE 6

B-68

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE X DAY/NIGHT OH-58D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TEAM/PLATOON) (CONCLUDED) TASK NO DESCRIPTION
AIRCRAFT #1 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS 5 AIRCRAFT #2 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF AIRCRAFT #1 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50-CAL MG 6 AIRCRAFT #2 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS AIRCRAFT #1 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS 7 AIRCRAFT #2 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH HF AIRCRAFT #1 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH .50-CAL MG 8 AIRCRAFT #2 ENGAGE STATIONARY/MOVING TARGET WITH RKTS 3 RKTS M274 HOVER/ RUNNING/ DIVING 300 1,500 TROOPS 1 HF CFT 3 RKTS M274 4 RKTS M274 HOVER/ RUNNING/ DIVING HOVER/ RUNNING/ DIVING HOVER/ RUNNING HOVER/ RUNNING/ DIVING 300 1,500 TROOPS 1 HF CFT 75 RDS .50 CAL

CONDITION AMMO
3 RKTS M274

MODE
HOVER/ RUNNING/ DIVING HOVER/ RUNNING HOVER/ RUNNING/ DIVING

RANGE (METERS)
300 6,000

STANDARD TARGET TARGET EFFECT

ARMOR IAW TABLE 6

500 8,000

ARMOR

HIT

300 1,500

WHEELED VEHICLE

HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA IAW TABLE 6

300 6,000

WHEELED VEHICLE ARMOR

IAW TABLE 6

500 8,000

HIT

75 RDS .50 CAL

300 1,500

WHEELED VEHICLE

HIT OR 10% OF RDS IN 36m X 36m TEA IAW TABLE 6

STANDARD: Aircraft 1 and 2 must achieve a GO rating of 70% of all tasks to receive an overall Go for this table. NOTES: 1. Commanders may modify this table to tailor the gunnery tasks more closely to those required by the tasks, conditions, and standards found in the unit's MTP and unit's METL. 2. Engagement points for each task are based on applying engagement time to the appropriate calculation sheet. 3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide HF and Stinger missiles for this table. When available through stockpile reliability, surveillance, stock rotation, or shelf life, live missiles may be used. AMMUNITION: Aircraft #1 300 rds .50 Cal 14 rkts M274 Aircraft #2 14 rkts M274 4 HF CFT

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-69

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE XI DAY/NIGHT OH-58D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (COMPANY) TASK Receive mission, conduct mission planning Conduct air movement CONDITION Commander receives on-order deliberate attack mission. Enemy is two to three hours from decision point. Operations overlay includes lateral boundaries, phase lines, air routes, and engagement area. Commander receives order to execute mission. Unit departs TAA en route to HA and BP/ABF according to the briefed time schedule. Unit occupies BP/ABF according to the SOP. SITREP from S2 indicates that the enemy is near the planned engagement area. STANDARD Commander will ensure that precombat checks are complete. Commander briefs mission to aircrews. Unit conducts mission planning and rehearsal. Unit complies with A2C2 plan, coordinates with ground elements in vicinity of HA and BP/ABF, and meets times for crossing start point, ACPs, CCPs, and release point. Unit occupies BP/ABF along briefed routes, establishes security in ABF, and prepares to engage IAW briefed schedule. Direct fire distribution according to the SOP. Unit will fire and maneuver according to the commanders guidance. Execute distribution of fires according to the SOP. Unit will fire and maneuver, engage troops and vehicles with MG, and neutralize artillery with RKTS. The commander reports to higher HQ.

Conduct BP/ABF operations

Engage Multiple targets are in the EA. Unit engages multiple targets targets with long-range missile fires. Detect and react to OPFOR During missile engagements, unit makes contact with lead elements of the OPFOR. OPFOR is recon element with lightly armored vehicles and troops supported by artillery. Unit engages with MG at short to medium ranges and RKTS at medium to long ranges.

Conduct FARP Upon completing briefed mission, unit operations rallies at HA and returns along briefed air route to FARP.

Commander consolidates BDA and FARM, reports to higher command, and determines proper weapons load for aircraft. Aircraft sequence into FARP and refuel according to the SOP. Unit complies with A2C2 plan, conducts AAR, prepares for future operations, and completes precombat checks.

Return to TAA, and prepare for future operations

Commander orders the unit to depart the FARP and return to the TAA along briefed air routes.

NOTES: 1. The purpose of this table is to exercise command and control of the troop live fire. 2. Commanders may modify this table to tailor the gunnery tasks more closely to those required by the tasks, conditions, and standards found in the unit's MTP and unit's METL. 3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for this table. Table XI should be conducted as a dry fire table or in the AVCATT.

B-70

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE XI DAY/NIGHT OH-58D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TROOP) TASK Receive mission, conduct mission planning CONDITION Commander receives on-order zone recon mission. Enemy situation is unknown. Operations overlay includes lateral boundaries, LD, and objective. STANDARD Commander will ensure that precombat checks are complete. Commander briefs mission to aircrews. Unit conducts mission planning and rehearsal.

Conduct movement to LD Conduct zone reconnaissance

Commander receives order to execute mission. Unit departs TAA en route to the LD. Enemy contact is likely. Unit uses bounding over-watch to conduct reconnaissance. Unit makes contact with lead elements of the OPFOR. OPFOR is recon element with lightly armored vehicles and dismounted troops. Unit rallies, conducts battle handover, and returns along briefed air routes to FARP.

Unit complies with A2C2 plan and coordinates with ground elements for LD passage.

Unit recons assigned zone IAW time constraints in OPORD.

Detect and react to OPFOR

Unit engages OPFOR and breaks contact. The engagement is not decisive. Commander reports to higher HQ.

Conduct FARP operations

Commander determines proper weapons load for aircraft. Aircraft sequence into FARP and refuel according to the SOP.

Return to TAA, and prepare for future operations

Commander orders the unit to depart the FARP and return to the TAA along briefed air routes.

Unit complies with A2C2 plan, conducts AAR, prepares for future operations, and completes precombat checks.

NOTES: 1. The purpose of this table is to exercise command and control of the troop live fire. 2. Commanders may modify this table to tailor the gunnery tasks more closely to those required by the tasks, conditions, and standards found in the unit's MTP and unit's METL. 3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide resources for this table. Table XI should be conducted as a dry fire table or in the AVCATT.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-71

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

TABLE XII DAY/NIGHT OH-58D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (COMPANY) TASK Receive mission, conduct mission planning Conduct air movement CONDITION Commander receives on-order deliberate attack mission. Enemy is two to three hours from decision point. Operations overlay includes lateral boundaries, phase lines, air routes, and engagement area. Commander receives order to execute mission. Unit departs TAA en route to HA and BP/ABF according to the briefed time schedule. Unit occupies BP/ABF according to the SOP. SITREP from S2 indicates that the enemy is near the planned engagement area. Multiple targets are in the EA. Unit engages targets with long-range missile fires. During missile engagements, unit makes contact with lead elements of the OPFOR. OPFOR is recon element with lightly armored vehicles and troops supported by artillery. Unit engages with MG at short to medium ranges and RKTS at medium to long ranges. STANDARD Commander will ensure that precombat checks are complete. Commander briefs mission to aircrews. Unit conducts mission planning and rehearsal. Unit complies with A2C2 plan, coordinates with ground elements in vicinity of HA and BP/ABF, and meets times for crossing start point, ACPs, CCPs, and release point. Unit occupies BP/ABF along briefed routes, establishes security in ABF, and prepares to engage IAW briefed schedule. Direct fire distribution according to the SOP. Unit will fire and maneuver according to the commanders guidance. Execute distribution of fires according to the SOP. Unit will fire and maneuver, engage troops and vehicles with MG, and neutralize artillery with RKTS. The commander reports to higher HQ.

Conduct BP/ABF operations Engage multiple targets Detect and react to OPFOR

Conduct FARP Upon completing briefed mission, unit operations rallies at HA and returns along briefed air route to FARP.

Commander consolidates BDA and FARM, reports to higher command, and determines proper weapons load for aircraft. Aircraft sequence into FARP and refuel according to the SOP. Unit complies with A2C2 plan, conducts AAR, prepares for future operations, and completes precombat checks.

Return to TAA, and prepare for future operations

Commander orders the unit to depart the FARP and return to the TAA along briefed air routes.

NOTES: 1. The purpose of this table is to exercise command and control of the troop live fire. 2. Commanders may modify this table to tailor the gunnery tasks more closely to those required by the tasks, conditions, and standards found in the unit's MTP and unit's METL. 3. DA Pam 350-38 contains information about the amount and type of ammunition provided for this table.

B-72

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Appendix B

TABLE XII DAY/NIGHT OH-58D ADVANCED TRAINING TABLE (TROOP) TASK Receive mission, conduct mission planning CONDITION Commander receives on-order zone recon mission. Enemy situation is unknown. Operations overlay includes lateral boundaries, LD, and objective. STANDARD Commander will ensure that precombat checks are complete. Commander briefs mission to aircrews. Unit conducts mission planning and rehearsal.

Conduct movement to LD Conduct zone reconnaissance

Commander receives order to execute mission. Unit departs TAA en route to the LD. Enemy contact is likely. Unit uses bounding over-watch to conduct reconnaissance. Unit makes contact with lead elements of the OPFOR. OPFOR is recon element with lightly armored vehicles and dismounted troops. Unit rallies, conducts battle handover, and returns along briefed air routes to FARP.

Unit complies with A2C2 plan and coordinates with ground elements for LD passage.

Unit recons assigned zone IAW time constraints in OPORD.

Detect and react to OPFOR

Unit engages OPFOR and breaks contact. The engagement is not decisive. Commander reports to higher HQ.

Conduct FARP operations

Commander determines proper weapons load for aircraft. Aircraft sequence into FARP and refuel according to the SOP.

Return to TAA, and prepare for future operations

Commander orders the unit to depart the FARP and return to the TAA along briefed air routes.

Unit complies with A2C2 plan, conducts AAR, prepares for future operations, and completes precombat checks.

NOTES: 1. The purpose of this table is to exercise command and control of the troop live fire. 2. Commanders may modify this table to tailor the gunnery tasks more closely to those required by the tasks, conditions, and standards found in the unit's MTP and unit's METL. 3. DA Pam 350-38 contains information about the amount and type of ammunition provided for this table.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

B-73

This page intentionally left blank.

Appendix C

Engagement Time Point Calculation Sheets

The point calculation sheets in this appendix (Figures C-1 through C-22) allow the assessing of points for each engagement. The times are based on weapon-system characteristics, times of flight, and crew coordination. All engagement times are measured in seconds.

USING THE POINT CALCULATION SHEETS

C-1. To determine engagement-time scores, select the applicable table for the engagement; for example, MPSM rockets, four pair. Determine range to the target on the top row, and read down to the engagement time, which is expressed in seconds. After finding the correct engagement time, read the leftmost column to determine the score. C-2. Cannon and Hellfire remote engagements have entries for even-numbered seconds. For oddnumbered times, subtract one second. The rule is to round down. To determine a score, move across to the time that the target was hit. The point value is under that time. C-3. For ranges with masking terrain, commanders may elect to add 10 seconds to engagement times to allow crews to unmask and acquire targets. C-4. Chapter 2 contains specific instructions on how to time engagements. C-5. The score for rockets will be determined based on the actual number of pairs fired.

TIME 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 (seconds) POINTS 100 98 96 94 92 90 88 86 84 82 80 78 76

56 74

58 60 70 80 72 70 50 30

Figure C-1. Point Calculation Sheet for Engagement Times, Tables VII and VIII, 30-Millimeter Cannon Tasks, AH-64A/D ROCKETS 6 Rockets 4 Rockets POINTS 1 of 6 rockets in 10meter radius TEA 1 of 4 rockets in 10meter radius TEA 6 of 6 rockets in 50meter radius TEA 4 of 4 rockets in 50meter radius TEA 5 of 6 rockets in 50meter radius TEA 3 of 4 rockets in 50meter radius TEA 3 of 6 rockets in 50meter radius TEA 2 of 4 rockets in 50meter radius TEA

100

90

80

70

Figure C-2. Point Calculation Sheet, Tables VII and VIII, Diving Rocket Engagement Tasks (TEA Less Than 1,500 Meters), AH-64A/D

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

C-1

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

Figure C-3. Diving Rockets, TEA Less Than 1,500 Meters, AH-64A/D

RANGE 1,000(meters) 2,000 POINTS

100 95 90 85 80 75 70 50 30 0 15 or less 15.1 - 17 17.1 - 18 18.1 - 19 19.1 - 20 20.1 - 21 21.1 - 22 22.1 - 24 24.1 - 25 > 25

2,0013,000

3,001-4,000

4,0015,000

5,0016,000

6,001-7,000 7,001-8,000

Engagement Time in Seconds

19 or less 19.1 - 20 20.1 - 22 22.1 - 23 23.1 - 24 24.1 - 26 26.1 - 27 27.1 - 30 30.1 - 31 > 31 23 or less 23.1 - 25 25.1 - 26 26.1 - 28 28.1 - 30 30.1 - 31 31.1 - 33 33.1 - 36 36.1 - 38 > 38 28 or less 28.1 - 30 30.1 - 32 32.1 - 34 34.1 - 36 36.1 - 38 38.1 - 40 40.1 - 44 44.1 - 46 > 46 34 or less 34.1 - 36 36.1 - 38 38.1 - 41 41.1 - 43 43.1 - 46 46.1 - 48 48.1 - 53 53.1 - 55 > 55 39 or less 39.1 - 42 42.1 - 45 45.1 - 48 48.1 - 50 50.1 - 53 53.1 - 56 56.1 - 62 62.1 - 64 > 64 46 or less 46.1 - 50 50.1 - 53 53.1 - 56 56.1 - 59 59.1 - 63 63.1 - 66 66.1 - 73 73.1 - 76 > 76

Figure C-4. Point Calculation Sheet, Tables VII and VIII, Autonomous SAL Hellfire Engagement Tasks, AH-64A/D

C-2

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

___________________________________________________________________________ Appendix C, C1

RANGE (meters) POINTS

100

1,0002,000

2,0013,000

3,001-4,000

4,001-5,000

5,0016,000

6,0017,000

7,0018,000

Engagement Time in Seconds

<15 15.1-17 17.1-18 18.1-19 19.1-20 20.1-21 21.1-22 22.1-23 23.1-24 >24 <17 17.1-19 19.1-20 20.1-22 22.1-24 24.1-26 26.1-27 27.1-29 29.1-31 >31 <19 19.1-21 21.1-23 23.1-25 25.1-27 27.1-29 29.1-31 31.1-33 33.1-35 >35 <21 21.1-23 23.1-25 25.1-27 27.1-29 29.1-31 31.1-33 33.1-35 35.1-37 >37 <23 23.1-25 25.1-27 27.1-29 29.1-32 32.1-35 35.1-38 38.1-41 41.1-45 >45 <27 27.1-30 30.1-34 34.1-38 38.1-42 42.1-46 46.1-50 50.1-54 54.1-58 >58 <34 34.1-37 37.1-40 40.1-43 43.1-46 46.1-50 50.1-54 54.1-58 58.1-62 >62

95 90 85 80 75 70 50 30 0

Figure C-5. Point Calculation Sheet, Tables VII and VIII, TADS RFHO Engagement Tasks, AH-64D

TIME (SECONDS) POINTS

40

42

4 4 9 6

4 6 9 4

4 8 9 2

5 0 9 0

5 2 8 8

5 4 8 6

5 6 8 4

5 8 8 2

6 0 8 0

6 2 7 8

6 4 7 6

6 6 7 4

6 8 7 2

7 0 7 0

7 6 5 0

80

100

98

30

Figure C-6. Point Calculation Sheet, Tables VII and VIII, SAL Hellfire Remote Engagement Tasks, AH-64A/D

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

C-3

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

8 ROCKETS RANGE (meters) POINTS 100

95 90 85 80 75 70 50 30 0 92 or less 92.1 - 98 98.1 - 105 105.1 - 111 111.1 - 118 118.1 - 124 124.1 - 131 131.1 - 144 144.1 - 151 > 151 102 or less 102.1 - 109 109.1 - 116 116.1 - 123 123.1 - 131 131.1 - 138 138.1 - 145 145.1 - 160 160.1 - 167 > 167

1,000-2,000 2,001-3,000 3,001-4,000 4,001-5,000 5,001-6,000 6,001-7,000 7,001-8,000 Engagement Time in Seconds
111 or less 111.1 - 119 119.1 - 127 127.1 - 135 135.1 - 143 143.1 - 151 151.1 - 159 159.1 - 175 175.1 - 183 > 183 127 or less 127.1 - 136 136.1 - 145 145.1 - 154 154.1 - 163 163.1 - 172 172.1 - 181 181.1 - 199 199.1 - 208 > 208 139 or less 139.1 - 149 149.1 - 159 159.1 - 169 169.1 - 179 179.1 - 189 189.1 - 199 199.1 - 219 219.1 - 229 > 229 155 or less 155.1 - 166 166.1 - 177 177.1 - 188 188.1 - 199 199.1 - 210 210.1 - 221 221.1 - 243 243.1 - 254 > 254 173 or less 173.1 - 185 185.1 - 198 198.1 - 210 210.1 - 222 222.1 - 235 235.1 - 247 247.1 - 272 272.1 - 284 > 284

6 ROCKETS RANGE (meters) POINTS 100

95 90 85 80 75 70 50 30 0 54 or less 54.1 - 58 58.1 - 62 62.1 - 65 65.1 - 69 69.1 - 73 73.1 - 77 77.1 - 85 85.1 - 89 > 89 62 or less 62.1 - 66 66.1 - 70 70.1 - 75 75.1 - 79 79.1 - 84 84.1 - 88 88.1 - 97 97.1 - 101 > 101

1,000-2,000 2,001-3,000 3,001-4,000 4,001-5,000 5,001-6,000 6,001-7,000 7,001-8,000 Engagement Time in Seconds
69 or less 69.1 - 74 74.1 - 79 79.1 - 84 84.1 - 89 89.1 - 94 94.1 - 99 99.1 - 109 109.1 - 114 > 114 81 or less 81.1 - 87 87.1 - 93 93.1 - 99 99.1 - 104 104.1 - 110 110.1 - 116 116.1 - 128 128.1 - 133 > 133 91 or less 91.1 - 98 98.1 - 104 104.1 - 111 111.1 - 117 117.1 - 124 124.1 - 130 130.1 - 143 143.1 - 150 > 150 103 or less 103.1 - 110 110.1 - 118 118.1 - 125 125.1 - 132 132.1 - 140 140.1 - 147 147.1 - 162 162.1 - 169 > 169 117 or less 117.1 - 125 125.1 - 134 134.1 - 142 142.1 - 150 150.1 - 159 159.1 - 167 167.1 - 184 184.1 - 192 > 192

Figure C-7. Point Calculation Sheet, Tables VII and VIII, MPSM Rocket-Engagement Tasks

C-4

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

___________________________________________________________________________ Appendix C, C1

4 ROCKETS

RANGE (meters)
POINTS 100 95 90 85 80 75 70 50 30 0

1,0002,000

2,0013,000

3,0014,000

4,0015,000

5,0016,000

6,0017,000

7,0018,000

Engagement Time in Seconds 37 or less 43 or less 37.1 - 40 40.1 - 42 42.1 - 45 45.1 - 48 48.1 - 50 50.1 - 53 53.1 - 58 58.1 - 61 > 61 43.1 - 46 46.1 - 49 49.1 - 52 52.1 - 55 55.1 - 58 58.1 - 61 61.1 - 67 67.1 - 70 > 70 48 or less 48.1 - 52 52.1 - 55 55.1 - 59 59.1 - 62 62.1 - 66 66.1 - 69 69.1 - 76 76.1 - 79 > 79 57 or less 57.1 - 61 61.1 - 65 65.1 - 69 69.1 - 73 73.1 - 77 77.1 - 81 81.1 - 89 89.1 - 93 > 93 64 or less 64.1 - 68 68.1 - 73 73.1 - 77 77.1 - 82 82.1 - 86 86.1 - 91 91.1 - 100 > 105 72 or less 72.1 - 77 77.1 - 82 82.1 - 88 88.1 - 93 93.1 - 98 98.1 - 103 82 or less 82.1 - 88 88.1 - 94 94.1 - 99 99.1 - 105 105.1 - 111 111.1 - 117

103.1 - 113 117.1 - 129 > 118 > 135

100.1 - 105 113.1 - 118 129.1 - 135

2 ROCKETS

RANGE (meters)
POINTS 100 95 90 85 80 75 70 50 30 0

1,0002,000

2,0013,000

3,0014,000

4,0015,000

5,0016,000

6,0017,000

7,0018,000

Engagement Time in Seconds 20 or less 24 or less 20.1 - 22 22.1 - 23 23.1 - 25 25.1 - 26 26.1 - 28 28.1 - 29 29.1 - 32 32.1 - 33 > 33 24.1 - 26 26.1 - 27 27.1 - 29 29.1 - 31 31.1 - 32 32.1 - 34 34.1 - 37 37.1 - 39 > 39 27 or less 27.1 - 29 29.1 - 31 31.1 - 33 33.1 - 35 35.1 - 37 37.1 - 39 39.1 - 43 43.1 - 45 > 45 32 or less 32.1 - 35 35.1 - 37 37.1 - 39 39.1 - 41 41.1 - 44 44.1 - 46 46.1 - 51 51.1 - 53 > 53 36 or less 36.1 - 39 39.1 - 42 42.1 - 44 44.1 - 47 47.1 - 49 49.1 - 52 52.1 - 57 57.1 - 60 > 60 41 or less 41.1 - 44 44.1 - 47 47.1 - 50 50.1 - 53 53.1 - 56 56.1 - 59 59.1 - 65 65.1 - 68 > 68 47 or less 47.1 - 50 50.1 - 54 54.1 - 57 57.1 - 60 60.1 - 64 64.1 - 67 67.1 - 74 74.1 - 77 > 77

Figure C-8. Point Calculation Sheet, Tables VII and VIII, MPSM Rocket-Engagement Tasks

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

C-5

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

8 ROCKETS RANGE (meters) POINTS

100 95 90 85 80 75 70 50 30 0 43 or less 43.1 - 46 46.1 - 49 49.1 - 52 52.1 - 55 55.1 - 58 58.1 - 61 61.1 - 67 67.1 - 70 > 70 53 or less 53.1 - 56 56.1 - 60 60.1 - 64 64.1 - 68 68.1 - 71 71.1 - 75 75.1 - 83 83.1 - 86 > 86

1,0002,000

2,0013,000

3,0014,000

4,0015,000

5,0016,000

6,0017,000

7,0018,000

Engagement Time in Seconds

65 or less 65.1 - 70 70.1 - 74 74.1 - 79 79.1 - 84 84.1 - 88 88.1 - 93 93.1 - 102 > 107 78 or less 78.1 - 83 83.1 - 89 89.1 - 94 94.1 - 100 96 or less 96.1 - 103 120 or less 138 or less 120.1 - 128 138.1 - 148

103.1 - 110 128.1 - 137 148.1 - 158 110.1 - 116 137.1 - 145 158.1 - 167 116.1 - 123 145.1 - 154 167.1 - 177

100.1 - 105 123.1 - 130 154.1 - 162 177.1 - 187 105.1 - 111 130.1 - 137 162.1 - 171 187.1 - 197 111.1 - 122 137.1 - 151 171.1 - 188 197.1 - 217 > 128 > 158 > 197 > 227

102.1 - 107 122.1 - 128 151.1 - 158 188.1 - 197 217.1 - 227

6 ROCKETS RANGE (meters) POINTS

100 95 90 85 80 75 70 50 30 33 or less 33.1 - 35 35.1 - 38 38.1 - 40 40.1 - 42 42.1 - 45 45.1 - 47 47.1 - 52 52.1 - 54 > 54 41 or less 41.1 - 44 44.1 - 46 46.1 - 49 49.1 - 52 52.1 - 55 55.1 - 58 58.1 - 64 64.1 - 67 > 67

1,0002,000

2,0013,000

3,0014,000

4,0015,000

5,0016,000

6,0017,000

7,0018,000

Engagement Time in Seconds

50 or less 50.1 - 54 54.1 - 58 58.1 - 61 61.1 - 65 65.1 - 68 68.1 - 72 72.1 - 79 79.1 - 83 > 83 60 or less 60.1 - 65 65.1 - 69 69.1 - 73 73.1 - 77 77.1 - 82 82.1 - 86 86.1 - 95 95.1 - 99 > 99 74 or less 74.1 - 80 80.1 - 85 85.1 - 90 90.1 - 95 95.1 - 101 92 or less 92.1 - 99 99.1 - 106 106 or less 106.1 - 114 114.1 - 122

106.1 - 112 122.1 - 129 112.1 - 119 129.1 - 137 119.1 - 125 137.1 - 144

101.1 - 106 125.1 - 132 144.1 - 152 106.1 - 117 132.1 - 145 152.1 - 167 117.1 - 122 145.1 - 152 167.1 - 175 > 122 > 152 > 175

Figure C-9. Point Calculation Sheet, Tables VII and VIII, PD Rocket-Engagement Tasks

C-6

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

___________________________________________________________________________ Appendix C, C1

4 ROCKETS

RANGE (meters)
POINTS 100 95 90 85 80 75 70 50 30 0

1,0002,000

2,0013,000

3,0014,000

4,0015,000

5,0016,000

6,0017,000

7,0018,000

Engagement Time in Seconds 23 or less 29 or less 23.1 - 25 25.1 - 26 26.1 - 28 28.1 - 30 30.1 - 31 31.1 - 33 33.1 - 36 36.1 - 38 > 38 29.1 - 31 31.1 - 33 33.1 - 35 35.1 - 37 37.1 - 39 39.1 - 41 41.1 - 45 45.1 - 47 > 47 36 or less 36.1 - 38 38.1 - 41 41.1 - 43 43.1 - 46 46.1 - 48 48.1 - 51 51.1 - 56 56.1 - 59 > 59 43 or less 43.1 - 46 46.1 - 49 49.1 - 52 52.1 - 55 55.1 - 58 58.1 - 61 61.1 - 67 67.1 - 70 > 70 53 or less 53.1 - 56 56.1 - 60 60.1 - 64 64.1 - 68 68.1 - 71 71.1 - 75 75.1 - 83 83.1 - 86 > 86 65 or less 65.1 - 70 70.1 - 74 74.1 - 79 79.1 - 84 84.1 - 88 88.1 - 93 93.1 - 102 > 107 75 or less 75.1 - 80 80.1 - 86 86.1 - 91 91.1 - 96 96.1 - 102 102.1 - 107 107.1 - 118 > 123

102.1 - 107 118.1 - 123

2 ROCKETS

RANGE (meters)
POINTS 100 95 90 85 80 75 70 50 30 0

1,0002,000

2,0013,000

3,0014,000

4,0015,000

5,0016,000

6,0017,000

7,0018,000

Engagement Time in Seconds 13 or less 17 or less 13.1 - 14 14.1 - 15 15.1 - 16 16.1 - 17 17.1 - 18 18.1 - 19 19.1 - 21 21.1 - 22 > 22 17.1 - 18 18.1 - 19 19.1 - 20 20.1 - 22 22.1 - 23 23.1 - 24 24.1 - 26 26.1 - 28 > 28 21 or less 21.1 - 23 23.1 - 24 24.1 - 26 26.1 - 27 27.1 - 29 29.1 - 30 30.1 - 33 33.1 - 35 > 35 25 or less 25.1 - 27 27.1 - 29 29.1 - 31 31.1 - 32 32.1 - 34 34.1 - 36 36.1 - 40 40.1 - 41 > 41 31 or less 31.1 - 33 33.1 - 35 35.1 - 37 37.1 - 40 40.1 - 42 42.1 - 44 44.1 - 48 48.1 - 51 > 51 38 or less 38.1 - 41 41.1 - 43 43.1 - 46 46.1 - 49 49.1 - 51 51.1 - 54 54.1 - 59 59.1 - 62 > 62 43 or less 43.1 - 47 47.1 - 50 50.1 - 53 53.1 - 56 56.1 - 59 59.1 - 62 62.1 - 68 68.1 - 71 > 71

Figure C-10. Point Calculation Sheet, Tables VII and VIII, PD Rocket-Engagement Tasks

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

C-7

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

Figure C-11. Running Rocket Target Engagement Area, 1,501 3,000 meters, AH-64A/D

Figure C-12. Table 6, Rocket Target Engagement Area, 3,000 6,000 meters, AH-64A/D

C-8

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

___________________________________________________________________________ Appendix C, C1

.50-CALIBER MACHINE GUN

Rounds in 36m x 36m TEA

HIT 100

70 rds 97

63 rds 94

56 rds 91

49 rds 88

42 rds 85

35 rds 82

28 rds 79

21 rds 76

14 rds 73

7 rds 70

POINTS

Figure C-13. Point Calculation Table .50-Caliber Machine-Gun Engagement Tasks, 300 1,500 meters, OH-58D

ROCKETS 3 Rockets POINTS 4 Rockets POINTS 1 of 3 rockets in 10meter radius TEA 100 1 of 4 rockets in 10meter radius TEA 3 of 3 rockets in 50meter radius TEA 90 4 of 4 rockets in 50meter radius TEA 2 of 3 rockets in 50- 1 of 3 rockets in 50-meter meter radius TEA radius TEA 80 0

3 of 4 rockets in 50- 2 of 4 rockets in 50-meter meter radius TEA radius TEA

100

90

80

70

Figure C-14. Point Calculation Table Rocket-Engagement Tasks 300 - 1,500 meters, OH-58D

PD THREE- OR FOUR-ROCKET ENGAGEMENT TASKS RANGE (meters) POINTS 100 95 90 85 80 75 70 50 30 0 1,501 3,000 < 34 34.1 39 39.1 44 44.1 49 49.1 54 54.1 59 59.1 64 64.1 69 69.1 74 >74.1 3,001 4,000 4,001 5,000 5,001 6,000 < 69 69.1 81 81.1 92 92.1 104 104.1 115 115.1 127 127.1 138 138.1 161 161.1 173 >173.1

Engagement Time in Seconds < 47 < 56 47.1 55 56.1 65 55.1 63 65.1 74 63.1 71 74.1 83 71.1 78 83.1 92 78.1 86 92.1 102 86.1 94 102.1 111 94.1 110 111.1 130 110.1 117 130.1 139 >117.1 >139.1

Figure C-15. Point Calculation Table 2, OH-58D

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

C-9

This page intentionally left blank.

Appendix D

Example of a Digital Gunnery Program

D-1. Figure D-1 shows an example of a digital gunnery program.

Table of Contents
Paragraph/Title 1. Gunnery Program Overview 2. Gunnery Tables 3. Mode Descriptions 4. Scoring Methodology 5. Crew Qualification Ratings 6. Target-Engagement Groups 7. Ammunition 8. Alibi Fires 9. Individual Engagement Descriptions Appendix A. Longbow Apache Gunnery Tables VII and VIII Appendix B-1. Radar-Guided Engagement Point Calculation Sheet Appendix B-2. Gunnery Products Example of a Tactical Scenario (Range) Page No. 2 2 3 4 9 9 9 9 10 11 17 19 20

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program

D-0

_____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix D

1. Gunnery Program Overview: Appendix A contains the 21st Cavalry Brigade UFTP Longbow Gunnery Tables. These tables will apply to all units undergoing UFTP at Ft. Hood and are not subject to modification by the unit undergoing transition. All 32 crews assigned to the unit will be required to complete Tables V through VIII as a crew. Only the 24 line crews will complete the advanced tables because of ammunition authorization restrictions. The gunnery qualification table will consist of six missile shots, three rocket shots, three gun shots, and two air-to-air missile shots (future growth position) for all AH-64D Longbow units, for a total of 12 engagements (14 future), built from the tables listed below. 2. Gunnery Tables: Once a unit completes UFTP, it will use the following tables to construct its individual program. In addition to the core tasks listed, the unit commander and master gunner will choose an additional seven tasks from the list below for unit gunnery qualification, based on such items as METL, range constraints, and expected geographic mission deployment area. Note: STRAC ammunition and training strategy is currently a guide; only the standards are mandatory (for example, 85 percent of all assigned line crews will complete gunnery qualification. The 21st Cavalry Brigade has received approval from DA to qualify all crews assigned during UFTP. Until it can show a reduction in both proficiency and ability with the amount of ammunition that the brigade is currently allocated to shoot, the brigade will have to remain within the current STRAC manual for table totals. This will require some planning to make sure that units stay within their designated allocation. There are five basic core gunnery tasks for all AH-64D Longbow Apache crews worldwide. These are shown in the following table. The additional engagement list to choose from is on the following page. WPN/AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION 1. 30-mm, IHADSS, Hovering 2. 2.75" COOP Rockets, Hovering 3. SAL HFRemote, Hovering 4. SAL HFHovering 5. SAL HFHovering TGT CONFIGURATION Stationary Stationary Stationary Stationary Stationary RANGE (meters) <1,000 2,000-4,000 4,000 <2,000 >2,000 AMMUNITION 40 rds 8 rkts (M274) 1 HTM 1 HTM 1 HTM

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-1

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

30-MM CANNON
WPN-A/C CONFIGURATION
6. 30-mm, Hovering 7. 30-mm, Moving/Running/Diving 8. 30-mm, Hovering 9. 30-mm, Moving/Running/Diving 10. 30-mm, FCR, Hovering 11. 30-mm, FCR, Moving/Running/Diving

TGT CONFIGURATION
Stationary Stationary Moving Moving Stationary Moving

RANGE (meters)
<1,000 >1,000 <1,000 >1,000 500-3,500 500-3,500

AMMUNITION
30 rds 30 rds 30 rds 30 rds 30 rds 30 rds

2.75" ROCKETS
WPN-A/C CONFIGURATION
12. 2.75" Rockets, IHADSS, Hovering 13. 2.75" Rockets, IHADSS, Moving/Running/Diving 14. 2.75" Rockets, COOP, Hovering 15. 2.75" Rockets, COOP, Moving/Running/Diving 16. 2.75" Rockets, FCR, Hovering 17. 2.75" Rockets, FCR, Moving/Running/Diving

TGT CONFIGURATION
Stationary Moving Stationary Moving Stationary Moving

RANGE (meters)
1,500-7,000 1,500-7,000 1,500-7,000 1,500-7,000 1,500-6,500 1,500-6,500

AMMUNITION
6/8 rkts 6/8 rkts 6/8 rkts 6/8 rkts 6/8 rkts 6/8 rkts

SAL 1/2* HF
WPN-A/C CONFIGURATION TGT CONFIGURATION RANGE (meters)
>3,000 <2,000 >2,000 >800 >800

AMMUNITION
2 HTM 1 HTM 1 HTM 2 HTM 1 HTM

18. SAL HF, Rapid Stat/Moving/Running Stationary/Moving 19. SAL HF, LOBL, Stat/Moving/Running Stationary/Moving 20. SAL HF, LOAL, Stat/Moving/Running Stationary/Moving 21. SAL HF, RIPL, Stat/Moving/Running Stationary/Moving 22. SAL HF, (From RFHO) Stationary *There is no training missile available for the SAL 2 (AGM-114K).

RFHF WPN-A/C CONFIGURATION

23. RFHF, RFHO, Stat/Moving/Running 24. RFHF, Autonomous 25. RFHF, Rapid 26. RFHF, TADS HO

TGT CONFIGURATION
Stationary/Moving Stationary/Moving Stationary/Moving Stationary/Moving

RANGE (meters)
<3,000 <3,000 >2,000 >2,000

AMMUNITION
1 RFHF TME 1 RFHF TME 2 RFHF TME 1 RFHF TME

WINGTIP AIR-TO-AIR MISSILES**

**There is no designated air-to-air missile in the inventory for Longbow Apache; however, once officially designated, these shots are anticipated to be the ones to choose from for use during crew gunnery Tables VII and VIII.

WPN-A/C CONFIGURATION
27. ATA Missile, Hovering 28. ATA Missile, Running 29. ATA Missile, Air to Air 30. ATA Missile, Air to Air

TGT CONFIGURATION
Stationary/Moving Stationary/Moving Moving Moving

RANGE (meters)
Any distance Any distance Any distance Any distance

AMMUNITION
1 CFT 1 CFT 1 CFT 2 CFT

3. Mode Descriptions: The following mode descriptions apply to all gunnery tables: Statstationary hover. Movingbelow ETL. Runningabove ETL. Running fire for the purpose of these tables is considered defined as above 30 KTAS; off axis is preferred but not mandatory. Diving (fire)steep or normal.

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-2

_____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix D

4. Scoring Methodology: The focus for crew gunnery is to shift the most weight of the total qualification score to the primary weapon system (Hellfire), with the 30-millimeter and 2.75-inch rockets being important but not the driving factor as to whether a crew qualifies. Additional scored items are listed below. a. Qualified/Nonqualified Engagement Criteria: To pass an engagement as qualified, two criteria are required: (1) The target engagement criteria for the weapon system fired must be achieved; for example, hit for HF or 3 of 8 for rockets (see the scoring standards below). (2) Once the criteria in #1 above is met (target effect), then points are assessed for time. The crew must achieve a minimum of 70 points on 8 out of 12 qualified engagements to pass the table. If target effect is achieved, but the maximum time is exceeded (for 70 points), points will be given according to the point calculation sheets listed in Appendix C. However, this engagement will not be considered a qualified engagement toward the required total; for example, SAL HF less than 2,000 meters. The crew hits the target but takes 40 seconds; 30 points are assessed, but it is an unqualified engagement. (3) An unqualified engagement occurs when target effect is not achieved, regardless of time. Points are not awarded for unqualified engagements, except as explained above. b. Scoring Standards: The listed evaluation criteria will be used for all UFTP Longbow units undergoing crew gunnery qualification. The 21st Cavalry Brigade evaluators will use Table VII Day/Night to train the unit master gunner and SP/IP, as required, to evaluate gunnery based on the following criteria. Table VIII will be evaluated by the unit evaluation cell with oversight provided by 21st Cavalry Brigade evaluators. (1) The following standards will be strictly adhered to by evaluators during crew gunnery. Once an evaluator has assigned a score, that score will not be adjusted. (2) The on-board video recorder will be used to record all engagementsno video tape/recorderno score. For LOT 4 and previous version, the video recorder will be set to TADS video for all engagements. For LOT 5 and subsequent aircraft, the video will be set to the appropriate sight or MPD used for the shot being completed. (a) Area Weapons SystemTarget must be hit as detected by the RETS, RDSS, or BSS systems from the AWSS; shown as hit by the ballistic sensor on the computer in the range tower; or visually verified on the VRS tape, plus engagement times listed in Appendix C (engagement time point calculation sheets). (b) Area Rocket SubsystemTEA is a 300 meters wide by 400 meters deep box. For a GO for each engagement, the unit must achieve the following: 1 of 4 rockets in the TEA. 2 of 6 rockets in the TEA. 3 of 8 rockets in the TEA. 4 of 10 rockets in the TEA (growth position). 5 of 12 rockets in the TEA (growth position).

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-3

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Note: Rockets will be fired in pairs. The crew must wait for each pair to impact before launching the next pair for the AWSS to correctly score the shot. All rockets required by the individual engagement must be attempted to be fired. Points will be assessed for engagement times listed in Appendix C (engagement time point calculation sheets) or Appendix B (radar-guided engagement point calculation sheets), this document, for radar-guided engagements. Rocket engagements will be taped in either TADS DTV WFOV or TADS FLIR MFOV-POLARITYWHITE HOT to facilitate rocket sensing in case of a lack of an approved DA scoring system or the failure thereof for adjudication purposes.

(3) Longbow Hellfire Modular Missile SystemThe LHMMS consists of both SAL 1/2 (PIM) and RF Hellfire missiles. (a) SAL 1/2 missilesA successful missile engagement consists of the following requirements, plus engagement times listed in Appendix C (engagement time point calculation sheets). If the out-front boresight is not precisely aligned, all FLIR missile shots will be scored as NO-GO. Target is in the range of the missile mode being used. Correct mode, code (PRF or PIM), quantity, and type (SAL 1 or SAL 2) are used. Intervisibility is maintained throughout the engagement with no obstructions during terminal guidance (not required on remote). Proper backscatter countermeasures are used before missile launch. LOS on the target must meet the following criteria for the range and terminal guidancereference Rockwell HF Operational Brief 6-17-95 handout and FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140). If IAT is used during missile launch, the aircraft must be offset at least three to five degrees to the side from which the missile is coming off the rail. RANGE (kilometers) <2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6 6 to 7 7 to 8 TERMINAL GUIDANCE TIME LAUNCH TO IMPACT (seconds) 4 6 6 6 6 7 8

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-4

_____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix D

If IAT is used during a rapid autonomous shot, it must be disengaged during launch of the second missile or the nose must be offset at least three to five degrees during launch of the second missile. If the engagement requires a rapid shot, the second missile must be fired before the expiration of the time of flight of the first missile. During a remote engagement, the correct TIME OF FLIGHT for the range being fired must be called before missile launch or the LASER ON time must be called before exceeding the maximum delay timereference Rockwell HF Operational Brief 6-17-95 Handout and FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140). During a remote engagement, the following criteria will be used to assess the correct technique for firing the missile: The proper target grid must be entered into the system and then selected as the ACQ SOURCE (for example, T10) or by using CAQ off the FCR target report (for example, T50*). (*If T00 shows up in the acquisition source window, the aircraft has not accepted the data. The crew must reselect the appropriate target and align the aircraft, or the shot will be scored as a NO-GO) A missile mode of LOAL-LO or LOAL-HI should be used for steering guidance. If LOAL-DIR is used, the TADS must be slaved to the correct ACQ source for steering guidance or the shot will be scored as a NO-GO. The crew member in the back seat may elect to make the remote shot. If this occurs, the video recorder source must be the pilot symbology to correctly score the procedures. Engagement must be completed before initiation of target drop.

(4) RF MissilesA successful missile engagement will consist of the following criteria, plus the engagement time criteria listed in Appendix C (radar-guided engagement point calculation sheets) for radar-guided engagements. (a) If the engagement is completed from an AH-64D with radar, the crew member firing must select the proper sight and radar mode (that is, ground or air), select the proper target via cursor acquisition or by spacing through the next to shoot until proper target is acquired, and ensure that the proper type of missile is selected. (This method is in addition to the two methods listed below). (b) If the engagement is completed from an AH-64D without radar, there are two methods of shooting an RF missile:

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-5

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Radar frequency handoverThe crew will select REC on the TSD page and ensure that the proper target is selected as the next to shoot on the TSD, the missile type is correct, and the proper symbology is presented depending on the type of target selected (moving or stationary).

Note: For positive habit transfer, it is highly recommended that the TADS link function be used to verify target validity before missile launch. RF Hellfire via TADS handoverthe crew will ensure that the proper sight is selected (TADS), the proper missile type is selected (RF), a minimum of three seconds of laser energy is designated on the target for transfer alignment (or until the display Target data? disappears), and the proper missile symbology appearsfor example, solid LOAL constraints box (track rate) or LOBL constraints box (range rate) appears before trigger pull. This is a completely random function in the training mode; either is acceptable.

c. Timing: Engagement timing will begin when the target is fully presented to the crew. The tower will make a call in the blind when the computer shows full presentation (this is for backup scoring purposes only and should not be used as a crutch by the firing crew; once better range instrumentation or telemetry is acquired, this administrative call will be omitted). If the target area is being observed by the firing crew and it is obvious that the target did not come up until a later time than the tower call, time will start when the target is observed on the tape by the scorer. However, if it is obvious to the scorer that the crew has observed the target and has begun the engagement sequencefor example, deslaved the TADS and moved towards the target or stepped down on a field of viewtime will start before the tower call. The time for a remote shot will begin when the crew acknowledges the hand-over. The time will stop when one of the following occurs: Target effect is achieved, for gun engagements. Target drop initiates at the end of the sequence. Final round impacts the TEA, if observed, or TOF expires for rocket engagements. Crew calls engagement complete. SIM LAUNCH message appears in the high action display for RF missiles or remote SAL 1/2 HF engagement and crew included TOF in its reply to the designator. Crew calls Laser On during remote SAL Hellfire shot (no TOF included in reply to designator). TOF expires for autonomous SAL 1/2 Hellfire shots as shown in the HAD area. The TOF of the first missile fired decrements to zero following the launch of the second missile during a RAPID Hellfire shot.

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-6

_____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix D

d. Table Scoring: The total score for a table is 1,200 (1,400 including HGST and crew points) points, broken down as follows: 1,200 points for each Table VIII Day/Night qualification (individual table, not totaled). 100 points for the written examination (50 percent of each crew-members score would apply for a maximum total of 100).* 100 crew points given for things such as crew coordination and safety and tactical considerations.* (Every crew starts with 100 crew points; points will be deducted during conduct of the range if the crew fails the criteria listed in the crew points section.) Crew must complete 70 percent of total required engagements (8 of 12 currently; 10 of 14 future) with a qualified rating and a minimum of 70 points on each of those 8 engagements (10 future) to pass the table.

*These points may be used for the top-gun competition as discriminators. e. Crew Points: Each crew starts with 100 points. Crew points do not affect the Table VIII qualification score. These points are intended to be a tie-breaker for the top-crew gunnery award (if there should be a tie). Crew points will be deducted for items such as lack of safety in the FARP and on the range, lack of crew coordination, and not using tactical employment techniques; for example, terrain-flight altitudes on the range, premission planning for conduct of the range, correctly assessing the highest to lowest threat, and shooting the appropriate weapons system based on factors such as distance and weapons system being engaged. The brigade/battalion/squadron commander and master gunner/SP will decide on what these factors are for their unit and are the adjudicating authorities for any disagreements regarding crew-point deduction. This will be published in writing before the unit goes to gunnery. Points should be deducted in the following increments for the listed reasons. These are cumulative and can be assessed simultaneously. Recommended deductions are listed below: Deduct 100 points for any safety violation. Deduct 10 points each time that WEAPON? is observed. Deduct 10 points when SIGHT? is observed. Deduct 10 points for failure to transmit a required IDM message. Deduct 10 points for exceeding target-engagement group times. Deduct 5 points for going above or below an established ceiling or hard deck.

Note: A crew does not necessarily lose crew points even if it has a NO-GO on a particular engagement.

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-7

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

5. Crew Qualification Ratings: The crew qualification rating system is as follows. RATING Distinguished: Superior: Qualified: Unqualified: SCORE 1,080-1,200 points 960-1,079 points See below* PERCENTAGE 90-100 80-89.9 <79.9

less than 8 of 12 qualified engagements

*Qualified (achieved at least 70 points) on 8 out of 12 engagements; Q2/3/4 maximum points available=560 points 6. Target-Engagement Groups: Units should train as they plan to fight. Even during crew-qualification tables, the crew will fire target-engagement groups instead of individual engagements, one at a time. This forces the crews to begin to think about crew coordination for consecutive shots, assess and shoot the highest threat first, and begin to use basic tactical employment techniques. These groups will be set up to replicate real-world battlefield scenarios that will have a logical flow to them. Battle positions/attack-by-fire positions will be set up on the range. Crews will select firing positions within the BP/ABF to engage targets, as necessary; however, points will be deducted for improper selection as outlined in the ATM. Administrative range constraints have been reduced as much as reasonably possible, but this flexibility requires the crew to maintain a high situational awareness. 7. Ammunition: Crews are allowed to exceed the ammunition allocation for a single engagement but are not given additional ammunition to make up for that ammunition. If a crew uses more than the allocated ammunition on a single engagement and does not have enough ammunition to execute the remaining tasks, no credit will be given for the incomplete tasks. Uncompleted or nonfired tasks, will be executed during the rerun or refire portion of that crews training, if necessary to qualify Q2 or higher. 8. Alibi Fires: The battalion commander or his designated representative is the deciding authority for alibis. Any aircraft system or subsystem malfunction not detectable by the crew before the engagement that adversely affects the performance of the selected weapon system will constitute an alibi. Malfunctions induced by crew error do not constitute an alibi. Crews are highly encouraged to reengage targets with a missile (after completion of the targetengagement group) if they suspect they did not achieve a qualified engagement. The above criteria will be used during grading only if the missile shot was an unqualified engagement, for Q2 purposes. Conducting these engagements immediately will save range time by eliminating subsequent range runs.

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-8

_____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix D

9. Individual Engagement Descriptions: Each of the descriptions below outlines in further detail the individual weapon listed and the accompanying scoring criteria. (Crews must meet the total of eight qualified engagements in addition to the minimums listed.) a. Hellfire. Each Hellfire shot is worth 100 points (600 possible). Crew must complete at least four of the six engagements as qualified. (Weight must be given to the primary weapon system on the aircraft.) A minimum score of 70 points (70 percent) is required on each qualified engagement to count toward the four. Rapid or ripple shots should be included in the table and will be considered and scored as one engagement. Scoring criteria will be as follows: (1) RapidTime starts when the aircraft is either unmasked or the target engagement begins if no masking terrain is available. The second missile must be launched (SIM LAUNCH message observed) before the first missile impact (TOF expires). Time stops after the first missile impacts the target (TOF expires). If IAT is engaged during the second missile launch, the aircraft must be offset at least three to five degrees to the side from which the missile is departing or the engagement will be considered a NO-GO. In addition, the LOS reticle must remain on target during terminal guidance of the second missile and laser energy must be on target for the proper amount of time for the missile to be considered a GO. (2) RIPLTime starts when either the aircraft is unmasked or target engagement begins if no masking terrain is available. When the autonomous missile is launched first, time stops when the remote missile is launched and a SIM LAUNCH message is observed in the high-action display. If the remote missile is launched first, time stops when the autonomous missile impacts the target or time of flight countdown expires, as shown in the HAD. b. 30-mm. Each 30-millimeter shot is worth 100 points (300 possible). Crew must complete one of the three engagements as qualified and a minimum of 70 points (70 percent). c. 2-75-Inch Rockets. Each 2.75-inch rocket engagement is worth 100 points (300 possible). The crew must complete one of the three engagements as qualified and a minimum of 70 points (70 percent). A DA-approved scoring system will be used according to this FM unless it is unavailable. Objective scoring from videotapes will be used only as a last resort.

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-9

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Appendix A Longbow Apache Gunnery Tables VII and VIII

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-10

_____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix D

A-1. TABLE VII DAY TABLE VII. DAY AH-64D CREW TRAINING COURSE (CREW)
TASK
NO 1 DESCRIPTION SAL HF SAL HF SAL HF REMOTE 30-MM IHADSS 2.75" SAL HF RAPID SAL HF MODE HOVERING HOVERING HOVERING HOVERING HOVERING HOVERING STATIONARY/ MOVING/ RUNNING HOVERING MOVING/ RUNNING/ DIVING HOVERING HOVERING MOVING/ RUNNING/ DIVING STATIONARY/ MOVING/ RUNNING

CONDITION
RANGE (meters) >2,000 2,000 >4,000 <1,000 2,000-4,000 >3,000 >800 TARGET STATIONARY STATIONARY STATIONARY STATIONARY STATIONARY STATIONARY MOVING

STANDARD
TGT EFFECT HIT HIT HIT HIT 3 OF 8 HIT X 2 HIT X 1 AMMO 1 MSL 1 MSL 1 MSL 40 RDS 8 RKTS 2 MSLS 1 MSL DODIC TNG MSL TNG MSL TNG MSL B118 H974 TNG MSL TNG MSL

C O R E

2 3 4 5 6 7

S W I N G
10 11 12 30-MM IDM/TADS 2.75" IDM/TADS 2.75" 8 9 TADS HO-RFHF 30-MM

>800 >1,000

MOVING MOVING

HIT HIT

1 MSL 30 RDS

TME B118

500-3,500 1,500-6,000 1,500-6,000

STATIONARY STATIONARY STATIONARY

HIT 2 OF 6 2 OF 6

30 RDS 6 RKTS 6 RKTS

B118 H975 H975

13

RFHF

500-6,000

STATIONARY

HIT

1 MSL

TME

F C R
14 RFHF

15

FCR 30-MM

16

FCR 2.75"

STATIONARY/ MOVING/ RUNNING STATIONARY/ MOVING/ RUNNING STATIONARY/ MOVING/ RUNNING

500-8,000

MOVING

HIT X 2

2 MSLS

TME

500-3,500

MOVING

HIT

30 RDS

TNG SIM

1,500-6,000

STATIONARY

3 OF 8

8 RKTS

TNG SIM

AMMUNITION: (DA Pam 350-38) Ammunition depicted equals the total ammunition required for both day and night firings for the given table; that is, 8 rkts (M267), 32 rkts (M274), 200 rds 30-mm (B118). NOTES: 1. Table is designed for a non-FCR aircraft for the live-fire portion. 2. FCR tasks will be accomplished by demonstrating proficiency to an IP within +30 days of Table VII Day/Night. 3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide missiles for live fire of this table. MOVINGbelow ETL; RUNNINGabove ETL

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-11

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

A-2. TABLE VII NIGHT TABLE VII. NIGHT AH-64D CREW TRAINING COURSE (CREW)
TASK NO DESCRIPTION
SAL HF SAL HF SAL HF REMOTE 30-MM IHADSS 2.75" SAL HF RAPID SAL HF

CONDITION MODE
HOVERING HOVERING HOVERING HOVERING HOVERING HOVERING STATIONARY/ MOVING/ RUNNING HOVERING MOVING/ RUNNING/ DIVING HOVERING HOVERING

STANDARD TARGET
STATIONARY STATIONARY STATIONARY STATIONARY STATIONARY STATIONARY MOVING

RANGE (meters)
>2,000 <2,000 >4,000 <1,000 2,000-4,000 >3,000 >800

TGT EFFECT
HIT HIT HIT HIT 3 OF 8 HIT X 2 HIT X 1

AMMO
1 MSL 1 MSL 1 MSL 40 RDS 8 RKTS 2 MSLS 1 MSL

DODIC
TNG MSL TNG MSL TNG MSL B118 H974 TNG MSL TNG MSL

C O R E

1 2 3 4 5 6

S W I N G

8 9

TADS HO-RFHF 30-MM

>800 >1,000

MOVING MOVING

HIT HIT

1 MSL 30 RDS

TME B118

10 11

30-MM IDM/TADS 2.75" IDM/TADS

500-3,500 1,500-6,000

STATIONARY STATIONARY

HIT 2 OF 6

30 RDS 6 RKTS

B118 H975

12

2.75"

MOVING/ RUNNING/ DIVING STATIONARY/ MOVING/ RUNNING STATIONARY/ MOVING/ RUNNING STATIONARY/ MOVING/ RUNNING STATIONARY/ MOVING/ RUNNING

1,500-6,000

STATIONARY

2 OF 6

6 RKTS

H975

13

RF HF

500-6,000

STATIONARY

HIT

1 MSL

TME

F C R

14

RF HF

500-8,000

MOVING

HIT X 2

2 MSLS

TME

15

FCR 30-MM

500-3,500

MOVING

HIT

30 RDS

TNG SIM

16

FCR 2.75"

1,500-6,000

STATIONARY

3 OF 8

8 RKTS

TNG SIM

AMMUNITION: (DA Pam 350-38) Ammunition depicted equals the total ammunition required for both day and night firings for the given table; that is, 8 rkts (M267), 32 rkts (M274), 200 rds 30-mm (B118). NOTES: 1. Table is designed for a non-FCR aircraft for the live-fire portion. 2. FCR tasks will be accomplished by demonstrating proficiency to an IP within +30 days of Table VII Day/Night. 3. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide missiles for live fire of this table. MOVINGbelow ETL; RUNNINGabove ETL

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-12

_____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix D

A-3. TABLE VIII DAY TABLE VIII. DAY AH-64D CREW TRAINING COURSE (CREW)
TASK CONDITION STANDARD

NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

DESCRIPTION SAL HF SAL HF SAL HF REMOTE 30-MM IHADSS 2.75" SAL HF RAPID SAL HF

MODE HOVERING HOVERING HOVERING HOVERING HOVERING

RANGE (meters) >2,000 <2,000 >4,000 <1,000 2,000-4,000 >3,000 >800

TARGET STAT STAT STAT STAT STAT STAT MOVING

TGT EFFECT HIT HIT HIT HIT 3 OF 8 HIT X 2 HIT X 1

AMMO 1 MSL 1 MSL 1 MSL 40 RDS 8 RKTS

DODIC TNG MSL TNG MSL TNG MSL B118 H974

8 9

HOVERING STATIONARY/ MOVING/ RUNNING TADS HO-RFHF HOVERING 30-MM MOVING/ RUNNING/ DIVING HOVERING HOVERING MOVING/ RUNNING/ DIVING

2 MSLS TNG MSL 1 MSL TNG MSL

>800 >1,000

MOVING MOVING

HIT HIT

1 MSL 30 RDS

TME B118

10 30-MM IDM/TADS 11 2.75" IDM/TADS 12 2.75"

500-3,500 1,500-6,000 1,500-6,000

STAT STAT STAT

HIT 2 OF 6 2 OF 6

30 RDS 6 RKTS 6 RKTS

B118 H975 H975

13 14

Growth PositionATA Growth PositionATA

AMMUNITION: (DA Pam 350-38) Ammunition depicted equals the total ammunition required for both day and night firings for the given table; that is, 8 rkts (M267), 32 rkts (M274), 200 rds 30-mm (B118). NOTES: 1. Table is designed for a non-FCR aircraft for the live-fire portion. 2. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide missiles for live fire of this table. 3. Air-to-air missile engagements will be added once DA approves a missile for use. MOVINGbelow ETL; RUNNINGabove ETL

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-13

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

A-4. TABLE VIII NIGHT TABLE VIII. NIGHT AH-64D CREW QUALIFICATION COURSE (CREW)
TASK NO DESCRIPTION MODE RANGE (meters) CONDITION TARGET TGT EFFECT STANDARD AMMO DODIC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

SAL HF SAL HF SAL HF REMOTE 30-MM IHADSS 2.75" SAL HF RAPID SAL HF

HOVERING HOVERING HOVERING HOVERING HOVERING HOVERING STATIONARY/ MOVING/ RUNNING HOVERING MOVING/ RUNNING/ DIVING HOVERING HOVERING MOVING/ RUNNING/ DIVING

> 2,000 < 2,000 > 4,000 < 1,000 2,000-4,000 > 3,000 > 800

STAT STAT STAT STAT STAT STAT MOVING

HIT HIT HIT HIT 3 OF 8 HIT X 2 HIT X 1

1 MSL 1 MSL 1 MSL 40 RDS 8 RKTS 2 MSLS 1 MSL

TNG MSL TNG MSL TNG MSL B118 H974 TNG MSL TNG MSL

8 9

TADS HO-RFHF 30-MM

> 800 > 1,000

MOVING MOVING

HIT HIT

1 MSL 30 RDS

TME B118

10 11 12

30-MM IDM/TADS 2.75" IDM/TADS 2.75"

500-3,500 1,500-6,000 1,500-6,000

STAT STAT STAT

HIT 2 OF 6 2 OF 6

30 RDS 6 RKTS 6 RKTS

B118 H975 H975

13 14

Growth PositionATA Growth PositionATA

AMMUNITION: (DA Pam 350-38) Ammunition depicted equals the total ammunition required for both day and night firings for the given table; that is, 8 rkts (M267), 32 rkts (M274), 200 rds 30-mm (B118). NOTES: 1. Table is designed for a non-FCR aircraft for the live-fire portion. 2. DA Pam 350-38 does not provide missiles for live fire of this table. 3. Air-to-air missile engagements will be added once DA approves a missile for use. MOVINGbelow ETL; RUNNINGabove ETL Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-14

_____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix D

A-5. EXAMPLE OF A TARGET-ENGAGEMENT GROUPING SHEET

TEG # Weapon Sight Range (meters) Target Rds Req Mode Stds Type of Eng Eng No.

1 (ABF1) [00:03:30]

30-mm SAL HF 30-mm

TADS TADS PILOT IHADSS TADS TADS

<1,500 1,500-2,500 500-1,000 >5,000 >5,000

Stat. Lt. Armor 30 Moving Lt. Armor Truck Stat. Armor Stat. Lt. Armor Stat. Armor Stat. Armor 1 40 2 8 1 1 6 6 1 30 1

Running Hovering Hovering

Hit Hit Hit

Defensive Offensive Offensive Offensive Offensive Offensive Defensive Offensive Offensive Defensive Offensive Offensive

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

2 (ABF2) [00:05:00] 3 (ABF3) [00:03:30] 4 (ABF4) [00:04:00] 5 (ABF5)

SAL HF RAPID 2.75"

Hovering Hit X 2 Hovering 3 of 8 Hovering Hovering Hit Hit

SAL HF NAV SYS >4,500 REMOTE SAL HF TADS 1,500-3,500 2.75" 2.75" COOP COOP TADS TADS TADS

2,500-3,500 Stat. Lt. Armor 2,500-3,500 BRDM

Hovering 2 of 6 Hovering 2 of 6 Hovering Hovering Hit Hit

RFHFTADS HO [00:03:30] 30-mm SAL HF

2,500-3,500 Moving Armor 500-1,500 BRDM

2,500-8,000 Moving/Stat. Armor

Hovering Hit X 1

NOTES: 1. Target-engagement group times are total times for all engagements contained in the group. Points are deducted for going over the maximum allotted time to complete all individual engagements listed. 2. Individual engagements still have minimum and maximum times and point scoring associated with each shot. 3. Crews must ensure that they are moving tactically between positions. Individual firing points within ABFs are up to the crew, and points will be deducted for improper selection, as outlined in the ATM. 4. Crews must ensure that the proper video source is selected to enable proper scoring as required. 5. Individual engagements within a TEG will not necessarily occur in the order listed. MOVINGbelow ETL; RUNNINGabove ETL

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-15

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Appendix B-1 Radar-Guided Engagement Point Calculation Sheet

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-16

_____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix D

APPENDIX B-1. RADAR-GUIDED ENGAGEMENT POINT CALCULATION SHEET TADS RFHO TIME SCORE SHEET
RANGE IN METERS POINTS 1,000-2,000 2,001-3,000 3,001-4,000 4,001-5,000 5,001-6,000 6,001-7,000 7,001-8,000

Engagement Time in Seconds <15 15.1-17 17.1-18 18.1-19 19.1-20 20.1-21 21.1-22 22.1-23 23.1-24 >24 <17 17.1-19 19.1-20 20.1-22 22.1-24 24.1-26 26.1-27 27.1-29 29.1-31 >31 <19 19.1-21 21.1-23 23.1-25 25.1-27 27.1-29 29.1-31 31.1-33 33.1-35 >35 <21 21.1-23 23.1-25 25.1-27 27.1-29 29.1-31 31.1-33 33.1-35 35.1-37 >37 <23 23.1-25 25.1-27 27.1-29 29.1-32 32.1-35 35.1-38 38.1-41 41.1-45 >45 <27 27.1-30 30.1-34 34.1-38 38.1-42 42.1-46 46.1-50 50.1-54 54.1-58 >58 <34 34.1-37 37.1-40 40.1-43 43.1-46 46.1-50 50.1-54 54.1-58 58.1-62 >62

100 95 90 85 80 75 70 50 30 0

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-17

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

Appendix B-2 Gunnery Products

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-18

_____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix D

Example of a Tactical Scenario (Range) Longbow Apache Tables VII and VIII Tactical Scenario
Overall Situation: The individual qualification crew is part of a notional team conducting a movement to contact to reestablish enemy contact, followed by a series of offensive and defensive hasty attacks as the enemy continues to move along its axis of advance. (The virtual lead aircraft of the team is initially on the northwest side of Jack Mountain.) Specific Engagement Situations: [Target Engagement Group 1] This TEG is following Route Eagle. Upon reaching CP1, the group will receive an FCR target report from lead (Longbow Ground Station [LGS]), which will depict a target array to the east of Robinette Point. Upon crossing PL Tina (CP2), the crew is allowed to go weapons hot. They will call crossing the phase line into BP Lemon, at which time the target scenario will begin. The crew will stumble upon a reconnaissance elementconsisting of a BRDM, dismounted troops, and trucks. The first engagement will be a defensive 30-millimeter running-fire shot against the truck with troops about 1,000 meters to the right front. The crew should halt the aircraft at this time but, in any case, will not proceed further forward than PL Michelle. The next engagement will be a defensive SAL HF against the BRDM about 1,900 meters away. About 10 to 15 seconds after the mover starts, a truck accompanied by several dismounted troops will pop up about 500 meters to the left front, which will require the back-seat crew member to fire a defensive 30-millimeter IHADSS shot. There will also be a truck located about 1,000 meters on the same azimuth to aid in target acquisition. Once the engagements are complete (area is clear tactically), the crew will call for clearance to move forward past PL Michelle. [Target Engagement Group 2] The crew will pull up into BP Blue and begin offensively engaging targets out in the vicinity of Wolf Point based on the FCR target report received earlier. TEG #2 will initially engage with a SAL Hellfire rapid shot, followed by four pair of 2.75" rockets in suppression before its move. Upon completion, the crew will receive instructions to change the frequency to Clabber Tower. This will simulate a passage of lines into a new brigade sector in the tactical scenario.

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-19

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

[Target Engagement Group 3] Upon completion of the communications check, the crew will move along Route Condor to occupy a firing position within BP Reef. The crew will be given a remote SAL-1 Hellfire mission. After proper authentication is confirmed by the crew from the tower, the crew will be cleared to shoot. The next engagement will be to conduct a defensive SAL-1 HF engagement at a T-72 frontal target about 3,000 meters away. This will simulate another forward recon element that has worked its way across the stream bed to the front. Upon completion of these engagements, the crew will be sent three IDM messages: a target data file containing stored targets, an updated FCR target report showing the enemy rounding Robinette Point, and a no-fire zone/priority fire zone that will protect a team to the North and give the crew some direction as to which area to shoot in next, via the LGS. Note: The no-fire zone is to restrict fires to the North until the aircraft moves to the next BP to meet safety fans and additional range-control measures. [Target Engagement Group 4] The crew is required to send a free text message confirming receipt back to the LGS. Upon successful receipt, tower will call and give a verbal target handover to the crew for specific targets contained within the target data file. They will conduct two 2.75-inch shots at these targets, which consist of stationary light armor. This is supposed to replicate a call for suppressive fire from another aircraft. In most combat engagements, the crew members would engage indirectly, but for qualification purposes, they will visually aim the weapons after selecting them as the acquisition source. Upon completion of these engagements, the crew will be instructed to move to BP Grey along Route Falcon to attack the remaining elements of the lead echelon. Figure D-1. Example of a digital gunnery program (continued). [Target Engagement Group 5] While en route to BP Grey, the crew will be given a final FCR target report/PFZ/NFZ IDM message showing the remaining elements of the lead echelon along the west side of Robinette Point headed north. They will be required to shoot a defensive RF Hellfire at a stationary tank via a TADS handover 2,700 meters to the front. The next shot will be a defensive 30-millimeter shot at a moving BRDM 800 meters to the front. The final shot will be a SAL HF against a stationary armor target. This will complete the crews qualification run; the crew will return, weapons cold, to the FARP via Route Hawk.

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Continued)

D-20

_____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix D

EXAMPLE OF AN AH-64D LONGBOW DIGITAL RANGE CREW CARD

TEG#
1 (ABF 51) [00:03:30]

L/R AZ
096150

WEAPON
30-mm SAL HF 30-mm

SIGHT
TADS TADS BS IHADSS TADS COOP Nav Sys TADS COOP COOP TADS TADS TADS

RANGE (METERS)
500-1,500 1,500-2,500 300-1,000 >4,000 >4,000 >4,000 1,500-3,500 >2,500 >2,500 >800 >800 1,500-3,000

TARGET
Stationary Light Armor Moving Light Armor Truck Stationary Heavy Armor Stationary Light Armor Moving Heavy Armor Stationary Heavy Armor Stationary Heavy Armor Stationary Light Armor Moving Light Armor Moving Light Armor Moving Light Armor

RDS REQ
30 1 40 2 8 1 1 6 6 1 30 1

MODE
Running Hovering Hovering Hovering Hovering Hovering Hovering Hovering Hovering Hovering Hovering Hovering

STDS
Hit Hit Hit Hit x 2 3 of 8 Hit Hit 2 of 6 2 of 6 Hit Hit Hit

TYPE OF ENG
Defensive Offensive Defensive Offensive Offensive Offensive Defensive Offensive Offensive Defensive Offensive Offensive

ENG #
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

2 (ABF 52) [00:05:00]

057067

SAL HF Rapid 2.75" Rockets

3 (ABF 53) [00:03:30]

072104

SAL HF Remote SAL RF

4 (ABF 53) [00:04:00]

072104

2.75" Rockets 2.75" Rockets

5 (ABF 54) [00:03:30]

080104

RF-TADS HO 30-mm SAL HF

Figure D-1. Example of a Digital Gunnery Program (Concluded)

D-21

Appendix E

Risk Management
This appendix assists those who plan and execute helicopter gunnery training in identifying and minimizing the associated risks. Soldiers should compare this information, the accident/incident history of the unit, and their own experience to consider how it applies to their situation and areas of responsibility. Risk management must become a part of the planning process and method of operation.

SECTION I RISK MANAGEMENT DEFINED INTRODUCTION

E-1. Risk management applies to all situations and environments. Risk management is a critical consideration for all aspects of aerial gunnery live-fire training. E-2. The objective of risk management is to eliminate unnecessary risks. Units conduct tough, realistic gunnery training. However, no training is worth the cost of a life as the result of taking unnecessary risk. If an action will result in an unacceptable risk, the unit must take steps to mitigate that risk. If the unit cannot reduce the risk to an acceptable level, the unit should not take that action. The units bottom line should be to avoid unwarranted/unnecessary risk. E-3. Managing risk is subjective. It is based on judgment, training, and experience. Units charge many, if not all, young soldiers with the execution of hazard controls and risk-reduction measures. By nature, some of them are impulsive risk takers. Their limited experience, coupled with an attitude of invulnerability, can increase the level of risk that they are willing to accept. Their sense of indestructibility, motivation (esprit de corps), and willingness to achieve the mission at any cost also play a part. Some soldiers and individuals ignore existing standards/procedures and improvise their own. Because of inexperience or complacency, they Overestimate their ability to respond to or recover from a hazardous incident; they become overconfident. Underestimate the level of risk posed by a hazard.

E-0

_____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix E

E-4. Soldiers must understand and follow control measures developed and implemented by leaders and staffs. Individuals must maintain situational awareness and self-discipline when they perform their duties. They must Understand and apply risk management. Execute control measures directed by their leaders; that is, perform to standards. Carry risk management into training. Always be watchful for an unsafe condition or action; anyone/everyone has the authority to halt/correct an unsafe condition/action. Failure to effectively manage risk can quickly make an operation all too costly, politically and economically, and in terms of combat power (soldiers lives and equipment). E-5. Risk is characterized by both the probability and severity of a potential loss that may result from hazards because of the presence of an adversary or some other hazardous condition. Perception of risk varies from person to person. What one person perceives as risky or dangerous, another may not. A leaders perception of the environment obviously influences his or her decisions. E-6. The principles that form the framework for implementation of the risk-management process are The integration of risk preparation, and execution. management into mission planning,

The making of risk-management decisions at the appropriate level in the chain of command. The refusal to accept unnecessary risk.

TRAINING CONCERNS
E-7. Concerns include hazardous and critical training tasks and feasible risk-reduction measures that provide leaders with the flexibility to safely conduct tough, realistic training. This helps leaders determine The balance between training realism and unnecessary training risks. The effect of training operations on the environment. The level of proficiency and experience of soldiers and leaders. E-8. Units should base their risk-management decisions on awareness, rather than mechanical habit. Leaders should act on a keen appreciation for the essential factors that make each situation unique instead of from conditioned response. Throughout the aerial gunnery operation, the commander must also consider U.S. Government civilians and contractsupport personnel in his or her risk-management process. E-9. Accident/incident risk includes all operational risk considerations, other than tactical risk. It includes risks to the friendly force. It also includes risks posed to civilians by an operation, as well as the effect of an operation on the environment. It can include activities associated with hazards concerning friendly personnel and civilians, equipment readiness, and environmental conditions.

E-1

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

SECTION II THE RISK-MANAGEMENT PROCESS THE RISK-MANAGEMENT FIVE-STEP PROCESS

E-10. Risk management is the process of identifying, assessing, and controlling hazards arising from operational factors and making decisions that balance the risk cost with the mission benefits. It is a systematic five-step process that can be applied to any situation, program, or environment. It is a continuous processas variables change, the process starts over. The five-step risk-management process has two sections: Steps 1 and 2 (assess) and Steps 3, 4, and 5 (control and evaluate). STEPS 1 AND 2 E-11. Steps 1 and 2 together make up risk assessment. In Step 1, individuals identify hazards that they may encounter in executing a mission. In Step 2, they determine the direct effect of each hazard on the operation. E-12. The risk assessment enhances situational awareness. This awareness builds confidence and allows soldiers and units to take timely, efficient, and effective protective measures. STEPS 3 THROUGH 5 E-13. Steps 3 through 5 are the essential follow-through actions to effectively manage risk. In these steps, leaders balance risk against costs and take appropriate actions to eliminate unnecessary risk. E-14. During execution, as well as during planning and preparation, leaders continuously assess the risk to the overall mission and to those involved in the task. Finally, leaders and individuals evaluate the effectiveness of controls and provide lessons learned so that others may benefit from the experience. STEP 1. IDENTIFY HAZARDS E-15. A hazard is an actual or potential condition in which the following can occur because of exposure to the hazard: Injury, illness, or death of personnel. Damage to or loss of equipment and property. Mission degradation. E-16. All operational environments contain hazards. Combat operations, stability operations, base-support operations, and even day-to-day training present unique hazards for the units involved. Units identify hazards (Figure E-1) during the first four steps of the military decision-making process (Figure E-2): mission receipt, mission analysis, COA development, and COA analysis. The ability of unit leaders and staffs to identify hazards is essential. One reality of todays missions is that the aspect of a hazard can change rapidly. Things of little risk initially can quickly become major threats because of unforeseen natural or man-made events. Leaders should remain

E-2

_____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix E

watchful for these risk factors because complacency can kill. Existing controls may not continue to control hazards in rapidly changing situations. E-17. The factors of METT-T provide a sound framework for identifying hazards when planning, preparing, and executing aerial-gunnery operations.

RISK MANAGEMENT WORKSHEET

1. MSN/TASK : 4. PREPARED BY:

PAGE

1 of 1

Insertion/Extraction
MAJ PARKER, ASSISTANT S3
RANK/LAST NAME/DUTY POSITION

2. DTG BEGIN : 042100SEP97 3. DATE PREPARED: END : 042200SEP97 041300SEP97

8. RI RE SK SI D LE UA VE L L

6 RI . I SK NI T LE IAL VE L

13. C

5. HAZARDS

7. CONTROLS

11. HOW TO IMPLEMENT

12. HOW TO SUPERVISE

O N T R O L S

Adverse Environment - 0% Illumination - Complete Blackout - Visibility During Flight - Brownout

Continuous Operations - Fatigue Unfamiliar Terrain - Flight Plan - Landing Zone Inadequate Planning Time
9. OVERALL RISK LEVEL AFTER CONTROLS ARE IMPLEMENTED (CIRCLE ONE):

E F F E C T I V E

ID Ha zar ds
10. RISK DECISION AUTHORITY: RANK/LAST NAME/DUTY POSITION

LOW

MODERATE

HIGH

EXTREMELY HIGH

Figure E-1. Sample Risk Management WorksheetIdentify Hazards

*Military Decision-Making Process 1. Receipt of Mission 2. Mission Analysis 3. COA Development 4. COA Analysis (War Game) 5. COA Comparison 6. COA Approval 7. Orders Production 8. Rehearsal 9. Execution and Assessment * FM 5-0 (FM 101-5)

Identify Hazards X X X X

Assess Hazards

Develop Controls and Make Risk Decision

Implement Controls

Supervise and Evaluate

X X X X X X X X

Figure E-2. Example of Risk Management Integrated Into the Military Decision-Making Process

E-3

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

STEP 2. ASSESS HAZARDS E-18. Step 2 completes the risk-assessment portion of the risk-management process. This step examines each hazard in terms of probability and severity to determine the risk level of one or more hazardous incidents that can result from exposure to the hazard. E-19. Units assess hazards during the three steps of the military decision-making process: mission analysis, COA development, and COA analysis (Figure E-3). Units also conduct this step after controls are developed. E-20. An incident must be credible in that it must have a reasonable expectation of happening. The result is an estimate of risk from each hazard and an estimate of the overall risk to the mission caused by hazards that the unit cannot eliminate. Leaders must also assess the risk to civilians posed by the operation and assess the affect of operations on the environment. E-21. Use the assessment matrix, Figure E-4, to assign a value to the hazard. FM 3-100.14(FM 100-14) contains more detailed information on this matrix.

RISK MANAGEMENT WORKSHEET

1. MSN/TASK : 4. PREPARED BY:

PAGE

1 of 1

Insertion/Extraction
MAJ PARKER, ASSISTANT S3
RANK/LAST NAME/DUTY POSITION

2. DTG BEGIN: 042100SEP97 3. DATE PREPARED: 041300SEP97 END: 042200SEP97

8. RI R E S K SI D LE UA VE L L

6 RI . I SK NI T LE IA VE L L

13.

5. HAZARDS

7. CONTROLS

Adverse Environment - 0% Illumination - Complete Blackout - Visibility During Flight - Brownout Continuous Operations - Fatigue
Unfamiliar Terrain - Flight Plan - Landing Zone

EH

H H EH

As se ss Ha za rd s

11. HOW TO IMPLEMENT

12. HOW TO SUPERVISE

C O N T R O L S

E F F E C T I V E

Inadequate Planning Time

LOW MODERATE

9. OVERALL RISK LEVEL AFTER CONTROLS ARE IMPLEMENTED (CIRCLE ONE):

10. RISK DECISION AUTHORITY: RANK/LAST NAME/DUTY POSITION

HIGH

EXTREMELY HIGH

Figure E-3. Example of a Risk Management WorksheetAssess Hazards

E-4

_____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix E

Risk Level: E - Extremely High H - High M - M oderate L - Low

HAZARD PROBABILITY
Frequent Likely
Occasional

Seldom

Unlikely

s e v e r i t y

Catastrophic Critical

E E H M

E H M L

H H M L

H M L L

M L L L

M arginal Negligible

Figure E-4. Risk-Assessment Matrix STEP 3. DEVELOP CONTROLS AND DETERMINE RESIDUAL RISK E-22. Step 3 is accomplished in two substeps: develop controls and make risk decisions (Figures E-5 and E-6). Units develop controls and make risk decisions during COA development, analysis, comparison, and approval as part of the military decision-making process. Substep A. Develop Controls (Figure E-5) E-23. After assessing each hazard, leaders develop one or more controls that either eliminate the hazard or reduce the risk (probability/severity) of a hazardous incident. When developing controls, they consider the reason for the hazard, not just the hazard itself. Substep B. Determine Residual Risk (Figure E-6) E-24. An essential element of the risk decision is determining if the risk is justified. The commander must compare and balance the risk against mission expectations. He or she alone decides if controls are sufficient and acceptable and whether to accept the resulting residual risk. If he or she determines that the risk level is too high, then he or she directs the development of additional controls or alternate controls or modifies, changes, or rejects the COA. A commander may place constraints on his or her subordinates that restrict their freedom of action to accept risk in instances in which the risk might imperil His or her intent. His or her higher commanders intent A critical capability of the unit.

E-5

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

RISK MANAGEMENT WORKSHEET

1. MSN/TASK : 4. PREPARED BY:

PAGE

1 of 1

Insertion/Extraction
MAJ PARKER, ASSISTANT S3
RANK/LAST NAME/DUTY POSITION

2. DTG BEGIN: 042100SEP97 3. DATE PREPARED: END: 042200SEP97 041300SEP97

8. RI RE SK SI D LE U A VE L L

6 RI . I S K NI T LE IA VE L L

13.

5. HAZARDS

7. CONTROLS

11. HOW TO IMPLEMENT

12. HOW TO SUPERVISE

C O N T R O L S

E F F E C T I V E

Adverse Environment - 0% Illumination - Complete Blackout - Visibility During Flight - Brownout Continuous Operations - Fatigue
Unfamiliar Terrain - Flight Plan - Landing Zone

EH En route altitude greater than 500 ft AGL Ensure that crew has current hazard map NVDs will be used PC/AC will brief brownout procedures Aircraft ramp tongue and cargo door closed H H
Ensure that crew-rest plan is adhered to Ensure that crew has current photos/maps of LZ conducted

De ve lo p

Co nt ro ls

Inadequate Planning Time

LOW MODERATE

EH Full rehearsal will be

10. RISK DECISION AUTHORITY: RANK/LAST NAME/DUTY POSITION

9. OVERALL RISK LEVEL AFTER CONTROLS ARE IMPLEMENTED (CIRCLE ONE):

HIGH

EXTREMELY HIGH

Figure E-5. Example of a Risk Management WorksheetDevelop Controls

RISK MANAGEMENT WORKSHEET

1. MSN/TASK : 4. PREPARED BY:

PAGE

1 of 1

Insertion/Extraction
MAJ PARKER, ASSISTANT S3
RANK/LAST NAME/DUTY POSITION

2. DTG BEGIN: 042100SEP97 END: 042200SEP97

3. DATE PREPARED: 041300SEP97

8. R RE IS S K ID LE UA VE L L

6 RI . I SK NI T LE IAL VE L

13.

5. HAZARDS

7. CONTROLS

11. HOW TO IMPLEMENT

12. HOW TO SUPERVISE

Adverse Environment - 0% Illumination - Complete Blackout - Visibility During Flight - Brownout

Continuous Operations - Fatigue Unfamiliar Terrain - Flight Plan - Landing Zone Inadequate Planning Time
LOW MODERATE

EH En route altitude greater

C O N T R O L S

than 500 ft AGL Ensure that crew has current hazard map NVDs will be used PC/AC will brief brownout procedures Aircraft ramp tongue and cargo door closed Ensure that crew-rest plan is adhered to Ensure that crew has current photos/maps of LZ conducted

E F F E C T I V E

H H

M M H

Re Det si erm du al ine Ri sk

EH Full rehearsal will be

EXTREMELY HIGH

9. OVERALL RISK LEVEL AFTER CONTROLS ARE IMPLEMENTED (CIRCLE ONE):

10. RISK DECISION AUTHORITY:

HIGH

COLONEL BATTISTE/BDE CDR

RANK/LASTNAME/DUTY POSITION

Figure E-6. Example of a Risk Management WorksheetDetermine Residual Risk STEP 4. IMPLEMENT CONTROLS (FIGURE E-7) E-25. Leaders and staffs integrate controls into SOPs, written and verbal orders, mission briefings, and staff estimates. They must ensure that these controls are conveyed through clear, simple execution orders and that all levels understand them.

E-6

_____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix E

E-26. Leaders must explain how supervisors will implement controls. Examples of control implementation include Conducting such implementations as rehearsals, ROC drills, and battle drills. Maintaining personnel. communications between aircraft and armament

Conducting operations on the arm/dearm areas. Operating weapon systems.

RISK MANAGEMENT WORKSHEET

1. MSN/TASK : 4. PREPARED BY:

PAGE

1 of 1

Insertion/Extraction
MAJ PARKER, ASSISTANT S3
RANK/LAST NAME/DUTY POSITION

2. DTG BEGIN: 042100SEP97 3. DATE PREPARED: END: 042200SEP97 041300SEP97

8. RI R E SK SI D LE UA VE L L

6 RI . I SK NI T LE IA VE L L

13.

5. HAZARDS

7. CONTROLS

11. HOW TO IMPLEMENT

12. HOW TO SUPERVISE

Adverse Environment - 0% Illumination - Complete Blackout - Visibility During Flight - Brownout Continuous Operations - Fatigue Unfamiliar Terrain - Flight Plan - Landing Zone

EH En route altitude greater

than 500 ft AGL Ensure that crew has current hazard map NVDs will be used PC/AC will brief brownout procedures Aircraft ramp tongue and cargo door closed Ensure that crew-rest plan is adhered to Ensure that crew has current photos/maps of LZ conducted

H Mission Brief
Rehearsals

C O N T R O L S

E F F E C T I V E

ENT LE M IMP

Mission Brief Rehearsals

H H

TACSOP

M Mission
Brief Rehearsals

Inadequate Planning Time

LOW MODERATE

EH Full rehearsal will be

HIGH EXTREMELY HIGH

FRAGO

9. OVERALL RISK LEVEL AFTER CONTROLS ARE IMPLEMENTED (CIRCLE ONE):

10. RISK DECISION AUTHORITY:

COLONEL BATTISTE/BDE CDR

RANK/LAST NAME/DUTY POSITION

Figure E-7. Example of a Risk Management WorksheetImplement

E-7

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140) ______________________________________________________________________

STEP 5. SUPERVISE AND EVALUATE (FIGURE E-8) E-27. Leaders must supervise the execution of their orders. 1. Supervise E-28. Leaders supervise mission rehearsal and execution to ensure that standards and controls are enforced. Techniques may include spot checks, inspections, situation reports and brief-backs, buddy checks, and close supervision. E-29. During the mission, leaders must continuously monitor controls to ensure that these controls remain effective. Leaders must modify controls as necessary. Leaders and individuals anticipate, identify, and assess new hazards to implement controls. Leaders must continually assess variable hazards such as fatigue, equipment serviceability, and the environment. E-30. Leaders modify controls to keep risks at an acceptable level during all operations. Leaders must continuously plan to ensure that controls emplaced at the beginning of the mission apply to changes in the operations current situation and to hazardous conditions. Leaders must ensure that performing repetitive tasks does not cause soldiers to relax their vigilance. Leaders must continuously check on controls put in place to reduce risks over a prolonged period. 2. Evaluate E-31. After a mission is completed, leaders and individuals evaluate how well they executed the risk-management process. They must Determine how to ensure that successes continue to the next mission. Capture and disseminate lessons learned so that others may benefit from the experience. Consider the effectiveness of the risk assessment in identifying and accurately determining the probability and severity of hazards that resulted in mission degradation. Determine whether they accurately estimated the residual risk of each hazard and the residual risk of the overall mission. Evaluate the effectiveness of each control in reducing or removing risk, including whether controls were effectively communicated, implemented, and enforced. E-32. Leaders and individuals determine why some controls were ineffective and what they must do if they encounter the hazard again. Units may have to change a control or use a completely different control to mitigate a risk. The application of risk management requires good judgment and intuitive analysis born of confidence, experience, and situational awareness.

E-8

_____________________________________________________________________________ Appendix E

RISK MANAGEMENT WORKSHEET

1. MSN/TASK : 4. PREPARED BY:

PAGE

1 of 1

Insertion/Extraction
MAJ PARKER, ASSISTANT S3
RANK/LAST NAME/DUTY POSITION

2. DTG BEGIN: 042100SEP97 3. DATE PREPARED: END: 042200SEP97 041300SEP97

8. RI RE SK SI D LE UA VE L L

6 RI . I S K NI T LE IA VE L L

13. C O
N T R O L S

5. HAZARDS

7. CONTROLS

11. HOW TO IMPLEMENT

12. HOW TO SUPERVISE

E F F E C T I V E

Adverse Environment - 0% Illumination - Complete Blackout - Visibility During Flight - Brownout Continuous Operations - Fatigue
Unfamiliar Terrain - Flight Plan - Landing Zone Inadequate Planning Time
LOW MODERATE

EH En route altitude greater

than 500 ft AGL Ensure that crew has current hazard map NVDs will be used PC/AC will brief brownout procedures Aircraft ramp tongue and cargo door closed Ensure that crew-rest plan is adhered to Ensure that crew has current photos/maps of LZ conducted

H Mission Brief
Rehearsals Mission Brief Rehearsals

Direct Supv

Mission Updates

E IS RV PE SU

H H

TACSOP

Direct Supv Direct Supv Mission Update Direct Supv

M Mission
Brief Rehearsals

EH Full rehearsal will be

HIGH EXTREMELY HIGH

FRAGO

9. OVERALL RISK LEVEL AFTER CONTROLS ARE IMPLEMENTED (CIRCLE ONE):

10. RISK DECISION AUTHORITY:

COLONEL BATTISTE/BDE CDR

RANK/LAST NAME/DUTY POSITION

Figure E-8. Example of a Risk Management WorksheetSupervise TOOLS AND PITFALLS E-33. Commanders use the risk-management process to assess the risks associated with each unit mission. From this assessment, units develop risk-reducing standard operating procedures. Pitfalls arise when units use risk-management tools without adapting them to the factors of METT-T. E-34. In an unchanging environment or static situation, units may find a standardized risk-assessment card or checklist to be of some value in the initial mission analysis and COA development. However, such a tool used alone will probably not identify all hazards for every mission in a changing operational environment. Units should continually strive to gain and maintain situational awareness. E-35. Completing the risk assessment alone and then failing to identify effective controls usually results in a GO or NO-GO decision based on the initial risk only. E-36. If the risk assessment does not accurately identify the hazards and determine the level of residual risk, the leader is likely to make his risk decision based upon incomplete or inaccurate information. E-37. The risk-management process provides reasonable controls to support mission accomplishment without exposing the force to unnecessary residual risk.

E-9

GLOSSARY
A @ A AA A 2C 2 AADS AAR ABCS ABF ABFC AC A/C acft ACP acq ACT ADA ADI ADL ADS ADSS adv AF AGES AGL AGM AH AHGR AL ALCA ALFGL at attack assembly area Army airspace command and control airspeed and direction sensor after-action review airfield battlefield countermeasures and survivability attack by fire (position) attack-by-fire (position) card aircraft commander aircraft aircraft air control point acquisition air cavalry troop air defense artillery attitude direction indicator armament datum line Air Data Subsystem Air Data Sensor Subsystem advance adjust fire Air-Ground Engagement System above ground level antitank guided missile attack helicopter attack helicopter gunnery range Alabama aircraft loader control assembly automatic low-frequency gain limiting

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

Glossary-1

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

ALSE ALT AM AMC AMCCOM AMC ORD AMC TGT ammo AMPS AND AP APC API API-T approx Apr APU AQC AR ARCP ARCS ARI ARM ARMD ARNG ARS ARTEP ASE ASET ASM ASO assy ATA ATAC

aviation life support equipment airborne laser tracker ante meridiem air mission commander U.S. Army Armament, Munitions, and Chemical Command at my command ordnance at my command target ammunition aviation mission planning station alphanumeric display armor piercing armored personnel carrier armor-piercing incendiary armor-piercing incendiarytracer approximately April auxiliary power unit aviator qualification course Army regulation aerial rocket control panel aerial rocket control system Army restructuring initiative antiradiation missile armed Army National Guard Area Rocket Subsystem Army Training and Evaluation Program aircraft survivability equipment aircraft survivability equipment trainer alternate scoring method aviation safety officer assembly air to air air-to-air combat

Glossary-2

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

___________________________________________________________________________Glossary, C1

ATAS ATGM ATHS atk ATM ATS attk attn ATWESS auto AVIM avn AVTR AVUM AWS AWSS AZ BBC BDA bde BIT BMD BMP bn BOT BP BPC BRDM BRSIT BRT BS BSS BTM

air-to-air Stinger antitank guided missile Automatic Target Handover System attack aircrew training manual acquire-track-stow attack attention antitank weapons effects signature simulator automatic aviation intermediate maintenance aviation airborne videotape recorder aviation unit maintenance Area Weapon System Aerial Weapons Scoring System azimuth B backup bus controller battle-damage assessment brigade built-in test Russian combat vehicle, airborne Russian personnel carrier battalion burst on target battle position battle position card Russian combat reconnaissance patrol vehicle boresight bright boresight Ballistics Scoring Subsystem battalion training model

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

Glossary-3

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

BTR btry B/W C C&C C2 cal CALFEX CAQ CAS cav CB CBHK CCIP CCM C-COFT CCP cdr CDS CDU CFT CG CGUN CH CHAN CHANL CL CM CMS CMSL co COA COFT

Russian personnel carrier battery black on white C Celsius command and control command and control caliber combined arms live-fire exercise cursor acquisition close air support cavalry circuit breaker captive boresight harmonization kit continuously computed impact point counter-countermeasures crewconduct-of-fire training communication checkpoint commander Control Display Subsystem control display unit captive flight trainer center of gravity copilot gun cargo helicopter channel channel checklist countermeasure combat mission simulator copilot missile company course of action conduct-of-fire training

Glossary-4

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

___________________________________________________________________________Glossary, C1

comp COMSEC cont CONUS CONVERG coop CP CPG CPO CRT CS CSS CTC CTT CVI C/W CWEPT D DA DASE DBS DC deg DEK DELVRY DGST DIG dir DOD DODAC DODIC DOTDS DP

compensation communications security control continental United States convergence cooperative checkpoint copilot-gunner copilot-observer cathode ray tube combat support computer scoring system; combat service support combined training center common task training combat vehicle identification caution/warning cockpit weapon and emergency procedures trainer D diving Department of the Army digital automatic stabilization equipment Doppler beam sharpening direct current degree data entry keyboard delivery door gunnery skills test digital image generator direct Department of Defense Department of Defense ammunition code Department of Defense identification code Directorate of Training, Doctrine, and Simulation dual purpose

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

Glossary-5

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

DS DSN DSS DTC DTG DTTP DTV DVO EA EC ECAS ECCM ECP EGI EL ELEC EMP EMR eng EOCM EOD EPS EPU ETL eval F FA FAA FAB FAC FAIL FARM

direct support defense switched network Detonation Scoring Subsystem data transfer cartridge date-time group doctrine and tactics training plan day television direct-view optics E engagement area electronic countermeasure Enhanced Cobra Armament System electronic counter-countermeasures engineering change proposal embedded GPS/INS elevation electrical electromagnetic pulse electromagnetic radiation engagement electro-optical countermeasures explosive ordnance disposal electronic power supply electronics processor unit effective translational lift evaluation F Fahrenheit field artillery forward assembly area forward avionics bay flight activity category? failure fuel, ammunition (cannon or machine gun), rockets, missiles

Glossary-6

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

___________________________________________________________________________Glossary, C1

FARP FASCAM FCC FCP FCR FDC FD/LS FFAR FFE FHT FI FL flex FLIR FLOT FLTR FM FOC FOD FORSCOM FOV FP FPS FRAGO ft FTX FWS FXD FY G G3 G-COFT GEN

forward arming and refueling point family of scatterable mines fire control computer fire control panel fire control radar fire direction center fault detection/location system folding-fin aerial rocket fire for effect field-handling trainer (nonrated crew-member) flight instructor flechette flexible forward-looking infrared forward line of own troops filter field manual; frequency modulated focus foreign-object damage United States Army Forces Command field of view firing point feet per second fragmentary order foot or feet field training exercise field weapon simulator fixed fiscal year G gravitational force assistant chief of staff (operations and plans) gunneryconduct-of-fire trainer generator

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

Glossary-7

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

GHSS GHz GND GPC GPCL/H-V GPS GPU GTL G/VLLD GZN HA HAD HARS HDD HDM HDU HE HEAT HEDP HEI HEI-T HEI-T-SD HEPD HERO HF HFOV HGAP HGST HI HIGE HIMAG HLFR HMD

Gunners Helmet Sight Subsystem gigahertz ground gun pitch cue, solid ring gun pitch cue lines, horizontal and vertical Global Positioning System ground power unit gun-target line ground or vehicular laser locator designator grid zone H holding area high action display Heading and Altitude Reference System heads-down display Hellfire dummy missile helmet display unit high explosive high-explosive antitank high-explosive dual-purpose high-explosive incendiary high-explosive incendiary-tracer high-explosive incendiary with tracer and self-destruct (feature) high-explosive point detonating hazard of electronic radiation to ordnance Hellfire horizontal field of view gap in center of LOS reticle, measured horizontally helicopter gunnery skills test high hover-in-ground effect high magnification Hellfire helmet-mounted display

Glossary-8

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

___________________________________________________________________________Glossary, C1

HMMWV HMX HO HOD HOGE HQ HRET HRR HSI HSS ht HTA-3 HTM HTS HUD H-V hvy IAT IATF IAW ID IDM IERW IFF IGE IHADSS il ill ILS IMUX in inbd ind

high mobility multipurpose wheeled vehicle high-melting explosive handover heads-out display hover-out-of-ground effect headquarters horizontal LOS reticle, outside tip to outside tip high-range resolution horizontal situation indicator Helmet Sight Subsystem height an explosive consisting of HMX, TNT, and aluminum flake powder Hellfire training missile hard target sensor heads-up display horizontal-vertical heavy I image autotracking individual aircrew training folder in accordance with identification improved data modem initial entry rotary wing identification friend and foe in-ground effect Integrated Helmet and Display Sight System illumination illumination instrument landing system interface multiplexer inch(es) inboard indicator

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

Glossary-9

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

inf INS INU IO IP IR IRCCM IRIS ISP JAAT JATO KIAS km kt KTAS KVA KW L LASS lat LAW lb LBHMM LBHMMS LCT LD LDNS LEA LEU LFX LGS

infantry Inertial Navigation System inertial navigation unit instructor operator instructor pilot infrared infrared counter-countermeasures infrared imaging seeker integrated systems processor J joint air attack team jet-assisted takeoff K knots indicated airspeed kilometer(s) knot(s) knots true airspeed kilovolt ampere Kiowa Warrior L left Laser Aim Scoring System latitude light antitank weapon pound(s) Longbow Hellfire modular missile Longbow Hellfire Modular Missile System Longbow crew trainer line of departure Lightweight Doppler Navigation System launcher electronics assembly laser electronics unit live-fire exercise Longbow ground station

Glossary-10

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

___________________________________________________________________________Glossary, C1

LH LHG LHMMS LMC LNCH LO LOAL LOAL-DIR LOAL-HI LOAL-LO LOBL LO MAG LOS LP L/R LRF LRF/D LRSNCO LRSO LRU LRV LSR LST lt LTL LTU LWR LZ m M MACOM mag MALF LT

left hand left hand grip Longbow Hellfire Modular Missile System linear motion compensator launch low lock-on after launch lock-on after launch-direct lock-on after launch-high lock-on after launch-low lock-on before launch low magnification line of sight listening post left/right laser range finder laser range finder/designator laser range safety noncommissioned officer laser range safety officer line replaceable unit laser range validator laser laser spot tracker light laser-target line laser transceiver unit lower landing zone M meter(s) missile major Army command magnification malfunction light

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

Glossary-11

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

MAN manl MANPAD MANPADS MAN TRK max med MEDEVAC METL METT-T MFD MFOV MG mil MILES min MK mm MMS mod MOI MOPP MOS MP MPD MPRC MPS MPSM MPT-SD mR MRE MRT M/S M/SEC

manual manual man-portable air defense Man-Portable Air Defense System manual tracker maximum medium medical evacuation mission-essential task list mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops, and time available multifunction display medium field of view machine gun milliradian(s) multiple integrated laser engagement system minute(s); minimum mark millimeter(s) mast-mounted sight modification method of instruction mission-oriented protective posture military occupational specialty multipurpose multipurpose display multipurpose range complex meters per second multipurpose submunition multipurpose tracer-self destruct milliradian(s) meal, ready-to-eat minimum resolvable temperature meters per second meters per second

Glossary-12

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

___________________________________________________________________________Glossary, C1

MSL msl msn MSP MTA MTI MTOE MTP MUX MV mvng MWO N NA NATO nav NBC NCO NCOIC NED NFOW NFZ NG NGB no NOE NORM NSN NTS NVD NVG NVS

mean sea level missile mission mast sight processor moving target acquisition moving target indicator modified table(s) of organization and equipment mission training plan multiplex magnetic variation moving modification work order N no not applicable North Atlantic Treaty Organization navigation nuclear, biological, chemical noncommissioned officer noncommissioned officer in charge north, east, and down narrow field of view no-fire zone National Guard National Guard Bureau number nap of the earth normal national stock number next to shoot night vision device night vision goggles Night-Vision System

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

Glossary-13

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

O OC OFS OGE OH OIC OP OPFOR OPORD OPSEC OPTEMPO ORD ORIDE ORT OSET OTL OUTBD OVRD P PBIT PC PD PEN PEN-M PFZ Ph PHS PHSS PIM PK PL plt PLT/GNR observer-controller offset out-of-ground effect observation helicopter officer in charge observation post opposing forces operations order operations security operational tempo operational requirement document override optical relay tube offset observer-target line outboard override P pilot power-up built-in test pilot in command point detonating penetrate penetration in meters priority fire zone probability of hit pilot helmet sight Pilot Helmet Sighting System pulse interval modulation probability of kill precautionary landing; phase line; platoon leader platoon pilot/gunner

Glossary-14

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

___________________________________________________________________________Glossary, C1

PM PMI PMSL P/N PNVS POI POL POST PPC pr prac PRF PRI PRI-CHAN-TRACKING PRKT PSI psi PTA PTT PTWS PWR ON Q1 Q2 Q3 QE qty quad R RAD R/A/G RAI RAS

post meridiem premarksmanship instruction pilot missile part number Pilots Night Vision System program of instruction petroleum, oils, lubricants passive optical seeker tracking performance planning card pair practice pulse repetition frequency primary primary-channel-tracking pilot rocket pilots steering indicator pounds per square inch preterminal acquisition (mode) preterminal track (mode) point target weapon system power on Q qualification on first attempt qualification on second attempt qualification on third attempt quadrant elevation quantity quadruple R range; ready ram air decelerator rockets/ATAS/guns remote attitude indicator rocket arming symbol

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

Glossary-15

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

RC RCD RCO RCPU RCS rd RDSS rdy rec recon REM req reqd RETS RF RFD RFHO RH RHA RHE RIPL rkt RL RMI RMP RMS rnd RND REM rng RNG-KM ROC ROC-V ROE RP

remote control; resistance capacitance recorder range control officer rocket control panel unit radar cross section round Rocket Detonation Scoring Subsystem ready record reconnaissance remaining required required Remote Target System radar frequency range finder designator radar frequency handover right hand rolled homogenous armor remote Hellfire electronics ripple rocket readiness level radio magnetic indicator reprogrammable microprocessor (Stinger) Rocket Management System round rounds remaining range range-kilometers rehearsal of concept recognition of combat vehicles rules of engagement red phosphorus

Glossary-16

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

___________________________________________________________________________Glossary, C1

RPG rpl RPS RRU RSO S S2 S3 S4 SAL SAM sec sel SERE SEU SI sig SIGHT SEL sim SITREP SK SKR SM sng SOF SOI SOP SP SPH squad SSN SSU ST

rocket-propelled grenade ripple revolutions per second rocket remote unit range safety officer S stationary Intelligence Officer (U.S. Army) Operations and Training Officer (U.S. Army) Supply Officer (U.S. Army) semiactive laser surface-to-air missile second(s); section select survival, evasion, resistance, and escape sight electronics unit nonrated crew-member standardization instructor signal sight selection switch simulated situation report smokescreen seeker submunition single special operations forces signal operation instructions standing operating procedures standardization instructor pilot spheroid squadron social security number sight survey unit store

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

Glossary-17

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

sta STAB stad STANAG stat STBY std STI STRAC STRICOM STX supv SYM sys T TA TAA TACSOP TADS TAS TASC TBD TBP TC TCB TCP TEA TEG temp TEU tgt TGT/NAV TIS

stationary stabilator stadiametric standardization agreement stationary standby standard stationary target indicator Standards in Training Commission Simulation, Training and Instrumentation Command situational training exercise supervision symbology system T training transfer alignment tactical assembly area tactical standing operating procedures Target Acquisition and Designation System true airspeed training aids support center to be determined to be published training circular turret control box TOW control panel target-effect area target-engagement group temperature TADS electronic unit target target/navigation thermal imaging system

Glossary-18

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

___________________________________________________________________________Glossary, C1

TKR TM tm TME tng TNT TOC TOE TOF TOW TP TPT TRADOC TRAINDAT SET TRP TRRAT GENTEXT TRTG TSD TSTT TT TTA TTP TV TVS UFTP UH UHF U.S. USAAWC USAF USAR USAREUR USARPAC

tracker technical manual team training missile emulator training trinitrotoluene (dynamite) tactical operations center table(s) of organization and equipment time of flight tube-launched, optically tracked, wire-guided (missile) target practice target practice-tracer Training and Doctrine Command (U.S. Army) training data set target reference point training readiness rating general text tactical radar threat generator tactical situation display TADS selected task trainer terminal track (mode) terminal track acquisition (mode) tactics, techniques, and procedures television television sensor U unified field test program utility helicopter ultra high frequency United States (of America) United States Army Aviation Warfighting Center United States Air Force United States Army Reserve United States Army, Europe United States Army, Pacific

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

Glossary-19

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

USR UTM V V2 VASI VFE VFOV VFR VGAP VHF VIP VMC VMC VRET VRS W w/ WAS W/B W/E WESTCOM WFOV w/o WP wpn WR WRM WR ORD WR TGT WSS wt WX

unit status report universal transverse Mercator V airspeed or velocity in feet per second takeoff safety speed visual approach slope indicator maximum flap-extended speed vertical field of view visual flight rules gap in center of reticle, measured vertically very high frequency very important person visual meteorological conditions minimum control speed vertical LOS reticle, outside tip to outside tip video recording system W width with weapons action switch white on black with equipment United States Army Western Command wide field of view without weapons processor weapon when ready width, range, mil when ready ordnance when ready target weapons select switch width weather

Glossary-20

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

___________________________________________________________________________Glossary, C1

X X XMSN Y Z ZFOV ZSU times (multiplication) transmission Y yes Z zoom zoom field of view Russian self-propelled antiaircraft gun

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

Glossary-21

This page intentionally left blank.

BIBLIOGRAPHY
AR 5-13. Training Ammunition Management. 1 March 2005. AR 25-52. Authorized Abbreviations, Brevity Codes, and Acronyms. 4 January 2005. AR 75-1. Malfunctions Involving Ammunition and Explosives. 23 April 2001. AR 95-1. Flight Regulations. 1 September 1997. AR 190-11. Physical Security of Arms, Ammunition and Explosives. 12 February 1998. AR 220-1. Unit Status Reporting. 10 June 2003. AR 350-1. Army Training and Education. 9 April 2003. AR 380-5. Department of the Army Information Security Program. 29 September 2000. AR 385-63. Range Safety. 19 May 2003. AR 385-64. U.S. Army Explosives Safety Program. 1 February 2000. AR 600-106. Flying Status for Nonrated Army Aviation Personnel. 8 December 1998. AR 700-19. U.S. Army Munitions Reporting Systems. 1 January 2001. AR 702-6. Ammunition Stockpile Reliability Program (ASRP). 16 May 2003. AR 725-50. Requisition, Receipt, and Issue System. 15 November 1995. ARTEP 1-112-MTP. Mission Training Plan for the Attack Helicopter Battalion. 18 April 2002. ARTEP 1-113-MTP. Mission Training Plan for the Utility Helicopter Battalion. 31 August 2001. ARTEP 1-114-MTP. Mission Training Plan for the Air Cavalry/Reconnaissance Squadron and Troop. 30 March 2000. DA Form 759. Individual Flight Record and Flight CertificateArmy. DA Form 2028. Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms. DA Form 7122-R. Crew Member Training Record. 1 DA Pamphlet 25-30. Consolidated Index of Army Publications and Blank Forms. DA Pamphlet 40-501. Hearing Conservation Program. 10 December 1998. DA Pamphlet 75-5. List of Storage and Outloading Drawings for Ammunition. 15 November 1984. DA Pamphlet 350-38. Standards in Weapons Training. 1 October 2002. DA Pamphlet 385-63. Range Safety. 10 April 2003. DA Pamphlet 710-2-1. Using Unit Supply System (Manual Procedures). 31 December 1997. DA Pamphlet 710-2-2. Supply Support Activity Supply System: Manual Procedures. 30 September 1998. FM 1 The Army. 14 June 2005. FM 1-02. Operational Terms and Graphics. 21 September 2004. FM 3-0(FM 100-5). Operations. 14 June 2001. FM 44-80. Visual Aircraft Recognition. 30 September 1996 (will be revised as FM 3-01.80) FM 1-100. Army Aviation Operations. 21 February 1997 (will be revised as FM 3-04.111). FM 1-111. Aviation Brigades. 21 August 2003 . (will be revised as FM 3-04.111). FM 1-112. Attack Helicopter Operations. 2 April 1997 (will be revised as FM 3-04.112). FM1-113. Utility and Cargo Helicopter Operations. 12 September 1997 (will be revised as FM 3-04.113).

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

Bibliography-1

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

FM 1-114. Air Cavalry Squadron and Troop Operations. 1 February 2000 (will be revised as FM 3-04.114). FM 1-203. Fundamentals of Flight. 3 October 1988 (will be revised as FM 3-04.203). FM 1-230. Meteorology for Army Aviators. 30 September 1982 (will be revised as FM 3-04.230). FM 1-240. Instrument Flying and Navigation for Army Aviators. 15 December 1984 (will be revised as FM 3-04.240). FM 3-04.301(FM 1-301). Aeromedical Training for Flight Personnel. 29 September 2000. FM 1-564. Shipboard Operations. 29 June 1997 (will be revised as FM 3-04.564). FM 3-05.70(FM 21-76). Survival. 17 May 2002. FM 3-07(FM 100-20). Stability Operations and Support Operations. 20 February 2003. FM 17-95. Cavalry Operations. 24 December 1996 (will be revised as FM 3-20.95). FM 3-22.68(FM 23-67). Crew-Served Machine Guns, 5.56-mm and 7.62-mm. 31 January 2003. FM 90-4. Air Assault Operations. 16 March 1987 (will be revised as FM 3-18.12). FM 100-14. Risk Management. 23 April 1998 (will be revised as FM 3-100.14). FM 4-30.1(FM 9-6). Munitions Distribution in the Theater of Operations. 16 December 2003. FM 4-30.13. Ammunition Handbook: Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Munitions Handlers. 1 March 2001. FM 7-0(FM 25-100). Training the Force. 22 October 2002. FM 7-1(FM 25-101). Battle Focused Training. 15 September 2003. FM 7-10(FM 25-101). The Infantry Rifle Company. 14 December 1990 (will be revised as FM 3-21.10). Fratricide: Reducing Self-Inflicted Losses. No. 92-4, April 1992. Center for Army Lessons Learned (CALL), U.S. Army Combined Arms Command, Fort Leavenworth, KS 66027-7000, DSN 552-2255; website http://call.army.mil. SB 742-1. Inspection of Supplies and Equipment Ammunition Surveillance Procedures. 1 June 1998. STANAG 3117 (Edition Seven), Aircraft Marshaling Signals. 11 June 1999. TB 9-1005-262-50-1. Integration of M240H 7.62 mm Machine Gun and Assorted Equipment for the M41, M24, and M144 Helicopter Armament Systems. 29 December 2004. TB 9-1300-256. Ammunition: National Stock Numbers and Department of Defense Codes. 30 June 1999. TB 9-1300-385. Munitions Restricted or Suspended. 12 January 2004. TC 1-204. Night Flight Techniques and Procedures. 27 Dec 1988. TC 1-248. Aircrew Training Manual, OH-58D,. Kiowa Warrior. 12 September 2005. TC 1-210. Aircrew Training Program Commanders Guide to Individual and Crew Standardization. 3 October 1995. TC 1-211. Aircrew Training Manual, Utility Helicopter, UH-1. 9 December 1992. TC 1-237. Aircrew Training Manual Utility Helicopter, UH-60 Series. 27 September 2005. TC 1-213. Aircrew Training Manual for Attack Helicopter, AH-1. 9 December 1992. TC 1-238. Aircrew Training Manual, Attack Helicopter, AH-64A. 23 September 2005. TC 25-8. Training Ranges. 5 April 2004. TM 1-1520-236-10. Operators Manual for Army Model AH-1F Attack Helicopter. 26 January 2001. TM 1-1520-238-10. Operators Manual for Helicopter, Attack, AH 64-A Apache. 31 August 1994. TM 1-1520-248-10. Operators Manual for Army OH-58D Helicopter. 15 March 2005.

Bibliography-2

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

___________________________________________________________________________References, C1

TM 1-1520-251-10. Operators Manual for Helicopter, Attack, AH-64D Longbow Apache. 29 March 2002. TM 3-4240-280-10. Operator's Manual for Mask, Chemical-Biological: Aircraft, ABC-M24 and Accessories and Mask, Chemical-Biological, Tank, M25A1 and Accessories. 15 March 1988. TM 9-1005-224-10. Operators Manual for Machine Gun, 7.62-mm, M60 W/E and Machine Gun, 7.62-mm, M60D W/E. 2 April 1998. TM 9-1005-262-13. Operators, Aviation Unit and Aviation Intermediate Maintenance Manual for Armament Subsystem, Helicopter, 7.62-mm Machine Gun Mounts: Door Mounted, Lightweight, Model M23; Door Mounted, Lightweight, Model M24; Ramp Mounted, Lightweight, Model M41; and Window Mounted, Lightweight, Model M144. 29 December 1986. TM 9-1005-262-23P. Aviation Unit and Aviation Intermediate Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Armament Subsystem Helicopter, 7.62-mm Machine Gun Mounts: Door Mounted, Lightweight, Model M23; Door Mounted, Lightweight, Model M24; Ramp Mounted, Lightweight, Model M41; and Window Mounted, Lightweight, Model M144. 29 December 1986. TM 9-1005-313-10. Operator's Manual for Machine Gun, 7.62mm, M240; M240B; M240C; M240D; M240E1; M240G; M240H; M240N. 15 November 2002. TM 9-1005-313-23&P. Technical Manual Unit and Direct Support Maintenance (Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List) for M240 Series Machine Guns Machine Gun, 7.62mm, M240; Machine Gun, 7.62mm, M240B; Machine Gun, 7.62mm, M240C; Machine Gun, 7.62mm M240D; Machine Gun, 7.62mm, M240E1; Machine Gun, 7.62mm, M240G; Machine Gun, 7.62mm, M240H; and Machine Gun, 7.62mm, M240N. 15 November 2002. TM 9-1300-200. Ammunition, General. 3 October 1969. TM 43-0001-27. Army Ammunition Data Sheets for Small Caliber Ammunition. 29 April 1994. TM 43-0001-28. Army Ammunition Data Sheets for Artillery Ammunition: Guns, Howitzers, Mortars, Recoilless Rifles, Grenade Launchers and Artillery Fuzes. 28 April 1994. TM 43-0001-30. Army Ammunition Data Sheets for Rockets Systems Rocket Fuzes Rocket Motors. 1 December 1981. TM 55-1520-234-10. Operator's Manual for Army Model AH-1S (Mod) Helicopter. 17 November 1976.

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

Bibliography-3

This page intentionally left blank.

Index
References are to paragraph number except for illustrations, which are listed by figure or table numbers. AWSS, 1-24, 3-15, 3-17, commanders assessment, 2-1 A
acquisition, target, A-19, A-94 A-96 adjustment, fire, A-64 A-69 advanced tables, B-20 B-29 aerial rocket control system firing procedures. See ARCS. search techniques, 6-40 6-44 weapons scoring system, 3-55 3-65 AGES, 1-3, 3-54 AHGR, 3-66, 3-67 aiming points, 4-34, 4-45, 4-53, 4-59, 4-65, A-61, Figure A-9 air combat weaponeering, 7-42 7-57 aircraft, emergency plan, 3-37, 3-40, 3-47 mil values, 6-78 6-90, Tables 6-4 6-12 air resistance drag, 4-10, 4-12, 4-55 air-to-air Stinger, 5-119 5-127, Figure 5-35, Figure 5-36, Table 5-15 alibi fires, B-19 angle of impact, 4-44, Figure 4-7 angles, lead, 4-62, 4-69, Table 4-2 angular rate error, 4-23, 4-61 ARCS, 5-29, 5-44, 5-45 attack helicopter gunnery range, 3-28, 3-29, 3-31, 3-44 3-47, 3-50, 3-66, 3-66, 3-67, Figure 3-2 ATWESS, 3-15 3-55 3-65, Table 3-1 2-7, 2-26 communications

B
backscatter, 5-73 5-80, 5- 92, Figure 5-20, Table 5-10 ballistic scoring subsystem, 3-58, 3-59 ballistics, aerial, 4-16 4-34 exterior, 4-9 4-15 interior, 4-1 4-8 terminal, 4-35 4-44, 4-64 bipod firing, A-12, A-13 boresighting, 3-43, 3-48, 4-5, 4-48, 7-15 7-18 burnout, tracer, 5-3, A-58, A-66 burst on target, 7-19, 7-25 7-28, A-53

crew, 6-92 6-103 lines of, 6-114 6-121 conditions out-of-trim, horizontal, 4-32, 4-33 out-of-trim, vertical, 4-32, 4-34 surface, 4-42 confirmation, 6-37, 6-38, 6-65, 6-117 considerations ballistic, Apache-specific, 4-49 4-72 safety, 4-50 CPG, 6-41, 6-42, 6-71, 6-85, 6-86, 6-115, 6-128 crew communication, 6-92 6-103 crew search, 6-38, 6-39, 6-50, 6-57 techniques, 6-45 6-49 crew techniques firing, 7-19 7-28 burst on target, 7-19, 7-25 mil relation method, 7-27 recognition method, 7-28 crew warfighting contributing factors, 6-10 6-15 fratricide prevention, 6-1 6-36 situational awareness, 6-1 6-9

C
call for fire, 6-19, 6-134 6-146, Figures 6-1 6-3 CAS, 3-15 C-COFT, 2-27, 2-29, 2-30, Table 2-1 center of gravity, rocket, 4-31 checks before mission receipt, 6-149 6-151 communication, 6-156, 6-161 6-167 crew, 6-159 final, 6-154 6-158 precombat, 6-147, 6-148 preparing for mission, 6-153 run-up, 6-160 upon mission receipt, 6-152

D
DODAC, 5-8, 5-19, 5-24

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

Index-1

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

dispersion, 4-7, 4-8, 4-20, 4-21, 4-45, 4-47, 4-48, 4-51, 4-60, 4-65 boresight, 4-48 sights, 4-47 vibrations, 4-45, 4-46 DODIC, 5-47, 5-51 5-55, 5-61, 5-62, Table 5-5, Table 5-6 drift projectile, 4-13, 4-14, 4-26, 4-56, 4-58, Figure 4-1

modes, 7-2 7-7, 7-12, 7-29 7-41 types of, 7-1 FLIR, 6-20, 6-26, 6-45, 6-48, 6-85, 6-86, 6-88, 6-89, Tables 6-4 6-11 fratricide prevention, 6-1 6-36 doctrine/tactics, techniques, and procedures, 6-18 6-24 training, 6-17, 6-25 6-31, 6-34 organization, 6-32 materiel solutions, 6-33, 6-34 leader and soldier development, 6-35, 6-36 fundamentals, fire control, A-51 A-53 fuzes, 5-21, 5-22, 5-25 5-31, 5-35 5-41, 5-43 5-46, 5-120, Figure 5-7

training strategy, A-1 A-50 tactics, techniques, and procedures, A-51 A-74 advanced table tactics, techniques, and procedures, A-75 A-105 advanced tables and range training, A-106 A-117 Hydra-70 (2.75-inch) rocket, 5-25, Table 5-5, Table 5-6

E
effect horizontal plane gyroscopic, 4-13 port-starboard, 4-26 relative wind, 4-7, 4-20, 4-24, 4-27, 4-32 4-34 target, 2-13, 2-37, 2-60, 2-62, 2-64, 2-82, 2-83 vertical plane gyroscopic, 4-27, 4-28 emergency plan, aircraft, 3-37, 3-40, 3-47 estimation, range, A-54 A-56, A-60, Figure A-1 ETL, 4-7

I
IGE, 4-18, 4-21, 4-60 IHADSS, 4-62, 4-69, 4-70

K
Kentucky Windage, 7-28, 7-43

L
laser-off operations, 6-91 live fire, 2-3, 2-7, 2-14, 2-22, 2-28 2-37, 2-33 2-37, 2-40, 2-41, 2-45, 2-46, 2-50, 2-52 2-54, 2-86, Table 2-1 LOAL, 5-65, 5-68, 5-71, 5-75. 5-78, 5-109, 5-111, 5-114, 5-116, Figures 5-11 5-16, Figure 5-21, Figure 5-25, Table 5-10, Table 5-12, Table 5-14 LOBL, 5-57, 5-71, 5-73, 5-75, 5-77, 5-80, 5-85, 5-103, 5-105, 5-109, 5-111, 5-112, 5-116, Figure 5-9, Figure 5-10, Figure 5-21, Figure 5-25, Figure 5-28, Table 5-13, Table 5-14 logistic requirements, 3-27 LRF/D, 2-83 LRSNCO, 3-39 LRSO, 3-39

G
G-COFT, 2-27, 2-29, Table 2-1 ground hand signals, 3-44, Figure 3-1 gunnery skills test (HGST), 2-1, 2-28, Table 2-1 aerial weapons scoring system, 1-24, 3-15, 3-17, 3-55 3-65, Table 3-1 program, 1-1, 1-2, 1-4, 1-10, 1-25 standards, 1-1, 1-4 1-9, 1-14, 1-18 training strategy, 1-1 1-3, 1-7 gravity center of, 4-31

F
facilities requirements construction, 3-21 preplanning, 3-20 fin-stabilized projectiles, 4-29 4-34 fire adjustment, A-64 A-69 commands, 6-19, 6-65, 6-94, 6-104 6-113, 6-122 6-133, A-36 A-42, A-75, A-109, Figure A-1 control fundamentals, A-51 A-53

H
hand signals, 3-44, Figure 3-1 helicopter door gunnery

M
map method, 6-71

Index-2

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

_________________________________________________________________________ Index, C-2

master gunner, 1-6, 1-25 1-27 mil setting range table, Table 6-2 mil values aircraft, 6-78 6-90, Tables 6-4 6-12 mil determination AH-64, 6-80 6-89 OH-58D, 6-90 missiles, 5-48 5-127 modes of fire, 7-2 7-7, 7-29 7-41 MPRC, 3-51, 3-52, 3-54

PIM, 5-55 5-60, Table 5-7, Table 5-8 plan, aircraft emergency, 3-37, 3-38, 3-40, 3-47 PNVS, 6-85, 6-88, Table 6-4, Tables 6-6 6-8 port-starboard effect, 4-26 projectile drift, 4-13, 4-14, 4-26, 4-56, 4-58, Figure 4-1 fin-stabilized, 4-16, 4-29 4-34 jump, 4-27, 4-28, 4-63, Figure 4-4 spin-stabilized, 4-16, 4-24 4-28 propellant force, 4-30

readiness reporting, 1-16 1-24 realistic training, 3-7 3-14 relative wind effect, 4-32 4-34 remote call for fire 6-135, 6-136 remote Hellfire missile firing, 6-134 requirements, range equipment, 3-22, 3-23 logistic, 3-27 OIC, 3-29, 3-33 3-36 personnel, 3-24 3-26 responsibilities, personnel, duties, 3-33 3-43 rocket, 2.75-inch, 5-25, 5-26, Table 5-5, Table 5-6, 7-11 7-14, 7-44 7-46, Table 7-3 rotor down-wash error, 4-17 4-22 RSO, 3-24, 3-37

N
NOE, 3-12, 4-44, 6-43 nuclear, biological, chemical. See applicable aircraft ATM.

R
radio operator, 3-40 range determination, 6-66 6-90 equipment requirements, 3-22, 3-23 facilities requirements, 3-20 layout, 3-48 3-67 logistic requirement, 3-27 master gunner, 3-4, 3-5, 3-10, 3-24, 3-38, 3-42, 3-62, 3-63, 3-68 OIC requirements, 3-29, 3-33 3-36 operation, 3-28 3-32 personnel requirements, 3-24 3-26 realistic, 3-7 3-14 requirements, 3-1 3-32 safety, 3-3, 3-9, 3-11, 3-15, 3-24, 3-29, 3-33, 3-35, 3-37 3-39, 3-43 3-47 safety officer, 3-24, 3-37 scheduling, 3-16 3-32 score sheet, 2-98 2-100, Figure 2-2

O
officer in charge, 3-24, 3-29, 3-33 3-38, 3-41 3-43 OGE, 4-20, 4-21, 4-60 operations order, 3-8 operational requirement, range, 3-15

S
safety range, 2-19 firing, 3-45, 3-46 ground, 3-44 officer, range, 3-24, 3-37 scoring criteria, 2-61 2-66 sighting range layout considerations, 3-48 3-50 situational awareness, 6-1 6-9, A-4 standards weapons training, 1-28 1-30 STRAC introduction, 1-28, 1-30 resources, 2-45 strategy training, 1-1 1-3

P
personnel requirements, 3-24 3-26 phraseology adjust fire commands, 6-104, 6-113, 6-130 6-132 alert terminology, 6-123 movement commands, 6-125 target identification, 6-126 target location, 6-124 weapon effect, 6-129 weapon engagement, 6-128 weapon selection, 6-127 pilot, instructor, 1-12, 1-26

T
tables, introduction of

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140, C1

Index-3

FM 3-04.140 (FM 1-140), C1 __________________________________________________________________

advanced, 2-5, 2-7, 2-30, 2-51, 2-53, 2-57, 2-60, 2-61, Table 2-1 gunnery, 1-10 1-15 TADS, 2-31 target acquisition, 6-26, 6-37 6--65 classification, 6-61 6-64 detection challenges, 6-56 effect standards, B-30 B-46 engagement factors, 7-49 7-57 location, 6-57 6-60, 6-104, 6-107, 6-116, 6-124, 6-135, 6-140 signatures, 6-40, 6-44, 6-50 6-55 trainer, unit, 1-12 training pregunnery, 2-7, 2-14 2-21 realistic, 3-7 3-14 strategy, 1-1 1-3, 1-7 trajectory shift, 4-25, 4-26, 4-62, Figure 4-3 TSTT, 2-26, 2-27

Y
yaw, 4-12, 4-27, 4-28, 4-55, 4-62

V
vertical plane gyroscopic effect, 4-27, 4-28

W
warheads, 5-25, 5-27 5-42, 5-44, 5-45, 5-47, 5-48, 5-54, 5-55, 5-62, 5-63, 5-103, 5-120, Figure 5-5, Figure 5-6, Table 5-4 weapon terminology and information, 7-8 7-18 weapons system engagement ranges, 4-50, 4-51, 7-43 7-48 wind effect, relative, 4-32 4-34

Index-4

FM 3-04.140, C1

17 April 2006

FM 3-04.140(FM 1-140)
14 JULY 2003

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

JOHN M. KEANE General, United States Army Acting Chief of Staff Official:

JOEL B. HUDSON

JOEL B. HUDSON Administrative Assistant to the Secretary of the Army

0318402

DISTRIBUTION: Active Army, Army National Guard, and U. S. Army Reserve: To be distributed in accordance with the initial distribution number 110716, requirements for FM 3-04.140.

PIN: 080897-000